Download Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)

PILOT’S OPERATING HANDBOOK
AND
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE
FLIGHT MANUAL
(Document No. RA050001 Revision M)
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation
22550 Nelson Road
Bend Municipal Airport
Bend, Oregon 97701
Phone: (541) 318-1144
Fax: (541) 318-1177
Serial Number
4XXXX
Registration Number
XXXXX
Type Certificate No. A00003SE
THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MATERIAL REQUIRED TO BE FURNISHED TO THE PILOT BY
THE FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATIONS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE
MANUFACTURER, AND CONSTITUTES THE FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL.
This Handbook meets GAMA Specification No. 1, Specification for Pilot’s Operating
Handbook, issued February 15, 1975 and revised September 1, 1984.
Approved by the Federal Aviation Administration
By:
Lester H. Burven
Date: 22 Feb 00
(Name)
Title: Manager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-1605
Initial Issue: _ 22 Feb 00___ Revised:
16 Oct 06
Log of Normal Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK
LOG OF NORMAL REVISIONS
Normal
Revision No.
Revised
Pages
Description of Revision or Referenced
Narrative Discussion Pages
Approved By
Date
A/02-22-2000
Title Page
Title page changed to reflect FAA approval of
Airplane Flight Manual
B
Entire
AFM/POH
The entire AFM/POH was reissued. For
specific details, see the narrative discussion of
revisions, which begins on page xii.
Jeff Morfitt
02/22/2000
Tom Archer
Acting Manager Flight
Test Branch, Seattle ACO
June 2, 2000
C
D
AFM/POH
Sections
1–8
and
Current
Supplements
Sections 3, 6,
7, and 9
E
Section 2,
Section 7
F
Section 2,
Section 3,
Section 4,
Section 6,
Section 7
Between Revisions B and C an upgraded
application software was installed. The new
software caused minor repagination of the
document, which necessitated a total reprinting
of Sections 1 through 8 of the AFM/POH. In
addition, all the applicable supplements were
reissued. For specific details see the narrative
discussion of revisions, which begins on page
xii.
All references to Standard and Premium IFR
packages were removed. This change affected
Section Nos. 3 and 7. The Weight and Balance
Record in Section No. 6 was moved to the end
of Appendix A and converted to a form, sans
headers and footers. The headings in Appendix
A were modified so that they are generic. All
the modifications to Section No. 6 changed the
pagination, and the section was reissued in its
entirety. Equipment that is part of the airplane’s
type design was removed from Section 9 and
added to Section 7. Section 9 was updated to
reflect current and anticipated STC’s.
Added JPI and Shadin instruments to the
Optional Equipment Section. Moved Optional
Equipment Section after Miscellaneous Equipment Section. Added placard in Limitations
section for JPI instrument. Added TLC
document number to the footer of each page.
Section 2, changed a few dimensions and
weights. Changed placard section to show
actual placards. Corrected power produced in
Section 3, and added special standby battery
discussion. Deleted a few references to the
standard package. Updated pre-flight procedure
to include leading edge of horizontal and
vertical stabilizer in Section 4. Changed
equipment list to make “Types of Equipment
for Operation” List and “Installed Equipment
List”. Added MX20 to Optional Equipment
section. Updated baggage net description in
Section 6. Updated horizontal description and
added information on leading edge tape in
Section 7. Corrected information about the air
Hobbs switch in Section 7. Corrected digital
engine scanner number. Changed information
on vacuum system to reflect current design.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
A.J. Pasion
Manager, Special
Certification Branch,
Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
ANM-190-S
A.J. Pasion
Manager, Special
Certification Branch,
Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
ANM-190-S
Jeff Morfitt
Project Manager,
Special Certification
Branch, Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
Jeff Morfitt
Project Manager,
Special Certification
Branch, Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
RA050001
iii
Log of Temporary Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK
LOG OF NORMAL REVISIONS
Normal
Revision No.
G
iv
Revised
Pages
Description of Revision or Referenced
Narrative Discussion Pages
Approved By
Date
AFM/POH
Sections
1–8
Updated manual with SI units to meet Canadian
requirements. Added new equipment including
GPSS, ground power plug, aural warning.
Updated checklists. Added missing information
and corrected existing information throughout
the manual.
Jeff Morfitt
Project Manager,
Special Certification
Branch, Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
Jeff Morfitt
Project Manager,
Special Certification
Branch, Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
H
AFM/POH
Section 7
Removed note from aural warning section that
stated the system was not yet certified.
I
AFM/POH
Sections
1–8
Added missing information and corrected
existing information throughout the manual.
J
AFM/POH
Sections
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
Incorporated FAA comments. Added missing
information and corrected existing information
throughout the manual.
K
AFM/POH
Sections
4, 5, 6, 7
Added information about pitot heat in Section
4. Added new airspeed calibration graphs in
Section 5. Other clerical corrections in Sections
6 and 7.
L
AFM/POH
Sections 1, 2,
3, 5, 6, 7, and
8
M
AFM/POH
Sections 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
and 8
N/A
Jeff Morfitt
Project Manager,
Special Certification
Branch, Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
Jeff Morfitt
Project Manager,
Special Certification
Branch, Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
See Narrative Discussion of Revisions. This
POH/AFM revision provides a terminating
action for AD# 2005-CE-01-AD.
E.P.Kolano
Flight Test Branch
Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
5/10/05
See Narrative Discussion of Revisions.
Shaun Ripple
Flight Test Branch
Seattle Aircraft
Certification Office
21 Nov 2006
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Log of Normal Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK
LOG OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
Temporary
Revision No.
and Date
Revised
Pages
Description of Revision or Referenced
Narrative Discussion Pages
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Approved By
Date
RA050001
v
Log of Temporary Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
vi
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: L/02-14-2005
List of Effective Pages
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Reissue
Page
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Added Pages
Rev
Page
Rev
Page
Reissue
Page
Rev
1-11
I
1-12
I
ii
M
M
1-13
G
iii
M
1-14
G
iv
M
1-15
C
v
M
1-16
C
vi
M
1-17
C
vii
M
1-18
C
viii
M
1-19
I
ix
M
1-20
I
x
M
1-21
I
xi
M
1-22
I
xii
M
1-23
I
xiii
M
1-24
I
xiv
M
xv
M
2-1
M
xvi
M
2-2
G
xvii
M
2-3
C
xviii
M
2-4
M
xix
M
2-5
G
xx
M
2-6
M
xxi
M
2-7
G
xxii
M
2-8
G
2-9
G
INTRODUCTION PAGES
Title
SECTION 1 (General)
Rev
Page
Rev
Page
Rev
SECTION 2 (Limitations)
1-1
I
2-10
J
1-2
I
2-11
J
1-3
G
2-12
J
1-4
M
2-13
J
1-5
G
2-14
J
1-6
I
2-15
J
1-7
I
2-16
J
1-8
L
2-17
J
1-9
I
2-18
J
1-10
I
2-19
J
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Added Pages
RA050001
vii
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Reissue
Page
Rev
2-20
J
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Added Pages
Page
Rev
Page
Reissue
Rev
SECTION 3 (Emergency Procedures)
Page
Rev
4-4
G
4-5
K
4-6
M
4-7
M
4-8
M
4-9
M
4-10
M
4-11
M
4-12
M
4-13
I
4-14
I
4-15
I
4-16
I
4-17
I
4-18
I
4-19
I
4-20
I
4-21
I
4-22
M
4-23
M
4-24
M
4-25
M
4-26
M
4-27
M
4-28
K
3-1
M
3-2
M
3-3
I
3-4
I
3-5
I
3-6
I
3-7
I
3-8
I
3-9
I
3-10
I
3-11
I
3-12
L
3-13
D
3-14
G
3-15
F
3-16
C
3-17
C
3-18
I
3-19
I
3-20
I
3-21
I
3-22
I
3-23
M
3-24
M
3-25
M
5-1
C
3-26
M
5-2
C
3-27
M
5-3
K
3-28
M
5-4
K
5-5
K
5-6
K
5-7
M
5-8
G
SECTION 4 (Normal Procedures)
4-1
M
4-2
M
4-3
G
RA050001
viii
Added Pages
Page
Rev
Page
Rev
SECTION 5 (Performance)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
List of Effective Pages
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Reissue
Page
Rev
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Added Pages
Page
Rev
Page
Reissue
Rev
Added Pages
Page
Rev
Page
Rev
Page
5-9
G
6-16
M
5-10
G
6-17
M
5-11
G
6-18
M
5-12
G
Weight & Balance (Appendix A)
5-13
I
Type of Equipment for Operation List
5-14
I
6-A1
M
5-15
I
6-A2
M
5-16
I
6-A3
M
5-17
I
6-A4
M
5-18
I
6-A5
M
5-19
G
6-A6
M
5-20
G
6-A7
M
5-21
G
6-A8
M
5-22
I
Weight & Balance (Appendix B)
5-23
I
Installed Equipment List
5-24
I
5-25
G
5-26
G
SECTION 6 (Weight & Balance)
6-1
M
6-19
M
6-2
G
6-20
M
6-3
G
6-4
M
6-5
M
6-6
M
6-7
M
6-8
M
6-9
M
6-10
M
6-11
M
6-12
M
6-13
M
6-14
M
6-15
M
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
6-B1
M
6-B2
M
6-B3
M
6-B4
M
6-B5
M
6-B6
M
Rev
SECTION 7
(Description of Airplane & Systems)
7-1
I
7-79
M
7-2
I
7-80
M
7-3
I
7-4
M
7-5
M
7-6
M
7-7
I
7-8
I
7-9
I
7-10
I
7-11
L
7-12
J
RA050001
ix
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Reissue
Page
Rev
7-13
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Added Pages
Page
Rev
M
7-47
I
7-14
L
7-48
I
7-15
I
7-49
I
7-16
I
7-50
I
7-17
I
7-51
I
7-18
I
7-52
I
7-19
M
7-53
I
7-20
M
7-54
I
7-21
I
7-55
L
7-22
I
7-56
L
7-23
I
7-57
M
7-24
I
7-58
M
7-25
I
7-59
M
7-26
I
7-60
M
7-27
I
7-61
M
7-28
I
7-62
M
7-29
I
7-63
M
7-30
I
7-64
M
7-31
I
7-65
M
7-32
I
7-66
M
7-33
I
7-67
M
7-34
J
7-68
M
7-35
I
7-69
M
7-36
I
7-70
M
7-37
I
7-71
M
7-38
I
7-72
M
7-39
I
7-73
M
7-40
I
7-74
M
7-41
I
7-75
M
7-42
I
7-76
M
7-43
I
7-77
M
7-44
I
7-78
M
7-45
I
7-46
I
RA050001
x
Page
Rev
Page
Reissue
Rev
Added Pages
Page
Rev
Page
Rev
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
List of Effective Pages
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Reissue
Page
Rev
Added Pages
Page
Rev
Page
Rev
SECTION 8
(Handling, Servicing & Maintenance)
8-1
G
8-2
G
8-3
L
8-4
G
8-5
G
8-6
G
8-7
G
8-8
M
8-9
G
8-10
G
8-11
I
8-12
I
8-13
I
8-14
I
8-15
I
8-16
I
8-17
I
8-18
I
8-19
I
8-20
I
SECTION 9 (Supplements)
SUPPLEMENTS 1 - 13
There are 13 supplemental sections appended
to Section 9. Page 3 in each supplement
contains a table of revisions that provides the
effective date of each page.
9-1
C
9-2
C
9-3
C
9-4
C
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
xi
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
A
Cover
B
Various
B
B
B
B
B
B
viii
1-4
1-5
1-13
2-4
2-6
B
3-6
B
3-10
B
3-10
B
3-10
B
3-23
B
3-29
B
B
B
B
4-1
4-8
4-10
4-10
B
4-21
RA050001
xii
Comment
The cover page was modified to incorporate the date FAA dated and signed copy.
The entire AFM/POH is being reissued with revision B. This procedure was anticipated
since actual use of the documentation during flight and ground-training operations will
always uncover a number of mistakes and oversights.
There were approximately 80 typographical and grammatical errors. The most frequent was
the use of a comma before the conjunctive adverb however instead of a semicolon. Other
items included: subject-verb agreement; an omitted or extra article, helping verb,
conjunction, or preposition; omitted or unnecessary ed, ly etc. endings of a word, i.e.,
recommend instead of recommended or turned instead of turn, are typical examples; in a
few instances, a word was plural when it should be singular and visa-versa, i.e., doors seal
instead of door seals or controls instead of control; a few unnecessary commas were
removed and a few missing periods were added; in a few areas there was reference to the
next table when actually it was the previous table and visa-versa; of course, there were a
few misspelled words, i.e., sale weight was used for scale weight and lightening was used
for lightning; there were about 10 incidents where an unnecessary space was added to the
airplane’s designation, i.e., LC 40-550FG, which was removed; there were a few areas
where double line-spacing between paragraphs and an unnecessary line space after a
heading were removed. None of the above revisions affected the meaning of what was
written.
The entire AFM/POH was converted to PDF format. This procedure simplifies printing as
well as the revision process; however, the PDF format does change the pagination of the
document slightly. The net effect was that Section 4 now contains 26 pages, rather than 28
pages. In addition, the positioning of text on the various pages may vary slightly from
revision A. The page numbers cited in column 2 refer to the pages of revision B.
Under Section 4 pages 4-27 and 4-28 were removed from the list of effective pages.
Propeller – The low and high pitch stop settings were revised to 13.5º and 35º, respectively.
Specific Loading – The power loading was revised to read 10.97.
The entire page was revised extensively to reflect current procedures and designations.
Powerplant Limitations – Maximum recommended cruise BHP was changed to 248.
Propeller Data and Limitations – The low pitch stop setting was changed to 13.5º.
Engine Failure . . . (Below 400 feet AGL) – Item 1, both airspeeds were changed to 90
KIAS.
In-Flight Engine Fire – Turning off HVAC was moved to occur before turning off the
master switch. The airspeed in item 6 was changed to 179 KIAS.
In-Flight Electrical Fire – These procedures were extensively revised. HVAC was moved
to item 1. Item 7 was removed. The remaining items were changed to use the standby
battery for a phased power up.
In-Flight Cabin Fire (Fuel/Hydraulic Fluid) – Turning off HVAC was moved to item 1.
Failure of engine driven fuel pump – The paragraph was made less ambiguous by adding
adjectives to the word pump, i.e., backup pump, pump arming, etc.
Exterior Emergency Exit Release – No. 6 was added to the narrative discussion, which
makes it more similar to the placarded instructions.
Preflight Inspection Area 1 – In item 7 the word right replaces the word left.
Before Takeoff – Item 5 is expanded to ensure the HSI is in the slave mode.
Cruise – Item 5 was altered to Changing Fuel Tanks followed by two subheadings.
The two Notes on the page were consolidated under one heading, but kept separate.
Mixture Settings – The use of the words warmer and colder in relation to EGT adjustments
was confusing. These words were dropped in favor of richer and leaner.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
B
4-24
B
B
4-25
5-20
B
6-9
B
6-17 &
6-18
6-20 &
6-21
6-A2
B
7-13
B
7-19
B
7-28
B
7-39
B
7-41
B
7-41
B
7-42
B
7-42
B
7-59
B
8-4
B
3 of 8
B
3 of 16
B
3 of 8
B
3 of 8
B
3 of 6
B
3 of 6
C
Various
B
B
Comment
Warning – The words Federal Aviation Agency were replaced with FAA, which was done
for spacing purposes.
Caution – The caution statement was moved up one paragraph for spacing purposes.
Figure 5-21 – The far right text box was changed to 50% rather than 60%.
The CG, empty weight, and related numbers in the sample problem were changed to
parallel those of the certified airplane rather than the prototype.
The sample problem was changed to incorporate the revised empty weight and CG on page
6-9.
The headings and labeling of the four multiplying graphs on these pages were formatted
with similar fonts and centered more precisely. All changes were cosmetic in nature.
21-07 – An operational ECS servomotor was made a requirement for all flight conditions.
Wing Flaps – The dimmer wheel no longer controls the illumination of the flap EL lighting
and the second paragraph was so modified.
Propeller and Governor – In the third paragraph the low pitch stop setting was changed to
13.5º.
KI 256 Flight Director (FD) – Second paragraph, last sentence, the words portion of this
POH/AFM were removed.
Figure 7-10 – Equipment available on the standby battery was modified to include the GPS
for the premium IFR package.
Upper Engine and Instrument Panel – The text was modified to indicate that the left
thumb-wheel controls the lights.
Lower Instrument Panel, Circuit Breaker Panel and Rocker Switches – The text was
modified to indicate that the right thumb-wheel controls the lights.
Figure 7-12 Upper Instrument Panel row – Text in the center cell was modified to
indicate that the left thumb-wheel controls the lights.
Figure 7-12 Lower Inst. & Circuit Breaker Panel row – Text in the center cell was
modified to indicate that the right thumb-wheel controls the lights.
Code and Altitude Display Windows – The text was changed to reflect that the altitude
display information is on the right side of the unit.
Delivery Package – In the table of items, the term 1 Set was added after Checklist Booklet.
Supplement No. 4 – The revision log was revised to parallel the list of effective pages
format.
Supplement No. 5 – The revision log was revised to parallel the list of effective pages
format.
Supplement No. 6 – The revision log was revised to parallel the list of effective pages
format.
Supplement No. 7 – The revision log was revised to parallel the list of effective pages
format.
Supplement No. 10 – The revision log was revised to parallel the list of effective pages
format.
Supplement No. 11 – The revision log was revised to parallel the list of effective pages
format.
Grammatical Corrections – Revision C has several grammatical corrections. None of the
changes affect the meaning of the text. A few hyphens, semicolons, commas, and periods
were added. Noun-verb tense relationships were corrected in a few areas, and several
sentences were reworded to eliminate the passive voice. Finally, the font sizes in a few
areas were modified slightly because of problems with the application software.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
xiii
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
C
iii
to
xii
C
1-11
C
1-16,
1-17 &
1-19
to
1-21
C
2-5
C
2-8
C
2-11
C
2-13
C
3-6
C
3-7
C
3-9
C
3-10
C
3-13
C
4-7
C
4-7
C
4-8
C
4-9
C
5-25
C
5-26
C
6-17
C
7-14
C
7-22
C
7-23
RA050001
xiv
Comment
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Log of Normal Revisions – Pages v and vi were removed.
These pages were intended to accommodate future revisions; however, it would take many
years to fill these pages, and they will be added when needed. The document repagination
caused minor changes in the length of some section, and the List of Effective Pages (LOEP)
were modified accordingly. Finally, the heading in column 1 in the LOEP was modified
slightly.
A new heading titled Miscellaneous was added and the definitions of Flight Time and Time
in Service were inserted.
Table Footnote – As originally written the footnote stated, Example: Refer to (Figure 1-1)
and (Figure 1-2) for examples of how to use these types of tables. The text was modified to
state, Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these
types of tables.
Fuel Flow and Fuel Pressure/Figure 2-6 – The maximum fuel flow is changed to 28 GPH
and the maximum pressure is now 22 psi. These limitations parallel the new gauge placards,
which were changed to reflect the expanded limitations. There were previous issues
concerning noise limitations and the engine’s rated horsepower. The new limits reflect full
takeoff power as 2700 RPM and 310 BHP.
Other Limitations (Altitude) – The requirement for oxygen above 14,000 MSL was
modified to indicate that any installed oxygen system must be FAA approved.
Compass Card Placard – Text was changed to indicate that strobe lights are also operated
when the compass is calibrated. The statement regarding maximum deviation was removed.
MAX TURN LIMIT and TURN LIMIT placards were added at the bottom of the page.
Precautionary Landing with Engine Power – Removed item No. 7 (Ignition Switch –
SET TO OFF) since it is in the checklist as the next to last item.
Engine Fire on the Ground During Startup – Item No. 4 had the parenthetical statement
If parking brake is engaged added.
Warning – A warning statement was added that indicates the pilot should turn on the pitot
heat at least five minutes before entering visible moisture.
Electrical System Discharging – The end of the sentence in Item No. 8 was changed to
read as possible or practicable.
(Figure 3-2) – A reference dagger was added to the turn coordinator that indicates the
circuit breaker is shared with the ECS servomotor.
Before Taxi – HSI – SET TO THE SLAVED POSITION was added to the checklist as Item
4. Doing this permits checking the HSI while taxiing.
Taxing – Item No. 3 was changed from Directional Gyro to Directional Gyro/HSI.
Normal Takeoff – Landing/Taxi Lights – OFF OR AS REQUIRED was added to the
checklist as item 7.
Normal Climb and Max perform climb checklist – The landing/taxi light procedure was
moved to the Normal Takeoff Checklist. Arming the backup boost pump was added to both
checklists. The leaning procedure for maximum performance was expanded slightly.
Sample Problem – The solution for No. 4 was changed from 6.1 Miles to 8.5 Miles.
Sample Problem – The solutions for Nos. 11 and 12 were reversed. This was corrected,
and the word “feet” was added.
Figure 6-17 – A note was added that reminds the user that the sample empty weight will
vary for each airplane, and an appropriate reference is provided that shows the location of
the actual empty weight.
Front Seat Adjustment – Clarified the procedure for manual adjustment of the seats.
Manifold Pressure and Fuel Flow/Fuel Pressure – The location of these instruments was
changed from center-right to upper-right.
Tachometer – The location of this instrument was changed from top-right to center-right.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
C
7-25
C
7-30
C
7-61
C
8-7
C
C
C
C
8-7
8-8
6 of 8
Various
D
Various
D
3-13
D
3-23
D
Whole
Section
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
F
7-27
7-28
to
7-29
7-30
to
7-31
7-46
to
7-56
7-62
to
7-63
7-62
to
7-70
7-66
and
2-11
7-67
to
7-70
2-5
Comment
The Flight Time Mode – The text clarified times flight timer will operate, i.e., when oil
pressure exists and the system master is on; aircraft serial number applicability was also
noted.
Hour Meter – A discussion of the hour meter was added on this page, which includes the
two types of possible systems that could be installed. In addition, aircraft serial number
applicability was also noted.
Autopilot Disconnect Switch – The text and related figure were modified to eliminate all
references to Control Wheel Steering (CWS).
Tire Considerations – This heading and related discussion was added to the AFM/POH. In
addition, a caution statement was inserted after the text.
Dipstick NOTE – Text was added explaining how to remove the dipstick.
Battery Replacement Cycles – A new heading with related information was added.
Supplement No. 4 – All reference to control wheel steering (CWS) was removed.
Supplement No. 5 – The term DTA was changed to DAT.
Revision D has a few grammatical corrections. None of the changes affect the meaning of
the text. A few hyphens, semicolons, commas, and periods were added. Noun-verb tense
relationships were corrected in a few areas, and a few sentences were reworded to eliminate
the passive voice.
The reference to Premium IFR Package was removed from Figure 3-2.
Reference to the Premium IFR Package was removed from Figure 3-5. This changed the
pagination of the remaining pages.
The Weight and Balance Record in Section No. 6 was moved to the end of Appendix A and
converted to a form, sans headers and footers. All references to the Weight and Balance
form were updated. The headings in Appendix A were modified so that they are generic. In
addition, all references to the Premium and Standard IFR Packages were removed. All the
modifications to Section No. 6 changed the pagination, and the section was reissued in its
entirety.
Discussion of the Integrated Flight System was added.
The discussion of the KI 256 attitude indicator and flight director was moved from Section
9 to these pages, and previous references to the basic attitude indicator were removed. A
discussion of the autopilot/flight director interface was added.
The discussion of the KCS 55A Compass System was moved from Section 9 to these pages,
and previous references to the basic directional gyro (DG) were removed.
All reference to the Premium and Standard IFR Packages were removed, which included:
(1) Removal of the GX60 GPS graphic and all references to the GX60 GPS. (2) A slightly
modified discussion of theMD-200.
Optional Equipment – This is a new subsection of Section 7. The discussion of the
AvroTec FlightMonitor and the BF Goodrich 500/950 Stormscopes were added to this
section.
The Optional Equipment section was moved so that it now comes after the Miscellaneous
Equipment Section.
Added information about the J.P. Instruments digital engine scanner to the Optional
Equipment Section. Added placard for digital engine scanner to the Limitations section.
Added information about the Shadin fuel flow management system to the Optional
Equipment Section.
Correct baggage and entry dimensions and changed standard empty weight and useful load.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
xv
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
G
G
G
G
G
G
Page
No.
2-9 to
2-17
3-13 to
3-16
3-23 to
3-28
4-3 to
4-12
6-1 to
6-2
6-11 to
6-14
6-A1 to
6-A8
6-B1
to
6-B4
7-1 to
7-6
7-7 to
7-12
7-22 &
7-24
7-21 to
7-34
7-35
7-40 to
7-45
7-66
7-70 to
7-72
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-13 to
1-14
2-1
2-4 to
2-8
G
2-5
G
2-8
G
2-9
2-14 to
2-16
3-3
3-7
3-9
G
G
G
G
RA050001
xvi
Comment
Replaced all placard descriptions with pictures of placards.
Corrected the percent BHP the aircraft produces.
Add special information for the standby battery. Removed of few lingering references to
vacuum driven directional gyro.
Added step to check leading edge of horizontal and vertical stabilizers during pre-flight.
Change “ON” to “SET TO ALT” on the before takeoff checklist.
Updated Table of Contents for Chapter 6.
Updated information about the baggage nets.
Changed the title of the equipment list to “Types of Equipment for Operation”. Removed
the weight and arm information. Moved the sheet titled Tabulated After-Market Equipment
List to the end of the section, just before the Weight and Balance Record.
Added “Installed Equipment List” that will be updated for each delivered aircraft and lists
the weight and arm information. This list was also given a separate appendix, i.e. Appendix
B. The list is printed in landscape for consistency of presentation.
Updated Table of Contents for Chapter 7.
Added information about the horizontal stabilizer, and added information about leading
edge tape.
Added admonition to remind the pilot that the fuel gauges are approximate indications and
are never substitutes for proper planning and pilot technique.
Added information to assure that flight is only allowed when both vacuum pumps are
operating. Changed vacuum drawing and text to reflect current design.
Updated fuel system diagram to include the optional Shadin fuel flow meter.
Updated information on the rudder limiter.
Corrected digital engine scanner number to EDM-701.
Added information about the MX20 multi-function displays.
Added SI units.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Added SI units.
Updated page and figure references.
Modified Table of Contents for Chapter to add Electronic Display Limitations
Added SI units.
Modified Powerplant Limitations to clarify that there is a red line below zero on the fuel
quantity gauge and there is a red line at 10 psi on the oil pressure gauge.
Added Electronic Display Limitations to discuss MX20 limitations. Added note that U.S.
operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Updated page and figure references.
Added oil filler placard, fuel filler placard, and ground power plug placard.
Added SI units.
Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
G
G
3-12
3-14
3-18 to
3-19
4-1 to
4-2
4-3
4-4 to
4-12
4-6 to
4-7
G
G
G
G
G
G
4-8
G
G
4-10
4-13
4-14 to
4-16
G
G
4-17
G
G
G
G
G
4-19
4-22
4-25
4-27
5-6
5-8 to
5-22
5-25
6-3
6-A1
6-A1 to
6A8
6-B1
6-B1 to
6B5
7-10 to
7-12
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
7-13
G
G
G
G
G
7-15
7-17
7-20
7-22
7-24
G
7-26
G
G
7-28 to
7-30
7-33
Comment
Updated page and figure references.
Added SI units.
Added SI units. Updated page and figure references.
Updated Table of Contents
Added SI units. Changed crosswind component to 23 knots.
Updated checklists.
Added “Engine Start with Ground Power Cart” and “After Engine Start with Ground Power
Cart” checklists.
Added step to the Before Takeoff Checklist to check that doors are latched and detented.
Added steps for testing the aural warning system.
Added SI units. Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Added SI units. Updated page and figure references.
Added information about taxiing with the doors open to the Taxiing section. Added note
that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Added SI units.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada. Added SI units.
Added SI units. Updated page and figure references.
Added SI units. Updated page and figure references.
Added SI units.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Changed Title to Equipment for Types of Operation
Renumbered and added additional equipment to list.
Changed Installed Equipment List so that the title, S/N, and N-Number is on each page.
Renumbered and added additional equipment to list.
Updated page and figure references.
Added explanation that the flap extended light will continue to blink until the airspeed is
below 100 knots.
Added information about taxiing with the doors open to the Door section.
Added section on optional handles.
Added SI units.
Updated page and figure references.
Added Aural Warning section. Updated page and figure references.
Added information to the digital clock operation that the flight timer will not work unless
SL is incorporated.
Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
xvii
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
G
7-37
H
H
I
I
I
I
I
7-42 to
7-43
7-54
7-57 to
7-58
7-61
7-62
7-64
7-65
7-68
7-71 to
7-72
7-72
7-73
8-1 to
8-2
8-3
8-4 to
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-17
7-25 to
7-26
6-A21
6-B2
i - xx
1-1
1-2
1-7
1-18
I
2-12
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
H
I
3-1 to
3-2
3-8
I
3-8
I
I
I
3-19
3-20
3-29
4-1 to
4-2
I
I
RA050001
xviii
Comment
Clarified that increasing the fan speed will not increase flow through the eyeball vents.
Added SI units.
Added SI units. Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Updated page and figure references.
Updated page and figure references.
Added information regarding the operation of the MX20 system. Updated page and figure
references.
Added section on the Ground Power Plug.
Added section on the S-Tec 429 Global Positioning Steering System (GPSS) Converter.
Updated Table of Contents.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.
Added SI units.
Added SI units.
Updated page and figure references.
Added note that U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada. Added SI units.
Added section on the care of anti-erosion tape.
Removed note on aural warning that stated the system was not certified.
Changed description to Aural Warning System
Changed description to Aural Warning System
Updated
Updated Chapter 1 TOC
Updated three-view drawing to more accurately depict aircraft.
Corrected ISA temperature. Was: 56.5ºC Is: -56.5ºC.
Corrected table to call out nautical miles instead of knots.
Added new compass placard design. Changed term “escape hatchet” to “crash ax” for
consistency throughout manual.
Updated Chapter 3 TOC.
Changed reference in In-flight Engine Fire checklist.
Changed Step 6 of the In-flight Cabin Fire Checklist to say “Follow Emergency Landing
without Engine Power” checklist.”
Clarified the rudder deflection in the “Malfunction” section: is 17º ± 1º to 11.5º ± 0.5º.
Added “Lightning Strike” section.
Added description to strike the “corner” edge of the window when using the crash ax.
Updated Chapter 4 TOC
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
I
4-6
I
I
I
I
I
4-13
4-19
5-13
5-14
5-16
I
5-17
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-22
5-23
5-24
6-A1
6-A2
6-A7
6-B4 to
6-B5
7-1 to
7-6
I
I
I
7-8
I
7-10
I
7-11
I
7-16
I
7-35
I
I
I
I
7-37
7-47
7-55
7-58
I
7-64
I
7-83
I
I
J
J
J
8-12
8-17
2-11
3-1/3-2
4-1/4-2
J
6-A4
J
6-B2
J
6-B5
Comment
Added Caution note that the master switch should not be turned on until after the engine has
started and the ground power plug has been removed. Updated “Starting Engine with
Ground Power Cart” checklist to remove step to turn on master switch.
Corrected description of Aileron servo tab section.
Rewrote “Door Seals” section.
Corrected typo in table.
Corrected manifold pressure at 2700 RPM to read 21.
Corrected -38 sub-heading. Was: 23 C Is: 33 C.
Corrected fuel flow at the -9 standard temperature, 2300 RPM, 17” mp, 46% bhp to read
8.4 gph.
Corrected equation in example to read: (57 – 18 = 39).
Reformatted figures.
Reformatted figures
Added note explaining that chapter numbers correspond to the MM chapter numbers.
Corrected drawing number for item 23-05.
Changed drawing number to N/A for items 34-40 and 34-41.
Changed drawing number to N/A for items 34-40 and 34-41.
Updated Chapter 7 TOC.
Removed reference that anti-erosion tape can only be installed on aircraft S/N 40010 and
on.
Clarified the rudder deflection in Rudder Limiter section to 17º ± 1º to 11.5º ± 0.5º.
Corrected the Simultaneous Trim Application to note that if the pilot’s and co-pilot’s trim
are moved in opposite directions, the pilot’s overrides the co-pilot’s.
Added function of the aural warning system to the “Latching Mechanism” section.
Added S/N’s to title of Fuel System Diagram. Added new picture of fuel system diagram
for aircraft S/N 40080 and on. Added S/N’s to Fuel Vent system and added second Fuel
Vent System section for aircraft S/N 40080 and on.
Clarified procedures for moving the fuel selector valve.
Clarified the rudder deflection in Rudder Limiter section to 17º ± 1º to 11.5º ± 0.5º.
Corrected APR to APPR, which is what is displayed on the ACU.
Corrected typos on page.
Removed reference to SL30 in ADS Section. Added note that using the elevator trim switch
should not be used in lieu of using the ADS.
Added Caution note that the master switch should not be turned on until after the engine has
started and the ground power plug has been removed.
Added Warning about eyebolts to the “Securing the Airplane” section.
Updated “Anti-erosion Tape” section to include tape on gear fairings.
Added two new interior placards.
Updated TOC.
Updated TOC.
Removed individual wheel, brake, tire, and tube assemblies for the main gear leaving the
complete assemblies. Added nose gear assembly. Changed order of Chapter 32 items.
Removed individual wheel, brake, tire, and tube assemblies for the main gear leaving the
complete assemblies. Added nose gear assembly. Changed order of Chapter 32 items.
Corrected arm of portable oxygen system to 133.0.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
xix
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
J
7-12
Corrected diagram to accurately depict Items A through K.
J
7-34
Changed term “suction pumps” to “vacuum pumps”.
K
4-9
Added Caution note about pitot heat operation to the Before Takeoff checklist.
K
4-26
Added information about pitot heat operation to Cold Weather Operations section.
K
5-3
Corrected Figures 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3.
K
5-5
Corrected Figure 5-5.
K
6-14
Corrected baggage moment in Figure 6-13.
K
7-16
Added reference to aural warning system to Baggage Door section.
L
1-8
Revised terminology definition for Stall Strip.
L
2-1
Revised Table of Contents.
L
3-12
Reformatted Circuit Breaker Panel paragraph
L
5-7
Revised Figure 5-7.
L
6-17
Moved the Y-axis label on Figure 6-19.
L
7-11
Revised Trim Position Indicator paragraph.
L
7-14
Reformatted Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses paragraph.
L
7-55
Deleted “Warning” note regarding ILS/DME approaches.
L
M
8-3
Title
Page, v,
viii to
xxii
1-4
M
2-1
Revised footer.
M
2-4
M
2-6
Deleted Maximum Manifold Pressure for Idle.
Revised the low pitch and high pitch setting values in the Propeller Data and Limitations
section. Revised the Maximum Empty Weight from 2580 lbs. to 2568 lbs.
M
M
M
M
M
3-1 and
3-2
3-12
and 313
3-23 to
3-28
4-1 and
4-2
M
4-6
through
4-12
M
4-22
through
4-27
M
5-7
RA050001
xx
Comment
Revised product support e-mail address.
Revised and updated pages.
Revised the low pitch and high pitch setting values in the Propeller section.
Revised Table of Contents.
Added Something Stuck in or Interfering With a Doorjamb checklist.
Repaginated pages. Deleted pages 3-29 an 3-30.
Revised Table of Contents.
Revised title of starting engine procedure to “STARTING COLD ENGINE.”
Added Starting Hot Engine procedure.Added Approach procedure.
Added Note to the Crosswind Operations section.
Repaginated following pages.
Added paragraph directing fuel pump switch be off for descent and landing in the Descent
section.
Added paragraph to the Crosswind Landings section indicating airspeed may be up to 5 kts
higher or lower than indicated during sideslipping.
Repaginated following pages.
Replaced Figure 5-7.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS
Revision
Level
Page
No.
M
6-1
M
6-4 to
6-20
M
6A
M
6B
7-4 to
7-6
7-13
7-15 to
7-17
M
M
M
M
7-19
M
7-20
M
7-57 to
7-80
M
8-3
M
8-8
Comment
Revised Table of Contents.
Added Caution and example regarding specific weight of Aviation Gasoline. Revised
Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20. Deleted indication of an optional restraint system from the
Baggage Nets section. Revised the Maximum Empty Weight section. Revised Figure 6-20.
Repaginated pages and added pages 6-19 and 6-20.
Replaced list.
Replaced list.
Revised Table of Contents.
Revised main gear tire size.
Added Warning to the Door section. DO NOT open door during flight.
Changed 13.5º to 14º and revised the last two sentences of the third paragraph in the
Propeller and Governor paragraphs.
Changed “or pressure is above 18 psi” to “or a pressure differntial greater than 18 psi is
detected” in the Engine Oil section.
Revised the Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) section to include the Artex ME406
ELT. Added location of parallel port cable for chart updates of the FMP300 Flightmonitor
to the Subscription paragraph. Repaginated pages.
Changed “Lancair Company” to “Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation”. Revised
product support e-mail address.
Revised Figure 8-2. Revised Figure 8-3.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
xxi
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
xxii
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 1
General
TABLE OF CONTENTS
THREE-VIEW DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE..................................................................... 1-2
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 1-3
DESCRIPTIVE DATA ............................................................................................................... 1-4
Engine ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Propeller ................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Fuel ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Oil ......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Maximum Certificated Weights ........................................................................................... 1-5
Typical Airplane Weights ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Cabin and Entry Dimensions ................................................................................................ 1-5
Space and Entry Dimensions of Baggage Compartment ...................................................... 1-5
Specific Loadings ................................................................................................................. 1-5
ABBREVIATIONS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SYMBOLS ...................................................... 1-6
Airspeed Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Meteorological Terminology ................................................................................................ 1-7
Engine Power and Controls Terminology ............................................................................ 1-7
Airplane Performance and Flight Planning Terminology .................................................... 1-8
Weight and Balance Terminology ........................................................................................ 1-9
REVISIONS AND CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL ......................................... 1-12
Revisions ............................................................................................................................. 1-13
Supplements ........................................................................................................................ 1-13
Use of the terms Warning, Caution, and Note..................................................................... 1-14
Meaning of Shall, Will, Should, and May ........................................................................... 1-14
Meaning of Land as Soon as Possible or Practicable ........................................................ 1-14
CONVERSION CHARTS ........................................................................................................ 1-14
Kilograms and Pounds ........................................................................................................ 1-15
Feet and Meters .................................................................................................................. 1-16
Inches and Centimeters........................................................................................................ 1-17
Nautical Miles, Statute Miles, and Kilometers.................................................................... 1-18
Liters, Imperial Gallons, and U.S. Gallons ......................................................................... 1-19
Temperature Relationship (Fahrenheit and Celsius) ........................................................... 1-22
Fuel Weights and Conversion Relationships ...................................................................... 1-23
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-1
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
THREE-VIEW DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE
SPECIFICATIONS
Wing Area
141.2 ft.2 (13.1 m2)
Wing Span
35.8 ft. (10.9 m)
Length
25.2 ft. (7.68 m)
Empty Weight (±)
2200 lbs. (997.7 kg)
Gross Weight
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
Stall Speed
57 KIAS
Maneuvering Speed
148 KIAS
Cruising Speed
190 KTAS
Never Exceed Speed 235 KIAS
Engine
310 HP Continental
IO-550-N
Propeller
Hartzell
77 in. (196 cm) Constant Speed
Governor
McCauley
*Note: Wingspan is 36 ft.± with position lights.
*
(Figure 1-1)
RA050001
1-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 1
General
INTRODUCTION
This handbook is written in nine sections and includes the material required to be furnished to
the pilot by Federal Aviation Regulations and additional information provided by the manufacturer and constitutes the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual. Section 1 contains generalized
descriptive data about the airplane including dimensions, fuel and oil capacities, and certificated
weights. There are also definitions and explanations of symbols, abbreviations, and commonly
used terminology for this airplane. Finally, conventions specific to this manual are detailed.
NOTE
Federal Aviation Regulations require that a current Handbook be in the
airplane during flight. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.) It is the
operator’s responsibility to maintain the Handbook in a current status. The
manufacturer provides the registered owner(s) of the airplane with revisions.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
1-3
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
DESCRIPTIVE DATA
ENGINE
Number of Engines: 1
Engine Manufacturer: Teledyne Continental
Engine Model Number: IO-550-N
Engine Type: Normally aspirated, direct drive, air-cooled, horizontally opposed, fuel-injected,
six-cylinder engine with 550 in.3 (9013 cm3) displacement
Takeoff Power: 310 BHP at 2700 RPM
Maximum Continuous Power: 310 BHP at 2700 RPM
Maximum Normal Operating Power: Same as maximum continuous power.
Maximum Climb Power: Same as maximum continuous power.
Maximum Cruise Power: Same as maximum continuous power.
PROPELLER
Propeller Manufacturer: Hartzell
Propeller Hub and Blade Model Number: PHC-J3YF-IRF and F7691D-1
Number of Blades: 3
Propeller Diameter: 76 in. (193 cm) minimum, 77 in. (196 cm) maximum
Propeller Type: Constant speed and hydraulically actuated, with a low pitch setting of 14.1o ±
0.2o and a high pitch setting of 34.7o ± 1.0o (30 inch station)
FUEL
The following fuel grades, including the respective colors, are approved for this airplane.
100LL Grade Aviation Fuel (Blue)
100 Grade Aviation Fuel (Green)
Total Fuel Capacity - 106 Gallons (401 L)
Total Capacity Each tank: 53 Gallons (201 L)
Total Usable Fuel: 49 Gallons (186 L)/tank, 98 Gallons (371 L) Total
NOTE
Under certain atmospheric conditions, ice can form along various segments
of the fuel system. Under these conditions, isopropyl alcohol, ethylene glycol
monomethyl ether, or diethylene glycol monomethyl ether may be added to
the fuel supply. Additive concentrations shall not exceed 3% for isopropyl
alcohol or 0.15% for ethylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol
monomethyl ether (military specification MIL-I-27686E). See (Figure 8-1) in
Section 8 for a chart of fuel additive mixing ratios.
OIL
Specification or Oil Grade (the first 25 engine hours) - Aviation Grade Straight Mineral Oil
(MIL-L-6082) shall be used during the first 25 hours of flight operations.
Specification or Oil Grade (after 25 engine hours) - Teledyne Continental Motors
Specification MHS-24D and MHS-25 (latest revisions). An ashless dispersant oil shall be used
after 25 hours.
RA050001
1-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Viscosity Recommended for Various Average Air Temperature Ranges
Below 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 30, 10W30, 15W50, or 20W50
Above 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE50, 15W50, 20W/50, or 20W60
Total Oil Capacity
Sump: 8 Quarts (7.6 L)
Total: 10 Quarts* (9.5 L)
Drain and Refill Quantity: 8 Quarts (7.6 L)
Oil Quantity Operating Range: 6 to 8 Quarts (5.7 to 7.6 L)
NOTE*
The first time the airplane is filled with oil, additional oil is required for the
filter, oil cooler, and propeller dome. At subsequent oil changes, this
additional oil is not drainable from the system, and the added oil is mixed
with a few quarts of older oil in the oil system.
MAXIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS
Ramp Weight:
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
Takeoff Weight:
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
Landing Weight:
3230 lbs. (1465 kg)
Baggage Weight:
120 lbs. (54.4 kg)
TYPICAL AIRPLANE WEIGHTS
The empty weight of a typical airplane offered with four-place seating, standard interior,
avionics, accessories, and equipment has a standard empty weight of about 2300 lbs. (1043 kg).
Maximum Useful Load:
1100 lbs.* (498.9 kg)
*(The useful load varies for each airplane. Please see Section 6 for specific details.)
CABIN AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS
Maximum Cabin Width: 50 inches (127 cm)
Maximum Cabin Length (Firewall to aft limit of baggage compartment):
139.6 inches (354.6 cm)
Maximum Cabin Height: 49 inches (124.5 cm)
Minimum Entry Width: 33 inches (83.8 cm)
Minimum Entry Height: 33 inches (83.8 cm)
Maximum Entry Clearance: 46 inches (116.8 cm)
SPACE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS OF BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Maximum Baggage Compartment Width: 38.5 inches (97.8 cm)
Maximum Baggage Compartment Length: 52 inches (132 cm) (Including Shelf)
Maximum Baggage Compartment Height: 34.5 inches (87.6 cm)
Maximum Baggage Entry Width: 28 inches (71.1 cm) (Diagonal Measurement)
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
Wing Loading: 24.08 lbs./sq. ft.
Power Loading: 10.97 lbs./hp.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
1-5
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ABBREVIATIONS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SYMBOLS
AIRSPEED TERMINOLOGY
CAS
Calibrated Airspeed means the indicated speed of an
aircraft, corrected for position and instrument error.
Calibrated airspeed is equal to true airspeed in standard atmosphere at sea level.
KCAS
Calibrated Airspeed expressed in knots.
GS
Ground Speed is the speed of an airplane relative to the
ground.
IAS
Indicated Airspeed is the speed of an aircraft as shown in
the airspeed indicator when corrected for instrument error.
IAS values published in this Handbook assume zero
instrument error.
KIAS
Indicated Airspeed expressed in knots.
TAS
True Airspeed is the airspeed of an airplane relative to
undisturbed air, which is the CAS, corrected for altitude,
temperature and compressibility.
VH
This term refers to the maximum speed in level flight with
maximum continuous power.
VO
The maximum operating maneuvering speed of the
airplane. Do not apply full or abrupt control movements
above this speed. If a maneuver is entered gradually at VO
with maximum weight and full forward CG, the airplane
will stall at limit load. However, limit load can be exceeded
at VO if abrupt control movements are used or the CG is
farther aft.
VFE
Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the highest speed
permissible with wing flaps in a prescribed extended
position.
VNE
Never Exceed Speed is the speed limit that may not be
exceeded at any time.
VNO
Maximum Structural Cruising Speed is the speed that must
not be exceeded except in smooth air and then only with
caution.
VS
Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at which
the airplane is controllable.
RA050001
1-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
VSO
Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at which
the airplane is controllable in the landing configuration.
VX
Best Angle-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed that delivers the
greatest gain of altitude in the shortest possible horizontal
distance.
VY
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed that delivers the
greatest gain in altitude in the shortest possible time.
METEOROLOGICAL TERMINOLOGY
ISA
International Standard Atmosphere in which:
1. The air is a dry perfect gas;
2. The temperature at sea level (SL) is 15° C (59° F);
3. The pressure at SL is 29.92 inches of Hg. (1013.2 mb);
4. The temperature gradient from SL to an altitude where
the temperature is -56.5°C (-69.7°F) is -0.00198°C
(-.003564°F) per foot, and zero above that altitude.
Standard Temperature
Standard Temperature is 15°C (59ºF) at sea level pressure
altitude and decreases 2°C (32°F) for each 1000 feet of
altitude.
OAT
Outside Air Temperature is the free air static temperature
obtained either from in-flight temperature indications or
ground meteorological sources, adjusted for instrument
error and compressibility effects.
Indicated Pressure Altitude
The number actually read from an altimeter when the
barometric subscale has been set to 29.92 inches of Hg
(1013.2 mb).
Pressure Altitude (PA)
Altitude measured from standard sea level pressure (29.92
inches of Hg) by a pressure or barometric altimeter. It is the
indicated pressure altitude corrected for position and
instrument error. In this Handbook, altimeter instrument
errors are assumed to be zero.
Station Pressure
Actual atmospheric pressure at field elevation.
Wind
The wind velocities recorded as variables on the charts of
this handbook are to be understood as the headwind or
tailwind components of the reported winds.
ENGINE POWER & CONTROLS TERMINOLOGY
BHP
Brake Horsepower is the power developed by the engine.
EGT Gauge
The Exhaust Gas Temperature indicator is the instrument
used to identify the lean fuel flow mixtures for various
power settings.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-7
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
MP
Manifold Pressure is the pressure measured in the intake
system of the engine and is depicted as inches of mercury.
MCP
Maximum Continuous Power is the maximum power for
abnormal or emergency operations.
Maximum Cruise Power
The maximum power recommended for cruise.
MNOP
Maximum Normal Operating Power is the maximum power
for all normal operations (except takeoff). This power, in
most situations, is the same as Maximum Continuous
Power.
Mixture Control
The Mixture Control provides a mechanical linkage with
the fuel control unit of fuel injection engines, to control the
size of the fuel feed aperture, and thus, the air/fuel mixture.
It is also a primary means to shut down the engine.
Propeller Control
The lever used to select a propeller speed.
Propeller Governor
The device that regulates the RPM of the engine and
propeller by increasing or decreasing the propeller pitch,
through a pitch change mechanism in the propeller hub.
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute is a measure of engine and/or
propeller speed.
Stall Strip
A small triangular strip installed along the leading edge of
an airplane wing near the root. The stall strips force the
roots of the wing to stall before the tips. The strips allow
complete control throughout the stall.
Tachometer
An instrument that indicates propeller rotation and is
expressed as revolutions per minute (RPM).
Throttle
The lever used to control engine power, from the lowest
through the highest power, by controlling propeller pitch,
fuel flow, engine speed, or any combination of these.
Wing Cuff
Specially shaped composite construction on the outboard
leading edge of the wing. The cuff increases the camber of
the airfoil and improves the slow-flight and stall
characteristics of the wing.
AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE & FLIGHT PLANNING TERMINOLOGY
Demonstrated Crosswind
Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity is the velocity of the
Velocity
crosswind component for which adequate control of the
airplane can be maintained during takeoff and landing. The
value shown is not considered limiting.
RA050001
1-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: L/02-14-2005
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
G
A unit of acceleration equal to the acceleration of gravity at
the surface of the earth. The term is frequently used to
quantify additional forces exerted on the airplane and is
expressed as multiples of the basic gravitational force, e.g.,
a 1.7-g force.
GPH
Gallons Per Hour is the quantity of fuel consumed in an
hour expressed in gallons.
Limit Load
The maximum load a structure is designed to carry and the
factor of safety is the percentage of limit load the structure
can actually carry before its ultimate load is reached. A
structure designed to carry a load of 1,000 pounds with a
safety factor of 1.5 has an ultimate load of 1,500 pounds.
The airplane can be damaged above limit load.
NMPG
Nautical Miles per Gallon is the distance (in nautical
miles) which can be expected per gallon of fuel consumed
at a specific power setting and/or flight configuration.
PPH
Pounds Per Hour is the quantity of fuel consumed in an
hour expressed in pounds.
Unusable Fuel
Unusable Fuel is the amount of fuel expressed in gallons
that cannot safely be used in flight. Unusable Fuel is the
fuel remaining after a runout test has been completed in
accordance with governmental regulations.
Ultimate Load
The amount of load that can be applied to an aircraft
structure before it fails. The airplane can be damaged
between limit and ultimate load, and it can fail
catastrophically above ultimate load.
Usable Fuel
Usable Fuel is the quantity available that can safely be
used for flight planning purposes.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
Arm
The Arm is the horizontal distance from the reference
datum to the center of gravity (C.G.) of an item.
Basic Empty Weight
The Basic Empty Weight is the Standard Empty Weight
plus optional equipment.
CG
The Center of Gravity is the point at which the airplane
will balance if suspended. Its distance from the datum is
found by dividing the total moment by the total weight of
the airplane.
CG Arm
The arm obtained by adding the individual moments of the
airplane and dividing the sum by the total weight.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-9
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CG Limits
The extreme center of gravity locations within which the
airplane must be operated at a given weight.
Maximum Empty Weight
This is the maximum allowable weight of the airplane
when empty, before fuel, passengers, and baggage are
added. Subtracting the minimum useful load from the
maximum gross weight produces the maximum empty
weight. The amount of additional equipment that can be
added to the airplane is determined by subtracting the
standard empty weight from the maximum empty weight.
See page 6-16 for an example.
Maximum Gross Weight
The maximum loaded weight of an aircraft. Gross weight
includes the total weight of the aircraft, the weight of the
fuel and oil, and the weight of all the load it is carrying.
Maximum Landing Weight
The maximum weight approved for landing touchdown.
Maximum Ramp Weight
The maximum weight approved for ground maneuver. (It
includes the weight of the fuel used for startup, taxi, and
runup.)
Maximum Takeoff Weight
The maximum weight approved for the start of the takeoff
run.
Maximum Zero-Fuel Weight
The maximum weight authorized for an aircraft that does
not include the weight of the fuel. This weight includes the
basic empty weight plus the weight of the passengers and
baggage. The maximum zero-fuel weight can change
depending on the center of gravity location. See (Figure 24) for an example.
Minimum Flight Weight
This is the minimum weight permitted for flight operations
and includes the basic empty weight plus fuel, pilot,
passengers, and baggage. The minimum flight weight can
change depending on the center of gravity location. See
(Figure 2-4) for an example.
Minimum Useful Load
For utility category airplanes, certified for night or IFR
operations, a weight of 190 pounds for each installed seat
plus the fuel weight for 45 minutes at maximum continuous
power.
The moment of a lever is the distance, in inches, between
the point at which a force is applied and the fulcrum, or the
point about which a lever rotates, multiplied by the force,
in pounds. Moment is expressed in inch-pounds.
Moment
Reference Datum
This is an imaginary vertical plane from which all
horizontal distances are measured for balance purposes.
Standard Empty Weight
This is the weight of a standard airplane including unusable
RA050001
1-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
fuel, full operating fluids, and full oil.
Station
The Station is a location along the airplane's fuselage
usually given in terms of distance from the reference
datum, i.e., Station 40 would be 40 inches from the
reference datum.
Useful Load
The Useful Load is the difference between Takeoff Weight
or Ramp Weight, if applicable, and Basic Empty Weight.
MISCELLANEOUS
Flight Time - Airplanes
Time in Service
Pilot time that commences when an aircraft moves under its
own power for the purpose of flight and ends when the
aircraft comes to rest after landing.
Time in service, with respect to maintenance time records,
means the time from the moment an aircraft leaves the
surface of the earth until it touches it at the next point of
landing.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-11
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
1-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 1
General
REVISIONS & CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
REVISIONS
The data contained in this manual are updated through revisions provided by the manufacturer.
Normal revisions are issued every six to nine months depending on the volume of changes.
Temporary revisions are issued as needed for urgent matters concerning the airplane. This type
of revision is printed on red paper and contains the temporary revision number and date of the
revision. Temporary revisions are normally superseded at the next normal revision cycle since
they are incorporated into the manual as a normal revision. Revisions are noted in the manual as
follows.
1. The date of the initial issue of the Pilot's Operating Handbook (POH) is listed on the top line
of the footer, at the bottom of the page, near the inside margin.
2. The revision level and date of the latest revision is shown under the initial issuance date.
3. The revised text is cited on the Narrative Discussion of Revisions (NDR) pages, which is
included with each revision. The NDR identifies the date of the revision, the revision level,
the affected pages, and a discussion of the changes. The NDR pages follow the List of
Effective Pages and are numbered sequentially with roman numerals. For example, if the
final page number in the List of Effective Pages is x, then the first NDR page will be number
xi.
It is the responsibility of the owner or operator of the airplane to keep this manual current. Use
the following procedures to verify that all applicable revisions are incorporated in the POH.
1. Determine the latest normal revision level by referring to the Log of Normal Revisions
beginning on page iii of the manual. The information in this part lists the revision level and
date, the affected pages, and a brief description of the changes. If there is doubt about the
applicable revision level, this can be determined by contacting the manufacturer as shown in
Section 8 of this handbook.
2. Next, refer to the Log of Temporary Revisions, which begins on page v, and determine the
latest revision level. Again, if there is doubt concerning the latest temporary revision number,
contact the manufacturer as shown in Section 8.
3. If the logs of normal and temporary revisions contain the latest revision levels, perform an
audit of the pages in the handbook using the List of Effective Pages (LOEP), which begins
on page vii. First, verify that the revision levels shown at the bottom of the page for both
revision logs agree with the numbers shown at the bottom of the LOEP. For example, if the
LOEP shows a revision level of B for page 7-21, turn to that page and ensure that the
information in the footer agrees with the revision level, e.g., B/04-15-00. Perform this
procedure for each revised page in the LOEP.
a. On the List of Effective Pages, the revision levels and dates of revision are contained in
the footer at the bottom of the page for both normal and temporary revisions. Temporary
revisions are prefixed, with the letter T.
b. For example, the notation B/04-15-2000 // T1/06-12-2000 indicates that the second
normal revision was issued on April 15, 2000 and the first temporary revision was issued
on June 12, 2000. These dates and revision levels should be the same in the footer of the
respective revision logs.
SUPPLEMENTS
Equipment, which is not covered in Sections 1 through 8 in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook, is
included in Section 9, as applicable.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
1-13
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
USE OF THE TERMS WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
The following conventions will be used for the terms, Warning, Caution, and Note.
WARNING
The use of a Warning symbol means that information which follows is of
critical importance and concerns procedures and techniques which could
cause or result in personal injury or death if not carefully followed.
CAUTION
The use of a Caution symbol means that information which follows is of
significant importance and concerns procedures and techniques which could
cause or result in damage to the airplane and/or its equipment if not
carefully followed.
NOTE
The use of the term “NOTE” means the information that follows is essential
to emphasize.
MEANING OF SHALL, WILL, SHOULD, AND MAY
The words shall and will are used to denote a mandatory requirement. The word should denotes
something that is recommended but not mandatory. The word may is permissive in nature and
suggests something that is optional.
MEANING OF LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE OR PRACTICABLE
The use of these two terms relates to the urgency of the situation. When it is suggested to land as
soon as possible, this means to land at the nearest suitable airfield after considering weather
conditions, ambient lighting, approach facilities, and landing requirements. When it is suggested
to land as soon as practicable, this means that the flight may be continued to an airport with
superior facilities, including maintenance support, and weather conditions.
CONVERSION CHARTS
On the following pages are a series of charts and graphs for conversion to and from U.S. weights
and measures to metric and imperial equivalents. The charts and graphs are included to help
pilots who live in countries other than the United States or pilots from the United States who are
traveling to or within other countries.
RA050001
1-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
KILOGRAMS AND POUNDS
CONVERTING KILOGRAMS TO POUNDS
Kilograms
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2.205
4.409
6.614
8.818
11.023
13.228
15.432
17.637
19.842
10
22.046
24.251
26.455
28.660
30.865
33.069
35.274
37.479
39.683
41.888
20
44.092
46.297
48.502
50.706
52.911
55.116
57.320
59.525
61.729
63.934
30
66.139
68.343
70.548
72.753
74.957
77.162
79.366
81.571
83.776
85.980
40
88.185
90.390
92.594
94.799
97.003
99.208
101.413 103.617 105.822 108.026
50
110.231 112.436 114.640 116.845 119.050 121.254 123.459 125.663 127.868 130.073
60
132.277 134.482 136.687 138.891 141.096 143.300 145.505 147.710 149.914 152.119
70
154.324 156.528 158.733 160.937 163.142 165.347 167.551 169.756 171.961 174.165
80
176.370 178.574 180.779 182.984 185.188 187.393 189.597 191.802 194.007 196.211
90
198.416 200.621 202.825 205.030 207.234 209.439 211.644 213.848 216.053 218.258
100
220.462 222.667 224.871 227.076 229.281 231.485 233.690 235.895 238.099 240.304
Example: Convert 76 kilograms to pounds. Locate the 70 row in the first column and then move right, horizontally to
Column No. 6 and read the solution, 167.551 pounds.
(Figure 1-2)
CONVERTING POUNDS TO KILOGRAMS
Pounds
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0.454
0.907
1.361
1.814
2.268
2.722
3.175
3.629
4.082
10
4.536
4.990
5.443
5.897
6.350
6.804
7.257
7.711
8.165
8.618
20
9.072
9.525
9.979
10.433
10.886
11.340
11.793
12.247
12.701
13.154
30
13.608
14.061
14.515
14.969
15.422
15.876
16.329
16.783
17.236
17.690
40
18.144
18.597
19.051
19.504
19.958
20.412
20.865
21.319
21.772
22.226
50
22.680
23.133
23.587
24.040
24.494
24.948
25.401
25.855
26.308
26.762
60
27.216
27.669
28.123
28.576
29.030
29.483
29.937
30.391
30.844
31.298
70
31.751
32.205
32.659
33.112
33.566
34.019
34.473
34.927
35.380
35.834
80
36.287
36.741
37.195
37.648
38.102
38.555
39.009
39.463
39.916
40.370
90
40.823
41.277
41.730
42.184
42.638
43.091
43.545
43.998
44.452
44.906
100
45.359
45.813
46.266
46.720
47.174
47.627
48.081
48.534
48.988
49.442
Example: Convert 40 pounds to kilograms. Locate the 40 row in the first column and then move right one column to
Column No. 0 and read the solution, 18.144 kilograms.
(Figure 1-3)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
1-15
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
FEET AND METERS
CONVERTING METERS TO FEET
Meters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.281
6.562
9.843
13.123
16.404
19.685
22.966
26.247
29.528
10
32.808
36.089
39.370
42.651
45.932
49.213
52.493
55.774
59.055
62.336
20
65.617
68.898
72.178
75.459
78.740
82.021
85.302
88.583
91.864
95.144
30
98.425
101.706 104.987 108.268 111.549 114.829 118.110 121.391 124.672 127.953
40
131.234 134.514 137.795 141.076 144.357 147.638 150.919 154.199 157.480 160.761
50
164.042 167.323 170.604 173.885 177.165 180.446 183.727 187.008 190.289 193.570
60
196.850 200.131 203.412 206.693 209.974 213.255 216.535 219.816 223.097 226.378
70
229.659 232.940 236.220 239.501 242.782 246.063 249.344 252.625 255.906 259.186
80
262.467 265.748 269.029 272.310 275.591 278.871 282.152 285.433 288.714 291.995
90
295.276 298.556 301.837 305.118 308.399 311.680 314.961 318.241 321.522 324.803
100
328.084 331.365 334.646 337.927 341.207 344.488 347.769 351.050 354.331 357.612
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-4)
CONVERTING FEET TO METERS
Feet
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0.305
0.610
0.914
1.219
1.524
1.829
2.134
2.438
2.743
10
3.048
3.353
3.658
3.962
4.267
4.572
4.877
5.182
5.486
5.791
20
6.096
6.401
6.706
7.010
7.315
7.620
7.925
8.230
8.534
8.839
30
9.144
9.449
9.754
10.058
10.363
10.668
10.973
11.278
11.582
11.887
40
12.192
12.497
12.802
13.106
13.411
13.716
14.021
14.326
14.630
14.935
50
15.240
15.545
15.850
16.154
16.459
16.764
17.069
17.374
17.678
17.983
60
18.288
18.593
18.898
19.202
19.507
19.812
20.117
20.422
20.726
21.031
70
21.336
21.641
21.946
22.250
22.555
22.860
23.165
23.470
23.774
24.079
80
24.384
24.689
24.994
25.298
25.603
25.908
26.213
26.518
26.822
27.127
90
27.432
27.737
28.042
28.346
28.651
28.956
29.261
29.566
29.870
30.175
100
30.480
30.785
31.090
31.394
31.699
32.004
32.309
32.614
32.918
33.223
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-5)
RA050001
1-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INCHES AND CENTIMETERS
CONVERTING CENTIMETERS TO INCHES
Centimeters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0.394
0.787
1.181
1.575
1.969
2.362
2.756
3.150
3.543
10
3.937
4.331
4.724
5.118
5.512
5.906
6.299
6.693
7.087
7.480
20
7.874
8.268
8.661
9.055
9.449
9.843
10.236
10.630
11.024
11.417
30
11.811
12.205
12.598
12.992
13.386
13.780
14.173
14.567
14.961
15.354
40
15.748
16.142
16.535
16.929
17.323
17.717
18.110
18.504
18.898
19.291
50
19.685
20.079
20.472
20.866
21.260
21.654
22.047
22.441
22.835
23.228
60
23.622
24.016
24.409
24.803
25.197
25.591
25.984
26.378
26.772
27.165
70
27.559
27.953
28.346
28.740
29.134
29.528
29.921
30.315
30.709
31.102
80
31.496
31.890
32.283
32.677
33.071
33.465
33.858
34.252
34.646
35.039
90
35.433
35.827
36.220
36.614
37.008
37.402
37.795
38.189
38.583
38.976
100
39.370
39.764
40.157
40.551
40.945
41.339
41.732
42.126
42.520
42.913
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-6)
CONVERTING INCHES TO CENTIMETERS
Inches
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2.54
5.08
7.62
10.16
12.70
15.24
17.78
20.32
22.86
10
25.40
27.94
30.48
33.02
35.56
38.10
40.64
43.18
45.72
48.26
20
50.80
53.34
55.88
58.42
60.96
63.50
66.04
68.58
71.12
73.66
30
76.20
78.74
81.28
83.82
86.36
88.90
91.44
93.98
96.52
99.06
40
101.60
104.14
106.68
109.22
111.76
114.30
116.84
119.38
121.92
124.46
50
127.00
129.54
132.08
134.62
137.16
139.70
142.24
144.78
147.32
149.86
60
152.40
154.94
157.48
160.02
162.56
165.10
167.64
170.18
172.72
175.26
70
177.80
180.34
182.88
185.42
187.96
190.50
193.04
195.58
198.12
200.66
80
203.20
205.74
208.28
210.82
213.36
215.90
218.44
220.98
223.52
226.06
90
228.60
231.14
233.68
236.22
238.76
241.30
243.84
246.38
248.92
251.46
100
254.00
256.54
259.08
261.62
264.16
266.70
269.24
271.78
274.32
276.86
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-7)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
1-17
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NAUTICAL MILES, STATUTE MILES, AND KILOMETERS
Nautical
Miles
Statute
Miles
Kilo- Nautical Statute
Kilo- Nautical Statute Kilometers
Miles
Miles meters
Miles
Miles meters
5
6
9
175
202
324
345
397
639
10
12
19
180
207
333
350
403
648
15
17
28
185
213
343
355
409
657
20
23
37
190
219
352
360
415
667
25
29
46
195
225
361
365
420
676
30
35
56
200
230
370
370
426
685
35
40
65
205
236
380
375
432
695
40
46
74
210
242
389
380
438
704
45
52
83
215
248
398
385
443
713
50
58
93
220
253
407
390
449
722
55
63
102
225
259
417
395
455
732
60
69
111
230
265
426
400
461
741
65
75
120
235
271
435
405
466
750
70
81
130
240
276
444
410
472
759
75
86
139
245
282
454
415
478
769
80
92
148
250
288
463
420
484
778
85
98
157
255
294
472
425
489
787
90
104
167
260
299
482
430
495
796
95
109
176
265
305
491
435
501
806
100
115
185
270
311
500
440
507
815
105
121
194
275
317
509
445
512
824
110
127
204
280
322
519
450
518
833
115
132
213
285
328
528
455
524
843
120
138
222
290
334
537
460
530
852
125
144
232
295
340
546
465
535
861
130
150
241
300
345
556
470
541
870
135
155
250
305
351
565
475
547
880
140
161
259
310
357
574
480
553
889
145
167
269
315
363
583
485
559
898
150
173
278
320
369
593
490
564
907
155
178
287
325
374
602
495
570
917
160
184
296
330
380
611
500
576
926
165
190
306
335
386
620
505
582
935
170
196
315
340
392
630
510
587
945
(Figure 1-8)
RA050001
1-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LITERS, IMPERIAL GALLONS, AND U.S. GALLONS
CONVERTING LITERS TO IMPERIAL GALLONS
Liters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0.22
0.44
0.66
0.88
1.10
1.32
1.54
1.76
1.98
10
2.20
2.42
2.64
2.86
3.08
3.30
3.52
3.74
3.96
4.18
20
4.40
4.62
4.84
5.06
5.28
5.50
5.72
5.94
6.16
6.38
30
6.60
6.82
7.04
7.26
7.48
7.70
7.92
8.14
8.36
8.58
40
8.80
9.02
9.24
9.46
9.68
9.90
10.12
10.34
10.56
10.78
50
11.00
11.22
11.44
11.66
11.88
12.10
12.32
12.54
12.76
12.98
60
13.20
13.42
13.64
13.86
14.08
14.30
14.52
14.74
14.96
15.18
70
15.40
15.62
15.84
16.06
16.28
16.50
16.72
16.94
17.16
17.38
80
17.60
17.82
18.04
18.26
18.48
18.70
18.92
19.14
19.36
19.58
90
19.80
20.02
20.24
20.46
20.68
20.90
21.12
21.34
21.56
21.78
100
22.00
22.22
22.44
22.66
22.88
23.10
23.32
23.54
23.76
23.98
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-9)
CONVERTING IMPERIAL GALLONS TO LITERS
Imperial
Gallons
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0.00
4.55
9.09
13.64
18.18
22.73
27.28
31.82
36.37
40.91
10
45.46
50.01
54.55
59.10
63.64
68.19
72.74
77.28
81.83
86.37
20
90.92
95.47
100.01
104.56
109.10
113.65
118.20
122.74
127.29
131.83
30
136.38
140.93
145.47
150.02
154.56
159.11
163.66
168.20
172.75
177.29
40
181.84
186.39
190.93
195.48
200.02
204.57
209.12
213.66
218.21
222.75
50
227.30
231.85
236.39
240.94
245.48
250.03
254.58
259.12
263.67
268.21
60
272.76
277.31
281.85
286.40
290.94
295.49
300.04
304.58
309.13
313.67
70
318.22
322.77
327.31
331.86
336.40
340.95
345.50
350.04
354.59
359.13
80
363.68
368.23
372.77
377.32
381.86
386.41
390.96
395.50
400.05
404.59
90
409.14
413.69
418.23
422.78
427.32
431.87
436.42
440.96
445.51
450.05
100
454.60
459.15
463.69
468.24
472.78
477.33
481.88
486.42
490.97
495.51
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-10)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-19
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CONVERTING LITERS TO U.S. GALLONS
Liters
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0.00
0.26
0.53
0.79
1.06
1.32
1.59
1.85
2.11
2.38
10
2.64
2.91
3.17
3.43
3.70
3.96
4.23
4.49
4.76
5.02
20
5.28
5.55
5.81
6.08
6.34
6.60
6.87
7.13
7.40
7.66
30
7.93
8.19
8.45
8.72
8.98
9.25
9.51
9.77
10.04
10.30
40
10.57
10.83
11.10
11.36
11.62
11.89
12.15
12.42
12.68
12.94
50
13.21
13.47
13.74
14.00
14.27
14.53
14.79
15.06
15.32
15.59
60
15.85
16.11
16.38
16.64
16.91
17.17
17.44
17.70
17.96
18.23
70
18.49
18.76
19.02
19.28
19.55
19.81
20.08
20.34
20.61
20.87
80
21.13
21.40
21.66
21.93
22.19
22.45
22.72
22.98
23.25
23.51
90
23.78
24.04
24.30
24.57
24.83
25.10
25.36
25.62
25.89
26.15
100
26.42
26.68
26.95
27.21
27.47
27.74
28.00
28.27
28.53
28.79
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-11)
CONVERTING U.S. GALLONS TO LITERS
U.S. Gallons
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0.00
3.79
7.57
11.36
15.14
18.93
22.71
26.50
30.28
34.07
10
37.85
41.64
45.42
49.21
52.99
56.78
60.56
64.35
68.13
71.92
20
75.70
79.49
83.27
87.06
90.84
94.63
98.41
102.20
105.98
109.77
30
113.55
117.34
121.12
124.91
128.69
132.48
136.26
140.05
143.83
147.62
40
151.40
155.19
158.97
162.76
166.54
170.33
174.11
177.90
181.68
185.47
50
189.25
193.04
196.82
200.61
204.39
208.18
211.96
215.75
219.53
223.32
60
227.10
230.89
234.67
238.46
242.24
246.03
249.81
253.60
257.38
261.17
70
264.95
268.74
272.52
276.31
280.09
283.88
287.66
291.45
295.23
299.02
80
302.80
306.59
310.37
314.16
317.94
321.73
325.51
329.30
333.08
336.87
90
340.65
344.44
348.22
352.01
355.79
359.58
363.36
367.15
370.93
374.72
100
378.50
382.29
386.07
389.86
393.64
397.43
401.21
405.00
408.78
412.57
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-12)
RA050001
1-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CONVERTING IMPERIAL GALLONS TO U.S. GALLONS
Imperial
Gallons
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0.00
1.20
2.40
3.60
4.80
6.01
7.21
8.41
9.61
10.81
10
12.01
13.21
14.41
15.61
16.81
18.02
19.22
20.42
21.62
22.82
20
24.02
25.22
26.42
27.62
28.82
30.03
31.23
32.43
33.63
34.83
30
36.03
37.23
38.43
39.63
40.83
42.04
43.24
44.44
45.64
46.84
40
48.04
49.24
50.44
51.64
52.84
54.05
55.25
56.45
57.65
58.85
50
60.05
61.25
62.45
63.65
64.85
66.06
67.26
68.46
69.66
70.86
60
72.06
73.26
74.46
75.66
76.86
78.07
79.27
80.47
81.67
82.87
70
84.07
85.27
86.47
87.67
88.87
90.08
91.28
92.48
93.68
94.88
80
96.08
97.28
98.48
99.68
100.88
102.09
103.29
104.49
105.69
106.89
90
108.09
109.29
110.49
111.69
112.89
114.10
115.30
116.50
117.70
118.90
100
120.10
121.30
122.50
123.70
124.90
126.11
127.31
128.51
129.71
130.91
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-13)
CONVERTING U.S. GALLONS TO IMPERIAL GALLONS
U.S. Gallons
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0.00
0.83
1.67
2.50
3.33
4.16
5.00
5.83
6.66
7.49
10
8.33
9.16
9.99
10.82
11.66
12.49
13.32
14.16
14.99
15.82
20
16.65
17.49
18.32
19.15
19.98
20.82
21.65
22.48
23.32
24.15
30
24.98
25.81
26.65
27.48
28.31
29.14
29.98
30.81
31.64
32.47
40
33.31
34.14
34.97
35.81
36.64
37.47
38.30
39.14
39.97
40.80
50
41.63
42.47
43.30
44.13
44.96
45.80
46.63
47.46
48.30
49.13
60
49.96
50.79
51.63
52.46
53.29
54.12
54.96
55.79
56.62
57.45
70
58.29
59.12
59.95
60.79
61.62
62.45
63.28
64.12
64.95
65.78
80
66.61
67.45
68.28
69.11
69.95
70.78
71.61
72.44
73.28
74.11
90
74.94
75.77
76.61
77.44
78.27
79.10
79.94
80.77
81.60
82.44
100
83.27
84.10
84.93
85.77
86.60
87.43
88.26
89.10
89.93
90.76
Example: Refer to (Figure 1-2) and (Figure 1-3) for examples of how to use these types of tables.
(Figure 1-14)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-21
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIPS (FAHRENHEIT AND CELSIUS)
Fahrenheit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Celsius
-40F
-40C
145F
63C
330F
166C
-35F
-37C
150F
66C
335F
168C
-30F
-34C
155F
68C
340F
171C
-25F
-32C
160F
71C
345F
174C
-20F
-29C
165F
74C
350F
177C
-15F
-26C
170F
77C
355F
179C
-10F
-23C
175F
79C
360F
182C
-5F
-21C
180F
82C
365F
185C
0F
-18C
185F
85C
370F
188C
5F
-15C
190F
88C
375F
191C
10F
-12C
195F
91C
380F
193C
15F
-9C
200F
93C
385F
196C
20F
-7C
205F
96C
390F
199C
25F
-4C
210F
99C
395F
202C
30F
-1C
215F
102C
400F
204C
35F
2C
220F
104C
405F
207C
40F
4C
225F
107C
410F
210C
45F
7C
230F
110C
415F
213C
50F
10C
235F
113C
420F
216C
55F
13C
240F
116C
425F
218C
60F
16C
245F
118C
430F
221C
65F
18C
250F
121C
435F
224C
70F
21C
255F
124C
440F
227C
75F
24C
260F
127C
445F
229C
80F
27C
265F
129C
450F
232C
85F
29C
270F
132C
455F
235C
90F
32C
275F
135C
460F
238C
95F
35C
280F
138C
465F
241C
100F
38C
285F
141C
470F
243C
105F
41C
290F
143C
475F
246C
110F
43C
295F
146C
480F
249C
115F
46C
300F
149C
485F
252C
120F
49C
305F
152C
490F
254C
125F
52C
310F
154C
495F
257C
130F
54C
315F
157C
500F
260C
135F
57C
320F
160C
505F
263C
140F
60C
325F
163C
510F
266C
(Figure 1-15)
RA050001
1-22
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
FUEL WEIGHTS AND CONVERSION RELATIONSHIPS
The table below summarizes the weights and conversion relationships for liters, U.S. Gallons,
and Imperial Gallons. The chart values are only to two decimal places. The table is intended to
provide approximate values for converting from one particular quantity of measurement to
another.
Quantity
Weight Converting To U.S. Converting To
Gallons
Imperial Gallons
Kg. Lbs.
Liters
0.72
1.58
26% of the liter quantity 22% of the liter quantity
Imperial Gallons
3.72
7.2
1.2 times the number of
Imperial Gallons
U.S. Gallons
2.72
6.0
Converting To
Liters
4.55 times the number of
Imperial Gallons
83% of the U.S. Gallon 3.78 times the number of
quantity
U.S. Gallons
(Figure 1-16)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
1-23
Section 1
General
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
1-24
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 2
Limitations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 2-3
LIMITATIONS............................................................................................................................ 2-4
Airspeed Limitation ............................................................................................................... 2-4
Airspeed Indicator Markings ................................................................................................. 2-4
Powerplant Limitations.......................................................................................................... 2-4
Powerplant Fuel and Oil Data ............................................................................................... 2-5
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Average Temperature Ranges........................... 2-5
Oil Temperature............................................................................................................... 2-5
Oil Pressure...................................................................................................................... 2-5
Approved Fuel Grades..................................................................................................... 2-5
Fuel Flow and Fuel Pressure ........................................................................................... 2-5
Powerplant Instrument Markings .......................................................................................... 2-5
Propeller Data and Limitations.............................................................................................. 2-6
Propeller Diameters ......................................................................................................... 2-6
Propeller Blade Angles at 30 inches Station Pressure..................................................... 2-6
Power Setting Limitations ..................................................................................................... 2-6
Weight Limits ........................................................................................................................ 2-6
Other Weight Limitations ...................................................................................................... 2-6
Center of Gravity Limits........................................................................................................ 2-6
Center of Gravity Table ......................................................................................................... 2-7
Maneuvering Limits............................................................................................................... 2-7
Utility Category ............................................................................................................... 2-7
Approved Acrobatic Maneuvers............................................................................................ 2-7
Spins ...................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Flight Load Factor Limits...................................................................................................... 2-8
Utility Category ............................................................................................................... 2-8
Kinds of Operation Limits and Pilot Requirements .............................................................. 2-8
Icing Conditions .................................................................................................................... 2-8
Fuel Limitations..................................................................................................................... 2-8
Electronic Display Limitations .............................................................................................. 2-8
Other Limitations................................................................................................................... 2-8
Altitude ............................................................................................................................ 2-8
Flap Limitations............................................................................................................... 2-8
Passenger Seating Capacity ............................................................................................. 2-8
Rudder Limiter................................................................................................................. 2-9
PLACARDS .............................................................................................................................. 2-10
General................................................................................................................................. 2-10
Interior Placards................................................................................................................... 2-10
Exterior Placards.................................................................................................................. 2-15
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
2-1
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
2-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 2
Limitations
INTRODUCTION
Section 2 contains the operating limitations of this airplane. The Federal Aviation Agency
approves the limitations included in this Section. These include operating limitations, instrument
markings, and basic placards necessary for the safe operation of the airplane, the airplane's
engine, the airplane's standard systems, and the airplane’s standard equipment.
NOTE
This section covers limitations associated with the standard systems and
equipment in the airplane. Refer to Section 9 for amended operating
procedures, limitations, and related performance data.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
RA050001
2-3
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
LIMITATIONS
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
The airspeed limitations below are based on the maximum gross takeoff weight of 3400 lbs
(1542 kg). The maximum operating maneuvering speeds (VO) and applicable gross weight
limitations are shown in (Figure 2-1).
SPEED
KCAS KIAS
Max. Operating Maneuvering Speed
VO
VFE
Do not apply full or abrupt control movements
above this speed.
2500 Pounds Gross Weight
128
127
3400 Pounds Gross Weight
149
148
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
(Down or 40O Flap Setting)
120
119
Do not exceed this speed with full flaps. Takeoff
flaps can be extended at 130 KCAS (129 KIAS).
180*
179*
Do not exceed this speed except in smooth air and
then only with caution.
235*
235*
Do not exceed this speed in any operation.
Max. Structural Cruising Speed
VNO
REMARKS
*Decrease 4 knots for each 1000-ft
above 12,000 feet (Press. Alt.)
Never Exceed Speed
VNE
*Decrease 5 knots for each 1000-ft
above 12,000 feet (Press. Alt.)
(Figure 2-1)
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
The outer circumference of the airspeed indicator has four colored arcs. The meaning and range
of each arc is tabulated in (Figure 2-2).
MARKING
KIAS VALUE
OR RANGE
SIGNIFICANCE
White Arc
57 - 119
Full Flap Operating Range - Lower limit is maximum weight stalling speed
in the landing configuration. Upper limit is maximum speed permissible
with flaps extended.
Green Arc
71 - 179
Normal Operating Range - Lower limit is maximum weight stalling speed
with flaps retracted. Upper limit is maximum structural cruising speed.
Yellow Arc
179 – 235
Red Line
235
Operations must be conducted with caution and only in smooth air.
Maximum speed for all operations
(Figure 2-2)
POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
Number of Engines: One (1)
Engine Manufacturer: Teledyne Continental
Engine Model Number: IO-550-N
Recommended Time Between Overhaul: 2000 Hours (Time in Service)
Maximum Power: 310 BHP at 2700 RPM
Maximum Manifold Pressure: Full power at sea level
Maximum Recommended Cruise: 248 BHP (80%)
Maximum Cylinder Head Temperature: 460°F (238°C)
RA050001
2-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
POWERPLANT FUEL AND OIL DATA
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Average Air Temperature Ranges
Below 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 30, 10W30, 15W50, or 20W50
Above 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE50, 15W50, 20W/50, or 20W60
Oil Temperature
Maximum Allowable: 240ºF (116°C)
Recommended takeoff minimum: 100°F (38°C)
Recommended flight operations: 170°F to 200°F (77°C to 93°C)
Oil Pressures
Normal Operations: 30-60 psi (pounds per square inch)
Idle, minimum: 10 psi
Maximum allowable (cold oil): 100 psi
Approved Fuel Grades
100LL Grade Aviation Fuel (Blue)
100 Grade Aviation Fuel (Green)
Fuel Flow and Fuel Pressure
Normal Operations: 10 to 22 GPH (38 to 83 LPH) (7 to 16 psi)
Idle, minimum: 1 to 2 GPH (3.8 to 7.6 LPH) (4 psi)
Maximum allowable: 28 GPH (106 LPH) (22 psi)
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
The following table (Figure 2-3) shows applicable color-coded ranges for the various powerplant
instruments within the aircraft.
INSTRUMENT
Tachometer
RED LINE
GREEN ARC
RED LINE
Minimum Limit
Normal Operating
Limit
Minimum for idle
600 RPM*
2000 – 2700 RPM
2700 RPM
18 – 28 Inches Hg.
(No Placard)
Manifold Pressure
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Fuel Quantity
Minimum for takeoff 100ºF* (38°C)
170ºF – 200ºF
(77°C – 93°C)
30ºF to 100ºF
(-1°C to 38°C)
240ºF to 250ºF
(116°C to 121°C)
Minimum for idle 10 psi
30 - 60 psi
100 psi *
(Cold Oil)
10 – 22 GPH
(38 – 83 LPH)
4 – 14 psi*
28 GPH (106 LPH)
(22 psi)
240ºF – 460ºF
(116°C – 238°C)
460ºF (238°C)
A red line below “E” or “zero” indicates
the remaining four gallons in each tank
cannot be used safely in flight.
Fuel Pressure/Fuel Flow
Cylinder Head Temperature
4.5 – 5.2
Inches Hg.
Vacuum
* These temperatures or pressures are not marked on the gauge. However, it is important information that the pilot
must be aware of.
(Figure 2-3)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
2-5
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PROPELLER DATA AND LIMITATIONS
Number of Propellers: 1
Propeller Manufacture: Hartzell
Propeller Hub and Blade Model Numbers: PHC-J3YF-IRF and F7691D-1
Propeller Diameters
Minimum: 76 in. (193 cm)
Maximum: 77 in. (196 cm)
Propeller Blade Angle at 30 inch Station Pressure
Low: 14.1° (± 0.2º)
High: 34.7° (± 1.0º)
POWER SETTING LIMITATIONS
Do not exceed 20 inches of Hg. of manifold pressure below 2200 RPM. This requirement is not
an engine limitation, but rather a harmonic condition inherent in the Columbia 300 (LC40550FG).
WEIGHT LIMITS
Maximum Ramp Weight:
Maximum Empty Weight:
Maximum Takeoff Weight:
Maximum Landing Weight:
Maximum Baggage Weight:*
Utility Category
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
2568 lbs. (1165 kg)
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
3230 lbs. (1465 kg)
3120 lbs. (54.4 kg)
*The baggage compartment has two areas, the main area and the hat rack area. The combined
weight in these areas cannot exceed 120 pounds (54.4 kg). The main area is centered at station
166.6 with maximum weight allowance of 120 pounds (54.4 kg). The hat rack area, which is
centered at station 199.8, has a maximum weight allowance of 20 pounds (9.1 kg). When loading
baggage in the main baggage compartment, Zone A (the forward portion of the main baggage
area) must always be loaded first. See page 6-13 for diagram of loading stations and baggage
zones.
OTHER WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
TYPE OF WEIGHT
FORWARD DATUM
POINT AND WEIGHT
AFT DATUM POINT
AND WEIGHT
VARIATION
Minimum Flying Weight
103 inches and 2240 lbs.
110 inches and 2500 lbs.
Straight Line
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
103 inches and 2725 lbs.
110 inches and 3228 lbs.
Straight Line
LIMITATION
Reference Datum: The reference datum is located near the tip of the propeller spinner. As distance
from the datum increases, there is an increase in weight for each of the two limitation categories.
The variation is linear or straight line from the fore to the aft positions.
(Figure 2-4)
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS
(Figure 2-5) specifies the center of gravity limits for utility category operations. The variation
along the arm between the forward and aft datum points is linear or straight line. The straightline variation means that at any given point along the arm, an increase in moments changes
directly according to the variations in weight and distance from the datum.
RA050001
2-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CENTER OF GRAVITY TABLE
CATEGORY
FORWARD DATUM
POINT AND WEIGHT
AFT DATUM POINT
AND WEIGHT
103 inches
110 inches
2240 to 2500 lbs.
2500 to 3400 lbs.
Utility Category
VARIATION
Straight Line
Reference Datum: The reference datum is located at the tip of the propeller spinner. This location
causes all arm distances and moments (the product of arm and weight) to be positive values.
(Figure 2-5)
MANEUVER LIMITS
Utility Category – This airplane is certified in the utility category. Only the acrobatic
maneuvers shown in (Figure 2-6) are approved.
APPROVED ACROBATIC MANEUVERS
MANEUVER
ENTRY SPEED
Chandelles
150 KIAS
Lazy Eights
150 KIAS
Steep Turns
150 KIAS
Stalls
Slow Deceleration*
*
Ensure that maximum fuel imbalance
does not exceed 10 gallons (38 L).
SPINS PROHIBITED
(Figure 2-6)
While there are no limitations to the performance of the acrobatic maneuvers listed in (Figure 26), it is recommended that the pilot not exceed 60º of bank since this will improve the service life
of the gyros. Also, it is important to remember that the airplane accelerates quite rapidly in a
nose down attitude, such as when performing a lazy eight.
SPINS
The airplane, as certified by the Federal Aviation Agency, is not approved for spins of any
duration. During the flight test phase of the airplane’s certification, spins and/or spin recovery
techniques were not performed or demonstrated. It is not known if the airplane will recover from
a spin.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
2-7
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
WARNING
Do not attempt to spin the airplane under any circumstances. The airplane,
as certified by the Federal Aviation Agency, is not approved for spins of any
duration. During the flight test phase of the airplane’s certification, spins
were not performed. It is not known if the airplane will recover from a spin.
FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS
Utility Category - Maximum flight load factors for all weights are:
Flaps Position
Up (Cruise Position)
Down (Landing Position)
Max. Load Factor
+4.4g and -1.76g
+2.0g and -0.0g
KINDS OF OPERATION LIMITS AND PILOT REQUIREMENTS
The airplane has the necessary equipment available and is certified for daytime and nighttime
VFR and IFR operations with only one pilot. The operational minimum equipment and
instrumentation for the kinds of operation are detailed in Part 91 of the FAR’s. (U.S. operating
rules do not apply in Canada.)
ICING CONDITIONS
Flight into known icing is prohibited.
FUEL LIMITATIONS
Total Capacity: 106 US Gallons (401 L)
Total Capacity Each tank: 53 US Gallons (201 L)
Total Usable Fuel: 49 US Gallons (186 L)/in each tank (98 US Gallons (371 L) Total)
Maximum Fuel Imbalance: 10 US gallons (38 L) between left and right fuel tanks
ELECTRONIC DISPLAY LIMITATIONS
The MX20 is Limited to VFR Navigation Only. The information currently displayed on the
MX20 is approved only to enhance situational awareness and aid in VFR navigation. It is not
certified for use as an IFR instrument. All IFR navigation and IFR operations will be conducted
by primary reference to the primary flight instruments, primary navigation systems and displays,
and current and approved IFR charts. The MX20 can be operating and can be referenced during
IFR conditions to facilitate situational awareness, but it should not be used as an IFR navigation
tool. This limitation is not intended to restrict the pilot from using the MX20 as necessary in
dealing with an unsafe situation. The pilot should always use the best information available to
make timely safety-of-flight decisions.
OTHER LIMITATIONS
Altitude – The maximum flight altitude is 18,000 MSL with an FAA approved oxygen
installation and 14,000 MSL without oxygen installed. See FAR Part 91 for applicable oxygen
requirements.
Flap Limitations
Approved Takeoff Range: 12°
Approved Landing Range: 12° and 40°
Passenger Seating Capacity – The maximum passenger seating configuration is four persons.
RA050001
2-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 2
Limitations
Rudder Limiter - If the rudder limiter is found to be inoperative during the preflight inspection,
the problem must be corrected before flying the airplane. If the rudder limiter becomes
inoperative or malfunctions during flight, then a landing must be made as soon as possible or
practicable depending on the problem. In an emergency situation, with the rudder limiter
permanently engaged, the airplane is limited to a maximum right crosswind component of six
knots. Please see page 3-18 for a discussion of the applicable emergency procedures. Continuous
operation of the rudder limiter must not exceed a 15% duty cycle. For more information on stalls
and the stall warning system, please refer to pages 4-24 and 7-47, respectively.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
2-9
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PLACARDS
GENERAL
Federal Aviation Regulations require that a number of different placards be prominently
displayed on the interior and exterior of the airplane. The placards contain information about the
airplane and its operation that is of significant importance. The placard is placed in a location
proximate to the item it describes. For example, the fuel capacity placard is near the tank filler
caps. The placards and their locations are shown on the following pages as they appear on the
interior and exterior of the airplane.
INTERIOR PLACARDS
On Center Console Below Radios
FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATED UNDER CO-PILOT'S SEAT
The markings and placards installed in this
airplane contain operating limitations which
must be complied with when operating this
airplane in the Utility category. Other operating
limitations which must be complied with when
operating this airplane in this category are
contained in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Utility Category – No acrobatic maneuvers
approved, except those listed in the Pilot's
Operating Handbook.
FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING PROHIBITED.
SPINS PROHIBITED.
APPROVED FOR DAY/NIGHT – VFR/IFR.
NO SMOKING
Near Pilot and Copilot Door Handles
RA050001
2-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Near Door Handle on Passenger Side
On Bottom of Baggage Compartment Door
On The Front of the Pilot’s Seat Base Near Crash Ax
In Aft Cabin on Aft Baggage Bulkhead
Under Left Rear Seat Next to Leveling Washer
Under All Seats
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
RA050001
2-11
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Parking Brake Handle
Near Airspeed Indicator
Near Airspeed Indicator
Near Manifold Pressure Gauge
DO NOT EXCEED 20”
MANIFOLD PRESSURE
BELOW 2200 RPM
RA050001
2-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Magnetic Compass
OR
The magnetic direction indicator is calibrated for level flight with the engine, radios, and strobes
operating.
Above Copilots Fresh Air Vent
Near the Left Dimmer Switch on the Pilot’s Knee Bolster
On the Back Lower Portion of the Front Seat Headrests
(Embroidered into the leather with red stitching)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
RA050001
2-13
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Forward Portion of Front Seat Center Armrest Near Fuel Selector
OFF
LIFT AND TURN
On Engine Instrument Panel Above Fuel Gauge
MAXIMUM FUEL IMBALANCE NOT TO EXCEED 10 GAL
On Engine Instrument Panel Near EGT/CHT
(when optional JPI digital engine scanner is installed)
MAX
CHT
460°F
RA050001
2-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EXTERIOR PLACARDS
On Oil Filler Access Door
OR
Near Pilot and Passenger Door Handles
On Main Wheel Fairing
On Nose Wheel Fairings
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
RA050001
2-15
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Flaps Near Wing Root (Both Sides)
Near Fill Cap Of Fuel Tank
OR
Under Each Wing Near Fuel Drains
FOR DRAINING OF WING FUEL SUMP:
TO OPEN: PRESS CUP GENTLY INTO BOTTOM OF VALVE TO
DRAIN REQUIRED AMOUNT OF FUEL.
TO CLOSE: REMOVE CUP AND VALVE WILL CLOSE.
TO DRAIN WING TANKS: REFER TO MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
RA050001
2-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Exterior of Gascolator Door (Underside of Fuselage)
On Interior of Gascolator
On Left Side Wing Fillet
(when optional ground power plug is installed)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
RA050001
2-17
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Exterior of Fuselage – Forward of Wing on Pilot’s Side
RA050001
2-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
On Exterior of Fuselage – Forward of Wing on Copilot’s Side
On Top of Nose Wheel Fairing – (Pointing Aft)
MAX TURN LIMIT
On Forward Portion of Nose Gear Fairing
TURN LIMIT
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
RA050001
2-19
Section 2
Limitations
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
2-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
Airspeeds For Emergency Operations .................................................................................... 3-3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS ........................................................................ 3-4
Engine Failure During Takeoff.............................................................................................. 3-4
Engine Failure Immediately After Takeoff (Below 400 feet AGL) ...................................... 3-4
Engine Failure During Climb to Cruise Altitude (Above 400 feet AGL) ............................. 3-4
Engine Failure During Flight................................................................................................. 3-4
Engine Failure During Descent (Fuel Annunciator Illuminated) .......................................... 3-4
Procedures After an Engine Restart....................................................................................... 3-5
Emergency Landing Without Engine Power ......................................................................... 3-5
Emergency Landing With Throttle Stuck at Idle Power ....................................................... 3-6
Precautionary Landing With Engine Power .......................................................................... 3-6
Ditching ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Engine Fires On The Ground During Startup........................................................................ 3-7
In-Flight Engine Fire ............................................................................................................. 3-8
In-Flight Electrical Fire ......................................................................................................... 3-8
In-Flight Cabin Fire (Fuel/Hydraulic Fluid).......................................................................... 3-8
In-Flight Wing Fire................................................................................................................ 3-8
Inadvertent Icing ................................................................................................................... 3-9
Landing With Flat Main Tire ................................................................................................ 3-9
Landing With Flat Nose Tire................................................................................................. 3-9
Electrical System Overcharging ............................................................................................ 3-9
Electrical System Discharging............................................................................................. 3-10
Complete Electrical Failure ................................................................................................. 3-10
Rudder Limiter Malfunction................................................................................................ 3-11
Rudder Limiter Failure ........................................................................................................ 3-11
Runaway Trim ..................................................................................................................... 3-11
Partial Restoration of Disabled Trim System ...................................................................... 3-11
Broken or Stuck Throttle Cable........................................................................................... 3-12
Something Stuck in or Interfering With a Doorjamb .......................................................... 3-12
Evacuating the Airplane ...................................................................................................... 3-12
Circuit Breaker Panel........................................................................................................... 3-13
AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 3-14
Engine Failure and Forced Landing .................................................................................... 3-14
General........................................................................................................................... 3-14
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Below 400 feet AGL) ................................................... 3-14
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Above 400 feet AGL) ................................................... 3-14
In-Flight Engine Failure ................................................................................................ 3-14
Best Glide Speed Versus Minimum Rate of Descent.................................................... 3-14
Emergency Backup Boost Pump ................................................................................... 3-15
Critical Issues (Backup Boost Pump) ............................................................................ 3-15
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
3-1
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Engine Restarts .............................................................................................................. 3-16
Engine Does Not Restart................................................................................................ 3-16
Forced Landing with the Throttle Stuck in the Idle Position......................................... 3-17
Stuck Throttle with Enough Power to Sustain Flight .................................................... 3-17
Flight Controls Malfunction................................................................................................. 3-17
General ........................................................................................................................... 3-17
Aileron or Rudder Failure .............................................................................................. 3-17
Elevator Failure.............................................................................................................. 3-17
Trim Tab Malfunctions ........................................................................................................ 3-18
Rudder Limiter Failure or Malfunction ............................................................................... 3-18
General ........................................................................................................................... 3-18
Failure ............................................................................................................................ 3-18
Malfunction .................................................................................................................... 3-19
Total Electrical Failure................................................................................................... 3-19
Fires...................................................................................................................................... 3-19
General ........................................................................................................................... 3-19
Engine Fires ................................................................................................................... 3-19
Cabin Fires ..................................................................................................................... 3-19
Lightning Strike ................................................................................................................... 3-20
Engine and Propeller Problems............................................................................................ 3-20
Engine Roughness.......................................................................................................... 3-20
High Cylinder Head Temperatures ................................................................................ 3-20
High Oil Temperature .................................................................................................... 3-20
Low Oil Pressure............................................................................................................ 3-21
Failure of Engine Driven Fuel Pump ............................................................................. 3-21
Propeller Surging or Wandering .................................................................................... 3-21
Electrical Problems .............................................................................................................. 3-22
Under Voltage ................................................................................................................ 3-22
Alternator Failure........................................................................................................... 3-22
Load Shedding ............................................................................................................... 3-22
Over Voltage .................................................................................................................. 3-22
Complete Electrical Failure ................................................................................................. 3-23
General ........................................................................................................................... 3-23
Items Available Using the Standby Battery................................................................... 3-23
Items Not Available Using the Standby Battery............................................................ 3-24
Special Issues (Standby Battery).................................................................................... 3-24
Static Source Blockage ........................................................................................................ 3-25
Vacuum System Failure ....................................................................................................... 3-25
Spins..................................................................................................................................... 3-26
Emergency Exit.................................................................................................................... 3-27
General ........................................................................................................................... 3-27
Doors .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
Seat Belts........................................................................................................................ 3-27
Exiting (Cabin Door(s) Operable).................................................................................. 3-27
Exiting (Cabin Doors Inoperable).................................................................................. 3-27
Inverted Exit Procedures...................................................................................................... 3-27
General ........................................................................................................................... 3-27
Exterior Emergency Exit Release .................................................................................. 3-28
Crash Ax .............................................................................................................................. 3-28
RA050001
3-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
INTRODUCTION
The emergency procedures are included before the normal procedures, as these items have a
higher level of importance. The owner of this handbook is encouraged to copy or otherwise
tabulate the following emergency procedures in a format that is usable under flight conditions.
Plastic laminated pages printed on both sides and bound together are preferable. Such a checklist
is included as part of the airplane’s delivery package. Complete Emergency Procedures
Checklist shall be carried in the aircraft at all times in a location that is easily accessible to the
pilot in command.
Many emergency procedures require immediate action by the pilot in command, and corrective
action must be initiated without direct reference to the emergency checklist. Therefore, the pilot
in command must memorize the appropriate corrective action for these types of emergencies. In
this instance, the Emergency Procedures Checklist is used as a crosscheck to ensure that no items
are excluded and is used only after control of the airplane is established. When the airplane is
under control and the demands of the situation permit, the Emergency Procedures Checklist
should be used to verify that all required actions are completed.
In all emergencies, it is important to communicate with Air Traffic Control (ATC) or the
appropriate controlling entity within radio range. However, communicating is always secondary
to controlling the airplane and should be done, if time and conditions permit, after the essential
elements of handling the emergency are performed.
AIRSPEEDS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS
Engine Failure After Takeoff
Wing Flaps Up (Cruise Position)
Maximum Glide (Flaps Up)
106 KIAS
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
106 KIAS
Wing Flaps Takeoff Position
93 KIAS
2500 lbs. (1134 kg) Gross Weight
94 KIAS
Maneuvering Speed
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Minimum Rate of Descent (Flaps Up)
148 KIAS
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
85 KIAS
2500 lbs. (1134 kg) Gross Weight
127 KIAS
2500 lbs. (1134 kg) Gross Weight
80 KIAS
Precautionary Landing
(With engine power, flaps in the landing
position)
Approach Speed without Power
78 KIAS
Wing Flaps Up (Cruise Position)
Wing Flaps Landing Position
106 KIAS
90 KIAS
(Figure 3-1)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
3-3
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS
ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF
1. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE
2. Brakes ⎯ APPLY STEADY PRESSURE (release momentarily if skidding occurs)
3. Wing Flaps ⎯ IN THE CRUISE POSITION
4. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
5. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
6. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
7. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO OFF
ENGINE FAILURE IMMEDIATELY AFTER TAKEOFF (Below 400 Feet AGL)
1. Airspeed ⎯ 90 KIAS (with flaps in the up position)*
90 KIAS (with flaps in the takeoff position)*
2. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
3. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
5. Wing Flaps ⎯ IN THE LANDING POSITION (If airspeed and height above the ground
permit full extension of flaps. Otherwise, the maximum flap extension practicable should be
used depending on airspeed and height above the ground.)
6. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
*Obtain this airspeed if altitude permits; otherwise lower the nose, maintain current airspeed,
and land straight ahead.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING CLIMB TO CRUISE ALTITUDE (Above 400 Feet AGL)
1. Airspeed ⎯ 106 KIAS (flaps in the up position)
2. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO THE FULLER TANK (See Amplified Discussion.)
3. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO RICH
4. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO FULL OPEN
5. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ CHECK IN ARMED POSITION
5.1. Engine Does Not Restart ⎯ Use Emergency Landing Without Engine Power checklist.
5.2. Engine Restarts ⎯ Use the Procedures After an Engine Restart checklist.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING FLIGHT
1. Airspeed ⎯ 106 KIAS (flaps in the up position)
2. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO THE FULLER TANK (See Amplified Discussion.)
3. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO RICH
4. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO FULL OPEN
5. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ SWITCH SET TO ARMED POSITION
6. Ignition Switch ⎯ VERIFY SET TO BOTH (Proceed to 6.2 or 6.1 as applicable)
6.1. Engine Restarts ⎯ Use the Procedures After an Engine Restart checklist.
6.2. Engine Does Not Restart ⎯ Use Emergency Landing Without Engine Power checklist.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING DESCENT (Fuel Annunciator Illuminated)
1. Airspeed ⎯ 80 to 106 KIAS - See (Figure 3-3)
2. Mixture ⎯ SET TO RICH
3. Throttle ⎯ ADVANCED ABOUT ONE THIRD
4. Fuel Selector ⎯ SWITCH TANKS
RA050001
3-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
5. Vapor Suppression ⎯ SET TO ON
5.1.Engine Restarts ⎯ CLIMB TO SAFE ALTITUDE (Use Procedures After an Engine
Restart checklist.)
5.2.Engine Does Not Restart – Do Steps 6 and 7
6. Throttle ⎯ SET TO FULL OPEN
7. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ SET TO ARMED POSITION
7.1.Engine Restarts ⎯ CLIMB TO SAFE ALTITUDE (Use Procedures After an Engine
Restart checklist.)
7.2.Engine Does Not Restart ⎯ Use Emergency Landing Without Engine Power checklist if
altitude permits.
PROCEDURES AFTER AN ENGINE RESTART
1. Airspeed ⎯ APPROPRIATE TO THE SITUATION
2. Throttle Control ⎯ REDUCE AS REQUIRED
3. Failure Analysis ⎯ DETERMINE CAUSE (Proceed to 3.1 or 3.2 as applicable.)
3.1. Improper Fuel Management ⎯ If the engine failure cause is improper fuel management,
set the backup boost pump to OFF and resume flight.
3.2. Engine Driven Fuel Pump Failure ⎯ If fuel management is correct, failure of the engine
driven fuel pump or a clogged fuel filter is probable. If practicable, reduce power to 75%
or less and land as soon as possible. Do not set the mixture to rich for descent or landing.
Refer to the amplified discussion on page 3-15.
WARNING
If the backup boost pump is in use during an emergency, proper leaning
procedures are important. During the descent and approach to landing
phases of the flight, DO NOT set the mixture to rich as prescribed in the
normal before landing procedures, and avoid closing the throttle completely.
If a balked landing is necessary, coordinate the simultaneous application of
mixture and throttle. Please see amplified discussion on page 3-15.
EMERGENCY LANDING WITHOUT ENGINE POWER
1. Approach Airspeed ⎯ 90 KIAS (Full Flaps or Takeoff Flaps)
2. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
3. Loose objects ⎯ SECURE
4. Backup Boost Pump and Vapor Suppression ⎯ BOTH SET TO OFF
5. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
6. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO OFF
7. Electrical and Avionics Master Switches ⎯ SET TO OFF
8. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
9. Wing Flaps ⎯ AS REQUIRED (Full flaps recommended for landing)
10. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
11. Landing Flare ⎯ INITIATE AT APPROPRIATE POINT TO ARREST DESCENT RATE,
AND TOUCHDOWN AT NORMAL LANDING SPEEDS
12. Stopping ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING
CAUTION
At the forward CG limit, slowing below 80 KIAS prior to the flare, with idle
power and full flaps, will create a situation of limited elevator authority; an
incomplete flare may result.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
3-5
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EMERGENCY LANDING WITH THROTTLE STUCK AT IDLE POWER
1. Approach Airspeed ⎯ 90 KIAS (full flaps or takeoff flaps)
2. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
3. Loose objects ⎯ SECURE
4. Electrical and Avionics Master Switches ⎯ SET TO OFF
5. Backup Boost Pump and Vapor Suppression ⎯ BOTH SET TO OFF
6. Wing Flaps ⎯ AS REQUIRED (full flaps recommended)
7. Engine Shutdown ⎯ DELAY AS LONG AS PRACTICABLE (Then follow steps 8 - 13.)
8. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
9. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO OFF
10. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
11. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
12. Landing Flare ⎯ INITIATE AT APPROPRIATE POINT TO ARREST DESCENT RATE,
AND TOUCH DOWN AT NORMAL LANDING SPEEDS
13. Stopping ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING
WARNING
Two special conditions associated with forced landings are specifically
applicable to the Columbia 300 (and are different from many other General
Aviation airplanes). These differences must be clearly understood.
1. Since the trim tabs are electrically operated, setting the master switch to
OFF should be delayed until the pilot is certain that further use of the
trim, particularly the elevator trim, is not required.
2. Do not open the cabin doors in flight. The air loads placed on the doors in
flight will damage them and can cause separation from the airplane. A
damaged or separated door will alter the flight characteristics of the
airplane and possibly damage other control surfaces.
PRECAUTIONARY LANDING WITH ENGINE POWER
1. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
2. Loose Objects ⎯ SECURE
3. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO TAKEOFF POSITION
4. Airspeed ⎯ 95 to 105 KIAS
5. Select a landing area ⎯ FLY OVER AREA (Determine wind direction and survey terrain.
Note obstructions and most suitable landing area. Climb to approximately 1000 feet above
ground level (AGL), and retract flaps when at a safe altitude and airspeed. Set up a normal
traffic pattern for a landing into the wind.)
6. Electrical and radio switches ⎯ SET TO OFF
7. Wing flaps ⎯ SET TO LANDING POSITION (when on final approach)
8. Airspeed ⎯ 78 KIAS
9. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF (just before touchdown)
10. Landing ⎯ LAND AS SLOW AS PRACTICABLE IN A NOSE UP ATTITUDE
11. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
12. Stopping ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING
DITCHING
1. Radio ⎯ MAKE DISTRESS TRANSMISSION (Set transponder code 7700 and transmit a
Mayday distress condition. Give estimated position and intentions.)
2. Loose Objects ⎯ SECURE
3. Seat Belts and shoulder harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
RA050001
3-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
4. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO LANDING POSITION
5. Descent ⎯ ESTABLISH MINIMUM DESCENT (Set airspeed to 65 KIAS, and use power to
establish minimum descent, ±200 feet/minute. See 7.2 below for landings without power.)
6. Approach ⎯ In high winds and heavy swell conditions, approach into the wind. In light
winds and heavy swell conditions, approach parallel to the swell. If no swells exist, approach
into the wind.
7. Touchdown Alternatives
7.1. Touchdown (Engine power available) ⎯ Maintain minimum descent attitude. Apply
power to slow or stop descent if necessary. When over a suitable touchdown area, reduce
power and slowly settle into the water in a nose up attitude near the stalling speed.
7.2. Touchdown (No engine power available) ⎯ Use an 80 to 85 KIAS approach speed
down to the flare-out point, and then glide momentarily to get a feel for the surface.
Allow the airplane to settle into the water in a nose up attitude near the stalling speed.
8. Evacuation of airplane ⎯ Evacuate the airplane through the pilot or passenger doors. It may
be necessary to allow some cabin flooding to equalize pressure on the doors. If the pilot or
passenger doors are inoperative, use the crash ax/hatchet (located below the front seat on the
pilot’s side) to break either window on the main cabin doors. For more information see the
Crash Ax discussion on page 3-28.
9. Flotation devices ⎯ DEPLOY FLOTATION DEVICES
NOTE
Over glassy smooth water, or at night without sufficient light, even
experienced pilots can misjudge altitude by 50 feet or more. Under such
conditions, carry enough power to maintain a nose up attitude at 10 to 20
percent above stalling speed until the airplane makes contact with the water.
NOTE
In situations that require electrical system shutdown under poor ambient
light conditions, cabin illumination is available through use of the overhead
flip lights. The flip lights are connected directly to the battery and will
operate provided there is adequate battery power.
ENGINE FIRE ON THE GROUND DURING STARTUP
If flames are observed in the induction or exhaust system, use the following procedures.
1. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
2. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO FULL OPEN
3. Starter Switch ⎯ HOLD IN CRANKING POSITION (until fire is extinguished)
4. Parking Brake ⎯ RELEASE (If parking brake is engaged)
5. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ OBTAIN FROM CABIN AND EVACUATE AIRPLANE
6. Follow-up ⎯ If fire is present, extinguish it. Inspect for damage and make the appropriate
repairs or replacements.
NOTE
Sometimes a fire will occur on the ground because of improper starting
procedures. If circumstances permit, move the airplane away from the
ground fire by pushing aft on the horizontal stabilizer, and then extinguish
the ground fire. This must only be attempted if the ground fire is nominal
and sufficient ground personnel are present to move the airplane.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
3-7
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
IN-FLIGHT ENGINE FIRE
1. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO CLOSED
2. Mixture Control ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
3. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Heating and Ventilation System ⎯ SET TO OFF
5. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
6. Airspeed ⎯ 179 KIAS (If fire is not extinguished at this speed, increase speed to a level that
extinguishes the fire.)
7. Landing ⎯ PERFORM A FORCED LANDING (See procedures on page 3-5.)
IN-FLIGHT ELECTRICAL FIRE
1. All Heating and Ventilating Controls ⎯ SET TO OFF
2. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
3. All Avionics and Electrical Switches ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Trim System Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
5. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ DISCHARGE IN AREA OF THE FIRE
6. Post Fire Details ⎯ OPEN VENTILATION (if fire is extinguished)
7. Phased System Power-up ⎯ Determine if electrical power is necessary for the safe
continuation of the flight. If it is required, proceed with items 8 through 10 below.
8. Standby Battery ⎯ ACTIVATE (Break safety wire by raising guard – press latching switch)
9. Radios/GPS ⎯ SET TO ON (After Com/Nav is on, wait a few minutes before activating
GPS. Then ensure GPS unit functions normally, i.e., no indications of smoke or fire.)
10. Land as soon as possible.
IN-FLIGHT CABIN FIRE (Fuel/Hydraulic Fluid)
1. All Heating and Ventilating Controls ⎯ SET TO OFF
2. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
3. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ DISCHARGE IN AREA OF THE FIRE
5. When Fire is Extinguished ⎯ VENTILATE CABIN (Turn on master switch, cabin fan, open
ventilation, and deactivate door seals)
6. Post Fire Details ⎯ FOLLOW “EMERGENCY LANDING WITHOUT ENGINE POWER”
CHECKLIST
WARNING
The fire extinguishing substance is toxic and the fumes must not be inhaled
for extended periods. After discharging the extinguisher, the cabin must be
ventilated. If oxygen is available, put masks on and start oxygen flow.
Oxygen must only be used after it is determined that the fire is extinguished.
IN-FLIGHT WING FIRE
1. Navigation Lights Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
2. Pitot Heat Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
3. Strobe/Position Lights Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Landing Light ⎯ SET TO OFF
5. Flight Action ⎯ Perform an intense sideslip to keep the flames away from the fuel tank and
the cabin. The sideslip may also extinguish the fire. Land the airplane as soon as possible.
Use wing flaps only if essential for a safe landing.
RA050001
3-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
NOTE
In an emergency requiring the shutdown of electrical power, such as a fire in
flight, enabling the Standby Battery permits use of the flaps. The guarded
and wire-sealed switch is located on the light row of the circuit breaker
panel. Breaking the copper wire on the switch guard, raising the switch
guard, and depressing and locking the push-button switch, activates the
standby system. See pages 3-23 and 7-42 for more details.
WARNING
When flying in areas where inadvertent icing is possible, i.e., areas of visible
moisture that are not forecasted to have icing conditions, turn on the pitot
heat at least five minutes before entering the areas of visible moisture.
INADVERTENT ICING
1. Detection ⎯ CHECK SURFACES (The stall strips and wing cuffs are good inspection
points for evidence of structural icing.
2. Pitot Heat ⎯ SET TO ON
3. Course ⎯ REVERSE COURSE
4. Altitude ⎯ CHANGE (to a level where the temperature is above freezing)
5. Defroster ⎯ Divert all heated air to the defroster
6. Propeller Control ⎯ INCREASE (Higher propeller speeds will mitigate ice accumulation.)
7. Manifold Pressure ⎯ MONITOR (A drop in manifold pressure may be an indication of
induction icing; increase throttle settings as required.)
8. Heated Induction Air ⎯ SET TO ON (Operate if induction icing is evident or suspected.)
9. Alternate Static Source ⎯ (Open if static source icing is evident or suspected)
10. Flight Characteristics ⎯ ADD MARGIN OF SAFETY (An ice buildup on the wings and
other surfaces will increase stalling speeds. Add a margin to approach and landing speeds.)
11. Approach Speed ⎯ Appropriate for the amount of ice accumulation and flap setting. If there
is a heavy ice buildup on the windshield, a gentle forward slip or small S-turns may improve
forward visibility by allowing use of the side windows.
12. Landing Attitude ⎯ LIMITED FLARE (Land at a higher speed and in a flat attitude
sufficient to prevent the nose wheel from touching the ground first.)
LANDING WITH A FLAT MAIN TIRE
1. Approach ⎯ NORMAL
2. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO LANDING POSITION
3. Touchdown ⎯ Touch down on the inflated tire first and maintain full aileron deflection
towards the good tire, keeping the flat tire off the ground for as long as possible. Be prepared
for abnormal yaw in the direction of the flat tire.
LANDING WITH A FLAT NOSE TIRE
1. Approach ⎯ NORMAL
2. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO LANDING POSITION
3. Touchdown ⎯ Touch down on the main landing gear tires first. Maintain sufficient back
elevator deflection to keep the nose tire off the ground for as long as possible.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OVERCHARGING* (Alternator stays on-line and voltmeter has
high voltage indication)
1. Alternator Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
2. Nonessential Electrical and Avionics Equipment ⎯ SET TO OFF
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
3-9
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
3. Flight ⎯ Depending on conditions, the flight shall be terminated as soon as possible or
practicable.
NOTE
The voltage regulator will trip the alternator off-line in conditions of over
voltage, i.e., greater than 16.0 volts. If this happens the annunciator panel
will indicate the alternator is out. The most likely cause is transitory spikes
or surges tripped the alternator off-line.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DISCHARGING (Ammeter shows a discharging condition and the
alternator annunciator indicates “Alt Out”)
1. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
2. Alternator Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
3. Alternator Switch ⎯ SET TO ON
4. Alternator annunciator Light Alternatives (Follow either 4.1 or 4.2 below.)
4.1. Annunciator Light Condition (Light is off) - If after recycling the system, the alternator
annunciator light stays off, set the avionics master switch to ON and proceed with
normal operations.
4.2. Annunciator Light Condition (Light is on) - If after recycling the system the alternator
annunciator light does not go out or trips the alternator off-line again, follow steps 5 - 8
below.
5. Alternator ⎯ SET TO OFF
6. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO ON
7. Nonessential Avionics and Electrical Equipment ⎯ SET TO OFF
8. Flight ⎯ Depending on conditions, the flight must be terminated as soon as possible or
practicable.
COMPLETE ELECTRICAL FAILURE (Battery is totally discharged or provides unreliable
instrument, lighting, and avionics indications)
1. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
2. Standby Battery Switch Guard Sealing Wire ⎯ BREAK WIRE AND RAISE GUARD (See
amplified discussion on page 3-23.)
3. Standby Battery Switch ⎯ DEPRESSED AND LATCHED
4. Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE OR AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (depending
on flight conditions)
WARNING
During a total electrical failure, with the main battery inoperative, the
rudder limiter and the stall warning indicator will not work. In this situation,
the pilot must give special attention to maintenance of proper airspeeds,
particularly when operating near the airplane’s stalling speed.
NOTE
If the electrical system fails and the main battery is totally discharged, the
standby battery will supply power to the GPS, Com 1, the instrument
floodlights, the turn coordinator, the HSI (if installed), the blind encoder,
and the ECS servo for at least 30 minutes. The standby battery also powers
the flaps. However, they should be used only when needed just before
landing. If the standby battery has been in operation for 30 minutes, the
flaps may not operate.
RA050001
3-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
RUDDER LIMITER MALFUNCTION (System will not disengage and/or annunciator is lit.)
1. Left Rudder Pedal ⎯ VERIFY RUDDER LIMITER IS ENGAGED (If the system is not
engaged, the annunciator is faulty. In this situation, proceed to step No. 5 below.)
2. Rudder Limiter Circuit Breaker ⎯ PULLED (Wait for approximately 30 seconds.)
3. Rudder Limiter Circuit Breaker ⎯ IN (If rudder limiter is still engaged, do step 4. If rudder
limiter disengages, proceed to Step 5.)
4. Rudder Limiter Test Switch ⎯ SET TO TEST POSITION
5. Rudder Limiter Circuit Breaker ⎯ PULLED (Follow step 6 or 7 as applicable.)
6. Rudder Limiter Engaged ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
7. Rudder Limiter Disengaged ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
8. Landing with the Rudder Limiter Disengaged ⎯ Perform a normal landing, and avoid
operations near the airplane’s stalling speed.
9. Landing with Rudder Limiter Engaged ⎯ Airport selection should be based in part on the
runway length available and the amount of crosswind component. A crosswind from the left
is preferable. The maximum demonstrated right crosswind component with the rudder limiter
engaged is 6 knots.
RUDDER LIMITER FAILURE (The system is inoperative)
1. Rudder Limiter Circuit Breaker ⎯ CHECK IN (If the circuit breaker is out, reset and test for
proper operations. If system is functioning normally, proceed with the flight. If the circuit
breaker is IN, proceed to step No. 2 below.
2. Rudder Limiter Circuit Breaker ⎯ PULLED
3. Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
4. Landing with the rudder limiter disengaged ⎯ Perform a normal landing, and avoid
operations near the airplane’s stalling speed.
RUNAWAY TRIM (sudden and unexplained changes in control pressures)
1. Trim Tab System ON/OFF Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF TO DISABLE THE SYSTEM
2. Power Settings ⎯ REDUCE TO 50% BHP OR LESS (Depending on conditions)
3. Airspeed ⎯ 100 to 110 KIAS (Depending on conditions)
4. Circuit Breakers ⎯ PULL BOTH TRIM BREAKERS TO THE OFF POSITION
5. Flight Plan ⎯ TERMINATE AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE OR POSSIBLE (This depends
on the magnitude of control pressure(s) required to maintain a normal flight attitude.)
6. Landing ⎯ PREPARE FOR CONTROL PRESSURE CHANGES (When power is reduced
and airspeed decays, there can be substantial changes in the required control pressures.)
WARNING
In a runaway trim emergency the two most important considerations are to
(1) IMMEDIATELY turn off the trim system and (2) maintain control of the
airplane. The airplane will not maintain level flight and/or proper directional
control without pilot input to the affected flight control(s). If excessive
control pressure is required to maintain level flight, the flight must be
terminated as soon as possible. Pilot fatigue can be increased significantly in
this situation with the potential for making the landing difficult.
PARTIAL RESTORATION OF A DISABLED TRIM SYSTEM
1. Trim Tab On/Off Switch ⎯ SET TO THE ON POSITION
2. Malfunction Analysis ⎯ DETERMINE AXIS OF MALFUNCTION
3. Circuit Breaker(s) ⎯ SET PROPERLY FUNCTIONING AXIS BREAKER TO ON
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
3-11
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
BROKEN OR STUCK THROTTLE CABLE (with enough power for continued flight)
1. Continued Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
2. Airport Selection ⎯ ADEQUATE FOR POWER OFF APPROACH
3. Descent ⎯ CONTROL WITH MIXTURE (Avoid extended power off descents which could
result in cold soaking.)
4. Fuel Selector ⎯ FULLER TANK
5. Approach Airspeed ⎯ 93 KIAS (With flaps in the up position)
90 KIAS (With flaps in the landing position)
6. Seat Belts ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
7. Loose objects ⎯ SECURE
8. Flaps ⎯ AS REQUIRED (Full flaps should be extended only when reaching the runway is
assured.)
9. Mixture (Reaching runway is assured) ⎯ MIXTURE IDLE CUT-OFF
10. Touchdown ⎯ MAIN WHEELS FIRST, GENTLY LOWER NOSE WHEEL
11. Braking ⎯ AS REQUIRED
SOMETHING STUCK IN OR INTERFERING WITH A DOORJAMB
1. Affected Door ⎯ DO NOT OPEN THE DOOR IN FLIGHT
WARNING
Do not open any of the airplane doors in flight. The doors are not designed to
be opened in flight; subsequent airloads on an opened door will forcefully
pull it completely open and detach it from the airplane.
2. Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
EVACUATING THE AIRPLANE
1. Seat Belts ⎯ REMOVE (Do not remove seat belts until the airplane comes to a
complete stop, unless there is a compelling reason to do otherwise. If the onset of the
emergency is anticipated, ensure the seat belt is as tight as possible. See discussion on
page 3-27.)
2. Doors ⎯ USE BOTH IF POSSIBLE AND REQUIRED (Do not open doors in
flight.)
3. Crash Ax ⎯ USE AS REQUIRED (If the cabin doors are inoperable, break out a
cabin door window. See crash ax discussion on page 3-28.)
4. Exiting the Airplane ⎯ AS APPROPRIATE (If possible, use both doors. Generally,
it is best to go aft unless there are compelling reasons to do otherwise. See discussion
on page 3-27.)
5. Assistance ⎯ AS APPROPRIATE (If possible, necessary, and not life threatening,
render assistance to others in the airplane.)
6. Congregating Point ⎯ DESIGNATE (Pilot and passengers should have a designated
congregating point, say 100 feet aft of the airplane.)
RA050001
3-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
Many of the above emergency procedures involve resetting or pulling circuit breakers, which
requires a good understanding of the panel’s location and layout. The circuit breaker panel is
located forward of the pilot’s front seat on the lower side-panel. To ensure the pilot knows the
location of each circuit breaker, a table is provided in (Figure 3-2). Note that the circuit breaker
rows are approximately grouped. The first row is flight controls; the second row is for lighting
and the standby battery switch; rows three and four are basically for electrical equipment and
instruments; and the last row contains the avionics equipment. See (Figure 7 - 13) on page 7-43
for a diagram of the electrical system and a list of circuit breaker values.
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Flaps
Trim
Trim
Limiter
Position Strobe
Landing
Taxi
Panel
Standby
Lights
Lights
Lights
Lights
Lights
Battery Switch
Fuel
Stall
Backup
Engine
Pitot
●
Relays
Level
Warning
Pump
Instruments Heat
Voltage
Clock/
Turn
Door Seal/
Annunciator
●
●
Regulator Cabin Fan Coordinator† Power Point
Panel
Auto
Comm/
Comm/
Transponder/
Audio
Map
HSI
GPS
-pilot
Nav No. 1 Nav No. 2
Encoder
Amplifier
●
WX
●
Note 1: A ● indicates that the circuit breaker position is unused, but reserved for future optional equipment.
Note 2: The actual arrangement may vary slightly depending on the optional equipment installed.
† The ECS servomotor shares a 3 amp circuit breaker with the turn coordinator.
(Figure 3-2)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
3-13
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
ENGINE FAILURE AND FORCED LANDINGS
General – The most important thing in any emergency is to maintain control of the airplane. If
an engine failure occurs during the takeoff run, the primary consideration is to safely stop the
airplane in the remaining available runway. The throttle is reduced first to prevent momentary
restarting of the engine. Raising the flaps reduces lift, which improves ground friction and
facilitates braking. In emergencies involving loss of power, it is important to minimize fire
potential, which includes shutting down or closing the electrical and fuel systems.
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Below 400 feet AGL) – With an engine failure immediately
after takeoff, time is of the essence. The most important consideration in this situation is to
maintain the proper airspeed. The airplane will be in a climb attitude and when the engine fails,
airspeed decays rapidly. Therefore, the nose must be lowered immediately and a proper glide
speed established according to (Figure 3-3). It may not be possible to accelerate to the best
distance glide speed due to altitude limitations. In this instance, lower the nose, maintain current
airspeed, and land straight ahead.
It is unlikely there will be enough altitude to do any significant maneuvering; only gentle turns
left or right to avoid obstructions should be attempted. If there are no obstructions, it is best to
land straight ahead unless there is a significant crosswind component. Flaps should be applied if
airspeed and altitude permit since they can provide a 10+ knot reduction in landing speed.
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Above 400 feet AGL) – With an engine failure after takeoff,
there may be time to employ modified restarting procedures. Still, the most important
consideration in this situation is to maintain the proper airspeed. The airplane will be in a climb
attitude and when the engine fails, airspeed decays rapidly. Therefore, the nose must be lowered
immediately and a proper glide speed established according to (Figure 3-3). It may not be
possible to accelerate to the best distance glide speed due to altitude limitations. In this instance,
lower the nose, maintain current airspeed, and land straight ahead.
In-Flight Engine Failure – The extra time afforded by altitude may permit some diagnosis of
the situation. The first item is to establish the proper rate of descent at the best glide speed for
the situation, as shown in (Figure 3-3). If altitude and other factors permit, an engine restart
should be attempted. The checklist items 2 through 6, Engine Failure During Flight, on page 3-4,
ensure that the fuel supply and ignition are available. The most likely cause of engine failure is
poor fuel management. The two more frequent errors are forgetting to change the fuel selector
or, during an extended descent, failure to readjust the mixture.
Best Distance Glide
Min. Rate Glide
(Most Distance)
(Min. rate of descent)
Gross Weight
KIAS
KIAS
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
106
85
2500 lbs. (1134 kg)
93
80
(Figure 3-3)
Best Glide Speed Versus Minimum Rate of Descent Speed – The best distance glide speed
will provide the most distance covered over the ground for a given altitude loss, while the
minimum rate of descent speed, as its name suggests, will provide the least altitude lost in a
given time period. The best distance glide speed might be used in situations where a pilot, with a
RA050001
3-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
engine failure but several thousand feet above the ground, is attempting to reach a distant airport.
The minimum rate of descent could be used in a situation when the pilot is over the desired
landing spot and wishes to maximize the time aloft for checklists and restart procedures.
Emergency Backup Boost Pump – The backup boost pump is intended for use during an
emergency situation when failure of the engine driven pump has occurred. The switch that
controls this operation is on the rocker switch panel. The labeling on the switch reads BACKUP
PUMP ARMED. The switch is normally in the ARMED position for takeoff and climb to cruise
altitude and in the OFF position for cruise, descent, and approach to landing. The top of the
switch is engraved with the word OFF and is readable only when the switch is off.
If the engine driven pump malfunctions, and the backup boost pump is in the ARMED position,
the backup fuel pump will turn on automatically when the fuel pressure is less than about 5.5 psi.
This condition will also activate a red FUEL light in the annunciator panel. When the red FUEL
light in the annunciator panel illuminates, there may be an audible degradation in the smoothness
of engine operation. With the backup pump operating, fuel is not as precisely metered, compared
to the normal engine driven system, and frequent mixture adjustments are necessary when
changes are made to the power settings. In particular, avoid large power changes, since an overrich or over-lean mixture will affect the proper operation of the engine.
In general, as power is reduced from the 75% of BHP level, there must be a corresponding
leaning of the mixture. On an approach to landing, the normal checklist procedures must be
modified to exclude setting the mixture to full rich. It is best to make a partial power approach
with full flaps, and only reduce power when over the runway. If a balked landing is necessary,
coordinate the simultaneous application of mixture and throttle.
At power settings above the 75% level the problem is operating at too lean of a mixture. At full
throttle, the engine will produce approximately 79% of its rated BHP. In this situation, the fuelair mixture is lean of peak, and higher cylinder head temperatures and EGT readings will result
from extended use in the condition. Full throttle operations must be kept to a minimum and only
used to clear an obstacle, execute a balked landing, or other similar situations that require use of
all available power.
Critical Issues (Backup Boost Pump) – One of the more critical times for an engine driven
boost pump failure is when the engine is at idle power, such as a descent for landing. There are
two reasons that make this situation more serious compared with other flight phases. (1) The
airplane is more likely to be at a lower altitude, which limits time for detection, analysis, and
corrective measures. (2) With the engine at idle power, there is no aural indication of engine
stoppage. If the engine failure is a result of fuel starvation with a fuel pressure less than 5.5 psi,
then the FUEL annunciator will provide a visual indication.
There is a latching relay that basically controls the logic of the system. For example, it turns the
backup pump on, when the backup boost switch is in the ARMED position and the fuel pressure
drops below 5.5 psi. Moreover, if the backup system is automatically turned on while the vapor
suppression is on, it will suspend operation of this function. Most functions in the system are
integrated with the latching relay, and failure of this relay will result in failure of the system.
However, the FUEL annunciator light is independent of this system and will operate anytime the
fuel pressure is less than 5.5 psi.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: F/06-19-2001
RA050001
3-15
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
In a situation involving a double failure, i.e., a malfunction of the engine driven pump and the
latching relay, the FUEL annunciator will illuminate. Since the primer and backup boost pump
are one and the same, the pilot can bypass the latching relay by holding the primer switch in the
depressed position. In this particular situation, this would restore engine power and permit
continuation of the flight and a landing, which must be done as soon as possible. Of course, the
pilot must continually depress the primer switch, which increases the cockpit work load.
CAUTION
Do not shut down an engine for practice or training purposes. If engine
failure is to be simulated, it shall be done by reducing power. A few minutes
of exposure to temperatures and airspeeds at flight altitudes can have the
same effect on an inoperative engine as hours of cold-soaking in sub-Arctic
conditions.
25.0
25.0
20.0
20.0
15.0
15.0
10.0
10.0
5.0
5.0
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
Ground Distance (Miles)
Ground Distance (Miles)
GLIDING DISTANCE
(Zero Wind – Best Distance Glide)
14000
Altitude (Feet)
(Figure 3-4)
Engine Restarts - If the engine restarts, two special issues must be considered: (1) If the
airplane was in a glide for an extended period of time at cold ambient air temperatures, the
engine should be operated at lower RPM settings for a few minutes until the oil and cylinder
temperatures return to normal ranges if possible. (2) If the engine failure is not related to pilot
error, i.e., poor fuel management or failure to enrich the mixture during a long descent from a
high altitude, then a landing should be made as soon as practicable to determine the cause of the
engine failure.
Engine Does Not Restart - If the engine does not restart, then a forced landing without power
must be completed as detailed earlier in this section on page 3-5, Emergency Landing Without
Engine Power. Maintaining the best distance glide speed provides the maximum distance over
the ground with the least altitude loss. The preceding graph (Figure 3-4) provides information on
ground distance covered for a given height above the ground. At the best distance glide speed, a
good rule of thumb, under zero wind conditions, is to anticipate approximately 1¾ miles over the
ground for each 1000-foot increment above the ground.
RA050001
3-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Forced Landing with the Throttle Stuck in the Idle Position – If the throttle is stuck at idle or
near idle power, then a forced landing must be performed. The procedures are somewhat similar
to those associated with a complete power loss. However, powerplant shutdown should be
delayed as long as safely practicable since the stuck throttle may be spontaneously cured.
Changes in altitude, temperature, and other atmospheric conditions associated with the descent
may combine to alleviate the stuck throttle condition. On the other hand, the problem could be
the result of a broken throttle cable, which has no immediate cure. Regardless of the cause, the
pilot lacks both the time and resources to properly analyze the cause. Running the engine until
the last practicable moment, within the confines of safety, is the most prudent course of action.
It is possible that the throttle may stick at a power setting that is above idle, but at insufficient
brake horsepower to sustain level flight. At the same time, this condition may restrict the desired
rate of descent. In this situation, the pilot can set the mixture control to idle cut-off to
momentarily stop the operation of the engine. If cylinder head temperatures fall below 240º,
restart the engine as necessary by enriching the mixture.
Stuck Throttle with Sufficient Power to Sustain Flight – If the throttle sticks at a power
setting that produces enough power for continued flight then a landing should be made as soon
as possible. If the airplane is near the ground, climb to an altitude that provides a greater margin
of safety, provided there is sufficient power to do so. Do not begin the descent for land until the
airplane is near or over the airport. Again, as mentioned in the previous paragraph, the pilot can
set the mixture control to idle cut-off to momentarily stop the operation of the engine. If cylinder
head temperatures fall below 240º, restart the engine as necessary by enriching the mixture. A
checklist for a stuck throttle condition that will sustain flight is discussed on page 3-12.
FLIGHT CONTROLS MALFUNCTIONS
General – The elevator and aileron controls are actuated by pushrods, which provide direct
positive response to the input of control pressures. The rudder is actuated by cable controls. The
pushrod system makes the likelihood of a control failure in the roll and pitch axis remote.
Aileron or Rudder Failure – The failure of the rudder or ailerons does not impose a critical
situation since control around either the vertical and longitudinal axes can still be approximately
maintained with either control surface. Plan a landing as soon as practicable on a runway that
minimizes the crosswind component. Remember that the skidding and slipping maneuvers
inherent in such an approach will increase the airplane’s stall speed, and a margin for safety
should be added to the approach airspeed.
Elevator Failure – In the event of a failure of the elevator control system the airplane can be
controlled and landed using the elevator trim tab. The airplane should be landed as soon as
possible. En route, establish horizontal flight at 65% to 75% power. When within 15 miles of the
landing airport, slow to 120 KIAS, set the flaps to the takeoff position, and establish a timed
shallow descent. Adjust the descent with power to enter the downwind leg at or slightly above
pattern altitude. Make a slightly wider than normal pattern so more time is provided for setup.
On final approach, set the flaps to the landing position and re-trim the airplane to a 500 fpm
descent at about 80 KIAS. Do not make further adjustment to the elevator trim, and avoid
excessive power adjustments. On the final approach to landing, make small power changes to
control the descent. Do not reduce power suddenly at the flare-out point as this will cause an
excessive nose down change and may cause the airplane to land on the nose wheel first. At the
flareout point, coordinate the reduction of power with the full nose-up application of elevator
trim.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
RA050001
3-17
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
TRIM TAB MALFUNCTIONS
The airplane has two axis electrically powered trim tabs. There is a trim system on/off switch
located on the right side of the rocker switch panel, which turns off power to the actuators in
both axes. If a runaway trim condition is encountered in flight, characterized by sudden and
unexplained changes in control pressures; the trim system switch must immediately be set to the
OFF position. If the pilot wishes to restore part of the system’s trim, the following procedure
should be used.
1. After the trim system switch has been set to OFF, the trim circuit breakers (elevator and
aileron) should be pulled to the OFF position.
2. Turn the trim system switch to the ON position.
3. Based on the pressures experienced during the trim runaway, estimate which tab is least
likely to have caused the runaway and which tab is most likely to have caused the runaway.
4. Set the circuit breakers least likely to have caused the runaway to the ON position. The pilot
should be prepared to set the trim system switch to the OFF position in the event the
diagnosis is incorrect and the faulty trim actuator is brought back on line. In most situations,
the pilot should be able to easily determine which trim axis experienced the runaway
condition.
WARNING
In a runaway trim emergency the two most important considerations are to
(1) IMMEDIATELY turn off the trim system and (2) maintain control of the
airplane. The airplane will not maintain level flight and/or proper directional
control without pilot input to the affected flight control(s). If excessive
control pressure is required to maintain level flight, the flight must be
terminated as soon as possible. Pilot fatigue can increase significantly in this
situation with the potential for making the landing more difficult.
The power to the actuator motors is supplied from the system’s primary bus. In the event of a
power failure, the trim tabs will not operate and the settings in place before the failure will be
maintained until power is restored. Flight under these conditions or during a trim runaway
condition should not impose a significant problem. Atypical control pressures will be required
and the flight should be terminated as soon as possible or practicable (depending on flight
conditions) to mitigate pilot fatigue. Remember that during touchdown, when power is reduced
and airspeed decays, there can be substantial changes in the required control pressures.
RUDDER LIMITER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION
General – The purpose of the rudder limiter is to restrict adverse rudder application when the
airplane is near the critical angle of attack with the throttle set to more than 12 inches of Hg of
manifold pressure. For more information about the rudder limiter, see the Stall warning system
discussion on page 7-47. A pilot must follow certain procedures if a failure or malfunction
occurs. A distinction is made between the words failure and malfunction. A failure means the
rudder limiter system is completely inoperative, and the components of the system do not
interfere with the normal operation of the rudder. A malfunction means one or more of the
system components are stuck or operating improperly.
Failure – Failure of the rudder limiter system does not present significant problems during
normal flight operations. If the rudder limiter system fails in flight, the pilot must not make
adverse rudder deflections or fly near the airplane’s critical angle of attack, particularly at higher
RA050001
3-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
power settings. A landing shall be made as soon as practicable. Since a shorted or broken wire
might cause failure of the system, it is a good idea to pull the circuit breaker.
Malfunction – A malfunction of the rudder limiter system is a more serious issue, particularly if
it is stuck in the engaged position. With a stuck solenoid, the RUDR LMTR annunciator
normally will be illuminated and left rudder travel will be restricted. The first step is to verify
that the rudder limiter is engaged, and the cause of the problem is a faulty annunciator light. If
the problem is a faulty light, pull the rudder limiter circuit breaker, and land as soon as
practicable.
If the rudder limiter is stuck in the engaged position, the pilot should first take steps to disengage
the system. To do this, pull the rudder limiter circuit breaker, waiting about 30 seconds, and then
reset the circuit breaker. If this does not disengage the rudder limiter, the next step is to press the
test switch on the trim panel. If this action does not release the solenoid, which is holding the
rudder limiter in the engaged position, then the rudder limiter circuit breaker must be pulled and
a landing made as soon as possible. If recycling the system disengages the rudder limiter, then
the rudder limiter circuit breaker should be pulled and a landing made as soon as practicable.
If the solenoid is stuck, the rudder will be limited to11.5º ± 0.5º of left travel. In this situation,
select an airport with an adequate runway length that minimizes crosswind component. Since the
airplane tends to turn into the wind during a crosswind landing, if given a choice, a crosswind
from the left is more desirable. The maximum demonstrated right crosswind component with the
rudder limiter engaged is 6 knots.
Total Electrical Failure – The rudder limiter is not incorporated in the standby battery bus
system. During a total electrical failure, with the main battery inoperative, the rudder limiter and
the stall warning indicator will not function. In this situation, the pilot must give special attention
to maintenance of proper airspeeds, particularly when near the airplane’s stalling speed.
FIRES
General – Fires in flight (either engine, electrical, or cabin) are inherently more critical;
however, the likelihood of such an occurrence is extremely rare. The onset of an in-flight fire
can, to some degree, be forestalled through diligent monitoring of the engine instruments and
vigilance for suspicious odors. Fires on the ground can be mitigated through proper starting
techniques, particularly when the engine is very cold.
Engine Fires – The most common engine fires occur on the ground and are usually the result of
improper starting procedures. The immoderate use of the primer pump is a primary reason since
this causes engine flooding. In situations of extensive primer pump use, the excess fuel drains
from the intake ports and puddles on the ground. If this happens, the aircraft should be moved
away from the puddle. Otherwise, the potential exists for the exhaust system to ignite the fuel
puddle on the ground. Inadvertent engine flooding is likely during situations where the engine
has been cold-soaked at temperatures below 25°F (-4°C) for over two hours. See cold weather
operations on page 4-25.
Cabin Fire – Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for use of the fire extinguisher. For more
information on using the fire extinguisher see the discussion on page 7-69. Once a cabin fire is
extinguished, it is important to ventilate the cabin as soon as possible. The residual smoke and
toxins from the fire extinguisher must not be inhaled for extended periods. The ventilation
system should be operated at full volume with the cabin fan on. Deactivating the door seals
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
3-19
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
enhances the ventilation process. If oxygen is available, put masks on and start the oxygen flow.
Oxygen must only be used after it is determined that the fire is extinguished.
LIGHTNING STRIKE
In order to prevent as much damage as possible to the electrical system, components, and
avionics in the event of a lightning strike, surge protection has been built into the Columbia
300’s electrical system. This surge protection comes from a large MOV (metal oxide varistor)
soldered in behind the circuit breaker panel. The Columbia 300 system has one MOV on the
avionics bus. The MOV is located behind the circuit breaker panel and is not accessible by the
pilot in flight. It is imperative that after a lightning strike, the MOV is replaced before the next
flight.
CAUTION
After a lightning strike, the MOV must be replaced before the next flight.
If the aircraft is struck by lightning in flight, the MOV will have likely prevented significant
damage to the electrical components. The most likely damage will be to the equipment on the
extreme ends of the airplane, such as the strobe and anti-collision lights. After the lightning
strike, the pilot should reset all tripped circuit breakers. If any of the circuit breakers trip off
again, they should not be reset a second time. The pilot should then determine which equipment
is operating properly, and adjust the flight accordingly.
ENGINE AND PROPELLER PROBLEMS
Engine Roughness – The most common cause of a rough running engine is an improper mixture
setting. Adjust the mixture in reference to the power setting and altitude in use. Do not
immediately go to a full rich setting since the roughness may be caused by too rich of a mixture.
If adjusting the mixture does not correct the problem, reduce throttle until roughness becomes
minimal, and perform a magneto check.
Check operations on the individual left and right magnetos. If the engine operates smoothly
when operating on an individual magneto, adjust power as necessary and continue. However, do
not operate the engine in this manner any longer than necessary. Land as soon as possible for
determination and repair of the problem. If individual magneto operations do not improve
performance, set the magneto switch to BOTH, and land as soon as possible for engine repairs.
CAUTION
When operating on a single magneto, the engine may quit completely if
either magneto is faulty. If this happens, close the throttle to idle and set the
mixture to idle cut off before resetting the magneto switch to BOTH. This
will prevent a severe backfire. When the magneto switch is set to BOTH,
advance mixture and throttle to appropriate settings.
High Cylinder Head Temperatures – High cylinder head temperatures are often caused by too
lean of a mixture setting. Be sure the mixture is adjusted to the proper fuel flow for the power
setting in use. Put the aircraft in a gentle descent to increase airspeed. If cylinder head
temperatures cannot be maintained within the prescribed limits, land as soon as possible to have
the problem evaluated and repaired.
High Oil Temperature – A prolonged high oil temperature indication is usually accompanied
by a drop in oil pressure. If oil pressure remains normal, then the cause of the problem could be a
RA050001
3-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
faulty gauge or thermobulb. If the oil pressure drops as temperature increases, put the aircraft in
a gentle descent to increase airspeed. If oil temperature does not drop after increasing airspeed,
reduce power and land as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the above steps do not restore oil temperature to normal, severe damage
or an engine failure can result. Reduce power to idle, and select a suitable
area for a forced landing. Follow the procedures described on page 3-5,
Emergency Landing Without Engine Power. The use of power must be
minimized and used only to reach the desired landing area.
Low Oil Pressure – If oil pressure drops below 30 psi at normal cruise power settings without
apparent reason and the oil temperature remains normal, monitor both oil pressure and
temperature closely, and land as soon as possible for evaluation and repair. If a drop in oil
pressure from prescribed limits is accompanied by a corresponding excessive temperature
increase, engine failure should be anticipated. Reduce power and follow the procedures
described on page 3-5, Emergency Landing Without Engine Power. The use of power must be
minimized and used only to reach the desired landing area.
CAUTION
The engine oil annunciator is set to illuminate when the oil pressure is less
than 5 psi, which provides important information for ground operations. It is
not designed to indicate the onset of potential problems in flight.
Failure of Engine Driven Fuel Pump – In the event the engine driven fuel pump fails in flight
or during takeoff, there is an electrically operated backup fuel pump located in the wing area.
The first indication of failure of the engine driven pump is a drop in fuel pressure followed by a
FUEL annunciator and a loss of engine power.
The backup pump is normally in the ARMED position for takeoff and climb and will be
activated if fuel pressure drops below 5.5 psi. In the cruise and descent configurations, the pump
arming is normally in the OFF position. At the first indication of engine driven pump failure
(fuel pump warning annunciator, low fuel pressure, or rough engine operations), set the throttle
to full open and set the backup pump switch to the ARMED position. Thereafter, it must remain
in this position and a landing must be made as soon as practicable to repair the engine driven
boost pump. Please see an amplified discussion on page 3-15
NOTE
When operating at high altitudes, 15000 MSL or above, it may be necessary
to set the vapor suppression switch to ON in order to keep the engine driven
fuel pump from cavitating. Operation of the vapor suppression may be
required at lower altitudes when the ambient temperature is significantly
above normal.
Propeller Surging or Wandering – If the propeller has a tendency to surge up and down or the
RPM settings seem to slowly and gently vary (propeller wandering), one or more of the
following conditions may exist.
1. There may be excessive leakage in the transfer bearing. The governor may not be able to get
enough oil pressure, which causes a delay in propeller responsiveness. By the time the
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
3-21
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
propeller responds to earlier governor inputs, they have changed, resulting in propeller
wandering.
2. Dirty oil is another cause. Contaminants in engine oil cause blockage of close tolerance
passages in the governor, leading to erratic operations.
3. Excessive play in the linkage between the governor and cockpit control can lead to erratic
operations.
NOTE
Propeller surging or wandering in most instances does not limit the safe
continuation of the flight. However, to preclude the occurrence of more
serious problems, the issue should be corrected in a timely manner, i.e., at
the conclusion of the flight. If the surging or wandering is excessive, then a
landing should be made as soon as practicable.
ELECTRICAL PROBLEMS
The potential for electrical problems can be forestalled somewhat by systematic monitoring of
the ammeter and voltmeter gauges. The onset of most electrical problems is indicated by
abnormal readings from either or both of these gauges. The ammeter, which is presented on a
analog gauge, basically measures the condition of the battery while the voltmeter indicates the
condition of the airplane’s electrical system in a digital format.
Under Voltage – If there is an electrical demand above what can be produced by the alternator,
the battery temporarily satisfies the increased requirement and a discharging condition exists.
For example, if the alternator should fail, the battery carries the entire electrical demand of the
airplane. As the battery charge is expended, the voltage to the system will read something less
than the optimum 14.2 volts. At approximately 8 volts, most electrical components will cease to
work or will operate erratically and unreliably. Anytime the electrical demand is greater than
what can be supplied by the alternator, the battery is in a discharging state. If the discharging
state is not corrected, in time, there is a decay in the voltage available to the electrical system of
the airplane.
Alternator Failure – If the alternator has an internal failure, i.e., it cannot be recycled and the
annunciator remains on, the alternator side of the split master switch should be set to the OFF
position. A relay will disconnect it from the primary bus and prevent battery drain if the failure is
associated with an internal short.
Load Shedding – If the under voltage condition cannot be cured either by recycling the
alternator as described on page 3-10 or reducing the electrical load to the system, then the flight
should be terminated as soon as possible or as soon as practicable depending on flight
conditions. All nonessential electrical and avionics equipment must be turned off.
Over Voltage – The voltage regulator is designed to trip the alternator off-line in conditions of
over voltage, i.e., greater than 16.0 volts. When this happens the annunciator panel will indicate
the alternator is Out. The most likely cause is transitory spikes or surges tripped the alternator
off-line in the electrical system. If the alternator is not automatically disconnected in an over
voltage situation, the voltage regulator is probably faulty. In this situation, the pilot must
manually turn off the alternator; otherwise, damage to the electrical and avionics equipment is
likely. There is increased potential for an electrical fire in an uncorrected over voltage situation.
RA050001
3-22
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
COMPLETE ELECTRICAL FAILURE
General – Normally, a pilot can anticipate the onset of a complete electrical failure. Items like
an alternator failure and a battery discharging state usually precedes the total loss of electrical
power. At the point the pilot first determines the electrical system is in an uncorrectable state of
decay, appropriate planning should be initiated. The primary objective is to preclude the need for
use of the standby system by turning off all nonessential electrical and avionics equipment.
In case of a total and sudden or otherwise not anticipated electrical failure, the pilot must take
actions appropriate to the conditions of flight. If operating in VFR daytime conditions with a
favorable en route and terminal weather prognosis, the pilot might choose to continue to the
planned destination. The standby battery might only be used for communications at the terminal
area. In some instances, the use of the standby battery might not be necessary.
Conversely, if operating at night, under IFR conditions, or both, the pilot might need to activate
the standby battery immediately. In this situation, a landing must be made as soon as possible
since reliable use of the standby battery is only assured for 30 minutes. During a total electrical
failure, with the main battery inoperative, the rudder limiter and the stall warning indicator will
not function. Please see discussion on page 3-18.
Items Available Using the Standby Battery – The standby battery switch is located on the
second row of the circuit breaker panel. Activate the system by breaking the wire on the switch
guard, raising the guard, and depressing the locking push-button switch. The standby battery
system provides essential equipment for emergency operations. The equipment that is operated
by the standby battery is shown in (Figure 3- 5). A discussion of the items follows the table.
ITEMS AVAILABLE USING THE STANDBY BATTERY
HSI
GPS (GX50)
ECS Servomotor
Turn Coordinator
Nav/Comm #1 (SL30)
Altitude Encoder
Flood Bar
Flaps (and indicator)
GPS Annunciator
(Figure 3- 5)
1. The GX50 GPS and the SL30 Nav/Comm provide navigational guidance. The blind encoder
is connected to the standby battery and provides altitude data for the GPS.
2. Communications are maintained through use of the No. 1 SL30 Nav/Comm Radio.
3. The standby battery powers both the HSI and turn coordinator. In the unlikely event both
engine-driven vacuum pumps should fail during a total electrical failure, the pilot still has
two gyroscopic references.
4. The instrument flood bar under the glare shield provides interior lighting for the flight
instruments. The light bypasses the dimmer switch and will operate at full brightness when
the standby battery is active.
5. Wing flaps can be used; however, the use is limited to emergency forced landings in
unimproved or otherwise insufficient landing areas. The anticipated scenario is a situation in
which a forced landing is necessary without electrical power, such as an in-flight electrical
fire. If flaps are used at the destination airport in an emergency situation in which the standby
battery has been in operation for some time, they may not work or will partially extend.
Moreover, using the flaps might deplete all remaining standby battery energy.
6. The servomotor, which controls air temperature for the environmental control system, can be
operated to close the airflow to the cabin in emergencies involving a cabin or engine fire.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
3-23
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Items Not Available Using the Standby Battery – The items listed above are the only devices
connected to the standby battery. Clearly, use of the standby battery will involve an emergency
situation. Since each emergency situation, to some degree, is unique, the pilot must consider the
effect of losing most of the airplane’s electrical equipment as it relates to the specific situation.
The following list is a generalized discussion of some of the more obvious issues associated with
a complete electrical loss.
1. All engine gauges will not operate, including manifold pressure and RPM indications.
2. The rudder limiter system will not operate.
3. All aural and visual annunciations will be inoperative, such as stall warning, low fuel, and
the fuel selector position indicator. In addition, the fuel quantity gauges will be inoperative.
4. While the gyroscopic and static air flight instruments are not affected, the clock, timer, and
outside air temperature indications will not be available.
5. All electrical equipment, except the items on the standby battery, will be inoperative.
Important considerations are the loss of the transponder, pitot heat, position lights, landing
lights, audio panel lighting, intercom, and lighting for the magnetic compass. In addition, the
door seals will be inoperative with the attendant increase in ambient noise. Since the
intercom is inoperative, crew and passenger communications are more difficult.
6. The GPS will need reprogramming (including approaches), if it was in use at the time the
standby battery was activated.
NOTE
In case of a total electrical failure, the “LVAC” and “RVAC” annunciator
display will be inoperative. However, the vacuum gage, which is a direct
reading instrument, will provide an indication of the system’s condition.
Special Issues (Standby Battery) – The standby battery has three thermal-cutouts (one for each
cell pair) that will suspend operation of the standby battery should any one of the three cell pairs
overheat. The cutout is designed to suspend operation of the standby battery at 92ºC (198ºF).
The potential for standby battery cutoff depends primarily on the cabin’s ambient temperature.
In general, the standby battery will become inoperative after 30 minutes if the cabin ambient
temperature is 47ºC (117ºF).
This is computed by multiplying the standby battery heat up rate by 30 minutes, or 1.5ºC (1.8ºF)
x 30 minutes, which gives a temperature increase of 45º C (81ºF). Clearly, at ambient cabin
temperatures below 38ºC (100ºF) it is unlikely that the standby battery will achieve an
overheated condition, provided it is not operated for more than 30 minutes.
The standby battery is intended to provide 30 minutes of continuous service; however, in actual
practice it has the potential to exceed this service time, and depends mostly on its age and current
load placed on the battery. Pilots that use the standby battery beyond the 30-minute time period
do so at their own risk. In some instances, the risk associated with extended use (more than 30
minutes) must be weighed against other risk factors attendant with turning the battery off. The
table below (Figure 3-6) shows the approximate temperature increase for operating periods from
30 minutes to one hour.
RA050001
3-24
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
STANDBY BATTERY
(Operating Time Versus Temperature Increase)
Operating Time
of Standby
Battery
30 minutes
32 minutes
34 minutes
36 minutes
38 minutes
40 minutes
42 minutes
44 minutes
Temperature
Increase ºC
Temperature
Increase ºF
45.0
46.5
48.0
49.5
51.0
52.5
54.0
55.5
113.0
115.7
118.4
121.1
123.8
126.5
129.2
131.9
Operating Time
of Standby
Battery
46 minutes
48 minutes
50 minutes
52 minutes
54 minutes
56 minutes
58 minutes
60 minutes
Temperature
Increase ºC
Temperature
Increase ºF
57.0
58.5
60.0
61.5
63.0
64.5
66.0
67.5
134.6
137.3
140.0
142.7
145.4
148.1
150.8
153.5
(Figure 3-6)
Pilots should bear in mind that if battery operations are suspended, the standby battery cools at
approximately the same rate that it heats up, i.e., a decrease of 1.5ºC (1.8ºF) per minute.
Depending on the circumstances, it might be advisable to suspend standby battery operations for
a period of time. For example, turn the standby battery on for 15 minutes, and then turn if off for
15 minutes. This will extend the overall flight time without overheating the battery.
WARNING
For airplane serial numbers 40004 to 40010 that have not changed to the
battery with thermal cutouts, do not permit the battery’s internal
temperature to exceed 100ºC (212ºF). At this core temperature, the battery
will vent noxious fumes into the cabin.
STATIC AIR SOURCE BLOCKAGE
The static source for the airspeed indicator, the altimeter, the rate of climb indicator, and encoder
is located on the right side of the airplane’s fuselage, between the cabin door and the horizontal
stabilizer. The location of the static port is in an area of relatively undisturbed air. Because of the
airplane’s composite construction, the static source is less susceptible to airframe longevity error
inherent with aluminum airplanes.
If the normal static source is blocked, an alternate static source, which uses pressure within the
cabin, can be selected. Access for the alternate static source is on the pilot’s knee bolster near the
left dimmer control and is labeled ALT STATIC. To access the alternate static source, rotate the
static control knob clockwise until it locks in the ALT position. When the alternate static source
is in use, the indications of the airspeed indicator and altimeter will vary slightly. Airspeed
calibration charts are in Section 5 and begin on page 5-3. No altimeter calibrations are shown
since the error is less than 50 feet.
VACUUM SYSTEM FAILURE
The airplane is equipped with two separate vacuum pumps, which supply suction for the
gyroscopic attitude indicator. The second vacuum pump is provided as a redundant or backup
system, since the system requires only one pump. Both pumps are connected to the suction
system and operate continuously. If either vacuum pump should fail, the failure is noted on the
annunciator panel with an amber light indication of LVAC or RVAC, depending on which
vacuum pump failed. The gyroscopic instruments will operate normally with only one pump, and
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
3-25
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
no change is perceptible on the vacuum gauge. No action is required by the pilot to activate the
backup system.
In the unlikely event that both pumps fail in flight, the electric powered turn coordinator and HSI
can be utilized if a pilot inadvertently flies into the clouds. Inexperienced pilots must not attempt
continued operations in the clouds with a partial panel, i.e., only the turn coordinator and the
static system instruments (airspeed, altimeter, and rate of climb indicator). The best procedure to
follow for inadvertent flight into clouds is to execute an immediate 180° turn. If flying with a
partial panel, the following procedures should be used.
1. Note the airplane’s heading indication on the magnetic compass.
2. When the digital readout on the clock passes the minute or half-minute mark, begin a oneminute, standard rate turn.
3. Verify the turn rate by holding the airplane symbol in the turn coordinator on the index mark.
4. At the end of one minute, level the airplane in the turn coordinator and check the magnetic
compass to verify that a 180° turn was accomplished. Depending on the airplane’s initial
heading, it may take a few seconds for the magnetic compass to stabilize.
5. Use the elevator to maintain altitude.
If unable to establish visual contact with the 180° turn, it may be appropriate to descend through
the clouds to VFR conditions, depending on the height of the cloud base. If possible, obtain
permission for the emergency descent and perform the following procedures.
1. To minimize compass swing, establish the airplane on an east or west heading.
2. Adjust the power and other engine controls to allow a gradual descent of approximately 300
to 500 feet per minute at 120 KIAS.
3. Trim the airplane for this attitude so that there are neutral control pressures.
4. Keep the wings level by reference to the airplane symbol in the turn coordinator. Monitor the
magnetic compass or HSI, if installed, to ensure maintenance of the east or west heading and,
if necessary, apply gentle control pressure to adjust the heading.
5. When clear of the clouds, resume normal operations if conditions permit.
These procedures are intended to preclude unintentional entry into a spiral dive. The spiral dive,
commonly referred to as a Graveyard Spiral, will occur when the airplane passes its point of
lateral stability, approximately 45° of bank. At this point, continued application of nose up
elevator pressure will increase the airplane’s angle of bank, which increases the rate of descent
and the airspeed. To recover from a spiral dive the pilot should: (1) reduce power, (2) level the
wings by reference to the turn coordinator, and (3) raise and level the nose by reference to the
airspeed indicator, the altimeter, and the rate of climb indicator.
SPINS
The airplane, as certified by the Federal Aviation Agency, is not approved for spins of any
duration. During the flight test phase of the airplane’s certification, spins and/or spin recovery
techniques were not performed or demonstrated. It is not known if the airplane will recover from
a spin.
RA050001
3-26
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
WARNING
Do not attempt to spin the airplane under any circumstances. The airplane,
as certified by the Federal Aviation Agency, is not approved for spins of any
duration. During the flight test phase of the airplane’s certification, spins
were not performed. It is not known if the airplane will recover from a spin.
EMERGENCY EXIT
General – It is impossible to cover all the contingencies of an emergency situation. The pilot in
command must analyze all possible alternatives and select a course of action appropriate to the
situation. The discussion on the following pages is intended as a generalized overview of
recommended actions and issues associated with emergency egress.
Doors – In most emergencies, the main cabin doors are used as exit points. The operation of
these doors is discussed on page 7-15, and there are placards near the door handles, which
explain their operation. In addition, the Passenger Briefing Card discusses the operation of the
cabin doors in an emergency situation. It is important that passengers are familiar with their
operation since the pilot may be incapacitated during emergency exiting operations.
Seat Belts – The seat belt should not be removed until the airplane has come to a complete stop,
unless there are compelling reasons to do otherwise. At other times, such as when the airplane
has come to rest in an area of treetops, leaving the belts fastened might be the best course of
action. When the seat belts are removed, it is helpful if the pilot and passengers stow them in a
manner that minimizes interference with airplane egress patterns.
Exiting (Cabin Door(s) Operable) – If possible, use both cabin doors as exit points. In the
event of a wing fire, exit on the side away from the fire. The front seat passengers should
normally exit first and then, if appropriate, render assistance to the rear seat occupants. When
outside and on the wing, move to the rear of the airplane, over the trailing edge of the wing, all
other things being equal. If practicable, all passengers and the pilot should have a designated
congregating point. Fore example, 100 feet aft of the airplane.
Exiting (Cabin Doors Inoperable) – If the cabin doors are inoperable, there is a crash ax
(hatchet) located under the pilot’s seat that can be used to break out one of the cabin door
windows. Please see the crash ax discussion on page 3-28.
INVERTED EXIT PROCEDURES
General – In emergencies where the airplane has come to rest in an inverted position the
gullwing doors will not open sufficiently to exit the airplane. If this happens, there is a crash ax
below the pilot’s front seat that can be used to break either of the cabin door windows. Use the
following procedure.
1. Release the seat belt. The pilot should position himself or herself in a manner that minimizes
injury before releasing the seat belt.
2. Remove crash ax from its holder.
3. If the airplane is situated with one wing down and touching the ground and one wing up,
break the cabin door window on the up-wing side. If the wings are about level, break the
door window that offers the best access. See crash ax discussion on page 3-28.
4. Exit the airplane and/or render assistance to passengers as required.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
3-27
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Exterior Emergency Exit Release – There is an emergency exit door hinge release that can be
activated by ground personnel in the event the pilot and passengers are incapacitated. The release
strap loop is located on the bottom of the airplane near the left wing saddle inside the same
compartment that contains the gascolator.
It is important for the pilot to understand the procedures for using the exterior release. In some
instances, the pilot may be incapacitated but conscious and able to offer verbal instructions to
ground personnel. The following procedures are applicable to exterior removal of the door by
ground personnel.
1. Open the gascolator compartment by pressing the two spring buttons.
2. Move the door latching mechanism of the pilot’s door to the open position.
3. Pull up sharply on the emergency strap loop door hinge release.
4. Pull on the door release handle to open the door a few inches, and then move the door
latching mechanism to the locked position. This will prevent the door from closing and
provide an adequate handhold for removing the door.
5. Using both hands, grasp the left and right edges of the door, near the middle, and pull it away
from the fuselage.
6. Rock wing to assist in the removal of the door.
WARNING
Do not pull the emergency release strap loop to test its operation. An
operational test is specified during the airplane’s annual inspection. If the
door release is inadvertently activated, the airplane is unsafe to fly, and an
appropriately trained and certificated mechanic must rearm the system.
CRASH AX
A crash ax is located under the pilot’s seat for use in the event the normal cabin and the
emergency door releases cannot be used. The blade of the ax points down and is inserted in an
aluminum sheath, and the unit is secured with a Velcro strip. To use the ax, open the Velcro
fastener and remove the ax from its sheath.
It generally works best to strike the corner edge of the window near the doorframe. Several smart
blows to the window area around the perimeter of the doorframe will remove enough pieces so
that the middle portion of the window can be removed with a few heavy blows. Once the major
portion of the window is removed and if time and circumstances permit, use the ax blade to
smooth down the jagged edges around the doorframe. This will minimize injury when egressing
the airplane through the window.
WARNING
The crash ax/hatchet is a required item for the safe operation of the airplane.
It must be installed and secured in its sheath during all flight operations. Do
not use the crash ax for any other purposes, such as chopping wood, since it
can diminish the effectiveness of the tool.
RA050001
3-28
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
Indicated Airspeeds for Normal Operations ............................................................................. 4-3
NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS................................................................................... 4-4
Preflight Inspection................................................................................................................... 4-4
Before Starting Engine ............................................................................................................. 4-6
Starting Cold Engine ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Starting Hot Engine .................................................................................................................. 4-6
Starting Engine with Ground Power Cart................................................................................. 4-7
After Engine Start with Ground Power Cart ............................................................................ 4-7
After Engine Start ..................................................................................................................... 4-8
Before Taxi ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
Taxiing...................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Before Takeoff.......................................................................................................................... 4-8
Minor Spark Plug Fouling ........................................................................................................ 4-9
Normal Takeoff ....................................................................................................................... 4-10
Short Field Takeoff.................................................................................................................. 4-10
Crosswind Operations.............................................................................................................. 4-10
Normal Climb .......................................................................................................................... 4-10
Maximum Performance Climb ................................................................................................ 4-10
Cruise....................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Descent .................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Approach.................................................................................................................................. 4-11
Before Landing ........................................................................................................................ 4-11
Normal Landing....................................................................................................................... 4-12
Short Field Landing ................................................................................................................. 4-12
Balked Landing........................................................................................................................ 4-12
After Landing........................................................................................................................... 4-12
Shutdown ................................................................................................................................. 4-12
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES ....................................................................................................... 4-13
Preflight Inspection.................................................................................................................. 4-13
Wing Flaps......................................................................................................................... 4-13
Aileron Servo Tab.............................................................................................................. 4-13
Rudder Limiter Test........................................................................................................... 4-13
Fuel Drains......................................................................................................................... 4-13
Fuel Vents.......................................................................................................................... 4-14
Fuel Selector ............................................................................................................................ 4-14
Fuel Quantity ........................................................................................................................... 4-14
Static Wicks ............................................................................................................................. 4-15
Before Starting Engine ............................................................................................................ 4-15
Fresh Air Vents.................................................................................................................. 4-15
Three Point Restraints (Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses) ............................................ 4-15
Child Restraints ................................................................................................................. 4-15
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-1
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Engine Starting.........................................................................................................................4-16
Normal Starting..................................................................................................................4-16
Under Priming....................................................................................................................4-16
Over Priming......................................................................................................................4-16
Passenger Briefing Card...........................................................................................................4-17
Control Position Versus Wind Component (Table) .................................................................4-18
Taxiing .....................................................................................................................................4-18
Before Takeoff .........................................................................................................................4-18
Engine Temperatures .........................................................................................................4-18
Engine Runup.....................................................................................................................4-18
Door Seals ..........................................................................................................................4-19
Takeoffs....................................................................................................................................4-19
Normal Takeoff..................................................................................................................4-19
Short Field Takeoff ............................................................................................................4-19
Crosswind Takeoff .............................................................................................................4-20
Normal and Maximum Performance Climbs ...........................................................................4-20
Best Rate of Climb Speeds.................................................................................................4-20
Cruise Climb ......................................................................................................................4-20
Best Angle of Climb Speeds ..............................................................................................4-20
Power Settings....................................................................................................................4-20
Cruise .......................................................................................................................................4-20
Flight Planning...................................................................................................................4-20
Basic Cruise and Cruise-Climb Performance Chart ..........................................................4-21
Mixture Settings.................................................................................................................4-21
Control by Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) ..............................................................4-21
Control by Fuel Flow ...................................................................................................4-21
Door Seals ..........................................................................................................................4-22
Inoperative Door Seal Dump Valve...................................................................................4-22
Descent.....................................................................................................................................4-22
Approach ..................................................................................................................................4-22
Landing ....................................................................................................................................4-23
Normal Landings................................................................................................................4-23
Short Field Landings..........................................................................................................4-23
Crosswind Landings...........................................................................................................4-23
Balked Landings ................................................................................................................4-23
Stalls.........................................................................................................................................4-24
Practicing Stalls..................................................................................................................4-24
Rudder Limiter Duty Cycle................................................................................................4-24
Loading and Stall Characteristics ......................................................................................4-24
Spins.........................................................................................................................................4-25
Cold Weather Operations.........................................................................................................4-25
Hot Weather Operations...........................................................................................................4-26
Noise Abatement......................................................................................................................4-27
RA050001
4-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
INTRODUCTION
Section 4 contains checklists for normal procedures. As mentioned in Section 3, the owner of
this handbook is encouraged to copy or otherwise tabulate the following normal procedures
checklists in a format that is usable under flight conditions. Plastic laminated pages printed on
both sides and bound together (if more than one sheet) are preferable. The first portion of
Section 4 contains various checklists appropriate for normal operations. The last portion of this
section contains an amplified discussion in a narrative format.
INDICATED AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL OPERATIONS
The speeds tabulated below (Figure 4-1), provide a general overview for normal operations and
are based on a maximum certificated gross weight of 3400 pounds. At weights less than
maximum certificated gross weight, the indicated airspeeds are different. The pilot should refer
to Section 5 for specific configuration data.
Takeoff
Normal Climb Out
Short Field Takeoff to 50 feet
Climb To Altitude
Normal (Best Engine Cooling)
Best Rate of Climb at Sea Level
Best Rate of Climb at 10,000 Feet
Best Angle of Climb at Sea Level
Best Angle of Climb at 10,000 Feet
Approach To Landing
Normal Approach
Normal Approach
Short Field Landing
Balked Landing (Go Around)
Apply Maximum Power
Apply Maximum Power
Flaps Setting
Airspeed
UP Position
Takeoff Position
106-115 KIAS
78 KIAS
Flaps Setting
Airspeed
Up Position
Up Position
Up Position
Up Position
Up Position
106-115 KIAS
106 KIAS
93 KIAS
80 KIAS
84 KIAS
Flaps Setting
Airspeed
Up Position
Down (Landing Position)
Down (Landing Position)
105-110 KIAS
80-85 KIAS
78 KIAS
Flaps Setting
Airspeed
Takeoff Position
Landing Position
Maximum Recommended Turbulent Air
Penetration Speed
3400 lbs. (1542 kg)
2500 lbs. (1134 kg)
Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity*
Takeoff
Landing
Flaps Setting
88 KIAS
80 KIAS
Airspeed
Up Position
Up Position
148 KIAS
127 KIAS
Flaps Setting
Airspeed
Takeoff Position
Landing Position
23 Knots
23 Knots
* The maximum demonstrated crosswind velocity assumes normal pilot technique and a wind with a fairly
constant velocity and direction. The maximum demonstrated crosswind component of 23 knots is not considered
limiting. See pages 4-10, 4-20, 4-23, and 5-6 for a discussion of techniques and a computation table.
(Figure 4-1)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
4-3
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
Figure 4-2 depicts the major inspection points, and the arrow shows the sequence for inspecting
each point. The inspection sequence in (Figure 4-2) runs in a clockwise direction; however, it does
not matter in which direction the pilot performs the preflight inspection so long as it is
systematic. The inspection should be initiated in the cockpit from the pilot’s side of the airplane.
(Figure 4-2)
Area 1 (The Cabin)
1. Pitot Tube Cover ― REMOVE AND STORE
2. Pilot’s Operating Handbook ⎯ AVAILABLE IN THE AIRPLANE
3. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Mixture ― SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
5. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
6. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO ON (Press right side of split rocker switch.)
7. Trim System Switch ⎯ CHECK SET TO THE ON POSITION
8. Flaps ⎯ SET TO LANDING POSITION
9. Trim Tabs ⎯ SET TO NEUTRAL
10. Fuel Quantity Indicators ⎯ CHECK FUEL QUANTITY
11. Fuel Annunciators ⎯ NOT ILLUMINATED (Set fuel selector valve to left and right tanks.)
12. Rudder Limiter ― PRESS TO TEST (See Amplified Discussion on page 4-13.)
13. Pitot Heat ⎯ ON, CHECK OPERATION (See Note and Warning that follows.)
14. Pitot Heat ― SET TO OFF
NOTE
The heated pitot housing should be warm to the touch in a minute or so, and
it should not be operated for more than one to two minutes when the
airplane is in the static condition. For this reason the operational check must
be performed out of sequence.
WARNING
The pitot heat can get extremely hot within one minute and care must be
used when touching the housing. The technique used for testing the hotness
of an iron should be employed.
RA050001
4-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Area 2 (Left Wing Flap, Trailing Edge and Wing Tip)
1. Flap ⎯ CHECK (Visually check for proper extension and security of hardware.)
2. Aileron ⎯ CHECK (Freedom of movement)
3. Left Wing Tie-down ⎯ REMOVE
4. Aileron Servo Tab ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
5. Static Wicks (2) ⎯ CHECK FOR INSTALLATION AND CONDITION
6. Wing Tip ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage; check security of position and anti-collision lights.)
Area 3 (Left Wing Leading Edge, Fuel Tank, Left Tire)
1. Leading Edge ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage.)
2. Fuel Vent ⎯ CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTIONS
3. Landing Light ⎯ CHECK (Look for lens cracks and check security.)
4. Fuel Quantity ⎯ CHECK VISUALLY AND SECURE FILLER CAP
5. Wing Fuel Drain ⎯ CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION (Preceding first flight of the day or
after refueling)
6. Left Main Strut and Tire ⎯ CHECK (Remove wheel chocks, check tire for proper inflation,
check gear strut for evidence of damage.)
7. Main Fuel Drain ⎯ CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION (Preceding first flight of the day or
after refueling)
Area 4 (Nose Section)
1. Engine Oil ⎯ CHECK LEVEL (Maintain between 6 and 8 quarts, and fill to 8 quarts for
extended flights.)
2. Engine Oil Filler Cap and Accessory Door ⎯ CAP AND ACCESSORY DOOR SECURE
3. Propeller and Spinner ⎯ CHECK (Look for nicks, security, and evidence of oil leakage.)
4. Nose Wheel Strut ⎯ CHECK INFLATION (Approximately 3 to 4 inch of chrome strut must
be visible.)
5. Nose Tire ⎯ CHECK (Remove wheel chocks, check tire for proper inflation.)
Area 5 (Right Wing Leading Edge, Fuel Tank, Right Tire)
1. Wing Fuel Drain ⎯ CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION (Preceding first flight of the day or
after refueling.)
2. Right Main Strut and Tire ⎯ CHECK (Remove wheel chocks, check tire for proper inflation,
check gear strut for evidence of damage.)
3. Leading Edge ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage.)
4. Fuel Quantity ⎯ CHECK VISUALLY AND SECURE FILLER CAP
5. Fuel Vent ⎯ CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTIONS
Area 6 (Right Wing Tip, Trailing Edge, Wing Flap, and Right Fuselage Area)
1. Wing Tip ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage; check security of position and anti-collision lights.)
2. Aileron ⎯ CHECK (freedom of movement)
3. Aileron Trim Tab ⎯ CHECK FOR NEUTRAL POSITION
4. Static Wicks (2) ⎯ CHECK FOR INSTALLATION AND CONDITION
5. Right Wing Tie-down ⎯ REMOVE
6. Flap ⎯ CHECK (Visually check for proper extension and security of hardware.)
7. Static Air Vent ⎯ CHECK FOR BLOCKAGE (Vent is located on right side of fuselage
between the cabin door and the horizontal stabilizer.)
8. Antennas Bottom of Fuselage ⎯ CHECK FOR SECURITY
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date:G/02-01-2002
RA050001
4-5
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Area 7 (Tail Section)
1. Leading Edge of Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage.)
2. Antennas Vertical Stabilizer ⎯ CHECK FOR SECURITY
3. Rudder/Elevator Hardware ⎯ CHECK (General condition and security)
4. Rudder Surface ⎯ CHECK (freedom of movement)
5. Elevator Surface ⎯ CHECK (freedom of movement)
6. Elevator Trim Tab ⎯ CHECK FOR NEUTRAL POSITION
7. Static Wicks (5) ⎯ CHECK FOR INSTALLATION AND CONDITION
8. Tail Tie-down ⎯ REMOVE
Area 8 (Aft Fuselage and Cabin)
1. Baggage Door ⎯ CHECK CLOSED AND LOCKED
2. Master Switch ― SET TO OFF
3. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ CHECK FOR PRESENCE, SECURITY, AND EXPIRATION DATE
4. Crash Ax/Hatchet – CHECK FOR PRESENCE AND SECURITY
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
1. Preflight Inspection ⎯ COMPLETE
2. Fresh Air Vents ⎯ AS REQUIRED (Close fresh air vents of unoccupied seats.)
3. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ SECURE (Stow all unused seat belts.)
4. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO LEFT OR RIGHT TANK
5. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
6. Auto Pilot ⎯ SET TO OFF
7. Brakes ⎯ TESTED AND SET
8. All Circuit Breakers ⎯ CHECK IN
9. Standby Battery ⎯ OFF AND SAFETY WIRED
CAUTION
There is a significant amount of electric current required to start the engine.
For this reason, the avionics master switch must be set to the OFF position
during starting to prevent possible serious damage to the avionics
equipment.
STARTING COLD ENGINE
1. Mixture Control ⎯ RICH
2. Propeller Control ⎯ SET TO HIGH RPM
3. Vapor Suppression ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. Induction Heated Air ⎯ SET TO THE OFF POSITION
5. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO CLOSED, THEN ADVANCE ABOUT ONE INCH
6. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO ON
7. Primer Pump ⎯ PUSH IN (About 7 seconds for a cold engine. Fuel Flow should read about
12 psi.; HOT ENGINE use vapor suppression or prime for 1-2 seconds.)
8. Throttle Control ⎯ CLOSED AND THEN OPEN ½ INCH
9. Check Propeller Area ⎯ CLEAR (Ensure people/equipment are not in the propeller area.)
10. Ignition Switch ⎯ TURN TO START POSITION
STARTING HOT ENGINE
1. Mixture Control ⎯ IDLE (AFT)
2. Propeller Control ⎯ SET TO HIGH RPM
3. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO CLOSED
4. Induction Heated Air ⎯ SET TO THE OFF POSITION
5. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO ON
RA050001
4-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
6. Vapor Suppression ⎯ SET TO ON 30 SEC
7. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO CLOSED, THEN ADVANCE ABOUT ¼ INCH
8. Check Propeller Area ⎯ CLEAR (Ensure people/equipment are not in the propeller area.)
9. Ignition Switch ⎯ TURN TO START POSITION
10. Mixture Control ⎯ ADVANCE WHEN ENGINE STARTS
NOTE
It may be necessary to leave the vapor suppression on during starting (steps
7 – 10) and turn it off about one minute after engine start.
NOTE
If the engine is only moderately warm it may be necessary to push the primer
switch for a few seconds before starting.
STARTING ENGINE WITH GROUND POWER CART
1. Master Switch ⎯ VERIFY OFF
2. Check Propeller Area ⎯ CLEAR (Ensure people/equipment are not in the propeller area.)
3. Auxiliary Power Plug ⎯ CONNECT POWER PLUG (Use a 12 volt DC source)
4. Aircraft Bus⎯ VERIFY POWERED UP (Do not turn on the BATT or ALT Switch.)
5. Mixture Control ⎯ RICH
6. Propeller Control ⎯ SET TO HIGH RPM
7. Vapor Suppression ⎯ SET TO OFF
8. Induction Heated Air ⎯ SET TO THE OFF POSITION
9. Throttle Control ⎯ SET TO CLOSED, THEN ADVANCE ABOUT ONE INCH
10. Primer Pump ⎯ PUSH IN (About 7 seconds for a cold engine. Fuel Flow should read about
12 psi.; HOT ENGINE use vapor suppression or prime for 1-2 seconds.)
11. Throttle Control ⎯ CLOSED AND THEN OPEN ½ INCH
12. Check Propeller Area ⎯ CLEAR (Ensure people/equipment are not in the propeller area.)
13. Ignition Switch ⎯ TURN TO START POSITION
CAUTION
If the engine starter is engaged for 30 seconds and the engine will not start, release
the starter switch, and allow the starter motor to cool for three to five minutes.
Release the starter as soon as the engine fires. Never engage the starter while the
propeller is still turning.
CAUTION
The master switch should not be turned on until after the engine has started and
the ground power plug has been removed.
AFTER ENGINE START WITH GROUND POWER CART
1. Throttle Control ⎯ ADJUST IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)
2. Oil Pressure ⎯ CHECK (Ensure the red oil pressure annunciator light is off and that the oil
pressure gauge reads between 30 to 60 psi.)
3. Disconnect Cart ⎯ MOTION LINE SERVICE TECHNICIAN TO DISCONNECT CART
FROM PLUG
4. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO ON
5. Ammeter ⎯ CHECK (Ensure the red alternator annunciator light is off and that the ammeter
is indicating the system is charging.)
6. Position and Anti-collision Lights ⎯ SET AS REQUIRED
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-7
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
7. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO ON
8. Radios and Required Avionics ⎯ SET AS REQUIRED
9. Before moving ⎯ CLEAR (Wait for line service technician to clear you to move.)
AFTER ENGINE START
1. Throttle Control ⎯ ADJUST IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)
2. Oil Pressure ⎯ CHECK (Ensure the red oil pressure annunciator light is off and that the oil
pressure gauge reads between 30 to 60 psi.)
3. Ammeter ⎯ CHECK (Ensure the red alternator annunciator light is off and that the ammeter
is indicating the system is charging.)
4. Position and Anti-collision Lights ⎯ SET AS REQUIRED
5. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO THE ON POSITION
6. Radios and Required Avionics ⎯ SET AS REQUIRED
CAUTION
If the engine starter is engaged for 30 seconds and the engine will not start,
release the starter switch and allow the starter motor to cool for three to five
minutes. Release the starter as soon as the engine fires. Never engage the
starter while the propeller is still turning.
BEFORE TAXI
1. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO UP (Cruise Position)
2. Radio Clearance ⎯ AS REQUIRED
3. Taxi Light ⎯ SET TO ON (As required)
4. HSI – SET TO THE SLAVED POSITION
5. Passenger Briefing Card ⎯ ADVISE PASSENGERS TO REVIEW
6. Brakes ⎯ RELEASE
TAXIING
1. Brakes ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
2. Turn Coordinator ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
3. Directional Gyro/HSI ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Run Up Position ⎯ MAXIMUM HEADWIND COMPONENT
2. Parking Brake/Foot Brakes ⎯ SET or HOLD
3. Flight Controls ⎯ FREE AND CORRECT
4. Trim Tabs ⎯ SET FOR TAKEOFF
5. Flight Instruments ⎯ SET (Ensure HSI is in the slave mode.)
6. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET OUT OF DETENT (Ensure that 2 seconds after the annunciator
illuminates the aural warning is played.)
7. Acknowledge Switch ⎯ PRESS OFF (Ensure aural warning stops.)
8. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO FULLER TANK
9. Autopilot Master Switch ⎯ READY POSITION (See Section 9 for preflight and functional
checks. The autopilot should be in the Ready state but not engaged.)
10. Cabin Doors ⎯ CLOSED AND LATCHED (Verify that red annunciator door light is off.)
11. Passenger Side Door Lock ⎯ IN THE UNLOCKED POSITION
12. Engine Runup ⎯ OIL TEMPERATURE CHECK (Above 75°F)
13. Throttle ⎯ SET TO 1700 RPM, CHECK MAGNETOS (50 RPM maximum difference with
a maximum drop of 150 RPM)
14. Magnetos ⎯ VERIFY SET TO BOTH
RA050001
4-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
15. Propeller ⎯ CHECK OPERATION (Cycle from high to low RPM two or three times.)
16. Engine Instruments and Ammeter ⎯ CHECK (Within proper ranges)
17. Vacuum Gauge ⎯ CHECK (4.5 to 5.2 inches Hg)
18. Throttle ⎯ SET TO IDLE (Adjust friction lock as required.)
19. Radios ⎯ SET
20. Wing Flaps ⎯ TAKEOFF POSITION
21. Transponder ⎯ SET
22. Doors ⎯ LATCHED AND DETENTED
23. Annunciator Panel ⎯ ALL LIGHTS OFF
24. Door Seals ⎯ ON
25. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ ARMED
26. Time ⎯ NOTED
27. Brakes ⎯ RELEASE
WARNING
The absence of RPM drop when checking magnetos may indicate a
malfunction in the ignition circuit resulting in a hot magneto, i.e., one that is
not grounding properly. Should the propeller be moved by hand (as during
preflight inspection) the engine might start and cause death or injury. This
type of malfunction must be corrected before operating the engine.
CAUTION
Do not underestimate the importance of pre-takeoff magneto checks. When
operating on single ignition, some RPM drop should always occur. Normal
indications are 25 to 75 RPM and a slight engine roughness as each magneto
is switched off. A drop in excess of 150 RPM may indicate a faulty magneto
or fouled spark plugs.
CAUTION
If conditions are such that pitot heat may be required, turn on the pitot heat
at least 5 minutes prior to takeoff.
MINOR SPARK PLUG FOULING (Minor plug fouling can usually be cleared as follows.)
1. Throttle/Brakes ⎯ HOLD BRAKES MANUALLY AND SET THROTTLE TO 2200 RPM
2. Mixture ⎯ ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE (Move towards idle cutoff until
RPM peaks, and hold for 10 seconds. Return mixture to full rich.)
3. Throttle ⎯ SET TO 1700 RPM
4. Magnetos ⎯ RECHECK (50 RPM difference with a maximum drop of 150 RPM)
5. Throttle ⎯ SET TO IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine at a speed of more than 2000 RPM longer than
necessary to test engine operations and observe engine instruments. Proper
engine cooling depends on forward speed. Discontinue testing if temperature
or pressure limits are approached.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-9
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NORMAL TAKEOFF
1. Landing/Taxi Lights ⎯ AS REQUIRED
2. Mixture ⎯ ADJUST AS REQUIRED
3. Power ⎯ SET THROTTLE CONTROL AND RPM TO FULL (2700 RPM)
4. Elevator Control ⎯ LIFT NOSE AT 70-75 KIAS
5. Climb Speed ⎯ BEST RATE OF CLIMB SPEED TO 115 KIAS
6. Wing Flaps ⎯ RETRACT (At 400 feet AGL, and at or above the best rate of climb speed)
7. Landing/Taxi Lights – OFF OR AS REQUIRED
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF (Complete Before Takeoff checklist first)
1. Wing Flaps ⎯ (TAKEOFF Position)
2. Brakes ⎯ APPLY
3. Power ⎯ SET THROTTLE CONTROL TO FULL (2700 RPM)
4. Mixture ⎯ ADJUST AS REQUIRED (High altitude airport operations may require leaning.)
5. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ ARMED
6. Brakes ⎯ RELEASE
7. Elevator Control ⎯ MAINTAIN LEVEL NOSE ATTITUDE
8. Rotate Speed ⎯ 65 KIAS (5º nose up pitch attitude)
9. Climb Speed ⎯ 78 KIAS (Until clear of obstacles)
10. Wing Flaps ⎯ RETRACT (At 400 feet AGL, and at or above the best rate of climb speed)
NOTE
If usable runway length is not affected, it is preferable to use a rolling start to
begin the takeoff roll as opposed to a standing start at full power. Otherwise,
position the airplane to use all the runway available.
CROSSWIND OPERATIONS
Crosswind takeoffs and landings require a special technique that is incorporated into the
checklist for normal takeoffs and landings and, as such, do not require a dedicated checklist.
Please see the amplified discussion on pages 4-20 and 4-23 for applicable crosswind techniques.
NOTE
If the cross control method is used during a crosswind approach, the
resulting slight sideslip causes the airspeed to read up to 5 kts higher or
lower, depending on the direction of the sideslip.
NORMAL CLIMB
1. Airspeed ⎯ Best rate of climb to 115 KIAS (See cruise climb discussion of page 4-20)
2. Power Settings ⎯ ADJUST AS NECESSARY (See amplified discussion.)
3. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO RIGHT OR LEFT TANK
4. Mixture ⎯ Adjust (Adjusted for increases in altitude per AFM/POH instructions)
5. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ ARMED
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMB
1. Airspeed ⎯ 106 to 93 KIAS (Sea level and 10,000 feet respectively)
2. Power Settings ⎯ 2700 RPM AND FULL THROTTLE
3. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO RIGHT OR LEFT TANK (as appropriate)
4. Mixture ⎯ NEAR OR AT FULL RICH (When climbing at VY or VX – see page 4-20)
5. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ ARMED
RA050001
4-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE
1. Throttle Control ⎯ SET AS APPROPRIATE (18 to 28 inches of Hg ⎯ Note: Above about
12,000, the maximum manifold pressure will be less than 18 inches of Hg)
2. Propeller Control ⎯ SET AS APPROPRIATE (2000 to 2700 RPM)
3. Mixture ⎯ LEAN AS REQUIRED (Use EGT gauge or performance charts in Section 5.)
4. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ NOT ARMED
5. Changing Fuel Tanks ⎯ PERFORM STEPS 5.1 AND 5.2.
5.1. Fuel Selector ⎯ CHANGE AS REQUIRED (Switch tanks every 45 to 60 minutes,
depending on fuel flow. The maximum permitted fuel imbalance is 10 gallons (38 L).)
5.2. Vapor Suppression ⎯ SET TO ON DURING FUEL TANK CHANGEOVERS
NOTE
The vapor suppression must be turned on before changing the selected fuel
tank. After proper engine operations are established, the pump is turned off.
When changing power the sequence control usage is important. To increase
power, first increase RPM with the propeller control and then increase
manifold pressure with the throttle control. To decrease power, decrease
manifold pressure first with the throttle control and then decrease RPM with
the propeller control.
DESCENT
1. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO RIGHT OR LEFT (as appropriate)
2. Power Settings ⎯ AS REQUIRED
3. Mixture ⎯ MOVE TO RICHER SETTING AS REQUIRED
4. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ NOT ARMED
APPROACH
1. GPS Raim/Map Integrity ⎯ VERIFIED
2. GPS OBS/SUSP ⎯ AS REQUIRED
3. GPS CDI Button ⎯ VLOC or GPS
4. Nav aids ⎯TUNED AND IDENTIFIED
5. Approach Course ⎯ SET
6. Altimeter ⎯ SET
7. Mixture ⎯ FULL RICH
NOTE
Passing FAF, new course may be needed.
BEFORE LANDING
1. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ SECURE (both pilot and passengers)
2. Mixture Control ⎯ SET AS REQUIRED FOR CONDITIONS
3. Fuel Selector Valve ⎯ SET TO RIGHT OR LEFT (as appropriate)
4. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ NOT ARMED
5. Propeller Control ⎯ SET TO HIGH RPM
6. Autopilot ⎯ SET TO OFF (if applicable)
7. Landing/Taxi Lights ⎯ AS REQUIRED
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-11
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NORMAL LANDING
1. Approach Airspeed ⎯ AS REQUIRED FOR CONFIGURATION
Flaps (Cruise Position) .....110 to 120 KIAS
Flaps (Takeoff Position) .....90 to 100 KIAS
Flaps (Landing Position) ......80 to 85 KIAS
2. Trim Tabs (2) ⎯ ADJUST AS REQUIRED
3. Touchdown ⎯ MAIN WHEELS FIRST
4. Landing Roll ⎯ GENTLY LOWER NOSE WHEEL
5. Braking ⎯ AS REQUIRED
SHORT FIELD LANDING (Complete Before Landing Checklist first)
1. Initial Approach Airspeed ⎯ 90 to 110 KIAS (depending on flap setting)
2. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ NOT ARMED
3. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO LANDING POSITION
4. Maximum Full Flap Airspeed ⎯ 119 KIAS
5. Minimum Approach Speed with Wing Flaps in Landing Position ⎯ 78 KIAS
6. Trim Tabs (2) ⎯ ADJUST AS REQUIRED
7. Power ⎯ REDUCE AT THE FLARE POINT
8. Touchdown ⎯ MAIN WHEEL FIRST
9. Landing Roll ⎯ LOWER NOSE WHEEL SMOOTHLY AND QUICKLY
10. Braking and Flaps ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING AND RETRACT FLAPS (Up position)
BALKED LANDING (Go Around)
1. Power ⎯ SET THROTTLE TO FULL (At 2700 RPM)
2. Airspeed ⎯ 80 KIAS
3. Climb ⎯ POSITIVE (Establish Positive Rate of Climb.
4. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO TAKEOFF POSITION
5. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO CRUISE AT BEST RATE OF CLIMB SPEED (more than 400 feet
above the surface)
6. Backup Boost Pump ⎯ SET TO ARM
AFTER LANDING
1. Wing Flaps ⎯ SET TO UP (Cruise Position)
2. Door Seal ⎯ SET TO THE OFF POSITION
3. Transponder ⎯ SET TO STANDBY
4. Time ⎯ NOTE
SHUTDOWN
1. Parking Brake ⎯ SET
2. Throttle ⎯ SET TO IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)
3. Autopilot ⎯ SET TO OFF
4. ELT ⎯ CHECK NOT ACTIVATED (Check before shutdown)
5. Trim Tabs (2) ⎯ SET ALL TO NEUTRAL
6. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF (Ensure FlightMonitor is ready for shutdown.)
7. All Electrical Equipment ⎯ SET TO OFF (Check that all rocker switches are down.)
8. Mixture ⎯ SET TO IDLE CUT OFF
9. Ignition Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF (after engine stops)
10. Master Switch ⎯ SET TO OFF
RA050001
4-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
The purpose of the preflight inspection is to ascertain that the airplane is physically capable of
completing the intended operation with a high degree of safety. The weather conditions, length
of flight, equipment installed, and daylight conditions, to mention a few, will dictate any special
considerations that should be employed.
For example, in cold weather, the pilot needs to remove even small accumulations of frost or ice
from the wings and control surfaces. Additionally, the hinging and actuating mechanism of each
control surface must be inspected for ice accumulation. If the flight is initiated in or will be
completed at nighttime, the operation of the airplane’s lighting system must be inspected. Flights
at high altitude have special oxygen considerations for the pilot and passengers. Clearly, a pilot
must consider numerous special issues depending on the circumstances and conditions of flight.
The preflight checklist provided in this handbook covers the minimum items that must be
considered. Other items must be included as appropriate, depending on the flight operations and
climatic conditions.
Wing Flaps - Extending the wing flaps as part of the preflight routine permits inspection of the
attachment and actuating hardware. The pilot can also roughly compare that the flaps are equally
extended on each side. The flaps are not designed to serve as a step. Stepping on the flaps places
unnatural loads in excess of their design and can cause damage. If the flaps are extended during
the preflight inspection, it is unlikely that an uninformed passenger will use them as a step.
Aileron Servo Tab – The aileron servo tab on the trailing edge of the left aileron assists in
movement of the aileron. The servo tab is connected to the aileron in a manner that causes the
tab to move in a direction opposite the movement of the aileron. The increased aerodynamic
force applied to the tab helps to move the aileron and reduces the level of required force to the
control stick. During the preflight inspection, it should be noted that movement of the aileron, up
or down, produces an opposite movement of the servo tab. When the aileron is in the neutral
position, the servo tab should be neutral.
Rudder Limiter Test – There is a press to test feature for the rudder limiter located on the trim
panel. This is the same switch that is used to verify operation of all LEDs associated with the
trim, flaps, fuel tank position, and annunciator panel. This test of the rudder limiter is done in the
cockpit during the preflight inspection. However, the test only confirms that the solenoid
operates when power is applied. It does not check the logic of the system and its interface with
the stall warning microswitch and the manifold pressure gauge. To verify operation of the total
system, the stall warning microswitch is held in the up position for two to three seconds. The
aural stall warning will be heard immediately followed by an audible “click” of the rudder
limiter solenoid. See page 7-47 for more information on the stall warning system.
Fuel Drains - The inboard section of each tank contains a fuel drain near the lowest point in
each tank. The fuel drain operates with a typical sampling device and can be opened
intermittently for a small sample or it can be locked open to remove a large quantity of fuel. The
accessory door for the gascolator/fuel strainer is located under the fuselage, on the left side, near
the wing saddle. It is a conventional drain device that operates by pushing up on the valve stem.
The access door in this area must be opened to access the gascolator.
During the preflight inspection, the fuel must be sampled from each drain before flying to check
for the proper grade of fuel, water contamination and fuel impurities. The test must be performed
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
4-13
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
before the first flight of the day and after each refueling. If the system has water contamination,
it will form as a bubble in the bottom of the collection reservoir while sediment appears as
floating specks. If fuel grades are mixed, the sample will be colorless. If contamination is
detected, continue to draw fuel until the samples are clear. If fuel grades were mixed, the entire
fuel system may require draining. See page 8-6 for an expanded discussion of fuel
contamination.
Fuel Vents – The airplane has a fuel vent for each wing tank. The vents are wedge shaped
recesses built into an inspection cover. They are located under each wing approximately five feet
inboard from the wing tip. The vents are installed to ensure that air pressure inside the tank is the
same as the outside atmospheric pressure. The vents should be open and free of dirt, mud, and
other types of clogging substances.
FUEL SELECTOR
The fuel system design does not favor the use of one fuel tank over the other. The various
checklists used in this manual specify “Set to Left or Right Tank.” During takeoff and landing
operations, it is recommended that the fuel selector be set to the fuller tank if there are no
compelling reasons to do otherwise. Under low fuel conditions, selecting the fuller tank may
provide a more positive fuel flow, particularly in turbulent air. The vapor suppression must be
operated while changing the selected fuel tank. However, switching the fuel tanks at low
altitudes above the ground is normally not recommended unless there is a compelling reason to
do otherwise.
When a tank is selected and the selector is properly seated in its detent, one of two green lights
on the left and right side of the fuel gauge illuminate to indicate which tank is selected. If a green
light is not illuminated, then the selector handle is not properly seated in the detent. In addition,
if the fuel selector is not seated or is in the Off position, a red FUEL VALVE indication is
displayed on the annunciator panel.
FUEL QUANTITY
The Columbia 300 fuel quantity measuring system described on page 7-35 provides a fairly
accurate indication of the onboard fuel. The system has two sensors in each tank, and flat spots
in the indicating system are minimized. Still, the gauges must never be used in place of a visual
inspection of each tank. A raised metal tab is installed in the bottom of each tank, directly below
the filler neck, which limits inadvertent damage to the bottom of the tank from a fuel nozzle.
If the level of the fuel barely covers this tab, the tank contains about 25 gallons (95 L) of fuel.
While this is not a certified fuel level, it does provide the pilot with an approximate indication of
fuel quantity. For, example, to carry about 50 gallons (189 L) of fuel on a particular flight, each
tank should be filled to the point that covers these tabs. However, since this level will vary from
airplane to airplane, the best procedure is to establish the precise quantity by having empty tanks
filled to the level of the tabs from a metered fuel supply. For fuel quantities above the level of
the tabs, a measuring stick can be made that indicates precise quantities.
Since the tab is directly below the filler hole, it is suggested that the measuring stick be placed
on these tabs when this procedure is used to determine fuel quantity. Of course, this means that it
is not possible to visually sample levels less than approximately 25 gallons (95 L). However,
setting sampling device in the tanks at an angle to avoid the tabs will skew indications on the
stick. If such a stick is made, it must be of sufficient length to preclude being dropped into the
tank.
RA050001
4-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Here are a few final suggestions regarding the measuring stick. (1) Marks on the stick should be
etched into the wood or labeled with a paint that is impermeable to aviation fuel. (2) Remember,
that sticking the tanks may not be a precise indication, and a margin for safety should be added.
(3) It is a good idea to make a reference mark at the top of the measuring device that indicates
the position of the top of the filler neck. If the reference mark on the stick goes below the tank
neck when it is inserted in the tank, the measuring stick is resting on the bottom of the tank,
rather than on the tab.
STATIC WICKS
The static wicks are designed to discharge accumulated static electricity created by the airplane’s
movement through the air. Because the Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG) cruises at higher speeds,
the wicks are the solid type with a carbon interior and a plastic exterior. The static wick can be
broken without obvious exterior indications. To check the wick’s integrity, hold its trailing edge
between the thumb and forefinger, and gently move it left and right about two inches. If the unit
flexes at point A as shown in (Figure 4-3), the wick is broken and should be replaced.
Point A
Trailing Edge
(Figure 4-3)
In some instances, the owners and/or operators prefer to remove the wicks after each flight to
prevent breakage during storage. If the wicks are removed, they must be reinstalled before each
flight. Flight without the wicks can cause the loss of, or problems with communications and
navigation. See Section 7, page 7-69 for more information.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
Fresh Air Vents – The fresh air eyeball vents for all unoccupied seats shall be closed when the
pilot is the only person in the airplane. This is because, in the event of a fire, all ventilation must
be turned off. Turning off inaccessible fresh air ventilation while attending to the demands of the
emergency makes the situation more difficult.
Three Point Restraints (Seat Belts & Shoulder Harnesses) – The pilot in command is usually
diligent about securing his or her restraint device; however, it is important to ensure that each
passenger has their belt properly fastened. The lower body restraints on all seats are adjustable.
However, they may not be similar to airline or automotive restraint devices. A passenger may
have the seat belt fastened but not properly adjusted. See page 7-14 for a detailed discussion. The
use of seat belts is also explained on the Passenger Briefing Card.
Stow the restraint devices on unoccupied seats to prevent fouling during emergency exiting of
the airplane. Unoccupied rear seat restraints should be drawn to the smallest size possible and
the male and female ends of the buckle engaged in the rear seat positions. The front seat
passenger restraint buckle must not be engaged, even if the seat is unoccupied.
Child Restraints – The use of seat belts and child restraint systems (car seats) for children and
infants is somewhat more complicated. The FAR’s state that a child may be held by an adult who
is occupying an approved seat, provided that the person being held has not reached his or her
second birthday and does not occupy or use any restraining device. If a restraining device is
used, the FAR’s require a type approved under one of the following conditions.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
4-15
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
1. Seats manufactured to U.S. standards between January 1, 1981, and February 25, 1985, must
bear the label: "This child restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal motor vehicle
safety standards."
2. Seats manufactured to U.S. standards on or after February 26, 1985, must bear two labels:
"This child restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal motor vehicle safety
standards" and "This restraint is certified for use in motor vehicles and aircraft" in red
lettering.
3. Seats that do not meet the above requirements must bear either a label showing approval of a
foreign government or a label showing that the seat was manufactured under the standards of
the United Nations.
Approved child restraint systems usually limit the maximum child weight and height to 40 lbs.
(18 kg) and 40 inches (102 cm), respectively. Placing higher weights in the seat exceed the
intended design of child restraint system, and the only alternative is use of a passenger seat
restraint. However, use of the diagonal torso restraint for a small child presents special issues
since the shoulder strap may not fit across the child’s shoulder and upper chest.
For a child under 55 inches (140 cm) tall, The Academy of Pediatrics (AOP) recommends the
use of a lap belt, and to put the shoulder strap behind the child. This is not as protective as an
adjustable lap/shoulder combination would be. In fact, use of the lap belt alone has been
associated with a number of different injuries. According to the AOP, the least desirable
alternative is to put the shoulder strap under one arm.
ENGINE STARTING
Normal Starting – Under normal conditions there should be no problems with starting the
engine. The most common pilot mistake is over priming of the engine. The engine is primed by
introducing fuel to the intake ports. The start should then be initiated immediately. As the engine
starts it is important to advance the throttle slowly to maintain the proper fuel-air mixture.
Abnormal atmospheric conditions require special procedures and techniques for starting the
airplane. Please refer to Warm and Cold Weather Operations later in this section, which begins
on page 4-25.
Under Priming – If the engine does not start in three or four revolutions of the propeller, the
engine may not be adequately primed. This condition is also characterized by seemingly normal
smokeless start of four or five revolutions of the propeller followed by a sudden stop, as though
the mixture were in idle cut off. When the engine first starts to quit, hold the primer switch on for
a few seconds until the engine runs smoothly. If this does not work, the cause of the excessively
lean mixture after starting may be related to an assortment of atmospheric conditions rather than
improper priming procedures. Repeat the starting procedure but allow a few extra seconds of
priming.
Over Priming – If the engine starts intermittently and is followed by puffs of black smoke, over
priming is the most likely cause. The black smoke means the mixture is too rich and the engine is
burning off the excess fuel. The condition also occurs in hot weather where the decreased air
density causes an excessive rich mixture. If this should happen, ensure that the auxiliary boost
pumps are off, set the mixture to idle cut off, advance the throttle to full, and restart the engine.
When the engine starts, advance the mixture to full rich and reduce the throttle setting to idle.
RA050001
4-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
CAUTION
Over priming can cause a flooded intake resulting in a hydrostatic lock and
subsequent engine malfunction or failure. If the engine is inadvertently or
accidentally over primed, allow all the fuel to drain from the intake manifold
before starting the engine.
PASSENGER BRIEFING CARD
There are a number of items with which the passengers must be familiar. These items can easily
be covered through use of the Passenger Briefing Cards that are included in the airplane as part
of the delivery package. It is recommended that passengers be advised of the briefing cards’
location before taxiing the airplane. This will provide ample time for the passengers to review
the cards before takeoff. The information contained on the briefing cards is shown below.
1. Seat Belt – Federal Aviation Regulations require each passenger to use the installed restraint
devices during taxi, takeoff, and landing. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.) Use
of the three-point restraint system is accomplished by grasping the male end of the buckle,
drawing the lap webbing and diagonal harness across the lower and upper torso, and
inserting it into the female end of the buckle. There is a distinctive snap when the two parts
are properly connected. To release the belt, press the red button on the female portion of the
buckle.
2. Seat Belt and Harness Adjustment – Adjusting two devices in the lap-webbing loop varies
the length of the lap belt. One end of the adjustment loop contains a dowel, and the other has
a small strap. Draw the dowel and strap together to enlarge the lap belt size, and draw them
apart to tighten the lap belt. The upper torso restraints are connected to an inertia reel and no
adjustment is required.
3. Headsets – If there are headsets for the passenger seating positions, their use is
recommended. Comfort is enhanced in terms of noise fatigue, and the use of headsets
facilitates intercom communications. To use the voice-activated microphone, position the
boom mike about one quarter of an inch from the mouth, and speak in a normal voice.
4. Emergency Exit Procedures (Cabin Doors) – In most emergencies, the cabin doors are
used for exiting the airplane. The interior door handles are located near the bottom-aft
portion of the cabin doors. To open a door, pull the handle away from the door and lift up
until the handle is slightly past the horizontal position. There are placards on the interior
doors labeled “Open” and “Closed” with direction arrows.
5. Crash Ax/Hatchet – A crash ax is located under the pilot’s seat for use in the event the
normal cabin and the emergency door releases are inoperable. To use the ax, open the Velcro
fastener and remove the ax from its sheath. It generally works best to strike the edge of the
window near the doorframe. Several smart blows to the window area around the perimeter of
the doorframe will remove enough pieces so that the middle portion of the window can be
removed with a few heavy blows. Once the major portion of the window is removed and if
time and circumstances permit, use the ax blade to smooth down the jagged edges around the
doorframe. This will minimize injury when exiting the airplane through the window.
6. Oxygen System Operation – If the airplane is equipped with an oxygen system, the pilot
will notify you when use of oxygen is required. The pilot will explain use of the equipment
and applicable emergency procedures.
7. No Smoking – There is no smoking permitted in the airplane, no ashtrays are provided for
smoking, and the airplane is not certified as such. It is a violation of Federal Aviation
Regulations to smoke in this airplane. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
4-17
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CONTROL POSITIONS VERSUS WIND COMPONENT
The airplane is stable on the ground. The low wing design minimizes the tipping tendency from
strong winds while taxiing. Still, the proper positioning of control surfaces during taxiing will
improve ground stability in high wind conditions. The following table, (Figure 4-4), summarizes
control positions that should be maintained for a given wind component.
Wind Component
Aileron Position
Elevator Position
Left
Left Wing Aileron Up
Neutral
Quartering Headwind
(Move Aileron Control to the Left)
Hold Elevator Control in Neutral Position
Right
Right Wing Aileron Up
Neutral
Quartering Headwind
(Move Aileron Control to the Right)
Hold Elevator Control in Neutral Position
Left
Left Wing Aileron Down
Down Elevator
Quartering Tailwind
(Move Aileron Control to the Right)
(Move Elevator Control Forward)
Right
Right Wing Aileron Down
Down Elevator
Quartering Tailwind
(Move Aileron Control to the Left)
(Move Elevator Control Forward)
(Figure 4-4)
TAXIING
The first thing to check during taxiing is the braking system. This should be done a few moments
after the taxi roll is begun. Apply normal braking to verify that both brakes are operational. The
operation of the turn coordinator and directional gyro can be checked during taxiing provided
enough time has elapsed for the instruments to become stable, normally 2 to 3 minutes. Make a
few small left and right S-turns, and check the instruments for proper operation.
When taxiing, minimize the use of the brakes. Since the airplane has a free castoring nose wheel,
steering is accomplished with light braking. Avoid the tendency to ride the brakes by making
light steering corrections as required and then allowing the feet to slide off the brakes and the
heels to touch the floor. Avoid taxiing in areas of loose gravel, small rocks, etc., since it can
cause abrasion and damage to the propeller. If it is necessary to taxi in these areas, maintain low
propeller speeds. If taxiing from a hard surface through a small area of gravel, obtain momentum
before reaching the gravel.
The aircraft should never be taxied while the doors are in the full up position. The doors may be
opened 6 to 8 inches during taxi, which can be controlled by grasping the arm rest.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
Engine Temperatures – The control of engine temperatures is an important consideration when
operating the airplane on the ground. The efficient aerodynamic design and closely contoured
cowling around the engine maximizes cooling in flight. However, care must be used to preclude
overheating during ground operations. Before starting the engine runup check, be sure the
airplane is aligned for the maximum headwind component. Conversely, when the ambient
temperature is low, time may be needed for temperatures to reach normal operating ranges. Do
not attempt to run up the engine until the oil temperature reaches 75°F (24°C).
Engine Runup – The engine runup is performed at 1700 RPM. To check the operation of the
magnetos, move the ignition switch first to the L position and note the RPM drop. Return the
RA050001
4-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
switch to the BOTH position and then move the switch to the R position to check the RPM drop.
Return the switch to the BOTH position. The difference between the magnetos when operated
individually cannot exceed 50 RPM, and the maximum drop on either magneto cannot be greater
than 150 RPM.
To check the propeller operation, move the propeller control to the low RPM position for a few
seconds until a 300 to 500 RPM drop is registered on the tachometer. Return the propeller
control to the high RPM position and ensure that engine speed returns to 1700 RPM. Repeat this
procedure two or three times to circulate warm oil into the propeller hub.
While the engine is set to 1700 RPM, check the engine instruments to verify that all indications
are within normal limits. If the flight is to be conducted under IFR conditions or during periods
of darkness, the output of the alternator should be checked. This can be done by temporarily
loading the electrical system. To do this, turn on the taxi and landing lights. After a few seconds,
the ammeter should stabilize with a positive charge but at a slightly lower reading.
Door Seals – Normally, the door seal switch remains in the On position for the entire flight. If
the system pressure drops below 12 psi, the air pump will cycle on until pressure is restored. If
the pump runs continuously, it is an indication that a seal is damaged and incapable of holding
pressure. In this situation, the door seal system should not be operated until repairs are made.
TAKEOFFS
Normal Takeoff – In all takeoff situations, the primary consideration is to ascertain that the
engine is developing full takeoff power. This is normally checked in the initial phase of the
takeoff run. The engine should operate smoothly and provide normal acceleration. The engine
RPM should read 2700 RPM and the manifold pressure should be near anticipated output. At
high altitudes and/or abnormally high ambient temperatures, the mixture may need adjustment to
produce maximum takeoff power. This should be done just before or during the takeoff run.
With the engine set to full power, lean the mixture as required to eliminate engine roughness.
When the airplane is established in a normal climb and clear of the airport, adjust the mixture as
required according to the instructions on page 4-21.
Avoid the tendency to ride the brakes by making light steering corrections as required and then
allowing the feet to slide off the brakes and the heels to touch the floor. For normal takeoffs (not
short field) on surfaces with loose gravel and the like, the rate of throttle advancement should be
slightly less than normal. While this extends the length of the takeoff run somewhat, the
technique permits the airplane to obtain momentum at lower RPM settings, which reduces the
potential for propeller damage. Using this technique ensures that the propeller blows loose gravel
and rocks aft of the propeller blade. Rapid throttle advancement is more likely to draw gravel
and rocks into the propeller blade.
Short Field Takeoff – The three major items of importance in a short field takeoff are
developing maximum takeoff power, maximum acceleration, and utilization of the entire runway
available. Be sure the mixture is properly set for takeoff if operating from a high altitude airport.
During the takeoff run, do not raise the nose wheel too soon since this will impede acceleration.
Finally, use the entire runway that is available; that is, initiate the takeoff run at the furthest
downwind point available. Use a rolling start if possible, provided doing so does not affect
usable runway. If a rolling start is practicable, any necessary mixture adjustment should be made
just before initiating the takeoff run.
The flaps are set to the takeoff position. After liftoff, maintain the best angle of climb speed (80
to 84 KIAS at sea level and 10,000 MSL, respectively) until the airplane is clear of all obstacles.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
4-19
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Once past all obstacles, accelerate to the best rate of climb speed (106 KIAS) and raise the flaps.
If no obstacles are present, accelerate the airplane to the best rate of climb speed and raise the
flaps when at a safe height above the ground.
Crosswind Takeoff – Crosswind takeoffs should be made with takeoff flaps. When the take off
run is initiated, the aileron is fully deflected into the wind. As the airplane accelerates and
control response becomes more positive, the aileron deflection should be reduced as necessary.
Accelerate the airplane to approximately 75 knots and then quickly lift the airplane off the
ground. When airborne, turn the airplane into the wind as required to maintain alignment over
the runway and in the climb out corridor. Maintain the best angle of climb speed (80 KIAS) until
the airplane is clear of all obstacles. Once past all obstacles, accelerate to the best rate of climb
speed (106 KIAS); at or above 400 feet AGL, raise the flaps.
NORMAL AND MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMBS
Best Rate of Climb Speeds – The normal climb speed of the airplane, 106 to 115 KIAS,
produces the most altitude gain in a given time period while allowing for proper engine cooling
and good forward visibility. This airspeed range is above the actual best rate of climb airspeed
(VY) of 106 KIAS at sea level to 93 KIAS at 10,000 feet. The best rate of climb airspeed is used
in situations which require the most altitude gain in a given time period, such as after takeoff
when an initial 2,000 feet or so height above the ground is desirable as a safety buffer. In another
situation, ATC might require the fastest altitude change possible. The mixture should be well
rich of peak, near best power or at full rich if high CHT indications are experienced.
Cruise Climb – Climbing at speeds above 115 KIAS is preferable, particularly when climbing to
higher altitudes, i.e., those that require more than 6,000 feet of altitude change. A 500 FPM rate
climb at cruise power provides better forward visibility and engine cooling. In addition, a normal
leaning schedule can be employed, which lowers fuel consumption.
Best Angle of Climb Speeds – The best angle of climb airspeed (VX) for the airplane is 80
KIAS at sea level to 84 KIAS at 10,000 feet, with flaps in the up position. The best angle of
climb airspeed produces the maximum altitude change in a given distance and is used in a
situation where clearance of obstructions is required. When using the best angle of climb
airspeed, the rate at which the airplane approaches an obstruction is reduced, which allows more
space in which to climb. For example, if a pilot is approaching the end of a canyon and must gain
altitude, the appropriate VX speed should be used. Variations in the VX and VY speeds from sea
level to 10,000 feet are more or less linear, assuming ISA conditions. This equates to
approximately 1.3 knots/1000 feet reduction in the VY speed and about 0.4 knots/1000 increase
in the VX speed.
Power Settings – Use maximum continuous power until the airplane reaches a safe altitude
above the ground. Ensure the propeller RPM does not exceed the red line limitation. When the
airplane is a safe altitude above the ground, power should be reduced to at least 80% of BHP.
When changing power the sequence control usage is important. To decrease power, decrease
manifold pressure first with the throttle control and then decrease RPM with the propeller
control. The traditional practice of initially squaring power settings (for example, 25” MAP and
2500 RPM) is an acceptable procedure. If operating from an airport that is significantly above
sea level elevation, no adjustment to manifold pressure may be necessary.
CRUISE
Flight Planning – Several considerations are necessary in selecting a cruise airspeed, power
setting, and altitude. The primary issues are time, range, and fuel consumption. High cruise
RA050001
4-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
speeds shorten the time en route, but at the expense of decreased range and increased fuel
consumption.
BASIC CRUISE AND CRUISE-CLIMB PERFORMANCE CHART
WARNING THIS TABLE CANNOT BE USED FOR FLIGHT PLANNING
Altitude
60%
Power
70%
Power
80%
Power
2000 ft.
4000 ft.
6000 ft.
8000 ft.
10,000 ft.
Fuel Consumption (GPH)
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
Range (nm - no reserve)
1360
1375
1395
1420
1430
True Airspeed (Knots)
157
159
161
164
165
Fuel Consumption (GPH)
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
Range (nm - no reserve)
1095
1120
1135
1145
True Airspeed (Knots)
169
173
175
177
Fuel Consumption (GPH)
17.2
17.2
17.2
17.2
Range (nm - no reserve)
980
995
1050
1080
True Airspeed (Knots)
172
175
185
190
(Figure 4-5)
Cruising at higher altitudes increases true airspeed and improves fuel consumption, but the time
and fuel used to reach the higher cruise altitude must be considered. Clearly, numerous factors
are weighed to determine what altitude, airspeed, and power settings are optimal for a particular
flight. Section 5 in this manual contains detailed information to assist the pilot in the flight
planning process.
In general, the airplane cruises at 60% to 80% of available power. The previous table, (Figure 45) is provided as a broad overview of how power settings and altitude affect true airspeed, range,
and fuel consumption. The chart is based on standard temperatures for a particular altitude. This
table is not intended for flight planning purposes. Refer to Section 5 for specific information.
Mixture Settings – In cruise flight and cruise climb, care is needed to ensure that engine
instrument indications are maintained within normal operating ranges. After reaching the desired
altitude and engine temperatures stabilize (usually within five minutes), the mixture must be
adjusted. Two methods can be used to establish the optimum mixture setting.
1. Control by Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) – First, adjust the RPM and manifold
pressure (MP) to the desired setting. Next, slowly move the mixture control toward the lean
position while observing the EGT gauge. Note the point at which the temperature peaks or
starts to drop as the mixture is leaned further. At settings between 65% and 75% power,
advance the mixture control towards rich (clockwise) until the EGT is 50ºF (10ºC) richer
than the peak. At cruise settings below 65%, the engine can be operated at 50ºF (10ºC) lean
of peak EGT. Once the desired EGT is determined, set the movable needle on the EGT gauge
to that setting.
2. Control by Fuel Flow – First, adjust the RPM and MP to the desired cruise setting. Next,
refer to fuel flow charts in Section 5 and determine the optimum fuel flow for the cruise
altitude and temperature. (Be sure to account for nonstandard temperature conditions.)
Adjust the mixture setting towards the lean position until the applicable fuel flow is obtained.
3. If the power setting is above 80% of BHP, the mixture must only be adjusted if engine
roughness is experienced.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
4-21
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to adjust the mixture by using EGT at a setting above 75% of
maximum power. To prevent detonation, when increasing power, enrich
mixture, advance RPM, and adjust throttle setting, in that order. When
reducing power, retard throttle, then adjust RPM and mixture.
Door Seals – Normally, the door seal switch remains in the On position for the entire flight. If
the system pressure drops below 12 psi, the air pump will cycle on until pressure is restored. If
the pump runs continuously, it is an indication that a seal is damaged and incapable of holding
pressure. In this situation, the door seal system should not be operated until repairs are made.
Inoperative Door Seal Dump Valve – If the door seal dump valve should fail, the door seal
system can still be operated. However, the door seals must not be turned on until after takeoff
and must be turned off before landing. This procedure ensures rapid egress from the airplane in
an emergency situation. Moreover, opening the doors with the seals inflated can damage the
inflatable gaskets. For more information on the door seals and dump valve refer to page 7-16.
DESCENT
The primary considerations during the descent phase of the flight are to maintain the engine
temperatures within normal indications and to systematically increase mixture settings as altitude
is decreased. The descent from altitude is best performed through gradual power reductions and
gradual enrichment of the mixture. Avoid long descents at low manifold pressure as the engine
can cool excessively and may not accelerate properly when power is reapplied.
The fuel pump switch should only be in the “armed” position for takeoff and climb. It should be
off for descent and landing; during very low power operation and improper fuel system setup it
may be possible that the fuel pressure will drop below the 5.5 psi limit at which time the fuel
pump will come on. If this happens, the engine will flood and quit.
If power must be reduced for long periods, set the propeller to the minimum low RPM setting
and adjust manifold pressure as required to maintain the desired descent. If the outside air
temperature is extremely cold, it may be necessary to add drag to the airplane by lowering the
flaps so that additional power is needed to maintain the descent airspeed. Do not permit the
cylinder head temperature to drop below 240°F (116°C) for more than five minutes.
WARNING
During longer descents it is imperative that the pilot occasionally clear the
airplane’s engine by application of partial power. This helps keep the engine
from over cooling and verifies that power is available. If the engine quits
during a glide, there is no positive instrument indication or annunciation of
this condition, and with power reduced, there is no aural indication.
APPROACH
On the downwind leg adjust power to maintain 110 KIAS to 120 KIAS with the flaps retracted.
When opposite the landing point, reduce power, set the flaps to the takeoff position, and reduce
speed to about 90 KIAS. On the base leg, set the flaps to the landing position, and reduce speed
to 85 or 90 KIAS. Be prepared to counteract the ballooning tendency which occurs when full
flaps are applied. On final approach, maintain airspeed of 80 to 85 KIAS depending on
crosswind
RA050001
4-22
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
condition and/or landing weight. Reduce the indicated airspeed to 80 knots as the touchdown
point is approached.
CAUTION
At the forward CG limit, slowing below 80 KIAS prior to the flare with idle
power and full flaps, will create a situation of limited elevator authority; an
incomplete flare may result.
LANDINGS
Normal Landings – Landings under normal conditions are performed with the flaps set to the
landing position. The landing approach speed is 80 to 85 KIAS depending on gross weight and
wind conditions. The approach can be made with or without power; however, power should be
reduced to idle before touchdown. The use of forward and sideslips are permitted if required to
dissipate excess altitude. Remember that the slipping maneuver will increase the stall speed of
the airplane, and a margin for safety should be added to the approach airspeed.
The landing attitude is slightly nose up so that the main gear touches the ground first. After
touchdown, the back-pressure on the elevator should be released slowly so the nose gear gently
touches the ground. Brakes should be applied gently and evenly to both pedals. Avoid skidding
the tires or holding brake pressure for sustained periods.
Short Field Landings – In a short field landing, the important issues are to land just past the
beginning of the runway at minimum speed. The initial approach should be made at 85 to 90
KIAS and reduced to 80 KIAS when full flaps are applied. A low-power descent, from a slightly
longer than normal final approach, is preferred. It provides more time to set up and establish the
proper descent path. If there is an obstacle, cross over it at 78 KIAS. Maintain a power on
approach until just prior to touchdown. Do not extend the landing flare; rather, allow the airplane
to land in a slight nose up attitude on the main landing gear first. Lower the nose wheel smoothly
and quickly, and apply heavy braking. However, do not skid the tires. Braking response is
improved if the flaps are retracted after touchdown.
Crosswind Landings – When landing in a strong crosswind, use a slightly higher than normal
approach speed and avoid the use of landing flaps unless required because of runway length. If
practicable, use a 85 to 90 KIAS approach speed with the flaps in the takeoff position. A power
descent, from a slightly longer than normal final approach, is preferred. It provides more time to
set up and establish the proper crosswind compensation. Maintain runway alignment either with
a crab into the wind, a gentle forward slip (upwind wing down), or a combination of both. Touch
down on the upwind main gear first by holding aileron into the wind. As the airplane decelerates,
increase the aileron deflection. Apply braking as required. Raising the flaps after landing will
reduce the lateral movement caused by the wind, and also improves braking.
Sideslipping the airplane will cause the airspeed to read up to 5 kts higher or lower, depending
on the direction of the sideslip. This occurs because the static air source for the airplane is only
on one side of the fuselage.
Balked Landing – In a balked landing or a go-around, the primary concerns are to maximize
power, minimize drag, and establish a climb. Initiate a go-around by the immediate but smooth
full application of power. If the flaps are in the landing position, reduce them to the takeoff
positions once a positive rate of climb is established at 80 KIAS. Increase speed to 88 KIAS and
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-23
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
continue to accelerate to VY. When the airplane is a safe distance above the surface and at 106
KIAS or higher, retract the flaps to the up position and arm the backup boost pump.
STALLS
Practicing Stalls – For unaccelerated stalls (a speed decrease of one knot/second or less), the
stall recovery should be initiated at the first indication of the stall or the so-called “break” that
occurs while in the nose high pitch position. A drop in attitude that cannot be controlled or
maintained with the elevator control normally indicates this break.
There are fairly benign stall characteristics when the airplane is loaded with a forward CG. In
most cases, there is not a discernable break even though the control stick is in the full back
position. In this situation, after two seconds of full aft stick application, stall recovery should be
initiated. To recover from a stall, simultaneously release back-pressure and apply full power;
then level the wings with the coordinated application of rudder and aileron.
Accelerated stalls can occur at higher-than-normal airspeeds due to abrupt and/or excessive
control applications. These stalls may occur in steep turns, pull-ups, or other abrupt changes in
flight path. Accelerated stalls usually are more severe than unaccelerated stalls and are often
unexpected because they occur at higher-than-normal airspeeds. The recovery from accelerated
stalls (a speed change of three to five knots/second) is essentially the same as unaccelerated
stalls. The primary difference is the indicated stall speed is usually higher and the airplane’s
attitude may be lower than normal stalling attitudes.
Stalling speeds, of course, are controlled by flap settings, center of gravity location, gross
weight, and the rate of change in angle of attack. A microswitch in the left wing, which sounds
an aural warning, is actuated when the critical angle of attack is approached. Stall speed data at
various configurations are detailed on page 5-5.
Rudder Limiter Duty Cycle – The rudder limiter (RL) is an integral part of the stall warning
system. During stall practice, the rudder limiter is activated during all power on stalls, and
extensive operation of the system can cause overheating of the RL solenoid. The solenoid has a
15% duty cycle, which means that within a given time period, the system can be engaged only
15% of the time and at rest 85% of the time for cooling. In the period of one minute this works
out to nine seconds engaged and 51 seconds at rest, or approximately one power on stall per
minute.
Loading and Stall Characteristics – The center of gravity location and lateral fuel imbalance
affects the airplane’s stall handling characteristics. It was noted above that stall characteristics
are docile with a forward CG. However, as the center of gravity moves aft, the stall handling
characteristics, in terms of lateral stability, will deteriorate. On the Columbia 300, it is
particularly noticeable at higher power settings with flaps in the landing position. Lateral loading
is also an issue, particularly with an aft CG. When the airplane as at the maximum permitted fuel
imbalance of 10 gallons, stall handling characteristics are degraded.
The loading of the airplane is an important consideration since, for example, most checkouts are
performed with two pilots and no baggage, which results in a forward CG and fairly benign stall
characteristics. It is recommended, during the checkout and indoctrination phase for the
Columbia 300 LC40-550FG, that the pilots investigate stall performance at near gross weight
with a CG towards the aft limit of the envelope. This training, of course, should be under the
supervision of a qualified and certificated flight instructor.
RA050001
4-24
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
SPINS
The airplane, as certified by the FAA, is not approved for spins of any duration. During the flight
test phase of the airplane’s certification, spins and/or spin recovery techniques were not
performed or demonstrated. It is not known if the airplane will recover from a spin
WARNING
Do not attempt to spin the airplane under any circumstances. The airplane,
as certified by the Federal Aviation Agency, is not approved for spins of any
duration. During the flight test phase of the airplane’s certification, spins
were not performed. It is not known if the airplane will recover from a spin.
COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS
Engine starting during cold weather is generally more difficult than during normal temperature
conditions. These conditions, commonly referred to as “cold soaking,” causes the oil to become
more viscous or thicker. Cold weather also impairs the operation of the battery. The thick oil, in
combination with decreased battery effectiveness, makes it more difficult for the starter to crank
the engine. At low temperatures, aviation gasoline does not vaporize readily, further
complicating the starting procedure.
CAUTION
Superficial application of preheat to a cold-soaked engine can cause damage
to the engine since it may permit starting but will not warm the oil
sufficiently for proper lubrication of the engine parts. The amount of damage
will vary and may not be evident for several hours of operation. In other
situations, a problem may occur during or just after takeoff when full power
is applied.
The use of a preheater is required to facilitate starting during cold weather and is required when
the engine has been cold soaked at temperatures of 25°F (-4°C) or below for more than two
hours. Be sure to use a high volume hot air heater. Small electric heaters that are inserted into the
cowling opening do not appreciably warm the oil and may result in superficial preheating.
Apply the hot air primarily to the oil sump, filter, and cooler area for 15 to 30 minutes, and turn
the propeller by hand through six to eight revolutions at 5 to 10 minute intervals. Periodically
feel the top of the engine, and when some warmth is noted, apply heat directly to the upper
portion of the engine for five minutes to heat the fuel lines and cylinders. This will ensure proper
vaporization of the fuel when the engine is started. Start the engine immediately after completing
the preheating process. Since the engine is warm, use the normal starting procedures.
WARNING
To prevent the possibility of serious injury or death, always treat the
propeller as though the ignition switch is set to the on position. Before
turning the propeller by hand, use the following procedures. Verify the
magnetos switch is set to off, the throttle is closed, and the mixture is set to
idle cut off. It is recommended the airplane be chocked, tied down, with the
pilot’s cabin door open to allow easy access to the engine controls.
After starting the engine, set the idle to 1000 RPM or less until an increase in oil temperature is
noted. Monitor oil pressure closely, and watch for sudden increases or decreases in oil pressure.
If necessary, reduce power below 1000 RPM to maintain oil pressure below 100 psi. If the oil
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-25
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
pressure drops suddenly to below 30 psi, shut the engine down, and inspect the lubricating
system. If no damage or leaks are noted, preheat the engine for an additional 10 to 15 minutes.
Before takeoff, when performing the runup check, it may be necessary to incrementally increase
engine RPM to prevent oil pressure from exceeding 100 psi. At 1700 RPM, adjust the propeller
control to the full decrease position until minimum RPM is observed. Repeat this procedure
three or four times to circulate warm oil into the propeller dome. Check magnetos and other
items in the normal manner. When the oil temperature has reached 100°F and oil pressure does
not exceed 70 psi at 2500 RPM, the engine has warmed sufficiently to accept full rated power.
During takeoff and climb, the fuel flow may be high; however, this is normal and desirable since
the engine will develop more horsepower in the substandard ambient temperatures.
NOTE
In cold weather below freezing, ensure engine oil viscosity is SAE 30, 10W30,
15W50, or 20W50. In case of temporary cold weather, consideration should
be given to hangaring the airplane between flights.
The pitot tube housing contains a heating element to heat the pitot tube in the event icing
conditions are encountered in flight. Do not fly in conditions which may require the use of pitot
heat if the temperature is below 15°F (-9°C). If conditions are such that pitot heat may be
required, turn on the pitot heat at least 5 minutes prior to takeoff.
HOT WEATHER OPERATIONS
Flight operations during hot weather usually present few problems. It is unlikely that ambient
temperatures at the selected cruising altitude will be high enough to cause problems. The
airplane design provides good air circulation under normal flight cruise conditions. However,
there are some instances where abnormally high ambient temperatures need special attention.
These are:
1. Starting a hot engine
2. Ground operations under high ambient temperature conditions
3. Takeoff and initial climb out.
After a hot engine is stopped, the temperature of its various components begins to stabilize.
Engine parts with good airflow will cool faster. In some areas, where conduction is high and
circulation is low, certain engine parts will increase in temperature. In particular, the fuel
injection components (especially the fuel injection pump) will become heat-soaked and may
cause the fuel in the system to become vaporized.
During subsequent starting attempts the fuel pump will be pumping a combination of fuel and
fuel vapor. Until the entire system is filled with liquid fuel, difficult starting and unstable engine
operations can normally be expected. To correct this problem, set the fuel selector to either tank,
close the throttle, set the mixture to idle cutoff, and operate the primer for 15 to 20 seconds.
Ensure that the vapor suppression and backup boost pumps are off, and perform a normal start.
Ground operations during high ambient temperature conditions should be kept to a minimum. In
situations which involve takeoff delays, or when performing the Before Takeoff Checklist, it is
imperative that the airplane is pointed into the wind. During climb out, it may be necessary to
climb at a slightly higher than normal airspeed. Be sure the mixture is set properly, and do not
operate at maximum power for any longer than necessary. Temperatures should be closely
monitored and sufficient airspeed maintained to provide cooling of the engine.
RA050001
4-26
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 4
Normal Procedures
NOTE
Heat soaking is usually the highest between 30 minutes and one hour after
shutdown. At some point after the first hour the unit will stabilize, though it
may take as long as two or three hours (total time from shutdown)
depending on wind, temperature, and the airplane’s orientation (upwind or
downwind) when it was parked. Restarting attempts will be most difficult in
the period 30 minutes to one hour after shutdown.
NOISE ABATEMENT
Many general aviation pilots believe that noise abatement is an issue reserved for the larger
transport type airplanes. While larger airplanes clearly generate a greater decibel level, the pilot
operating a small single or multiengine propeller driven airplane should, within the limits of safe
operations, do all that is possible to mitigate the impact of noise on the environment. In some
instances, the noise levels of small airplanes operating at smaller general aviation airfields are
more noticeable. This is because at larger airports with frequent large airplane activity, there is
an expectation of airplane ambient noise.
The general aviation pilot can enhance the opinion of the general public by demonstrating a
concern for the environment in terms of noise pollution. To this end, common sense and
courteousness should be used as basic guidelines. Part 91 of the Federal Air Regulations (FAR’s)
permit an altitude of 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle over congested areas (U.S. operating
rules do not apply in Canada). However, an altitude of 2,000, where practicable and within the
limits of safety, should be used. Similarly, during the departure and approach phases of the
flight, avoid prolonged flight at lower heights above the ground. At airports where there are
established noise abatement procedures in the takeoff corridor, the short field takeoff procedure
should be used. This is a courteous thing to do even though the noise abatement procedure might
be applicable only to turbine-powered aircraft. The certificated level for the Columbia 300
(LC40-550FG) at 3400 lbs. (1542 kg) gross weight is 85.0 dB(A), which is the maximum
permitted level. The FAA has made no determination that these noise levels are acceptable or
unacceptable for operations at any airport.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
4-27
Section 4
Normal Procedures
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
4-28
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: K/01-30-2004
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 5
Performance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Airspeed Calibration (Flaps Up Position) ................................................................................... 5-3
Airspeed Calibration (Flaps Takeoff Position)............................................................................ 5-4
Airspeed Calibration (Flaps Landing Position) ........................................................................... 5-4
Temperature Conversion ............................................................................................................. 5-5
Stall Speed ................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Crosswind, Headwind, and Tailwind Component....................................................................... 5-6
Short Field Takeoff Distance (12º - Takeoff Flaps) .................................................................... 5-7
Maximum Rate of Climb ............................................................................................................. 5-8
Time, Fuel, and Distance to Climb.............................................................................................. 5-9
Cruise Performance Overview................................................................................................... 5-10
Brake Horsepower (BHP) & Fuel Consumption ....................................................................... 5-10
Cruise Performance Sea Level Pressure Altitude...................................................................... 5-11
Cruise Performance 2000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ........................................................................ 5-12
Cruise Performance 4000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ........................................................................ 5-13
Cruise Performance 6000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ........................................................................ 5-14
Cruise Performance 8000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ........................................................................ 5-15
Cruise Performance 10000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ...................................................................... 5-16
Cruise Performance 12000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ...................................................................... 5-17
Cruise Performance 14000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ...................................................................... 5-18
Cruise Performance 16000 Ft. Pressure Altitude ...................................................................... 5-18
Range Profile ............................................................................................................................. 5-19
Endurance Profile ...................................................................................................................... 5-20
Holding Considerations ............................................................................................................. 5-21
Time, Fuel, and Distance to Descend ........................................................................................ 5-22
Short Field Landing Distance (12º - Takeoff Flaps) ................................................................. 5-23
Short Field Landing Distance (40º - Land Flaps)...................................................................... 5-24
Example Problem....................................................................................................................... 5-25
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
RA050001
5-1
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
5-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/12-07-2000
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INTRODUCTION
The performance charts and graphs on the following pages are designed to assist the pilot in
determining specific performance characteristics in all phases of flight operations. These phases
include takeoff, climb, cruise, descent, and landing. The data in these charts were determined
through actual flight tests of the airplane. At the time of the tests, the airplane and engine were in
good condition and normal piloting skills were employed.
There may be slight variations between actual results and those specified in the tables and
graphs. The condition of the airplane, as well as runway condition, air turbulence, and pilot
techniques, will influence actual results. Fuel consumption assumes proper leaning of the
mixture and control of the power settings. The combined effect of these variables may produce
differences as great as 10%. The pilot must apply an appropriate margin of safety in terms of
estimated fuel consumption and other performance aspects, such as takeoff and landing. Fuel
endurance data include a 45-minute reserve at the specified cruise power setting. When it is
appropriate, the use of a table or graph is explained or an example is shown on the graph.
When using the tables that follow, some interpolation may be required. If circumstances do not
permit interpolation, then use tabulations that are more conservative. The climb and descent
charts are based on sea level, and some minor subtraction is required for altitudes above sea
level. For example, if 4.5 and 8.5 minutes are needed to climb from sea level to 4000 and 8000
feet respectively, then a climb from 4000 feet to 8000 feet will take about four minutes.
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
Airspeed Calibration − Normal and Alternate Static Source
Flaps − Up Position (0°)
250
Example: 157 KIAS is equal to 152 KCAS
when using the alternate static source.
240
230
220
Knots Indicated Airspeed (KIAS)
210
200
190
Alternate Static Source
180
Normal Static
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
Knots Calibrated Airspeed (KCAS)
(Figure 5-1)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: K/01-30-2004
RA050001
5-3
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Airspeed Calibration − Normal & Alternate Static Source
Flaps − Takeoff Position (12°)
140
Example: 81 KCAS is equal to 77 KIAS
when using the alternate static source.
Knots Indicated Airspeed (KIAS)
130
120
110
Normal Static
100
Alternate Static Source
90
80
70
60
50
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
Knots Calibrated Airspeed (KCAS)
(Figure 5-2)
Airspeed Calibration − Normal & Alternate Static Source
Flaps − Landing Position (40°)
130
Example: 72 KIAS is equal to 72 KCAS
when using the normal static source.
Knots Indicated Airspeed (KIAS)
120
110
100
90
Normal Static
Alternate Static Source
80
70
60
50
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
Knots Calibrated Airspeed (KCAS)
(Figure 5-3)
RA050001
5-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: K/01-30-2004
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
50
40
30
20
CELSIUS
10
0
--40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
-10
-20
-30
-40
FAHRENHEIT
(Figure 5-4)
STALL SPEEDS
The table shown in (Figure 5-5) shows the stalling speed of the airplane for various flap settings
and angles of bank. To provide a factor of safety, the tabulated speeds are established using
maximum gross weight and the most forward center of gravity (CG), i.e. 3400 pounds with the
CG located 107 inches from the datum. This configuration will produce a higher stalling speed
when compared with the speed that would result from a more rearward CG or a lesser gross
weight at the same CG. While an aft CG lowers the stalling speed of the airplane, the benign
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: K/01-30-2004
RA050001
5-5
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
stalling characteristics attendant with a forward CG are noticeably diminished. Please see stall
discussion on page 4-24. The maximum altitude loss during power off stalls is about 200 feet,
Nose down attitude change during stall recovery is generally less than 5°. Example: Using the
table below, stall speeds of 61 KIAS and 63 KCAS are indicated for 30º of bank with landing
flaps.
ANGLE OF BANK
CONDITIONS
(Most Forward Center of Gravity – Power Off – Coordinated Flight)
Weight
3400 lbs.
(1542 kg)
0°
30°
45°
60°
Flap Setting
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
Flaps - Cruise
71
71
76
76
84
84
100
100
Flaps - Takeoff
65
65
69
69
77
78
91
93
Flaps - Landing
57
57
61
61
68
68
80
80
(Figure 5-5)
CROSSWIND, HEADWIND, AND TAILWIND COMPONENT
Component
in knots of
Headwind or
Tailwind
Component
in knots of
Crosswind
Component
in knots of
Headwind or
Tailwind
Component
in knots of
Crosswind
Component
in knots of
Headwind or
Tailwind
Component
in knots of
Crosswind
Component
in knots of
Headwind or
Tailwind
Component
in knots of
Crosswind
80º
Headwind or
Tailwind
70º
Crosswind
60º
Headwind or
Tailwind
50º
Crosswind
40º
Headwind or
Tailwind
30º
Crosswind
20º
Headwind or
Tailwind
10º
Crosswind
WIND VELOCITY
KNOTS
Degs. Wind
Off Runway
Centerline
5
1
5
2
5
2
4
3
4
4
3
4
3
5
2
5
1
10
2
10
3
9
5
9
6
8
8
6
9
5
9
3
10
2
15
3
15
5
14
7
13
10
11
11
10
13
8
14
5
15
3
20
3
20
7
19
10
17
13
15
15
13
17
10
19
7
20
3
25
4
25
9
23
12
22
16
19
19
16
22
13
23
9
25
4
30
5
30
10
28
15
26
19
23
23
19
26
15
28
10
30
5
35
6
34
12
33
17
30
22
27
27
22
30
18
33
12
34
6
40
7
39
14
38
20
35
26
31
31
26
35
20
38
14
39
7
This table is used to determine the headwind, crosswind, or tailwind component. For example, a 15-knot wind, 55° off
the runway centerline, has a headwind component of 9 knots and a crosswind component of 12 knots. For tailwind
components, apply the number of degrees the tailwind is off the centerline and read the tailwind component in the
headwind/tailwind column. A 20-knot tailwind, 60º off the downwind runway centerline, has a tailwind component of
10 knots and a crosswind component of 17 knots.
(Figure 5-6)
RA050001
5-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: K/01-30-2004
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF DISTANCE (12º - TAKEOFF FLAPS)
(Figure 5-7)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
5-7
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
MAXIMUM RATE OF CLIMB
Weight
Pressure
Climb
Altitude – Ft. Speed – KIAS
3400 lbs.
(1542 kg)
3000 lbs.
(1361 kg)
2500 lbs.
(1134 kg)
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
Example
ISA
ISA - 20°C
ISA + 20°C
Rate of Climb (Feet/Minute)
106
102
100
97
95
92
90
87
84
99
96
94
91
89
86
85
82
79
90
88
86
83
81
79
77
75
72
1335
1246
1157
1068
979
890
801
713
624
1513
1412
1311
1211
1110
1009
908
808
707
1861
1695
1574
1453
1332
1211
1090
969
848
1225
1136
1047
958
869
780
691
602
513
1388
1287
1186
1085
985
884
788
682
581
1666
1545
1424
1303
1182
1061
940
819
698
Associated Conditions
Weight .... 3200 lbs. (1451 kg) Power.......... Max. continuous
at 2700 RPM.
Pressure Altitude ........... 7000
Flaps
...........................
Cruise
Ambient Air Temp .......... 1°C
Mixture ...... At recommended
leaning schedule
Climb Speed ............ 93 KIAS
Rate of Climb .... 975± ft/min.
1123
1034
945
857
768
679
590
501
412
1273
1172
1072
971
870
769
669
568
467
1528
1407
1286
1165
1044
923
802
681
561
Notes
Fuel mixture should be
leaned appropriately for altitude.
Fuel Flows
SL............ 22.0 GPH (83.3 LPH)
2000 ........ 20.3 GPH (76.8 LPH)
4000 ........ 19.1 GPH (72.3 LPH)
6000 ........ 18.0 GPH (68.1 LPH)
8000 ........ 16.9 GPH (64.0 LPH)
10000 ...... 15.9 GPH (60.2 LPH)
(Figure 5-8)
RA050001
5-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
TIME, FUEL, AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB
Pressure
Altitude
Feet
Weight
lbs. (kg)
2000
102
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
1136
1287
1545
2.5
2.2
2.0
0.9 (3.4)
0.8 (3.0)
0.8 (3.0)
4000
99
6000
97
8000
95
10000
92
12000
90
14000
87
16000
84
18000
82
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
3400 (1542)
3000 (1361)
2500 (1134)
1047
1186
1424
958
1085
1303
869
985
1182
780
884
1061
691
783
940
602
682
819
513
581
698
424
480
576
4.3
3.9
3.3
6.3
5.6
4.8
8.5
7.6
6.4
10.9
9.7
8.2
13.6
12.1
10.2
16.8
14.9
12.5
20.4
18.0
15.2
24.7
21.8
18.3
1.5 (5.7)
1.4 (5.3)
1.2 (4.5)
2.1 (7.9)
1.9 (7.2)
1.6 (6.1)
2.7 (10.2)
2.5 (9.5)
2.1 (7.9)
3.4 (12.9)
3.0 (11.4)
2.6 (9.8)
4.1 (15.5)
3.6 (13.6)
3.1 (11.7)
4.8 (18.2)
4.3 (16.3)
3.6 (13.6)
5.6 (21.2)
5.0 (18.9)
4.2 (15.9)
6.5 (24.6)
5.8 (22.0)
4.9 (18.5)
Example
Rate of Climb
ft/min
Time Min.†
From Sea Level
Climb Speed
KIAS
Associated Conditions
Weight.... 3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Power ......... Max. Man. Press
at 2700 RPM
Cruise Press. Altitude ....8500
Ambient Air Temp....... -12°C Flaps ............................Cruise
Mixture.......At recommended
leaning schedule
Temp.
..
Standard
Day (ISA)*
Climb Speed**........ 94 KIAS
R of C**.............910± ft/min.
(Corrected for ISA -10 deg C *See Note 2 for approximate
performance above or below
temp)
ISA temperatures.
Time...........................9.1 min
Fuel ............ 17.4 lbs. (7.9 kg)
Distance .................. 12.8 NM **At cruise altitude
Fuel used
Gallons (Liters)
Distance – N.M.
3.0
2.6
2.2
5.2
5.5
4.6
9.8
8.6
7.2
13.7
12.1
10.0
18.0
15.9
13.2
22.9
20.2
16.8
28.5
25.1
20.9
35.0
30.9
35.7
42.7
37.7
31.4
Notes
1. Distances shown are based
on zero wind.
2. For temperatures above
standard, decrease the rate of
climb 57 ft/min for each
10°C above the temperature.
3. For temperatures below
standard, increase the rate of
climb 63 ft/min for each
10°C below the temperature.
† Times include 45 seconds for
takeoff and acceleration to VY.
(Figure 5-9)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
5-9
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE OVERVIEW
The tables on pages 5-11 through 5-18 contain cruise data to assist in the flight planning process.
This information is tabulated for even thousand altitude increments and ranges from Sea Level
feet to 16000 feet. Interpolation is required for the odd number altitudes, i.e., 5000 feet, 7000
feet, etc., as well as altitudes increments of 500 feet, such as 7500 and 9500.
The tables assume proper leaning at the various operating horsepowers. Between 65% and 75%
of brake horsepower, the mixtures should be leaned through use of the exhaust gas temperature
(EGT) gauge and adjusted to 50ºF rich of the peak setting. Please refer to page 4-21 in this
handbook for proper leaning techniques. At brake horsepowers below 65%, the mixture may be
leaned to 50ºF lean of the peak EGT setting.
The maximum recommended cruise setting is 80% of brake horsepower; however, settings of
75% and below provide better economy with only a modest sacrifice in true airspeed. The
mixture must not be leaned above settings that produce more than 80% of brake horsepower
unless rough engine operations are encountered. In this instance, lean the mixture slowly until
smooth engine operations are reestablished. Be sure to monitor engine instruments to ensure safe
ranges.
In some instances, the interpolation process will involve power settings from two different
leaning schedules. For example, in (Figure 5-14) to determine the fuel flow for 2400 RPM and
22 inches of manifold pressure, temperature 26ºC (78ºF), requires interpolation between values
for 2300 RPM and 2500 RPM. The brake horsepower and fuel flow at 2500 RPM are 67% BHP
and 14.4 GPH (54.5 LPH). At 2300 RPM, it is 57% BHP and 10.8 GPH (40.9 LPH).
Interpolating between the two sets of numbers will yield 62% BHP and 12.6 GPH (47.7 LPH).
The interpolated fuel consumption, in this instance, is high because of the different leaning
schedules for 57% BHP and 67% BHP. The correct answer, 11.7 GPH, is found by using the
interpolated brake horsepower, 62%, and looking up the fuel consumption in (Figure 5-10).
Note: By scanning the particular Cruise Performance table in use, the appropriate fuel
consumption can usually be found without the need to reference (Figure 5-10).
BRAKE HORSEPOWER (BHP) AND FUEL CONSUMPTION
Percent Brake Horsepower & Fuel Consumption
Pct.
BHP
GPH
LPH
Pct.
BHP
GPH
LPH
Pct.
BHP
GPH
LPH
Pct.
BHP
GPH
LPH
40%
41%
42%
43%
44%
45%
46%
47%
48%
49%
50%
7.6
7.8
7.9
8.1
8.3
8.5
8.4
8.9
9.1
9.3
9.5
28.8
29.5
29.9
30.7
31.4
32.2
31.8
33.7
34.4
35.2
36.0
51%
52%
53%
54%
55%
56%
57%
58%
59%
60%
61%
9.6
9.8
10.0
10.2
10.4
10.6
10.8
11.0
11.2
11.3
11.5
36.3
37.1
37.9
38.6
39.4
40.1
40.9
41.6
42.4
42.8
43.5
62%
63%
64%
65%
66%
67%
68%
69%
70%
71%
72%
11.7
11.9
12.1
14.0
14.2
14.4
14.6
14.9
15.1
15.3
15.5
44.3
45.0
45.8
53.0
53.7
54.5
55.3
56.4
57.2
57.9
58.7
73%
74%
75%
76%
77%
78%
79%
80%
81%
82%
83%
15.7
15.9
16.2
16.4
16.6
16.8
17.0
17.2
17.4
17.7
17.9
59.4
60.2
61.3
62.1
62.8
63.6
64.3
65.1
65.9
67.0
67.8
(Figure 5-10)
RA050001
5-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE SEA LEVEL PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-18°C
(33°C Below Standard)
RPM
MP
% BHP
GPH
LPH
2700
25
24
89
85
19.3
18.3
2500
26
25
24
84
80
76
2300
28
27
26
25
24
80
76
72
69
65
15°C
(Standard Temperature)
37°C
(22°C Above Standard)
% BHP
GPH
LPH
KTAS
% BHP
GPH
LPH
KTAS
73.1
69.3
KTA
S
177
174
85
80
18.2
17.2
68.9
65.1
180
176
82
77
17.7
16.6
67.0
62.8
181
177
18.1
17.2
16.4
68.5
65.1
62.1
173
170
166
80
76
71
17.2
16.4
15.3
65.1
62.1
57.9
176
172
168
77
73
69
16.6
15.7
14.9
62.8
59.4
56.4
177
173
169
17.2
16.4
15.5
14.9
14.0
65.1
62.1
58.7
56.4
53.0
170
167
163
159
156
76
72
68
65
61
16.4
15.5
14.6
14.0
11.5
62.1
58.7
55.3
53.0
43.5
172
168
164
160
156
73
69
66
62
59
15.7
14.9
14.2
11.7
11.2
59.4
56.4
53.7
44.3
42.4
173
169
165
161
156
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
Numbers shown in bold italics are outside recommended cruise horsepower limits and are included for
interpolation purposes only.
Do not attempt mixture adjustment by use of EGT indications for operations above 75% of maximum power;
use the fuel flow settings shown in this chart. At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture
to 50Fº (10ºC) rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise
settings below 65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel
consumption. Data in these charts are based on this leaning schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of
manifold pressure below 2200 RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Cruise Altitude ....................................... 1000 feet
Temperature .................................................. 13°C
Manifold Pressure ............................ 25 inches Hg.
RPM ............................................................... 2500
Solution
% of BHP..................................................... 76.5%
Fuel Consumption..............16.5 GPH (62.5 LPH)*
True Airspeed ........................................ 175 Knots
Determine
1. ........................................................... % of BHP
2. .................................. Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. .....................................................True Airspeed
(Figure 5-11)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
5-11
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 2000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-22°C
(33°C Below Standard)
11°C
(Standard Temperature)
33°C
(22°C Above Standard)
RPM
2700
MP
23
22
21
20
19
18
% BHP
83
79
73
69
64
59
GPH
17.9
17.0
15.7
14.9
12.1
11.2
LPH
67.8
64.3
59.4
56.4
45.8
42.4
KTAS
175
172
167
162
157
151
% BHP
78
74
69
65
60
55
GPH
16.8
15.9
14.9
14.0
11.3
10.4
LPH
63.6
60.2
56.4
53.0
42.8
39.4
KTAS
177
174
168
163
157
150
% BHP
75
72
67
62
58
53
GPH
16.2
15.5
14.4
11.7
11.0
10.0
LPH
61.3
58.7
54.5
44.3
41.6
37.9
KTAS
178
174
169
163
157
149
2500
25
24
23
22
21
20
83
78
73
69
65
60
17.9
16.8
15.7
14.9
14.0
11.3
67.8
63.6
59.4
56.4
53.0
42.8
175
171
167
162
159
153
77
74
69
65
61
57
16.6
15.9
14.9
14.0
11.5
10.8
62.8
60.2
56.4
53.0
43.5
40.9
177
173
169
163
159
152
75
71
67
62
59
55
16.2
15.3
14.4
11.7
11.2
10.4
61.3
57.9
54.5
44.3
42.4
39.4
178
174
169
163
159
152
2300
25
24
23
22
21
20
71
67
63
59
56
52
15.3
14.4
11.9
11.2
10.6
9.8
57.9
54.5
45.0
42.4
40.1
37.1
164
160
156
151
147
141
66
63
59
56
53
49
14.2
11.9
11.2
10.6
10.0
9.3
53.7
45.0
42.4
40.1
37.9
37.1
166
161
156
151
146
139
64
60
57
53
51
47
12.1
11.3
10.8
10.0
9.6
8.9
45.8
42.8
40.9
37.9
36.3
33.7
165
160
156
149
144
137
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
Numbers shown in bold italics are outside recommended cruise horsepower limits and are included for
interpolation purposes only.
Do not attempt mixture adjustment by use of EGT indications for operations above 75% of maximum power;
use the fuel flow settings shown in this chart. At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to
50Fº rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below
65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these
charts are based on this leaning schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200
RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Cruise Altitude ....................................... 2000 feet
Temperature .................................................. 22°C
Manifold Pressure ................................25 inch Hg.
RPM ............................................................... 2500
Determine
1. ............................................................ % of BHP
2. ................................... Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
Solution
% of BHP........................................................ 77%
Fuel Consumption................16.4 GPH (62.1 LPH)
True Airspeed ...................................... 177 Knots*
*As a rule, always round to the more conservative
number when using the various performance tables in this
handbook.
(Figure 5-12)
RA050001
5-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 4000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-26°C
(33°C Below Standard)
7°C
(Standard Temperature)
29°C
(22°C Above Standard)
RPM
2700
MP
23
22
21
20
19
18
% BHP
86
81
76
71
66
61
GPH
18.5
17.4
16.4
15.3
14.2
11.5
LPH
70.0
65.9
62.1
57.9
53.7
43.5
KTAS
181
177
173
167
162
156
% BHP
81
77
72
66
62
57
GPH
17.4
16.6
15.5
14.2
11.7
10.8
LPH
65.9
62.8
58.7
53.7
44.3
40.9
KTAS
184
179
174
168
162
155
% BHP
78
74
69
64
60
55
GPH
16.8
15.9
14.9
12.1
11.3
10.4
LPH
63.6
60.2
56.4
45.8
42.8
39.4
KTAS
184
180
174
168
161
154
2500
24
23
22
21
20
19
81
76
71
68
63
59
17.4
16.4
15.3
14.6
11.9
11.2
65.9
62.1
57.9
55.3
45.0
42.4
176
172
167
164
159
153
76
71
67
64
59
55
16.4
15.3
14.4
12.1
11.2
10.4
62.1
57.9
54.5
45.8
42.4
39.4
178
174
168
164
158
152
73
69
64
61
57
53
15.7
14.9
12.1
11.5
10.8
10.0
59.4
56.4
45.8
45.8
40.9
37.9
179
174
168
164
157
150
2300
25
24
23
22
21
20
73
69
65
62
58
54
15.7
14.9
14.0
11.7
11.0
10.2
59.4
56.4
53.0
44.3
41.6
38.6
169
165
160
156
151
146
68
65
61
58
54
51
14.6
14.0
11.5
11.0
10.2
9.6
55.3
53.0
43.5
41.6
38.6
36.3
170
166
160
156
150
144
66
62
59
56
52
49
14.2
11.7
11.2
10.6
9.8
53.7
44.3
42.4
40.1
37.1
35.2
170
165
159
155
148
141
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
9.3
Recommended Mixture Setting
Numbers shown in bold italics are outside recommended cruise horsepower limits and are included for
interpolation purposes only.
Do not attempt mixture adjustment by use of EGT indications for operations above 75% of maximum power; use
the fuel flow settings shown in this chart. At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to
50Fº rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below
65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these
charts are based on this leaning schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200
RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Cruise Altitude ........................................4000 feet
Temperature ................................................... -9°C
Manifold Pressure ................................24 inch Hg.
RPM ................................................................2400
Solution
% of BHP.........................................................73%
Fuel Consumption................15.7 GPH (59.4 LPH)
True Airspeed ........................................ 171 Knots
Determine
1. ........................................................... % of BHP
2. .................................. Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. .....................................................True Airspeed
(Figure 5-13)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
5-13
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 6000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-30°C
(33°C Below Standard)
3°C
(Standard Temperature)
25°C
(22°C Above Standard)
RPM
2700
MP
22
21
20
19
18
17
% BHP
84
78
74
68
63
59
GPH
18.1
16.8
15.9
14.6
11.9
11.2
LPH
68.5
63.6
60.2
55.3
45.0
42.4
KTAS
182
177
173
167
161
155
% BHP
79
73
69
64
60
55
GPH
17.0
15.7
14.9
12.1
11.3
10.4
LPH
64.3
59.4
56.4
45.8
42.8
39.4
KTAS
185
179
174
168
161
154
% BHP
76
70
66
62
57
53
GPH
16.4
15.1
14.2
11.7
10.8
10.0
LPH
62.1
57.2
53.7
44.3
40.9
37.9
KTAS
185
179
174
167
159
152
2500
23
22
21
20
19
18
78
74
70
65
61
56
16.8
15.9
15.1
14.0
11.5
10.6
63.6
60.2
57.2
53.0
43.5
40.1
177
173
169
164
157
151
74
70
66
61
57
53
15.9
15.1
14.2
11.5
10.8
10.0
60.2
57.2
53.7
43.5
40.9
37.9
179
175
169
163
156
149
71
67
63
59
55
52
15.3
14.4
11.9
11.2
10.4
9.8
57.9
54.5
45.0
42.4
39.4
37.1
179
175
169
162
155
146
2300
23
22
21
20
19
18
67
63
59
55
52
48
14.4
11.9
11.2
10.4
9.8
9.1
54.5
45.0
42.4
39.4
37.1
34.4
165
161
156
150
144
137
62
60
56
52
49
45
11.7
11.3
10.6
9.8
9.3
44.3
42.8
40.1
37.1
35.2
32.2
169
164
158
151
146
137
60
57
53
50
47
43
11.3
10.8
10.0
9.5
8.9
8.1
42.8
40.9
37.9
36.0
33.7
30.7
164
159
152
145
137
126
8.5
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
Numbers shown in bold italics are outside recommended cruise horsepower limits and are included for
interpolation purposes only.
Do not attempt mixture adjustment by use of EGT indications for operations above 75% of maximum power; use
the fuel flow settings shown in this chart. At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to 50Fº
rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below 65%
power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these charts
are based on this leaning schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200 RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Cruise Altitude ....................................... 6000 feet
Temperature .................................................. 25°C
Manifold Pressure ............................... 22 inch Hg.
RPM ............................................................... 2400
Determine
1. ............................................................% of BHP
2. ................................... Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
Solution
% of BHP ........................................................ 62%
Fuel Consumption ............. 11.7 GPH* (44.3 LPH)
True Airspeed.........................................167 Knots
*The exact mathematical answer is 12.6 GPH by
interpolation. However, leaning at 65% to 75% of BHP is
different than at settings below 65% BHP. In this instance,
locate a 62% BHP setting on the performance chart to
determine fuel consumption. See page 5-10 for discussion
details.
(Figure 5-14)
RA050001
5-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 8000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-34°C
(33°C Below Standard)
-1°C
(Standard Temperature)
21°C
(22°C Above Standard)
RPM
2700
MP
22
21
20
19
18
17
% BHP
86
81
75
71
65
61
GPH
18.5
17.4
16.2
15.3
14.0
11.5
LPH
70.0
65.9
61.3
57.9
53.0
43.5
KTAS
188
183
178
172
166
160
% BHP
81
76
71
66
61
57
GPH
17.4
16.4
15.3
14.2
11.5
10.8
LPH
65.9
62.1
57.9
53.7
43.5
40.9
KTAS
191
184
178
173
166
159
% BHP
78
73
68
64
59
55
GPH
16.8
15.7
14.6
12.1
11.2
10.4
LPH
63.6
59.4
55.3
45.8
42.4
39.4
KTAS
191
185
178
172
164
157
2500
22
21
20
19
18
17
77
72
68
63
58
54
16.6
15.5
14.6
11.9
11.0
10.2
62.8
58.7
55.3
45.0
41.6
38.6
179
173
169
163
156
149
72
67
63
59
55
50
15.5
14.4
11.9
11.2
10.4
9.5
58.7
54.5
45.0
42.4
39.4
36.0
181
174
169
162
154
145
69
64
61
57
52
48
14.9
12.1
11.5
10.8
9.8
9.1
56.4
45.8
43.5
40.9
37.1
34.4
180
173
168
160
151
141
2300
22
21
20
19
18
17
65
61
57
53
50
46
14.0
11.5
10.8
10.0
9.5
8.7
53.0
43.5
40.9
37.9
36.0
32.9
166
160
155
149
141
133
61
57
54
50
47
43
11.5
10.8
10.2
9.5
8.9
8.1
43.5
40.9
38.6
36.0
33.7
30.7
166
159
152
145
136
124
59
55
51
48
45
41
11.2
10.4
9.6
9.1
8.5
7.8
42.4
39.4
36.3
34.4
32.2
29.5
164
157
149
140
129
115
3400 lbs. Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
Numbers shown in bold italics are outside recommended cruise horsepower limits and are included for
interpolation purposes only.
Do not attempt mixture adjustment by use of EGT indications for operations above 75% of maximum power; use
the fuel flow settings shown in this chart. At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to 50ºF
(10ºC) rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below
65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these
charts are based on this leaning schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200
RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Solution
Cruise Altitude ........................................ 8000 feet
% of BHP........................................................ 81%
Fuel Consumption..............17.4 GPH* (65.9 LPH)
Temperature ................................................... -1°C
True Airspeed ........................................ 191 Knots
Manifold Pressure................................ 22 inch Hg.
RPM................................................................ 2700
*Fuel flow shown is for best power mixture.
This power setting is above the maximum
recommended cruise setting of 80% and does
not represent a recommended mixture setting.
Determine
1. ............................................................% of BHP
2. ...................................Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
(Figure 5-15)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
5-15
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 10000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-38°C
(33°C Below Standard)
-5°C
(Standard Temperature)
RP
M
2700
MP
% BHP
GPH
LPH
KTAS
% BHP
GPH
20
19
18
17
16
15
78
75
68
63
62
53
16.8
16.2
14.6
11.9
11.7
10.0
63.6
61.3
55.3
45.0
44.3
37.9
183
179
172
166
164
150
73
70
64
59
58
50
2500
20
19
18
17
16
70
65
60
56
52
15.1
14.0
11.3
10.6
9.8
57.2
53.0
42.8
40.1
37.1
174
168
161
155
147
2300
20
19
18
17
59
55
52
48
11.2
10.4
9.8
9.1
42.4
39.4
37.1
34.4
160
153
147
139
17°C
(22°C Above Standard)
KTAS
% BHP
GPH
LPH
KTAS
15.7
15.1
12.1
11.2
11.0
9.5
LP
H
59.4
57.2
45.8
42.4
41.6
36.0
184
180
172
164
162
145
70
67
61
57
55
48
15.1
14.4
11.5
10.8
10.4
9.1
57.2
54.5
43.5
40.9
39.4
34.4
184
180
171
162
159
139
66
61
56
53
48
14.2
11.5
10.6
10.0
9.1
53.7
43.5
40.1
37.9
34.4
174
167
159
151
141
63
58
54
51
47
11.9
11.0
10.2
9.6
8.9
45.0
41.6
38.6
36.3
33.7
173
165
156
147
135
55
52
48
45
10.4
9.8
9.1
8.5
39.4
37.1
34.4
32.2
157
149
141
130
53
50
47
43
10.0
9.5
8.9
8.1
37.9
36.0
33.7
30.7
154
145
135
121
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
Do not attempt mixture adjustment by use of EGT indications for operations above 75% of maximum power; use
the fuel flow settings shown in this chart. At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to
50ºF (10ºC) rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings
below 65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data
in these charts are based on this leaning schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below
2200 RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Cruise Altitude ....................................... 9000 feet
Temperature ...................................................-3°C
Manifold Pressure ............................... 20 inch Hg.
RPM ............................................................... 2700
Solution
% of BHP ........................................................72%
Fuel Consumption ............... 15.5 GPH (58.7 LPH)
True Airspeed.........................................180 Knots
Determine
1. ............................................................% of BHP
2. ................................... Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
(Figure 5-16)
RA050001
5-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 12000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-42°C
(33°C Below Standard)
RPM
MP
% BHP
GPH
2700
19
18
17
16
15
75
70
66
60
55
2500
19
18
17
16
15
2300
19
18
17
16
-9°C
(Standard Temperature)
13°C
(22°C Above Standard)
KTAS
% BHP
GPH
LPH
KTAS
% BHP
GPH
LPH
KTAS
16.2
15.1
14.2
11.3
10.4
LP
H
61.3
57.2
53.7
42.8
39.4
183
178
171
163
155
70
66
61
56
52
15.1
14.2
11.5
10.6
9.8
57.2
53.7
43.5
40.1
37.1
183
177
170
160
150
67
63
59
54
49
14.4
11.9
11.2
10.2
9.3
54.5
45.0
42.4
38.6
35.2
183
176
168
157
145
67
62
58
54
48
14.4
11.7
11.0
10.2
9.1
54.5
44.3
41.6
38.6
34.4
174
167
160
153
140
63
58
54
51
45
11.9
11.0
10.2
9.6
8.5
45.0
41.6
38.6
36.3
32.2
173
164
156
148
131
60
56
52
49
43
11.3
10.6
9.8
9.3
8.1
42.8
40.1
37.1
35.2
30.7
171
161
152
142
119
57
53
49
46
10.8
10.0
9.3
8.7
40.9
37.9
35.2
32.9
158
151
143
133
53
50
46
43
10.0
9.5
8.4
8.1
37.9
36.0
32.9
30.7
154
145
134
120
51
48
44
41
9.6
9.1
8.3
7.8
36.3
34.4
31.4
29.5
149
138
124
102
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to 50Fº rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21 for a
discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below 65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC) lean of
peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these charts are based on this leaning schedule.
Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200 RPM.
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION
Conditions
Cruise Altitude ..................................... 12000 feet
Temperature ...................................................-9°C
Manifold Pressure ............................... 19 inch Hg.
RPM ............................................................... 2500
Solution
% of BHP ........................................................ 63%
Fuel Consumption ............... 11.9 GPH (45.0 LPH)
True Airspeed.........................................173 Knots
Determine
1. ............................................................% of BHP
2. ................................... Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
(Figure 5-17)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
5-17
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 14000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-46°C
(33°C Below Standard)
-13°C
(Standard Temperature)
9°C
(22°C Above Standard)
RPM
2700
MP
17
16
15
14
% BHP
74
62
57
48
GPH
15.9
11.7
10.8
9.1
LPH
60.2
44.3
40.9
34.4
KTAS
185
169
160
141
% BHP
69
58
53
45
GPH
14.9
11.0
10.0
8.5
LPH
56.4
41.6
37.9
32.2
KTAS
185
166
155
129
% BHP
67
56
51
43
GPH
14.4
10.6
9.6
8.1
LPH
54.5
40.1
36.3
30.7
KTAS
184
162
149
114
2500
17
16
15
60
55
50
11.3
10.4
9.5
42.8
39.4
36.0
165
155
146
56
51
47
10.6
9.6
8.9
40.1
36.3
33.7
161
149
137
54
49
45
10.2
9.3
8.5
38.6
35.2
32.2
156
142
125
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting
At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to 50°F (10ºC) rich of peak EGT. See page 4-21
for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below 65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC)
lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these charts are based on this leaning
schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200 RPM.
(Figure 5-18)
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 16000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE
-50°C
(33°C Below Standard)
-17°C
(Standard Temperature)
5°C
(22°C Above Standard)
RPM
2700
MP
16
15
% BHP
64
56
GPH
12.1
10.6
LPH
45.8
40.1
KTAS
175
159
% BHP
60
52
GPH
11.3
9.8
LPH
42.8
37.1
KTAS
171
152
% BHP
58
50
2500
16
56
10.6
40.1
160
53
10.0
37.9
154
50
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Gross Weight
GPH
11.0
9.5
LPH
41.6
36.0
KTAS
167
143
9.5
36.0
146
Recommended Mixture Setting
At cruise settings between 65% and 75% power, set the mixture to 50°Fº (10ºC) rich of peak EGT. See page 421 for a discussion of the adjustment procedures. At cruise settings below 65% power, operations at 50ºF (10ºC)
lean of peak EGT will provide the lowest fuel consumption. Data in these charts are based on this leaning
schedule. Finally, do not exceed 20 inches of manifold pressure below 2200 RPM.
(Figure 5-19)
RA050001
5-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
RANGE PROFILE
Columbia 300 Range Profile
Max Power Climb Plus 45 Minute Reserve at Cruise Power
Density Altitude (Feet)
18000
16000
14000
50%
BHP*
12000
60%
BHP*
10000
70%
BHP*
8000
75%
BHP*
6000
4000
80%
BHP*
2000
0
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
Range (Nautical Miles)
*OR FULL THROTTLES
(See Assumptions Below)
(Figure 5-20)
Conditions
Assumptions
Note
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Max.
Gross Weight
Standard Temperature
Proper Leaning
Full Fuel Tanks – 98
Gallons (371 L)
Chart assumes applicable
BHP is maintained until full
throttle is reached. After
that, BHP will decrease with
altitude.
The chart includes fuel for starting the
engine, taxi, takeoff, and climb to altitude.
The 45 minute reserve allowance is based
on the applicable percentage of BHP for
45 minutes.
Example: At a density altitude of 6000 feet, with a 60% BHP power setting, the range is approximately
1175 miles.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
5-19
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ENDURANCE PROFILE
Columbia 300 Endurance Profile
Max Power Climb Plus 45 Minute Reserve at Cruise Power
18000
DENSITY ALTITUDE (FT)
16000
14000
50%
BHP*
12000
75%
BHP*
10000
60%
BHP*
8000
6000
70%
BHP*
4000
80%
BHP*
2000
0
3
4
5
6
7
ENDURANCE (Hours)
8
9
*OR FULL THROTTLE (See Assumptions Below)
(Figure 5-21)
Conditions
Assumptions
Note
3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Max.
Gross Weight
Standard Temperature
Proper Leaning
Full Fuel Tanks – 98
Gallons (371 L)
Chart assumes applicable
BHP is maintained until full
throttle is reached. After
that, BHP will decrease with
altitude.
The chart includes fuel for starting the
engine, taxi, takeoff, and climb to altitude.
The 45 minute reserve allowance is based
on the applicable percentage of BHP for
45 minutes.
Example: At a density altitude of 6000 feet, with a 60% BHP power setting, the endurance is
approximately 7.2 hours.
RA050001
5-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
10
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
HOLDING CONSIDERATIONS
When holding is required, it is recommended that takeoff flaps be used with an indicated
airspeed of 120± knots. Depending on temperature, gross weight, and RPM, the manifold
pressure will range from about 13 to 17 inches. The fuel consumption has wide variability as
well and can range from about 8 to 10 GPH (30.3 to 37.9 LPH). The graph below,
(Figure 5-22), provides information to calculate either fuel used for a given holding time or the
amount of holding time available for a set quantity of fuel.
The graph is based on a fuel consumption of 9 GPH (34.1 LPH) and is included here to provide a
general familiarization overview. Under actual conditions, most pilots can perform the
calculation for fuel used or the available holding time without reference to the graph. Moreover,
the graph is only an approximation of the average anticipated fuel consumption. There will be
wide variability under actual conditions.
In the example below, a 35-minute holding time will use about 5.2 gallons (19.7 L) of fuel.
Conversely, if only 8 gallons (30.3 L) of fuel are available for holding purposes, the maximum
holding time is 53 minutes before other action must be taken. Note that this is about the amount
of fuel remaining in a tank when the low-level fuel warning light illuminates.
HOLDING TIME
(9.0 GPH)
FUEL USED - GALLONS
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
TIME - MINUTES
(Figure 5-22)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
5-21
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
TIME, FUEL, AND DISTANCE FOR CRUISE DESCENT
The table below (Figure 5-23) has information to assist the pilot in estimating cruise descent
times, fuel used, and distance traveled from cruise altitude to sea level or to the elevation of the
destination airport. For descents from cruise altitude to sea level, locate the cruise altitude for the
descent rate in use and read the information directly. This data is determined for a weight of
3000 lbs. but is representative of normal operating weights during descent.
For example, a descent at 500 FPM from 9000 feet to sea level will take approximately 18
minutes, consume 1.3 gallons of fuel, and 57 miles will be traveled over the ground under no
wind conditions. For descent from cruise altitude to a field elevation above sea level, subtract the
performance data numbers for the field elevation from the respective cruise altitude numbers.
Suppose in this example that the descent from 9000 feet is not to sea level, but rather to a field
pressure altitude of 3000 feet. In this instance, the descent time is 12 minutes (18 – 6 = 12), the
fuel used is 0.9 gallons (1.3 – 0.4 = 0.9), and the distance covered is 39 nm (57 – 18 = 39).
Power will be at 50% BHP± and lower, depending on altitude. As altitude decreases, power must
be reduced and the mixture set to a slightly richer setting. The pilot should be aware of the
limitation on VNO at altitudes above 12000 feet MSL and adjust indicated airspeed accordingly,
if flying in other than smooth air. See (Figure 2-1) for airspeed limitations and page 1-6 for the
definition of VNO.
Pressure
Altitude
15000
180 KIAS
500 FPM DESCENT Rate
(No Wind – Standard Temperature)
Time
Fuel Used Distance
KTAS
Min
Gal. (L)
NM
-
180 KIAS
1000 FPM DESCENT Rate
(No Wind – Standard Temperature)
Fuel Used Distance
KTAS
Time Min
Gal. (L)
NM
227
15
2.4 (9.1)
50
14000
-
-
-
-
223
14
2.2 (8.3)
46
13000
-
-
-
-
220
13
2.0 (7.6)
42
12000
-
-
-
-
216
12
1.8 (6.8)
38
11000
212
22
1.6 (6.1)
71
212
11
1.7 (6.4)
35
10000
209
20
1.4 (5.3)
64
209
10
1.5 (5.7)
32
9000
206
18
1.3 (4.9)
57
206
9
1.3 (4.9)
28
8000
203
16
1.1 (4.2)
50
203
8
1.2 (4.5)
25
7000
200
14
1.0 (3.8)
44
200
7
1.0 (3.8)
21
6000
197
12
0.9 (3.4)
37
197
6
0.9 (3.4)
18
5000
194
10
0.7 (2.6)
31
194
5
0.7 (2.6)
15
4000
191
8
0.6 (2.3)
24
191
4
0.6 (2.3)
12
3000
188
6
0.4 (1.5)
18
188
3
0.4 (1.5)
9
2000
185
4
0.3 (1.1)
12
185
2
0.3 (1.1)
6
1000
183
2
0.1 (0.4)
6
183
1
0.1 (0.4)
3
0
180
0.0
0.0 (0.0)
0.0
180
0.0
0.0 (0.0)
0.0
(Figure 5-23)
RA050001
5-22
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SHORT FIELD LANDING DISTANCE (12º - LANDING FLAPS)
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS
EXAMPLE
Power
As Required to Maintain 3º Approach
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
25º C
Flaps
12º (Flaps in Takeoff Position)
Pressure Altitude (PA)
4000 Ft.
Runway
Paved, Level, Dry Surface
Headwind Component
10 Knots
Approach Speed
88 KIAS (Vat 50 ft. Speed 88 KIAS All Weights)
Ground Roll
1950 Ft. (594 m)
Braking
Maximum
Total Distance Over 50 Ft. Obstacle
3120 Ft. (951 m)
For operation on a known level, smooth, mowed grass runway, which is either wet or dry but does not include standing water, the ground roll distance obtained
from this landing performance chart must be multiplied by a factor of 1.6 to obtain the correct field length. In the above example, the ground roll distance
would be 3,120 feet (951 m) (1.6 x 1950). In this instance, the total landing distance from a 50 foot (15 m) obstacle would be 4,290 feet (1308 m).
(Figure 5-24)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
5-23
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SHORT FIELD LANDING DISTANCE (40º - LANDING FLAPS)
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS
EXAMPLE
Power
As Required to Maintain 3º Approach
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
25º C
Flaps
40º (Flaps in Takeoff Position)
Pressure Altitude (PA)
4000 Ft.
Runway
Paved, Level, Dry Surface
Headwind Component
10 Knots
Approach Speed
78 KIAS (Vat 50 ft. Speed 78 KIAS All Weights)
Ground Roll
1620 Ft. (494 m)
Braking
Maximum
Total Distance Over 50 Ft. Obstacle
2650 Ft. (808 m)
For operation on a known level, smooth, mowed grass runway, which is either wet or dry but does not include standing water, the ground roll distance
obtained from this landing performance chart must be multiplied by a factor of 1.6 to obtain the correct field length. In the above example, the ground
roll distance would be 2,592 feet (790 m) (1.6 x 1620). In this instance, the total distance from a 50 foot (15 m) obstacle would be 3,622 feet (1104 m).
(Figure 5-25)
RA050001
5-24
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SAMPLE PROBLEM
Airplane Configuration
Cruise Environment
Takeoff Weight ... 3400 lbs. (1542 kg) Maximum Gross Weight
Usable Fuel .................................................. 98 Gallons (371 L)
Distance of Trip......................................... 412 Nautical Miles
Pressure Cruise Altitude ..........................................8000 Feet
Cruise Power ............................................................80% BHP
Ambient Air Temperature ............................ -1°C (Standard)
En route Winds ........................................ 30 Knot Headwind
Takeoff Environment
Landing Environment
Airport Pressure Altitude ........................................ 3500 Feet
Ambient Air Temperature ......... 25°C (17°C above standard)
Headwind Component ............................................. 30 Knots
Runway Length ...................................................... 3000 Feet
Obstacle at the end of the runway................................ 50 Feet
Climb to Cruise Altitude................... Max. Continuous Power
Airport Pressure Altitude ....................................... 2000 Feet
Ambient Air Temperature ...... 30°C (16.5°C above standard)
Landing Runway Number .................................................. 36
Wind Direction & Velocity ......................... 040º at 25 Knots
Runway Length ...................................................... 3000 Feet
Obstacle at approach end of the runway.......................... None
SOLVE FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Item
What is the takeoff ground run
distance at the departure airport?
What is the total takeoff distance
at the departure airport (ground
run and obstacle clearance)?
Assume a climb to cruise altitude
is started at a pressure altitude of
4000 feet. What is the
approximate fuel used to reach
cruise altitude?
What distance over the ground is
covered in the climb under no
wind conditions? What is the
approximate time?
What is the fuel flow at the 8000
foot cruise altitude?
What is the true airspeed at the
8000 foot cruise altitude (to the
nearest whole knot)?
Using the cruise and range
profiles, what are the
approximate miles covered and
time aloft at 80% BHP.
If 30 minutes of holding is
required at the destination
airport, how much fuel is used.
Assume a 500 FPM descent is
used for arrival at the destination
airport. At what distance from
the airport should the descent
begin to arrive at 1000 feet
above the surface?
What are the crosswind and
headwind components at the
destination airport?
What is the landing distance
required at the destination
airport, with landing flaps?
What is the landing distance
required at the destination
airport, with takeoff flaps?
Solution
Comments
725± Feet
Problem is different than example arrows, i.e., takeoff
weight - 3400 lbs. and headwind - 30 knots.
1400± Feet
Major indices are 500 and minor indices (not printed
on the graph) are 250 feet. Each line is 50 feet.
1.2 Gallons
(4.5 L)
The fuel required to reach a pressure altitude of 4000
and 8000 feet is 1.5 and 2.7 gallons, respectively. The
difference between these two altitudes yields 1.2
gallons. No adjustment for non-standard temperature
is possible.
8.5 Miles
4.2 Minutes
Using the technique described in No. 3 subtract the
4000 pressure altitude distance/time from the 8000
pressure altitude distance/time.
17.2 GPH
(65.1 LPH)
Basic interpolation problem between 81% and 76%
BHP.
190 knots
Basic interpolation problem between 81% and 76%
BHP.
910 NM
4.8 Hours
Notice that range and endurance are significantly
reduced when operating at higher power settings.
5.1 Gallons
(19.3 L)
When holding it is recommended that the fuel flow be
set to 10.2 GPH (38.6 LPH).
32 Miles
The airport elevation is 2000 feet and the descent is
from 8000 feet; hence, calculations should compare
8000 feet with 3000, which is 1000 feet above the
surface. See the instruction on page 5-22 for descents
to airports above sea level.
16 kts xwind
19 kts hdwnd
The wind is 40º off the runway centerline. See (Figure
5-6) for a detailed explanation.
1450± Feet
1800± Feet
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
In No. 10 above, the headwind component is 19 knots.
Insert this information along with the airport elevation
and temperature into (Figure 5-24).
In No. 10 above, the headwind component is 19 knots.
Insert this information along with the airport elevation
and temperature into
(Figure 5-25).
RA050001
5-25
Section 5
Performance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SOLVE FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS
No.
Item
13.
Assume that the destination
airport has a 50 foot obstacle and
the strong crosswind limits flap
usage to the takeoff setting, is
landing at the destination a
prudent action?
RA050001
5-26
Solution
No
Comments
Under these circumstances, the required runway is
almost 2800 feet, which leaves a cushion of only 200
feet.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 6
Weight & Balance - Equipment List
Section 6
Weight & Balance
&
Equipment List (Appendix A)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
PROCEDURES FOR WEIGHING & DETERMINING EMPTY CG
General................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Airplane Configuration.......................................................................................................... 6-4
Airplane Leveling .................................................................................................................. 6-4
Using the Permanent Reference Point ................................................................................... 6-6
Measurements ........................................................................................................................ 6-7
Converting Measurements to Arms ....................................................................................... 6-8
Weights and Computations.................................................................................................... 6-8
Example of Empty Center of Gravity (CG) Determination................................................... 6-9
Changes in the Airplane’s Configuration ............................................................................ 6-10
Determining Location (FS) of Installed Equipment in Relation to Datum ................... 6-10
Weight and Balance Forms............................................................................................ 6-10
Updating the Form......................................................................................................... 6-10
PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING GROSS WEIGHT AND LOADED CG
Useful Load and Stations..................................................................................................... 6-11
Baggage .............................................................................................................................. 6-11
Baggage Configuration Table.............................................................................................. 6-12
Baggage Nets ....................................................................................................................... 6-12
Summary of Loading Stations ............................................................................................. 6-13
Computing the Loaded Center of Gravity (CG) .................................................................. 6-13
Sample Problem – Calculator Method........................................................................... 6-14
Sample Problem – Graphical Method............................................................................ 6-15
Weight and Balance Limitations ......................................................................................... 6-15
Other Weight Limitations .................................................................................................... 6-16
Maximum Empty Weight .................................................................................................... 6-16
Front Seat Moment Computations Graph............................................................................ 6-17
Rear Seat Moment Computations Graph............................................................................. 6-17
Fuel Moment Computations Graph ..................................................................................... 6-18
Baggage Moment Computations Graph .............................................................................. 6-18
Center of Gravity Envelope ................................................................................................. 6-19
EQUIPMENT LIST GENERAL .............................................................................................. 6-A1
Install Code......................................................................................................................... 6-A1
Flight Operations Requirements ......................................................................................... 6-A1
Headsets ............................................................................................................................. 6-A1
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-1
Section 6
Weight & Balance - Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST -APPENDIX A .................................... 6-A1
Chapters 21-24 .................................................................................................................... 6-A1
Chapter 25 ........................................................................................................................... 6-A2
Chapters 26-31 .................................................................................................................... 6-A3
Chapter 32 ........................................................................................................................... 6-A4
Chapter 33 ........................................................................................................................... 6-A5
Chapter 34 ........................................................................................................................... 6-A5
Chapter 37 ........................................................................................................................... 6-A7
Chapters 52-77 .................................................................................................................... 6-A7
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL) - APPENDIX B....................................................... 6-B1
TABULATED AFTER-MARKET EQUIPMENT LIST (TAMEL) ............................ Follows IEL
WEIGHT & BALANCE RECORD.......................................................................Follows TAMEL
RA050001
6-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 6
Weight & Balance - Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 6
Weight & Balance/Equipment List
INTRODUCTION
Weight and Balance Procedures – This section, after the introduction, is divided into three
parts. The first part contains procedures for determining the empty weight and empty center of
gravity of the airplane. Its use is intended primarily for mechanics and companies or individuals
who make modifications to the airplane. While the procedures are not directly applicable for
day-to-day pilot use, the information will give the owner or operator of the airplane an expanded
understanding of the weight and balance procedures.
The procedures for determining the empty weight and empty CG are excerpted from the
maintenance manual and included in Pilot’s Operating Handbook to aid those who need to
compute this information but do not have access to a maintenance manual. This section also
contains procedures for maintaining and updating weight and balance changes to the airplane.
While a mechanic or others who make changes to the airplane’s configuration normally update
the section, the pilot, owner, and/or operator of the airplane are responsible for ensuring that the
information is maintained in a current status. The last entry on this table should contain the
current weight and moments for this airplane.
The second part of this section is applicable to pilots, as it has procedures for determining the
weight and balance for each flight. This part details specific procedures for airplane loading, how
loading affects the center of gravity, plus a number of charts and graphs for determining the
loaded center of gravity.
For pilot purposes, in the Lancair Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG), the datum point is at or near the
tip of the propeller spinner. All measurements from this point are positive or aft of the datum
point and are expressed in inches. It is important to remember that the weight and balance for
each airplane varies somewhat and depends on a number of factors. The weight and balance
information detailed in this manual only applies to the airplane specified on the cover page.
This weight and balance information is part of the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual
(AFM). Under the provision of Part 91 of the Federal Aviation Regulations no person can
operate a civil aircraft unless there is available in the aircraft a current AFM. (U.S. operating
rules do not apply in Canada.) It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to ensure that the
airplane is properly loaded.
Equipment List – The final portion of this section contains the equipment list. The equipment
list includes standard and optional equipment and specifies both the weight of the installed item
and its arm, i.e., distance from the datum. This information is useful in computing the new empty
weight and CG when items are temporarily removed for maintenance or other purposes. In
addition, equipment required for a particular flight operation is tabulated. The equipment is
generally organized and listed in accordance with ATA maintenance manual chapter numbering
specifications.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
6-3
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
PROCEDURES FOR WEIGHING & DETERMINING EMPTY CG
GENERAL
To determine the empty weight and center of gravity of the airplane, the airplane must be in a
level area and in a particular configuration.
AIRPLANE CONFIGURATION (Empty Weight)
1. The airplane empty weight includes eight quarts of oil (dipstick reading), unusable fuel,
hydraulic brake fluid, and installed equipment.
2. Defuel airplane per instruction in Chapter 12 of the maintenance manual.
3. Ensure the oil sump is filled to eight quarts (Cold engine). Check the reading on the dipstick
and service as necessary.
4. Place the pilot’s and front passenger’s seat in the full aft position.
5. Retract the flaps to the up or 0° position.
6. Center the controls to the neutral static position.
7. Ensure all doors, including the baggage door, are closed when the airplane is weighed.
CAUTION
It is not recommended to weigh an airplane with full fuel and subtract the
weight of the fuel to obtain empty weight because the weight of fuel varies with
temperature. If this method of weight determination is used, fuel weight should
be calculated conservatively. Use the specific weight of fuel at ambient
temperature. See table and example below.
Specific Weight, Lbs./U.S. Gallon
6.4
6.2
6
5.8
5.6
5.4
5.2
5
4.8
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Temperature, ºF
Average Specific Weight of Aviation Gasoline (Mil-F-5572 Grade 100/130 Type)
Versus Temperature
The following is offered as an example only. It is important to remember that the aircraft weight
in the example does not apply to a specific airplane.
RA050001
6-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Example:
Unconservative Calculation
Conventionally used fuel specific weight (6 lbs./U. S. gal.)
Total Aircraft weight with fuel
= 3038 lbs.
Weight of fuel (98 gal. x 6 lbs./U. S. gal.)
= 588 lbs.
Airplane empty weight (3038 lbs – 588 lbs.) = 2450 lbs.
Unconservative Calculation
Fuel specific weight at 60 ºF (5.83 lbs./U. S. gal.)
Total Aircraft weight with fuel
= 3038 lbs.
Weight of fuel (98 gal. x 5.83 lbs./U. S. gal.) = 571 lbs.
Airplane empty weight (3038 lbs – 571 lbs.) = 2467 lbs.
AIRPLANE LEVELING
Since there are no perfectly level reference areas on the airplane and the use of Smart Levels is
not common, the airplane is leveled by use of a plumb bob suspended over a fixed reference
point in the baggage compartment. Moreover, since the use of jacks with load cells is not
prevalent, the wheel scales method is described in this manual. The following steps specify the
procedures for installing the plumb bob and leveling the airplane. These steps must be completed
before taking readings from the wheel scales.
1. The airplane must be weighed in a level area.
2. Remove the left rear seat cushion and place in the footwell. When the cushion is removed, a
small washer, which is bonded to the bottom of the seat frame, will be exposed.
(Figure 6-1)
3. Using a string with a plumb bob attached to it, run the string over the gas strut door flange
between the flange ball and the point where the gas strut attaches to the ball and tie the string
off around the front seatbelt bracket. See (Figure 6-1).
4. Using the two jack method (Raising Both Wings) discussed in Chapter 7 of the maintenance
manual, position the two main tires and the nose tire of the airplane on three scales. Ensure
the brakes are set before raising the airplane off the floor. When all of the airplane’s weight
is on the three scales, move the jacks to a location that is not under the wings. The pointed
end of the plumb bob, in a resting state, will be near a 3/16-inch washer bonded into the seat
frame.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-5
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
5. It will be necessary to either deflate the nose tire or strut and/or main tires to center the
plumb bob point over the washer. When the pointer of the plumb bob is over any part of the
washer, the airplane is level.
6. Once the airplane is level, be sure to release the brakes.
USING THE PERMANENT REFERENCE POINT
To determine the empty weight center of gravity of the airplane, it is more convenient to work
with the permanent reference. The permanent reference point on the airplane is located at the
forward part of the wing bottom, in the center of the wing saddle and is 97.05 inches aft of the
datum. The location is shown in (Figure 6-2). There is a pronounced seam at the point where the
fuselage is attached to the wing, and the leading edge of the wing bottom is easy to identify.
Suspend a plumb bob from the permanent reference point in the exact center as shown in (Figure
6-2) through (Figure 6-4).
Reference
Point 97.05
(Figure 6-2)
1. Determine the center point on each tire, and make a chalked reference mark near the
bottom where the tire touches the floor. On the main gear tires, the mark should be on the
inside, near where the arrows point in (Figure 6-3).
RA050001
6-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NOSE GEAR TIRE
(MEASUREMENT B)
LATERAL REFERENCE
LINE BETWEEN MARKS
ON THE MAIN GEAR TIRES
FUSELAGE STATION 97.05
LOCATION OF PLUMB BOB
(MEASUREMENT A)
MAIN GEAR TIRES
CHALK MARKS
(Figure 6-3)
2. Create a lateral reference line between the two main gear tires. This can be accomplished by
stretching a string between the two chalk marked areas of the tires, snapping a chalk line
between these two points, or laying a 7.3 foot board between the points.
B
Measmt.
A
Measmt.
(Figure 6-4)
MEASUREMENTS
Measure the distance along the longitudinal axis from the permanent reference point (tip of the
plumb bob) to the lateral reference line between the main gear tires. This is Measurement A in
(Figure 6-3) and (Figure 6-4). Measure the distance along the longitudinal axis between the
plumb bob to the mark on nose tire. This is Measurement B in (Figure 6-3) and (Figure 6-4).
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-7
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CONVERTING MEASUREMENTS TO ARMS
To convert Measurement A and B distances to an arm, use the formulas shown in (Figure 6-5)
and (Figure 6-6), respectively.
MAIN GEAR
Measurement A Distance + 97.05 inches = Main Gear Arm
(Figure 6-5)
NOSE GEAR
97.05 inches - Measurement B Distance = Nose Gear Arm
(Figure 6-6)
WEIGHTS AND COMPUTATIONS
Each main gear scale should be capable of handling weight capacities of about 1200 lbs., while
the nose gear scale needs a capacity of at least 750 lbs. Computing the total weight and moments
requires seven steps or operations. These seven operations are discussed below and also shown
in (Figure 6-7).
Operation
No. 1
Operation
No. 2
Operation
No. 3
Operation
No. 4
Scale
Weight Reading Tare or Scale
Corrected
(lbs.)
Error
Weight (lbs.) X
Location
Arm
(Inches)
Right Main
Gear
Left Main
Gear
Main Gear
Arm
Main Gear
Arm
Nose Gear
Arm
Nose Gear
Right Scale
Reading
Left Scale
Reading
Nose Scale
Reading
Scale Error
Scale Error
Scale Error
Total Empty Weight and Empty Moments
Right Scale Wt.
X
± Error
Left Sale Wt.
X
± Error
Nose Scale Wt.
X
± Error
Total Corrected
Weight
Operation No. 6
Operation
No. 5
=
=
=
=
Moments
(lbs.- inches)
Right Gear
Moments
Left Gear
Moments
Nose Gear
Moments
Total Moments
Operation No. 7
(Figure 6-7)
1. Operation No. 1 - Enter the weight for each scale into the second column.
2. Operation No. 2 - Next, enter the scale error. The scale error is sometimes referred to as the
tare and is entered in the third column for each scale.
3. Operation No. 3 - Add or subtract the respective tare for each scale, and enter the result into
the fourth column. This is the correct weight.
4. Operation No. 4 - Using the formulas shown in (Figure 6-5) and (Figure 6-6), determine the
arm for the main gear and nose gear. Enter this information into the fifth column.
5. Operation No. 5 - Multiply the corrected scale weights times their respective arms to
determine the moments for each location. Enter the moments for each computation in the
sixth column.
6. Operation Nos. 6 and 7 – Sum the weights in the fourth column and the moments in the
sixth column. Note: The areas of primary calculations have a double outline.
RA050001
6-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 6
Weight & Balance
7. The final step, which is to determine the empty center of gravity, is to divide the total
moments by the total corrected weight. A detailed example of this computation is shown in
(Figure 6-9).
EXAMPLE OF EMPTY CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG) DETERMINATION
The following is offered as an example problem to aid in understanding the computation process.
It is important to remember that the weights, arms, and moments used in the example problem
are for demonstration purposes only and do not apply to a specific airplane. For the example
problem, assume the following.
1. Scale Weights
a. Right Main Gear – 887 pounds
b. Left Main Gear – 886 pounds
c. Nose Gear – 522 pounds
2. Scale Error (Tare)
a. Right Main Gear Scale is –2 pounds
b. Left Main Gear Scale is –1 pound
c. Nose Gear Scale is + 3 pounds
3. Measurements
a. Measurement Distance A is 24.05 inches
b. Measurement Distance B is 56.15 inches
c. These uncorrected scale weights and tares are shown in (Figure 6-8). Note that after
correcting for scale error, the right, left, and nose gear weights are 885.0, 885.0, and
525.0 pounds, respectively.
d. The arm for the main gear is computed as follows using the formula in (Figure 6-5).
Measurement distance A + 97.05 inches = Main Gear Arm (MGA)
or
24.05 inches + 97.05 inches = 121.1 inches MGA
4. The arm for the nose gear is computed as follows using the formula in (Figure 6-6).
97.05 inches – Measurement Distance B = Nose Gear Arm (NGA)
or
97.05 inches – 56.15 inches = 40.9 inches NGA
5. The main and nose gear arms, as computed, are shown in (Figure 6-8).
6. The corrected weights of 885 pounds are then multiplied with the 121.1 inch main gear arm,
which produces total moments of 107,173.5 lbs.-inches. In this example the moments are the
same for both the right and left gear since the weights are the same. However, it is not
uncommon for the right and left gear weights to vary a few pounds.
7. Next, the corrected 525 pound nose gear weight is multiplied times its 40.9 inch arm, which
produces a moment value of 21,472.5 lbs.-inches.
8. Finally, the total moments and corrected weight are summed. In the example below, the total
weight is 2,295 pounds and the total moments are 235,819.5 lbs.-inches. All this information
is summarized in (Figure 6-8). All required data for determining the empty center of gravity
are now available.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-9
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Scale
Location
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Weight
Tare or Scale Corrected
Arm
Moments
=
X
Reading (lbs.)
Error
Weight (lbs.)
(Inches)
(lbs.- inches)
Right Main
Gear
887
-2
885.0
X
121.1
Left Main
Gear
886
-1
885.0
X
121.1
Nose Gear
522
+3
+525.0
X
40.9
Total Empty Weight and Empty Moments
2295.0
=
=
=
107,173.5
107,173.5
+21,473.5
235,819.5
(Rounded) 235,820
(Figure 6-8)
9. The formula for determining empty weight center of gravity is shown in (Figure 6-9); in the
example below, the empty center of gravity of the airplane is at fuselage station (FS) 102.75.
Total Moments
= Center of Gravity
Empty Weight
or
235,820 lbs. − inches
= 102.75 inches
2,295 lbs.
(Figure 6-9)
CHANGES IN THE AIRPLANE’S CONFIGURATION
1. Determining Location (FS) of Installed Equipment in Relation to the Datum – If
equipment is installed in the airplane, the weight and balance information must be updated.
Individuals and companies who are involved with equipment installations and/or
modifications are generally competent and conversant with weight and balance issues. These
individuals or companies must be aware that the fixed reference point is located at fuselage
station (FS) 97.05. Please see (Figure 6-2) on page 6-6 for more information.
2. Weight and Balance Forms – There is a form that is inserted after Appendix A of Chapter 6
of the AFM/POH that is used to track changes in the configuration of the airplane. When
equipment is added or removed, these pages or an appropriate approved form must be
updated. In either instance the required information is similar.
3. Updating The Form – Fill in the date the item is added or removed, a description of the
item, the arm of the item, its weight, and the moment of the item. Remember, multiply the
weight times the arm of the item to obtain the moment. Finally, compute the new empty
weight and empty moment by adjusting the running totals. If an item is removed, subtract the
weight and moment of the item from the running totals. If an item is added, add the weight
and moment of the item to the running totals.
RA050001
6-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING GROSS WEIGHT
AND
LOADED CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
USEFUL LOAD AND STATIONS
The useful load is determined by subtracting the empty weight of the airplane from the
maximum allowable gross weight of 3400 pounds. The current information obtained from the
Weight & Balance Record in the previous discussion contains the empty weight and empty
moments for this airplane. The useful load includes the weight of pilot, passengers, usable fuel,
and baggage.
The objective in good weight and balance planning is to distribute the useful load in a manner
that keeps the loaded center of gravity within prescribed limits and near the center of the CG
range. The center of gravity is affected by both the amount of weight added and the arm or
distance from the datum. The arm is sometimes expressed as a station. For example, if weight is
added at station 110, this means the added weight is 110 inches from the datum or zero reference
point. The drawing below (Figure 6-10) shows the location of passenger and baggage loading
stations. The fuel is loaded at station 118 and is not shown in the figure. These loading stations
are summarized in (Figure 6-12).
(Figure 6-10)
BAGGAGE
The space between the rear seat and the aft bulkhead is referred to as the main baggage area, and
the shelf aft of this area is called the hat rack or simply the shelf. In (Figure 6-10) and (Figure 612) there are listings for three main area baggage stations, which are labeled A, M, and B. Area
A is the forward baggage zone and area B is the aft baggage zone. Point M is the middle point of
the baggage compartment. The arm for the shelf is measured from the datum point to the center
portion of the shelf.
Since the main baggage area, exclusive of the hat rack, is about three and one half feet in length,
consideration must be given to the arm of weights placed within this area. The use of multiple
baggage loading stations contribute to more precise center of gravity computations and facilitate
redistribution of baggage when the aft CG limit is exceeded. If no weight is placed on the hat
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-11
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
rack, then up to 120 lbs. can be placed in either zone or distributed evenly over the main baggage
area. This, of course, assumes that the placement of such weight does not exceed the maximum
gross weight or the center of gravity limitations.
The floor attachment points define the physical limits of each zone. That is, the area between the
forward and middle cross strap defines Zone A, and the middle cross strap and aft attachment
points define Zone B. There is a cargo net in the airplane that secures the contents in the baggage
compartment in three basic configurations. The table below (Figure 6-11) summarizes the three
different arrangements. The term “bubble” refers to the shape of the cargo net.
BAGGAGE CONFIGURATION TABLE
NO.
ZONE
CONFIGURATION OF CARGO NET
1.
A Only
Single forward bubble, anchored at the forward and middle
attachment points.
2.
A and B
Double bubble, anchored at forward, middle, and aft attachment
points
3.
Main
Area
Weight is evenly distributed over the main baggage area. There
can be one or two bubbles depending on the shape of the baggage.
APPLICABLE
ARM
155.7 inches
155.7 and 177.4 inches
times respective weights
166.6 inches
(Figure 6-11)
Baggage is always loaded in the forward area first (Zone A). Heavier items, of course, should be
placed near the floor, regardless of loading area, and never load the baggage compartment to a
level higher than the top of the hat rack. If only Zone A is utilized, the computations are based
on an arm of 155.7 inches. If both Zones A and B are utilized, with defined weights in each area
as shown in Configuration No. 2 in (Figure 6-11), two computations will be made to determine
the total baggage weight and moments.
In this situation, each zone will have a significantly different quantifiable weight. For example,
assume that 100 lbs. are loaded in Zone A and 20 lbs. in Zone B. These combined weights and
respective arms produce a baggage CG of 159.3, over seven inches forward of the middle point
of the baggage area. Conversely, if the respective Zone A and B weights are 55 and 65 lbs., the
baggage CG moves less than one inch from the middle CG point. As a general rule, if the
weights placed in Zones A and B do not vary more than 15%, then the middle CG arm of 166.6
can be used to compute the main baggage area moment.
BAGGAGE NETS
The airplane has two baggage nets. The hat rack net secures items placed on the hat rack. The
floor net secures items in the main baggage area. A summary of the two nets follows.
1. The floor net provides a total of four anchoring points. The points are all on the floor with
two behind the back seat and two just below the hat rack bulkhead. In addition, the floor net
can be adjusted at any one of the four straps at the attachment points by pressing on the
cinch and sliding the strap. The net can be removed by releasing each of the four
attachments by pressing down and holding on the button on the top of the attachment and
sliding it out of its mount. The net can be reinstalled by reversing the removal process. The
floor net must be used any time baggage is carried in the main baggage compartment area.
RA050001
6-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
2. The hat rack net is attached at four points, two in the overhead and two on the face of the
hat rack bulkhead. The net is not adjustable. To remove the net, unhook each of the four
hook attachments from the mounting slot. To attach the net, hook each of the four hook
attachments into the mounting slot. This net must be used anytime items are stored in the hat
rack area.
SUMMARY OF LOADING STATIONS
Description
Arm
Maximum Weight
(Inches From Datum)
Front Seat Pilot and Passenger
110.0 inches
N/A
Rear Seat Passenger(s)
141.4 inches
N/A
Fuel
118.0 inches
588 Lbs. (98 Gallons*)
Forward Baggage Area (Zone A)
155.7 inches
120 lbs.
Middle of Baggage Area (Point M)
166.6 inches
120 lbs.
Aft Baggage Area (Zone B)
177.4 inches
120 lbs.
Center Rear Baggage Shelf
199.8 inches
20 lbs.
*Usable Fuel (The 8 gallons of unusable fuel is included in the empty weight.)
Η†The maximum total allowed baggage weight is 120 lbs., and only 20 lbs. of this total
allowable weight can be placed on the rear baggage shelf. The weight of items placed
on the rear shelf must be subtracted from 120 lbs. of total allowable baggage weight.
(Figure 6-12)
COMPUTING THE LOADED CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
All information required to compute the center of gravity as loaded with passengers, baggage,
and fuel is now available. Refer to the sample-loading problem in (Figure 6-13). This table is
divided into two sections; the first section contains a sample-loading problem with computations,
and the second section provides space for actual calculations. It is recommended that the second
section of this table be copied or otherwise duplicated so that the pilot has an unmarked
document with which to perform the required calculations.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-13
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CALCULATOR METHOD
Actual Calculation
For This Airplane
Sample Problem
Calculator Method
ITEM
Basic Empty Wt.**
WT.
ARM
MOMENTS
(Lbs.)
(Inches)
(lbs.-in. )
2,295
ITEM
235,820
WT.
ARM
MOMENTS
(Lbs.)
(Inches)
(lbs.-in. )
Basic Empty Wt.
Front Seat Wts.
380
110.0
41,800
Front Seats
110.0
Rear Seats Wts.
175
141.4
24,745
Rear Seats
141.4
Baggage (Main)
50
166.6
8,330
Baggage (Main)*
166.6
Baggage (Zone A)
0
155.7
0
Baggage (Zone A)*
155.7
Baggage (Zone B)
0
177.4
0
Baggage (Zone B)*
177.4
Baggage (Shelf)
0
199.8
0
Baggage (Aft)
199.8
360
118.0
42,480
Fuel (At 6 lbs./gal.)
118.0
Fuel (At 6 lbs./gal.)
Totals
3,260
353,175
Totals
353,175 lbs.−in.
= 108.34 inches
3,260 lbs.
lbs.−in.
=
lbs.
inches
*When computing baggage moment use the arm for either the Main Baggage Area , Zone A, or Zones A and B as
applicable. Refer to the Baggage discussion on page 6-11 for more information. In this example, the weight is evenly
distributed over the main baggage area.
NOTE
The basic empty weight used in this example will vary for each airplane. Refer to the
Weight and Balance Record, which follows Appendix A of this section.
(Figure 6-13)
In the sample problem, multiplying the weight of a particular item, i.e., pilot, passengers,
baggage and fuel, times its arm, computes the moment for that item. The moments and weight
are then summed with the basic empty weight and the empty moment of the airplane. In the
example, these totals are 3,260 pounds and 353,175 moments. The loaded center of gravity of
108.34 inches is then determined by dividing the total moments by the gross weight.
The multiplying graphs, which begin on page 6-17, can be used to determine the moments for
each weight location. The answer is not as accurate as doing the calculation with a hand-held
calculator; however, the margin of error is not significant and within acceptable parameters of
safety. The example arrows in the graphs on pages 6-17 and 6-18 use the data from the sample
problem in (Figure 6-13).
When using the multiplying graphs, it is more convenient to divide the moments on the Y or
vertical axis by 1000. For example, 70,000 lbs.-in. is read as 70.0 (x 1000) lbs.-in. Once all the
calculations are made, the answer can then be multiplied by 1000. The numbers shown in (Figure
6-14) are moment values obtained by reading directly from the graphs and are expressed as 1000
lbs.-in. It should be noted that there is a nominal difference in center of gravity location between
the two procedures.
RA050001
6-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
GRAPHICAL METHOD
SAMPLE PROBLEM GRAPHICAL METHOD
(Using moments obtained from the Graphs)*
ITEM
WT. (Lbs.)
Basic Empty Wt.
2,295
MOMENTS (1000 lbs.-in. )
235.8 (Figure 6-8)
Front Seat Wts.
380
42.0* (Figure 6-15)
Rear Seats Wts.
175
25.0* (Figure 6-17)
Baggage (Main)
50
8.3* (Figure 6-19)
Baggage (Shelf)
0
0.0* (Figure 6-19)
360
42.0* (Figure 6-18)
Fuel (At 6 lbs./gal.)
Totals
3,260
353.1 x 1000 = 353,100
353,100 lbs.−in,
= 108.31 inches
3,260 lbs.
(Figure 6-14)
WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITATIONS
As its name suggests, weight and balance limitations have two components, a weight limitation
and a balance or center of gravity limitation. The maximum gross weight of the airplane is 3400
pounds. This is the first limitation that must be considered in weight and balance preflight
planning. If the gross weight is more than 3,400 lbs., then fuel, baggage, and/or passenger weight
must be reduced. Once the gross weight is at or below 3400 pounds, consideration is then made
for distribution of the weight.
The objective in dealing with the balance limitation is to ensure that the center of gravity is
within prescribed ranges at the specified gross weight. The center of gravity range is referred to
as the “envelope.” The Center of Gravity Envelope graph on page 6-19 shows the envelope for
the Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG). Using data from the sample problem in (Figure 6-14), a CG of
108.31 inches at 3,260 lbs. gross weight indicates the airplane, as loaded, is within the envelope.
If the center of gravity is outside the envelope, the airplane is not safe to fly. If the range is
exceeded to the left of the envelope, then the airplane is nose heavy and weight must be
redistributed with more to the aft position. Conversely, if the range is exceeded to the right of the
envelope, then the airplane is tail heavy and weight must be redistributed with more to the
forward position. Notice that the range of the envelope decreases as weight increases. At 3400
lbs. maximum gross weight, the range of the envelope is 107 inches to 110 inches, a range of
three inches. At 2500 lb. gross weight, the range increases to about seven inches. From this
example, it can be seen that as gross weight is decreased, the forward CG range increases.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-15
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
OTHER WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
TYPE OF WEIGHT
FORWARD DATUM
POINT AND WEIGHT
AFT DATUM POINT
AND WEIGHT
VARIATION
Minimum Flight Weight
103 inches and 2240 lbs.
110 inches and 2500 lbs.
Straight Line
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
103 inches and 2725 lbs.
110 inches and 3228 lbs.
Straight Line
LIMITATION
Reference Datum: The reference datum is located at the tip of the propeller spinner. As distance
from the datum increases, there is an increase in weight for each of the two limitation categories.
The variation is linear or straight line from the fore to the aft positions.
(Figure 6-15)
MAXIMUM EMPTY WEIGHT
The maximum empty weight of the Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG) is 2568 pounds. The FAA
requires the determination of this weight for FAA certification. For airplanes certified in the IFR
utility category, a passenger weight of 190 pounds for each seat plus the fuel weight for 45
minutes of flight are used for this computation. This equates to 72 pounds of fuel and 760
pounds of passenger weight for a total of 832 pounds. For the purpose of this discussion, the 832
pounds is referred to as the minimum useful load. Subtracting the minimum useful load from the
maximum gross weight of 3400 pounds produces the maximum empty weight of 2568 pounds.
The maximum empty weight is not an abstract concept as it has practical applications. For
example, assuming an empty weight of 2200 pounds, the 368 pound difference between the
empty weight and the maximum empty weight defines the maximum additional weight of
optional equipment that can be added to the airplane.
RA050001
6-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Front Seat Moment Computations
50000
Moments (lbs.-inc)
40000
30000
20000
10000
0
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
Weight (lbs.)
(Figure 6-16)
Rear Seat Moment Computations
60000
Moments (in.-lbs.)
50000
40000
30000
20000
10000
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Weight (lbs.)
(Figure 6-17)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-17
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Fuel Moment Computations
80000
80 Gals.
Moments (lbs.-in.)
70000
60000
60 Gals.
50000
40000
30000
20000
40 Gals.
10000
0
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
Weight (lbs.)
(Figure 6-18)
Baggage Moment Computations
25000
Zone B
Baggage
Moments (lbs.-in.)
20000
15000
Zone A Baggage
10000
Shelf
Main Baggage
5000
0
0
25
50
75
100
Weight (lbs.)
(Figure 6-19)
RA050001
6-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
COLUMBIA 300 (LC40-550FG) WEIGHT AND BALANCE ENVELOPE
3600
3500
3400
3300
M.L.W
3200
2
3100
3000
Wt.
(lbs.)
M.Z.F.W
2900
3
2800
2700
M.E.W
2600
2500
1
2400
M.F.W
2300
2200
2100
2000
1900
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
CG (inches)
(Figure 6-20)
1. Airplane basic empty weight must be below Maximum Empty Weight (M.E.W.) and above
Minimum Flight Weight (M.F.W.).
2. Weight must be below Maximum Landing Weight (M.L.W.) for landing. (If overweight
landing occurs, see maintenance manual for required inspection prior to further flight.)
3. Weight and Center of Gravity (CG) without fuel must be below the Maximum Zero Fuel
Weight (M.Z.F.W.) line.
4. See Section 2 of the AFM/POH for a listing of weight limitations.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-19
Section 6
Weight & Balance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
6-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
where information regarding the maintenance of the part can be
found.
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF
OPERATION
Install code - The following pages contain a listing of
equipment that can be installed in the airplane; this is indicated
in the Install Code column by the letters B and O. The meaning
of each letter code follows.
•
•
B (Basic Equipment) - The equipment is installed in all
airplanes.
O (Optional Equipment) – This equipment can be
installed at the factory at the option of the purchaser.
Chapter Numbers – The chapter numbers listed in the
equipment list correspond to the maintenance manual chapter
Flight Operation Requirements – There is certain minimum
equipment for IFR and night operations. Some equipment is
required for all flight operations, while other items are
optional. Columns five through eight, under the subheading
Flight Operation Requirements, identifies which equipment
must be installed and functioning for the various flight
conditions.
Headsets - Use of the communications equipment requires a
headset with a boom mike. Headsets are optional items and not
provided by the manufacturer since personal preference is a
significant issue. The pilot should add the actual weight of the
headset to his or her weight and, when applicable, to each
passenger’s weight for weight and balance calculations.
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
Drawing ref.
number
Install
Code
Item
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
Night
IFR
Opt.
CHAPTERS 21-24
21-01
21-02
21-03
LA53210003
LA53210003
LA53213000
B
B
B
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Front Seat Eyeball Vents
Rear Seat Eyeball vents
ECS Control Panel
RA050001
6-A1
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
21-04
21-05
21-06
21-07
23-01
23-02
23-03
23-05
24-01
24-02
24-03
24-04
24-05
24-06
24-07
24-08
Drawing ref.
number
LA53210018
LA53216000
LA71849204
LA53216000
LA52275109
LA55273000
LA53550000
LA53344300
LA71840000
LA53241000
LA53254272
LA53240000
LA53241000
LA53516000
LA53516000
LA53516000
Install
Code
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
O
O
O
Item
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
ECS Cabin Fan
ECS Heat Box
ECS Heat Exchanger
ECS Servomotor
Static Wicks Ailerons/Wings (4)
Static Wicks Elevator/Horizontal Stabilizer (4)
Static Wick Rudder (1)
SL15-MS Audio Panel
Alternator 60 amp (14 Volts)
Battery 14 Volt-25 Amp-hour
Standby Battery
Voltage Regulator
Battery Box
Ground Power Plug Relay
Ground Power Plug Socket
Ground Power Plug Wiring
Night
IFR
Opt.
See 1
See 1
CHAPTER 25
25-01
LA53342100
B
Artex ELT-200 Emergency Locator Transmitter Unit
1 The SL15 MS has a fail-safe feature, which permits communications on the No. 1 COMM only. While, technically speaking, there is no requirement for an
audio panel for IFR operations, the pilot should be aware that, without an audio amplifier, it is not possible to identify a navigational stations, use the ICS, or
communicate on a radio other than the No.1 position.
RA050001
6-A2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
25-03
25-04
25-05
25-06
25-07
25-08
25-09
25-10
25-11
25-12
25-13
25-14
25-15
25-16
25-17
25-18
25-19
Drawing ref.
number
LA53342000
LA53310000
LA53514017
LA53311200
LA53311300
LA53311800
LA53311100
LA53311600
LA53250000
LA53250000
LA53252500
LA53252500
LA53253000
LA53253200
LA53255000
RA 050001
LA53311400
Install
Code
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Item
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
ELT Antenna
Annunciator Panel
Circuit Breaker Panel
Rocker Switch Panel
Master/Ignition Switch Panel
Trim Panel
Flap Panel
Light Dimmer Switch Panel
Pilot’s Adjustable Seat
Copilot’s Adjustable Seat
Rear Seat Cushion
Rear Seatback Cushion
Pilot’s and Copilot’s Three Point Restraint (Each)
Rear Seat Passengers’ Three Point Restraint (Each)
Baggage Tie Downs and Restraining Net
POH and FAA AFM (Stowed in Copilot’s Seatback)
Aural Warning System
See 2
Night
IFR
Opt.
See 2
CHAPTERS 26-31
26-01
26-02
27-01
LA53254800
LA53254800
LA53271001
B
B
B
Fire Extinguisher Unit
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket
Pilot’s Control Stick
2 Baggage tie downs and a restraining net are required if baggage is carried in the baggage compartment.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-A3
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
27-02
27-03
27-04
31-01
31-02
31-03
Drawing ref.
number
LA53274001
LA53271002
LA53274001
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA57314000
Install
Code
Item
B
B
B
B
B
B
Pilot’s Rudder Pedals (Each)
Copilot’s Control Stick
Copilot’s Rudder Pedals (Each)
Voltmeter/Clock/Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
Flight Hour Meter
OAT Probe
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
Night
IFR
Opt.
See 3
See 3
CHAPTER 32
32-01
32-02
32-03
32-04
32-05
32-06
32-07
32-08
32-09
32-10
LA53321100
LA53322101
LA53322105
LA53322109
LA53322113
LA53321123
LA 53321127
LA 53321129
LA71324001
LA71324001
LA71323000
LA71322000
B
Main Wheel, Brake and Tire 15x6.00-6 (6-Ply)/Side
B
Main Gear Fairings (Each)
B
Main Wheel Fairings (Each)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Main Wheel Fairings Mounting Plate (Each)
Tab, Front Wheel Fairing
Tab Rear Wheel Fairing
Nose Strut Fairing
Nose Wheel Fairing
Nose Gear Strut
Nose Wheel, Tire and Tube 5.00-5
3 The right side controls may be removed provided permanent-type covers are placed over all openings from which the control were removed and the procedure
is approved and documented in the airframe logbooks by an appropriately certificated A & P mechanic.
RA050001
6-A4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
Drawing ref.
number
Item
Install
Code
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
Night
IFR
Opt.
See 5
See 6
See 6
See 7
See 5
See 5
See 5
See 5
See 5
See 6
See 6
See 7
See 5
See 5
See 5
See 5
CHAPTER 33
33-01
33-02
33-03
33-04
LA53311600
LA53570005
LA53311600
LA57332000
B
B
B
B
Flip Lights
Step Lights
Overhead Reading Lights
Strobe Lights/ Position Lights
33-05
33-06
LA57331000
LA57331007
B
B
Landing Light
Taxi Light
34-01
34-02
34-03
34-04
34-05
34-06
34-07
34-08
LA53344600
LA53342000
LA57317000
LA53240000
LA53312000
LA53342000
LA53342000
LA53342000
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
GX50 GPS
GPS Antenna
Marker Beacon Antenna
SD 120 Blind Encoder/Digitizer
SL30 NAV/COMM
COMM 1 Antenna
COMM 2 Antenna
NAV Antenna
See 4
CHAPTER 34
See 7
See 7
4 A landing light is required if the airplane is used to carry passengers for hire.
5 Both the GPS and the SL30 NAV/COMM are connected to the standby battery system, which is the basis for IFR certification. Accordingly, the antennas for
the SL30 and the NAV/COMM unit must be installed and operational for IFR operations. In addition, if a GPS approach or operations will be used during IFR
operation, then the GX50 system, including antenna, must be installed and operational.
6 If an ILS approach will be used during IFR operations, then the SL15 audio panel and remote marker beacon lights must be operative.
7 While a transponder, its related encoder, and two-way radio communications are not required for IFR operations in uncontrolled airspace, it is generally
impracticable to conduct VFR and IFR flight operations in the 48 contiguous states without this installed equipment.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
RA050001
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
6-A5
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
34-09
34-10
34-11
34-12
34-13
34-14
34-15
34-16
34-17
34-18
34-19
34-20
34-21
34-22
34-23
34-24
34-25
34-26
34-27
34-28
34-29
34-30
34-31
34-32
RA050001
6-A6
Drawing ref.
number
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53344500
LA53344500
LA53342209
LA53342201
LA53342207
LA53342205
LA53342500
LA53311400
LA53311400
761017
LA53312000
76997
761017
761017
LA53240000
10134
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
Install
Code
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
O
O
O
O
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Item
MD 200-306 Navigation Indicators
UPSAT 14H Annunciator Control Unit (ACU)
Transponder Unit
Transponder Antenna
KI 525A HSI Indicator
KG 102 Remote Gyro
KMT 112 Flux Valve
Panel Mounted KA 51B Slaving Control
Avidyne FlightMonitor (Moving Map Display)
Shadin Mini-flo Panel Unit
Shadin Flow Transducer (Pinwheel)
S-Tec 360 Autopilot Altitude Preselect
S-Tec 55 Autopilot Flight Guidance Computer
Roll Servo
Pitch Servo
Annunciator Unit
Pressure Transducer
Trim Adapter
KI 256 Flight Director System
Airspeed Indicator
KI 256 Artificial Horizon
Altimeter
Turn Coordinator
Vertical Speed Indicator
Flight Operation Requirements
All
Night
IFR
Opt.
See 7
See 7
See 7
See 7
See 7
See 7
See 7
See 7
4.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
Drawing ref.
number
Install
Code
Item
Magnetic Compass
Fuel Quantity Indicator Gauge
Tachometer
Stall Warning Switch
Stall Warning Horn
Rudder Limiter assembly
Heated Pitot Tube
Precise Flight Speed Brake 2000 System – Wing
Units (Each)
Precise Flight Speed Brake 2000 System –
Computer
Apollo MX20 MFD
S-Tec 429 Global Positioning System Steering
Remote Switch
S-Tec 429 Global Positioning System Steering Unit
34-33
34-34
34-35
34-36
34-37
34-38
34-39
LA53254000
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA57313000
LA57313000
LA53274300
LA57312002
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
34-40
N/A
O
34-41
N/A
O
34-42
LA53343903
O
34-43
N/A
O
34-44
N/A
O
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
Night
IFR
Opt.
CHAPTER 37
37-01
37-02
37-03
37-04
LA71842000
LA71844100
LA53260000
LA53260000
B
B
B
B
53-01
LA53325100
B
See 8
Vacuum Pumps (Each)
Vacuum Filter
Vacuum Regulator Valve
Manifold Shuttle Valve
CHAPTERS 52-77
Cabin Entry Steps (Each)
9
8 Both vacuum pumps must be operational for IFR operations.
9 The step is included in the basic package; however, some owners/operators elect to not have it installed since it lowers cruise speed slightly.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
6-A7
(APPENDIX A)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST
Lancair Columbia 300
All – Required for all flight
operations
IFR – Required for IFR flight operations
Night – Required for night
flight operations
Opt. – Optional, not required for flight operations
Item No.
61-01
61-02
61-03
71-01
71-02
72-01
77-01
77-02
77-03
77-04
77-05
RA050001
6-A8
Drawing ref.
number
LA71820000
LA71820000
LA71820000
LA71840000
LA71844100
LA71000000
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA53343201
Install
Code
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
O
Item
A shaded box in one of the four Flight
Operation Requirements columns indicates the
requirement for that item.
Flight Operation Requirements
All
Night
IFR
Opt.
Propeller
Propeller Spinner
Propeller Governor
Starter Motor, TCM Energizer
Engine Intake Filter
IO-550N TCM Engine Complete
Vacuum Gauge/Ammeter
Oil Pressure/Temperature Gauge
Fuel Flow/Manifold Pressure Gauge
Cylinder Head/Exhaust Gas Temperature Gauge
JPI EDM-700 Digital Engine Scanner
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX B)
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 6 (Appendix A)
Weight & Balance
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL)
Equipment List N65099 ─ S/N 40075 ─ Date A/C was weighed ─ June 11, 2003
Item No
21-01
21-02
21-03
21-04
21-05
21-06
21-07
23-01
23-02
23-03
23-05
24-01
24-02
24-03
24-04
24-05
24-06
24-07
24-08
25-01
25-03
25-04
25-05
25-06
25-07
25-08
25-09
Drawing Reference
Number
Installed
LA53210003
LA53210003
LA53213000
LA53210018
LA53216000
LA71849204
LA53216000
LA52275109
LA55273000
LA53550000
LA53344300
LA71840000
LA53241000
LA53254272
LA53240000
LA53241000
LA53516000
LA53516000
LA53516000
LA53342100
LA53342000
LA53310000
LA53514017
LA53311200
LA53311300
LA53311800
LA53311100
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Item
Front Seat Eyeball Vents
Rear Seat Eyeball Vents
ECS Control Panel
ECS Cabin Fan
ECS Heat Box
ECS Heat Exchanger
ECS Servomotor
Static Wicks Ailerons/Wings (4)
Static Wicks Elevator/Horizontal Stabilizer (4)
Static Wick Rudder (1)
SL15-MS Audio Panel
Alternator 60 amp (14 Volts)
Battery 14 Volt-25 Amp-hour
Standby Battery
Voltage Regulator
Battery Box
Ground Power Plug Relay
Ground Power Plug Socket
Ground Power Plug Wiring
Artex ELT-200 Emergency Locator Transmitter Unit
ELT Antenna
Annunciator Panel
Circuit Breaker Panel
Rocker Switch Panel
Master/Ignition Switch Panel
Trim Panel
Flap Panel
Weight
2.07
2.07
0.42
2.05
2.44
1.6
0.26
0.07
0.07
.018
0.8
12.8
30.0
1.83
.3.0
2.17
0.9
0.8
3.9
2.47
0.11
0.43
3.9
0.47
0.67
0.46
0.47
Arm
79.0
130.4
79.0
63.43
63.43
56.6
63.43
140
279.4
301.3
79
28.3
63.0
70.3
70
63.0
55.0
153.0
104.0
215
217.1
79.0
89.5
79.0
79.0
79.0
79.0
RA050001
6-B1
(APPENDIX B)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL)
Equipment List N65099 ─ S/N 40075 ─ Date A/C was weighed ─ June 11, 2003
Item No
25-10
25-11
25-12
25-13
25-14
25-15
25-16
25-17
25-18
25-19
26-01
26-02
27-01
27-02
27-03
27-04
31-01
31-02
31-03
32-01
32-02
32-03
32-04
32-05
32-06
RA050001
6-B2
Drawing Reference
Number
LA53311600
LA53250000
LA53250000
LA53252500
LA53252500
LA53253000
LA53253200
LA53255000
RA050001
LA53311400
LA53254800
LA53254800
LA53271001
LA53274001
LA53271002
LA53274001
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA57314000
LA53321100
LA53322101
LA53322105
LA53322109
LA53322113
LA53321123
LA53321127
LA53321129
Installed
Item
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Light Dimmer Switch Panel
Pilot’s Adjustable Seat
Copilot’s Adjustable Seat
Rear Seat Cushion
Rear Seatback Cushion
Pilot’s and Copilot’s Three Point Restraint (Each)
Rear Seat Passengers’ Three Point Restraint (Each)
Baggage Tie Downs and Restraining Net
POH and FAA AFM (Stowed in Copilot’s Seatback)
Aural Warning Remote Unit
Fire Extinguisher Unit
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket
Pilot’s Control Stick
Pilot’s Rudder Pedals (Each)
Copilot’s Control Stick
Copilot’s Rudder Pedals (Each)
Voltmeter/Clock/Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
Flight Hour Meter
OAT Probe
Main Wheel, Brake and Tire 15x6.00-6 (6-Ply)/Side
9
Weight
Arm
0.14
24.0
24.0
5.7
9.2
1.82
1.76
1.51
3.5
0.6
3.56
0.32
1.59
1.0
1.59
1.0
0.32
0.13
0.03
18.4
110.36
106.6
106.6
134.9
150.2
128.5
145.7
175.0
128.5
79.0
88.0
89.8
91.4
71.6
91.4
71.6
78.0
78.0
79.0
122.1
Main Gear Fairings (Each)
2.4
131.7
9
Main Wheel Fairings (Each)
3.9
122.1
9
9
9
Main Wheel Fairings Mounting Plate (Each)
Tab, Front Wheel Fairing
Tab, Rear Wheel Fairing
0.4
0.1
0.1
122.1
112.8
130.6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX B)
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 6 (Appendix A)
Weight & Balance
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL)
Equipment List N65099 ─ S/N 40075 ─ Date A/C was weighed ─ June 11, 2003
Item No
32-07
32-08
32-09
32-10
33-01
33-02
33-03
33-04
33-05
33-06
34-01
34-02
34-03
34-04
34-05
34-06
34-07
34-08
34-09
34-10
34-11
34-12
34-13
34-14
34-15
34-16
34-17
Drawing Reference
Number
Installed
LA71324001
LA71324001
LA71323000
LA71322000
LA53311600
LA53570005
LA53311600
LA57332000
LA57331000
LA57331007
LA53344600
LA53342000
LA57317000
LA53240000
LA53312000
LA53342000
LA53342000
LA53342000
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53344500
LA53344500
LA53342209
LA53342201
LA53342207
LA53342205
LA53342500
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Item
Nose Strut Fairing
Nose Wheel Fairing
Nose Gear Strut
Nose Wheel, Tire and Tube 5.00-5
Flip Lights
Step Lights
Overhead Reading Lights
Strobe Lights/ Position/
Landing Light
Taxi Light
GX50 GPS
GPS Antenna
Marker Beacon Antenna
SD 120 Blind Encoder/Digitizer
SL30 NAV/COMM (2)
COMM 1 Antenna
COMM 2 Antenna
NAV Antenna
MD 200-306 Navigation Indicators
UPSAT 14H Annunciator Control Unit (ACU)
Transponder Unit
Transponder Antenna
KI 525A HSI Indicator
KG 102 Remote Gyro
KMT 112 Flux Valve
Panel Mounted KA 51B Slaving Control
Avidyne FlightMonitor (Moving Map Display)
Weight
0.76
1.89
12.2
14.8
.074
0.05
0.16
0.54
0.29
0.29
2.6
0.24
0.45
0.63
2.25
0.56
0.56
0.41
1.2
0.5
2.27
0.3
3.94
4.3
0.3
0.2
8.5
Arm
40.89
40.89
40.89
40.89
116.0
150.0
102.62
135.9
102.4
102.4
79.0
226.4
120.5
79.0
79.0
164.0
199.0
276.5
75.0
75.0
75
111.5
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
78.0
RA050001
6-B3
(APPENDIX B)
Section 6
Equipment List
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL)
Equipment List N65099 ─ S/N 40075 ─ Date A/C was weighed ─ June 11, 2003
Item No
34-18
34-19
34-20
34-21
34-22
34-23
34-24
34-25
34-26
34-27
34-28
34-29
34-30
34-31
34-32
34-33
34-34
34-35
34-36
34-37
34-38
34-39
34-40
34-41
34-42
34-43
34-44
RA050001
6-B4
Drawing Reference
Number
LA53311400
LA53311400
761017
LA53343900
LA53312000
76997
761017
761017
LA53240000
10134
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53311400
LA53254000
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA57313000
LA57313000
LA53274300
LA57312002
N/A
N/A
PA53343600
PA53343600
Installed
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Item
Weight
Shadin Mini-flo Panel Unit (STC)
Shadin Pinwheel (STC)
S-Tec 360 Autopilot Altitude Preselect (STC)
Apollo MX20 (2)
S-Tec 55 Autopilot Flight Guidance Computer (STC)
Roll Servo
Pitch Servo
Annunciator Unit
Pressure Transducer
Trim Adapter
KI 256 Flight Director System
Airspeed Indicator
KI 256 Artificial Horizon
Altimeter
Turn Coordinator
Vertical Speed Indicator
Magnetic Compass
Fuel Quantity Indicator Gauge
Tachometer
Stall Warning Switch
Stall Warning Horn
Rudder Limiter assembly
Heated Pitot Tube
Precise Flight SpeedBrakeTM 2000 System - Wing Units (Each) STC
Precise Flight SpeedBrakeTM 2000 System – Computer STC
S-Tec 429 Global Positioning System Steering Remote Switch
S-Tec 429 Global Positioning System Steering Unit
1.0
1.0
0.9
7.2
2.8
2.9
2.9
.75
0.2
0.9
3.3
0.77
2.0
0.9
1.2
0.7
0.75
0.76
0.76
0.24
0.19
1.51
0.39
4.0
0.5
0.05
0.25
Arm
78.0
66.5
78.0
77.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
78.0
78.0
75.0
75.0
78.0
78.0
76.0
78.0
78.0
99.5
129.74
68.5
117.7
126.0
147.0
82.0
149.0
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
(APPENDIX B)
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 6 (Appendix A)
Weight & Balance
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL)
Equipment List N65099 ─ S/N 40075 ─ Date A/C was weighed ─ June 11, 2003
Item No
35-01
37-01
37-02
37-03
37-04
53-01
61-01
61-02
61-03
71-01
71-02
72-01
77-01
77-02
77-03
77-04
77-05
Drawing Reference
Number
Installed
SA01060SE
LA71842000
LA71844100
LA53260000
LA53260000
LA53325100
LA71820000
LA71820000
LA71820000
LA71840000
LA71844100
LA71000000
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA53311500
LA53343800
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Item
Semi-Portable Oxygen System (STC)
Vacuum Pumps (Each)
Vacuum Filter
Vacuum Regulator Valve
Manifold Shuttle Valve
Cabin Entry Steps (Each)
Propeller
Propeller Spinner
Propeller Governor
Starter Motor, TCM Energizer
Engine Intake Filter
IO-550N2 TCM Engine Complete
Vacuum Gauge/Ammeter
Oil Pressure/Temperature Gauge
Fuel Flow/Manifold Pressure Gauge
Cylinder Head/Exhaust Gas Temperature Gauge
JPI EDM 700
Weight
13.0
1.91
0.43
0.40
0.79
2.15
70.0
7.3
2.80
17.75
0.80
465.0
0.77
0.76
0.79
0.78
0.91
Arm
133.0
53.8
67.0
62.9
62.9
160.2
15.0
14.0
28.0
58.0
28.0
44.45
78.0
78.0
78.0
78.0
78.0
RA050001
6-B5
Section 6
Equipment List
(APPENDIX B)
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
6-B6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
The use of this page is optional and is provided for listing items that were added to the airplane via a Supplemental Type Certificate
(STC) or other FAA approved procedures. This page is included in this section as a convenience to provide consistency in presentation.
The page does not replace or amend any required documentation attendant with the after-market installation and/or modification.
TABULATED AFTER-MARKET EQUIPMENT LIST (TAMEL)
Lancair Columbia 300
Item No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Serial / Part No.
ATA
Chapter
Item
Weight
(lbs.)
Arm
(ins.)
TABULATED AFTER-MARKET EQUIPMENT LIST (TAMEL)
Lancair Columbia 300
Item No.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
Serial / Part No.
ATA
Chapter
Item
Weight
(lbs.)
Arm
(ins.)
DATE
MOVED
OUT
N/A
IN
N/A
BASIC AIRPLANE AS DELIVERED
DESCRIPTION OF ARTICLE OR
MODIFICATION
AIRPLANE MODEL: COLUMBIA 300 (LC40-550FG)
ITEM
MOVED
WEIGHT & BALANCE RECORD
(Inches)
N/A
(Lbs.)
N/A
WEIGHT ADDED
N/A
(Lbs. – in.)
N/A
(Lbs.)
N/A
(Inches)
N/A
(Lbs. – in.)
WEIGHT REMOVED
WEIGHT /MOMENT CHANGE
Date Airplane Weighed – June 11, 2003 (Initial)
SERIAL NUMBER: 40075
(Continuing History of Changes in Structure or Equipment Affecting Weight and Balance)
2369.33
(Lbs.)
245,307.67
(Lbs. – in.)
RUNNING
TOTALS
PAGE NO. 1
DATE
MOVED
IN
OUT
DESCRIPTION OF ARTICLE OR
MODIFICATION
AIRPLANE MODEL: COLUMBIA 300 (LC40-550FG)
ITEM
MOVED
WEIGHT & BALANCE RECORD
(Lbs.)
(Inches)
WEIGHT ADDED
(Lbs. – in.)
(Lbs.)
(Inches)
(Lbs. – in.)
WEIGHT REMOVED
WEIGHT /MOMENT CHANGE
Date Airplane Weighed – June 11, 2003 (Initial)
SERIAL NUMBER: 40075
(Continuing History of Changes in Structure or Equipment Affecting Weight and Balance)
(Lbs.)
(Lbs. – in.)
RUNNING
TOTALS
PAGE NO. 2
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Section 7
Description of Airplane & Systems
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 7-5
AIRFRAME & RELATED ITEMS ............................................................................................ 7-8
Basic Construction Techniques ............................................................................................. 7-8
Fuselage ........................................................................................................................... 7-8
Wings and Fuel Tanks ..................................................................................................... 7-8
Flight Controls ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
Ailerons and Elevator ...................................................................................................... 7-8
Aileron Servo Tab............................................................................................................ 7-9
Rudder.............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Flight Control System Diagram....................................................................................... 7-9
Rudder Limiter............................................................................................................... 7-10
Control Lock.................................................................................................................. 7-10
Trim System......................................................................................................................... 7-10
Elevators and Aileron .................................................................................................... 7-10
Trim System Diagram.................................................................................................... 7-10
Hat Switches .................................................................................................................. 7-11
Simultaneous Trim Application..................................................................................... 7-11
Trim Position Indicator.................................................................................................. 7-11
Trim On/Off Switch....................................................................................................... 7-11
Rudder Trim................................................................................................................... 7-11
Instrument Panel and Basic Cockpit Layout Diagram ........................................................ 7-12
Wing Flaps........................................................................................................................... 7-13
Landing Gear ....................................................................................................................... 7-13
Main Gear ...................................................................................................................... 7-13
Nose Gear ...................................................................................................................... 7-14
Seats..................................................................................................................................... 7-14
Front Seat (General) ...................................................................................................... 7-14
Front Seat Adjustment ................................................................................................... 7-14
Rear Seats ...................................................................................................................... 7-14
Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses...................................................................................... 7-14
Doors.................................................................................................................................... 7-15
Gull Wing or Cabin Doors............................................................................................. 7-15
Latching Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 7-15
Door Locks .................................................................................................................... 7-15
Door Seal System .......................................................................................................... 7-16
Baggage Door ................................................................................................................ 7-16
Step (Installed)............................................................................................................... 7-16
Step (Not Installed)........................................................................................................ 7-16
Handles .......................................................................................................................... 7-16
Brake System ....................................................................................................................... 7-17
Parking Brake ................................................................................................................ 7-17
Steering .......................................................................................................................... 7-17
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-1
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ENGINE..................................................................................................................................... 7-18
Engine Specifications........................................................................................................... 7-18
Engine Controls.................................................................................................................... 7-18
Throttle ............................................................................................................................ 7-18
Propeller........................................................................................................................... 7-18
Mixture ............................................................................................................................ 7-18
Engine Sub-systems ............................................................................................................. 7-18
Starter and Ignition......................................................................................................... 7-18
Propeller and Governor.................................................................................................. 7-19
Induction ........................................................................................................................ 7-19
Cooling........................................................................................................................... 7-20
Engine Oil ...................................................................................................................... 7-20
Exhaust........................................................................................................................... 7-21
INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................................................ 7-22
Engine Instrument Panel ...................................................................................................... 7-22
Fuel Quantity.................................................................................................................. 7-22
Manifold Pressure .......................................................................................................... 7-22
Fuel Flow ....................................................................................................................... 7-22
Vacuum .......................................................................................................................... 7-22
Ammeter......................................................................................................................... 7-23
Tachometer..................................................................................................................... 7-22
Oil Temperature ............................................................................................................. 7-23
Oil Pressure .................................................................................................................... 7-23
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) ............................................................................... 7-23
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)................................................................................... 7-23
Flight Instrument Panel........................................................................................................ 7-24
Annunciator Panel.......................................................................................................... 7-24
Aural Warning................................................................................................................ 7-24
Magnetic Compass ......................................................................................................... 7-25
Voltmeter/OAT/Clock ................................................................................................... 7-25
Voltmeter ................................................................................................................. 7-25
Outside Air Temperature (OAT).............................................................................. 7-26
Digital Clock ............................................................................................................ 7-26
Universal Time................................................................................................... 7-26
Local Time ......................................................................................................... 7-26
Flight Time......................................................................................................... 7-26
Flight Time Alarm.............................................................................................. 7-27
Elapsed Time Count Up Timer .......................................................................... 7-27
Elapsed Time Countdown Timer ....................................................................... 7-27
To Test the Clock..................................................................................................... 7-27
Remote Marker Beacon Repeater Indicator................................................................... 7-28
14H Annunciator Control Unit (ACU) .......................................................................... 7-28
Airspeed Indicator.......................................................................................................... 7-28
Integrated Flight System (IFS)....................................................................................... 7-28
KI 256 Flight Director and Flight Director (FD) ........................................................... 7-28
Drawing of the KI 256 Flight Director .................................................................... 7-29
Attitude Indicator ..................................................................................................... 7-29
KI 256 Flight Director.............................................................................................. 7-29
Autopilot/Flight Director Interface .......................................................................... 7-30
Pilot’s Guide ............................................................................................................ 7-30
RA050001
7-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Altimeter ........................................................................................................................ 7-30
Optional Instrument ....................................................................................................... 7-30
Turn Coordinator ........................................................................................................... 7-30
KCS 55A Compass System ........................................................................................... 7-31
Specifications ............................................................................................................ 7-31
HSI ............................................................................................................................ 7-32
Pilot’s Guide.............................................................................................................. 7-32
Vertical Speed or Velocity Indicator (VSI or VVI) ...................................................... 7-32
Navigational Head ......................................................................................................... 7-32
Hour Meter..................................................................................................................... 7-32
Pitot-Static System ........................................................................................................ 7-33
ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 7-34
Vacuum System ................................................................................................................... 7-34
Vacuum System Diagram .............................................................................................. 7-34
Fuel System ......................................................................................................................... 7-35
Fuel Quantity Indication................................................................................................ 7-35
Fuel Selector .................................................................................................................. 7-37
Fuel System Diagram .................................................................................................... 7-36
Fuel Low Annunciators ................................................................................................. 7-38
Fuel Vents...................................................................................................................... 7-38
Fuel Drains and Strainer ................................................................................................ 7-38
Backup Boost Pump, Vapor Suppression, and Primer .................................................. 7-39
Primer ............................................................................................................................ 7-39
Fuel Injection System .................................................................................................... 7-39
Environmental Control System (ECS)................................................................................. 7-39
Airflow and Operation................................................................................................... 7-39
Floor Vent System ......................................................................................................... 7-39
Environmental Control System Diagram....................................................................... 7-40
Defrosting System ......................................................................................................... 7-40
Individual Eyeball Vents ............................................................................................... 7-40
Standby Battery ............................................................................................................. 7-40
ELECTRICAL AND RELATED SYSTEM ............................................................................. 7-42
Electrical System ................................................................................................................. 7-42
General Description ....................................................................................................... 7-42
Master Switch ................................................................................................................ 7-42
Avionics Master Switch................................................................................................. 7-42
Rocker Switch Panel...................................................................................................... 7-42
Standby Battery System....................................................................................................... 7-42
Electrical System Diagram .................................................................................................. 7-43
Airplane Interior Lighting System....................................................................................... 7-44
Glare Shield Extension .................................................................................................. 7-44
Flip and Access Lights .................................................................................................. 7-44
Overhead Reading Lights .............................................................................................. 7-45
Instrument Flood Bar..................................................................................................... 7-45
Upper Instrument and Engine Panels ............................................................................ 7-45
Lower Instrument Panels and Rocker Switches ............................................................ 7-45
Summary of Interior Light Switches ............................................................................. 7-45
Trim, Flaps, Fuel Tank Position, and Annunciator Panel (Press to Test) ..................... 7-45
Interior Light Protection ................................................................................................ 7-46
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-3
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Airplane Exterior Light System ........................................................................................... 7-46
Position and Anticollision Lights................................................................................... 7-47
Taxi and Landing Lights ................................................................................................ 7-47
Stall Warning System........................................................................................................... 7-47
Stall Warning ................................................................................................................. 7-47
Rudder Limiter ............................................................................................................... 7-47
Rudder Limiter Test ....................................................................................................... 7-48
Rudder Limiter Fail-Safe Feature .................................................................................. 7-48
Fail-Safe Test ................................................................................................................. 7-48
Inadvertent Overriding of the Rudder Limiter............................................................... 7-48
Stall Warning System (Electrical).................................................................................. 7-48
STANDARD AVIONICS INSTALLATION............................................................................ 7-49
SL15-MS Audio Amplifier .................................................................................................. 7-49
General ........................................................................................................................... 7-49
Microphone Selector Switch.......................................................................................... 7-49
Transmitter Indicator...................................................................................................... 7-49
Drawing of the SL15 Stereo Audio Panel...................................................................... 7-49
Com Functions ............................................................................................................... 7-49
Split Com Modes ........................................................................................................... 7-49
Tel Mode ........................................................................................................................ 7-50
On/Off and Fail-Safe Feature......................................................................................... 7-50
Audio Selector Buttons .................................................................................................. 7-50
Swap Functions .............................................................................................................. 7-51
Volume Control.............................................................................................................. 7-51
Intercom ......................................................................................................................... 7-51
Squelch Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 7-52
Key Click Adjustment.................................................................................................... 7-53
Apollo GX50 Global Positioning System (GPS) ................................................................. 7-53
General ........................................................................................................................... 7-53
Picture of the GX50 GPS ............................................................................................... 7-54
Subscription Updates ..................................................................................................... 7-54
Apollo GX50 GPS User’s Guide ................................................................................... 7-54
H14 GPS Annunciator Control Unit (ACU) ........................................................................ 7-55
MSG (Message) Light.................................................................................................... 7-55
NAV/GPS Annunciation and Button ............................................................................. 7-55
APR (Approach Transition) ........................................................................................... 7-55
ACTV (Approach Active).............................................................................................. 7-56
PTK (Parallel Track)...................................................................................................... 7-56
GPS SEQ (GPS Sequencing) ......................................................................................... 7-56
Apollo SL30 NAV/Comm ................................................................................................... 7-56
Overview and Quick-Start Guide................................................................................... 7-56
Getting Started ............................................................................................................... 7-57
Basic Operating Procedures for the SL30 Nav/Comm .................................................. 7-58
MD-200 Navigation Indicator.............................................................................................. 7-59
Mid Continent Navigation Indicator .............................................................................. 7-59
Drawing of the MD-200 Navigation Indicator .............................................................. 7-60
VOR Station ................................................................................................................... 7-60
Localizer......................................................................................................................... 7-60
Glideslope ...................................................................................................................... 7-60
MD-200 Annunciators ................................................................................................... 7-61
RA050001
7-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Apollo SL70 ATCRBS Transponder................................................................................... 7-61
General........................................................................................................................... 7-61
On/Off Knob.................................................................................................................. 7-61
Ident Button ................................................................................................................... 7-61
Mode Buttons................................................................................................................. 7-61
Code and Altitude Display Windows ............................................................................ 7-62
Code Select Knob .......................................................................................................... 7-62
Timing Out..................................................................................................................... 7-62
Picture of the SL70 ........................................................................................................ 7-62
Altitude Hold ................................................................................................................. 7-62
Setting Altitude Hold..................................................................................................... 7-62
Setting the Altitude Hold Buffer ................................................................................... 7-63
Trans-Cal SSD 120 Blind Encoder/Digitizer ...................................................................... 7-63
General........................................................................................................................... 7-63
Altitude, Range, Accuracy............................................................................................. 7-63
Control Stick Switches & Headset Plug Positions ............................................................. 7-63
Autopilot Disconnect Switch (ADS) ............................................................................. 7-64
Push to Talk (PTT) Switch ............................................................................................ 7-64
Plug Positions ................................................................................................................ 7-64
Headsets......................................................................................................................... 7-64
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS ..................................................................................................... 7-65
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) ............................................................................... 7-65
General........................................................................................................................... 7-65
Artex 200 ELT............................................................................................................... 7-65
Switches................................................................................................................... 7-65
Testing and Reset Functions.................................................................................... 7-66
Artex ME406 ELT......................................................................................................... 7-66
Acuracy.................................................................................................................... 7-66
Switch Operation ..................................................................................................... 7-66
Self Test Mode......................................................................................................... 7-67
Testing ..................................................................................................................... 7-67
Fire Extinguisher ................................................................................................................. 7-69
General........................................................................................................................... 7-69
Temperature Limitations ............................................................................................... 7-69
Operation and Use ......................................................................................................... 7-69
Lightning Protection/Static Discharge................................................................................. 7-69
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................... 7-71
FlightMonitor (FMP300 Series) .......................................................................................... 7-71
Overview........................................................................................................................ 7-71
User’s Manual................................................................................................................ 7-71
Subscriptions ................................................................................................................. 7-71
BF Goodrich WX-500 and WX-950 Stormscope................................................................ 7-71
WX-500 User’s Guide ................................................................................................... 7-71
WX-950 Pilot’s Guide ................................................................................................... 7-71
Brief Operational Overview .......................................................................................... 7-72
J.P. Instruments Digital Engine Scanner ....................................................................... 7-72
Shadin Miniflo-L Digital Fuel Management System .................................................... 7-73
Functions........................................................................................................................ 7-73
Initial Programming....................................................................................................... 7-74
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-5
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Diagnostic Testing ......................................................................................................... 7-74
Preflight Check Programming........................................................................................ 7-74
Programming.................................................................................................................. 7-74
Emergency Procedures................................................................................................... 7-76
Apollo MX20 Multi-function Display ................................................................................. 7-76
Ground Power Plug .............................................................................................................. 7-77
S-Tec 429 Global Positioning System Steering (GPSS) Converter..................................... 7-78
RA050001
7-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of Airplane & Systems
INTRODUCTION
Section 7 provides a basic understanding of the airplane’s airframe, powerplant, systems,
avionics, and components. The systems include: electrical and lighting system; flight control
system; wing flap system; fuel system; braking system; heating and ventilating system; door
sealing system; pitot pressure system; static pressure system; stall warning system and the
vacuum system. In addition, various non-system components are described. These include:
control locks; doors and exits; baggage compartment; seats, seat belts and shoulder harnesses;
and the instrument panel.
Terms that are not well known and not contained in the definitions in Section 1 are explained in
general terms. The description and discussion on the following pages assume a basic
understanding of airplane nomenclature and operations.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
7-7
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
AIRFRAME & RELATED ITEMS
The Lancair Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG) is a pre-molded, composite built, semi-monocoque,
four seat, single engine, low wing, tricycle design airplane. The airplane is certified in the utility
category and is used primarily for transportation and related general aviation uses.
BASIC CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES
The construction process used to build the shell or outer surfaces of the fuselage, wing, and most
control surfaces involves creating a honeycomb sandwich. The sandwich consists of outer layers
of pre-preg fiberglass around a honeycomb interior. The term “pre-preg fiberglass” means the
fibrous material is impregnated with catalyzed epoxy resin by the manufacturer. This process
ensures consistency in surface thickness and strength. The honeycomb sandwich is assembled in
molds of the wing, fuselage, and control surfaces. An air pressure process is used during the heat
curing procedure to ensure a tight bond. Other structural components of the airplane, like ribs,
bulkheads, and spars, are constructed in the same manner. In areas where added structural
strength is needed, such as the wing spars, carbon fibers are added to the honeycomb sandwich.
Fuselage – The fuselage is built in two halves, the left and right sides; each side contains the
area from the firewall back to and including the vertical stabilizer. The bulkheads are inserted
into the right side of the fuselage through a process known as secondary bonding. The two
fuselage halves are bonded together, and the floors are bonded in after fuselage halves are
joined. Before the fuselage is assembled into one unit, cables, control actuating systems, and
conduits are added because of the ease in access. To prevent damage to the leading edge of the
vertical stabilizer, anti-erosion tape may be installed.
Wings and Fuel Tanks – The bottom of the wing is one continuous piece. The spars are placed
in the bottom wing and bonded to the bottom inside surface. Next, the ribs are inserted and
bonded to the inside surfaces of the bottom wing and to the spars. Finally, after wires, conduits,
and control tubes are inserted, the two top wing halves are bonded to the bottom wing and all the
spars and ribs. The airplane has integral fuel tanks, commonly referred to as a “wet wing.” The
ribs, spars, and wing surfaces are the containment walls of the fuel tanks. All interior seams and
surfaces within the fuel tanks are sealed with a fuel impervious substance. The wing cuffs
(specially shaped pieces of composite material) are bonded to the outboard leading edge of the
wing to increase the camber, or curvature, of the airfoil. This improves the slow-flight and stall
characteristics of the wing. To prevent damage to the leading edge of the wing, anti-erosion tape
may be installed.
Horizontal Stabilizer – The horizontal stabilizer is two separate halves bonded to two
horizontal tubes that are bonded to the fuselage. The shear webs and ribs are bonded into the
inside surface of the lower skin and the upper skin is then bonded to the lower assembly. To
prevent damage to the leading edge of the horizontal stabilizer, anti-erosion tape may be
installed.
FLIGHT CONTROLS
Ailerons and Elevator – The ailerons and elevator are of one-piece construction with most of
the stresses carried by the control surface. The end caps and drive rib that are used to mount the
control’s actuating hardware provide additional structural support. The aileron and elevator
control systems are operated through a series of actuating rods and bellcranks that run between
the control surface and the control stick in the cockpit. See (Figure 7 - 1) for an illustration of the
flight control systems.
RA050001
7-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Aileron Servo Tab – The aileron servo tab on the trailing edge of the left aileron assists in
movement of the aileron. The servo tab is connected to the aileron in a manner that causes the
tab to move in a direction opposite the movement of the aileron. The increased aerodynamic
force applied to the tab helps to move the aileron and reduces the level of required force applied
to the control stick.
Rudder - The rudder is of one-piece construction with most of the stresses carried by the control
surface. The drive rib that is used to mount the control’s actuating hardware provides additional
structural support. The rudder control system is operated through a series of cables and
mechanical linkages that run between the control surface and the rudder pedals in the cockpit.
See (Figure 7 - 1).
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Rudder Pedals
Control Sticks
Aileron
Crossover
Control Rod
Right Elevator
Control Rod
Control Rod Guide
Rudder Cables
Left Side
Aileron
Control Rod
Left Elevator
Control Rod
Right Side
Aileron
Control Rod
Aileron
Torque Tube
Bellcrank
Elevator Actuating
Control Rod
Elevator Interconnect
Assembly
(Figure 7 - 1)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-9
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Rudder Limiter – When the system is activated, a restricting device limits the left rudder travel
from 17º ± 1º to 11.5º ± 0.5º. The system is engaged when the stall warning is active and the
manifold pressure is above 12 in. of Hg. For more information, see the Stall Warning System
discussion on page 7-47.
Control Lock – When the airplane is parked or stored, there is a control lock designed to limit
movement of the ailerons, elevator, and rudder during high wind conditions. The device attaches
to the control stick, the rudder pedals, and a bracket under the pilot’s seat, near the crash ax. A
red flagged extension arm limits access to the ignition switch until the device is removed.
TRIM SYSTEM
Elevator and Aileron - The airplane has a two axis trimming system. The elevator trim tab is
located on the right side of the elevator, and the aileron trim tab is on the right aileron. A hat
switch on each control stick electrically controls both tabs, and the trim position is annunciated
on the trim panel, located to the right of the rocker switch panel. The trim servos are protected by
one-amp circuit breakers. See (Figure 7 - 2) for an illustration of the trim system.
TRIM SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Trim System
On/Off Switch
Trim Tab
Position LED
Indicators
Aileron Trim
Aileron Trim
Elevator Trim
Elevator Trim
Press To
Test Switch
Elev.
Servo
Aileron
Servo
Elev. Trim Tab
Ail. Trim Tab
Push-Pull
Rod
Push-Pull Rods
TRIM PANEL
PRIMARY BUS
Control Stick
Hat Switch
(Figure 7 - 2)
The trim surfaces are moved by push rods connected between each tab and a servomotor. The
aileron tab has one actuating rod and the elevator tab has two. The second actuating rod on the
elevator is a redundant system and is provided for the more critical tab in the system. The
frictional device installed on the aileron tab should never be lubricated.
RA050001
7-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Hat Switches – The trim tabs are controlled through use of a Hat Switch on the top portion of
pilot’s and copilot’s control stick, at the three and nine o’clock positions, respectively. Moving
the switch forward will correct a tail heavy condition, and moving it back will correct a nose
heavy condition. Moving the hat switch left or right will correct right wing down and left wing
heavy conditions, respectively.
Simultaneous Trim Application – If both switches, pilot’s and copilot’s, are moved in the
same direction at the same time, the trim will operate in the direction selected. For example,
nose down trim is selected on both hat switches. If the switches are simultaneously moved in
opposite directions, e.g., pilot’s is nose down and copilot’s is nose up the pilot’s selection
overrides the copilot’s. Finally, if trim is simultaneously selected in different directions, e.g.,
elevator trim is input by one pilot and aileron trim is input by the other, each trim tab will move
in the direction selected.
Trim Position Indicator – The trim position is displayed on two light bars using a series of blue
LED’s and two green light emitting diodes (LED) that are arranged on the trim panel in the
shape of a plus sign. The vertical lights indicate the position of the elevator trim and the
horizontal lights show the position of the aileron trim. The middle green lights in each bar
indicate the approximate neutral position.
The blue lights are sequentially lit and extinguished as the trim tab moves through its range of
travel. If the two green LED’s in the middle of the “+” are lit and no blue lights are illuminated,
both tabs are in the approximate neutral position. The LED’s level of brightness is controlled by
the position lights switch. When the position lights are on, the trim lights are in the dim mode,
and when the position lights are off, the trim lights are in the bright mode.
Trim On/Off Switch – The trim system on/off switch on the right side of the panel turns off
power on all the trim tabs. This switch is used if a runaway trim condition is encountered. See
page 3-18 for an expanded discussion of this issue. The press to test switch is discussed later in
this section on page 7-45 under the heading Trim, Flaps, Fuel Tank Position, and Annunciator
Panel (Press to Test).
Rudder Trim – The airplane has a manually adjustable tab on the lower portion of the rudder.
The tab is adjusted at the factory to produce near neutral rudder pressures at 8,000 feet MSL and
75% power. At other power settings and/or altitudes a slight amount of rudder pressure or aileron
trim may be required. The owner or operator of the airplane may wish to adjust this tab to
accommodate the most frequently used cruise configuration. The procedures for adjusting the
manual tab are contained in Chapter 27 of the Columbia 300 Airplane Maintenance Manual.
NOTE
Do not adjust the manual rudder tab by hand since this can produce an
uneven deflection or warping of the tab. Refer to the procedures in Chapter
27 of the Columbia 300 Airplane Maintenance Manual for adjustment of the
manual tab.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: L/02-14-2005
RA050001
7-11
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND BASIC COCKPIT LAYOUT DIAGRAM
9
10
K
8
7
14
A
B
C
D
E
F
19
Overhead Control Panel
11
G
H
A/S
HORZ
ALT
OPT
TC
DG
VSI
OBS
I
JI
12
13
Multifunction
Display(s)
(Optional)
14
16
15
6
20
4
5
17
4
3.1
3
18
3.2
1
2
Instrument Panel and Cockpit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Radio Rack Panel Assembly
Fuel Selector (On forward part of center armrest)
Left dimmer controls backlighting for radios and switches;
right dimmer controls engine and flight instrument
backlighting
3.1. Alternate Static Air
3.2. Heated Induction Air
Left/Right Knee Bolster
Rocker Switch Panel - See (Figure 7 - 14)
Master Switch Panel (Location of system master switch,
avionics master switch, ignition switch, and primer)
Engine Instrument Panel
Flight Instrument Panel
Marker Beacon Lights
Autopilot Master/Control Switch
Annunciator Panel - See (Figure 7 - 5)
Flap Panel – Flap switch and Annunciator
Environmental Control System (ECS) Panel
Fresh Air Vents
15. Lower Instrument Panel
16. GPS– See page 53
17. Right Knee Bolster Panel Assembly (Includes ELT
remote switch, power point adapter, and hour meter)
18. Engine Controls – (L) Throttle; (C) Prop; (R) Mixture
19. Overhead Control Panel Dimmer Switch
19.1. Left dimmer switch control reading lights
19.2. Right dimmer controls instrument flood bar
20. Trim Panel – See (Figure 7 - 2).
Engine & Flight Instruments Legend
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Left and Right Fuel Quantity
Manifold Pressure and Fuel flow
Vacuum and Ammeter
Tachometer
Oil Pressure and Temperature
Cylinder Head and Exhaust Gas Temperatures
Voltmeter and Clock/OAT- See (Figure 7 - 6)
A/P Annunciator for S-Tec 55
Optional Display (Shadin FF, Alt. Presel., etc.)
GPS Annunciator Control Unit – See (Figure 7 - 18)
Magnetic Compass
(Figure 7 - 3)
RA050001
7-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
WING FLAPS
The airplane is equipped with electric Fowler-type flaps. During flap extension, the flaps move
out from the trailing edge of the wing, which increases both the camber and surface area of the
wing. A motor located under the front passenger’s seat and protected by a 10-amp circuit breaker
powers the flaps. A flap shaped switch located in the flap switch panel, which is to the right of
the engine controls, operates the flaps.
The flap switch is labeled with three positions: UP (0°), T/O (12°), and LANDING (40°).
Rotating the flap switch clockwise retracts the flaps, and moving it counter-clockwise extends
the flaps. A light bar on the flap knob flashes, at approximately 2 hertz, while the flaps are in
motion. When the flaps reach the selected position the flashing light stops. When landing flaps is
selected, the in-transit light will not extinguish until the airspeed drops below 100 KIAS. The
load caused by the higher airspeed prevents the flaps from going past approximately 37 degrees
until the speed drops below 100 KIAS, and thus the load on the flaps is reduced. The
illumination of the flaps does not change with adjustments to the dimmer thumb-wheel switch.
Controlling light intensity and testing of the lights is discussed later in this section on page 7-45.
See (Figure 7 - 3) for a drawing of the instrument panel and cockpit layout.
When the flaps are in the up position, the knob is in a position parallel to the floor and points to
the UP label on the panel overlay. When flaps are in the takeoff position the knob is rotated 30°
counter clockwise from UP, and pointed to the T/O label. When flaps are in the down position,
the knob is rotated 30° more and points to the LANDING label. Flap extension speed placards
are posted on the flap switch panel overlay. See (Figure 7 - 4) for a drawing of the flap panel.
(Figure 7 - 4)
LANDING GEAR
Main Gear – The airplane has tricycle landing gear with the two main wheels located behind the
center of gravity (CG) and a nose wheel well forward of the CG point. The main gear is made
from high quality rod steel that has been gun-drilled (drilled through the center like the bore of a
gun barrel). The main gear is attached to a tubular steel gearbox that is bolted to the bottom of
the fuselage, just aft of the wing saddle. There are 15x6.00-6 tires (tire width and rim diameter in
inches) that are inflated to 55 psi and mounted to the gear with Cleveland disc brakes. Composite
wheel fairings are mounted over each tire to reduce drag.
Nose Gear – The nose gear has a nitrogen and oil-filled oleo-type strut that is bolted to the
engine mount and serves as a shock absorber. Forcing oil through orifices in the piston and an
internal plug or barrier absorbs landing or vertical impact. A rotation key or vane working within
an oil- filled pocket contains rotational movements (shimmy dampening). Both of these
movements, vertical and rotational, are fully contained within the main cylinder body and under
normal usage will require little maintenance. Pressurized (250 psi) nitrogen supports the aircraft
weight, absorbs small shocks from taxiing, and returns the oleo to full extension.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-13
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
When the airplane is on the ground, with pressure on the nose strut, the nose wheel is free
castoring and has rational travel through about 120º, 60° to the left and 60° to the right. When
the airplane is in flight with pressure off the nose strut, the nose wheel will self-center, which is
accomplished by a key in the cylinder rod and a fixed cam. The nose tire is 5.00-5 and should be
filled to 88 psi. A composite wheel fairing is mounted over the tire to reduce drag.
SEATS
Front Seats (General) – Two individual, adjustable, tubular frame seats provide the front
seating for the pilot and passenger. The base of the tubular seat frame is covered with sheet
aluminum, and the seat cushions are attached to the aluminum through a series of Velcro strips.
The seat backs on the front seats fold forward to permit access to the aft seating area. The seat
cushions and seat backs are foam filled and covered with natural leather and ultra-leather. For
added protection, both the front and rear seats incorporate a special rigid, energy absorbing foam
near the bottom of the cushion. The cushion is designed for the loads applied by a seated
passenger, and it is possible to damage the seat if concentrated loads are applied. Care must be
taken to avoid stepping on the seats with high-heeled shoes or placing heavy objects on the seat
that have small footprints.
Front Seat Adjustment – The front seats are adjustable fore and aft through a range of
approximately seven inches. The adjustment control for the seats is located below the seat
cushion on the left side. To adjust the position of either seat, move the control lever towards the
middle until the seat unlocks from the seat track and adjust the seat to the desired position.
Release the adjustment control when the seat is in the desired position, and test for positive seat
locking by applying a slight fore and aft movement to the seat cushion. The tilt of front seat
backs is adjustable on the ground by loosening the jam nut on the coarse-threaded bolts on each
side of the seatback and then raising or lowering the bolts that control the tilt of the seat. See
Chapter 25 in the maintenance manual for specific limitations.
Rear Seats – The rear seats are a split bench-type design and are nonadjustable. The bench seat
frame is composite construction and bolted to the interior of the fuselage. The foam filled seat
and seat back cushions are covered with natural leather and ultra-leather and attached to the seat
bench with Velcro fasteners. The seatbacks are attached to a metal crossbar and secured with
quick release pins; however, removal of the rear seat back is not permitted for normal operations.
SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES
The seat belts and shoulder harnesses are an integrated three-point restraint type of design. With
this type of restraint, the lap belt and diagonal harness are incorporated using one continuous
piece of belt webbing. The webbing is anchored on each side of the seat for the lap belt restraint
and then in the overhead for the harness restraint.
Use of the three-point restraint system is accomplished by grasping the male end of the buckle,
drawing the lap webbing and diagonal harness across the lower and upper torso, and inserting it
into the female end of the buckle. There is a distinctive snap when the two parts are properly
connected. Adjusting two devices in the lap-webbing loop varies the length of the lap belt. One
end of the adjustment loop contains a dowel, and the other has a small strap. Draw the dowel and
strap together to enlarge the lap belt size, and draw them apart to tighten the lap belt. To release
the belt, press the red button on the female portion of the buckle. The torso part of the webbing is
on inertial reels that permit the freedom of movement required for piloting operations and
passenger comfort. In case of rapid deceleration, the inertial reel will engage a locking
mechanism and provide positive restraint.
RA050001
7-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: L/02-14-2005
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
DOORS
WARNING
Do not open any of the airplane doors in flight. The doors are not designed to
be opened in flight; subsequent airloads on an opened door will forcefully
pull it completely open and detach it from the airplane.
Gull Wing or Cabin Doors – The airplane has entrance doors on each side, which permits easy
access to front and rear seat positions. The doors are hinged at the top and open to an almost
vertical position above the fuselage. The doors are part of the fuselage contour and when both
are fully opened, have a gull wing type of appearance. In the full up or full open position, each
door is supported and kept open by a gas strut. The strut will only hold the door open when the
door is in the vertical or near vertical position.
The hinges, in conjunction with the dual slide bolts of the door latching mechanism, which
extend through the fore and aft door jam, keep the door secure with four points of contact. A
distinction is made here between the latching mechanism and the security door locks. The
latching mechanism ensures that the doors will remain secured during flight. The door locks are
primarily antitheft devices and restrict use of the latching mechanism.
The aircraft should never be taxied while the doors are in the full up position. The doors may be
opened 6 to 8 inches during taxi, which can be controlled by grasping the arm rest.
Latching Mechanism – From the exterior, the latching mechanism on each cabin door is
operated through movement of the exterior door handle. The handle is mounted on the side of the
door in the bottom-aft position and has two ranges of movement. The handle is recessed into the
door with adequate room for a handhold. A safety release on the handle must be disengaged
before the door will open. Pulling the handle away from the door activates the release. Moving
the forward end of the handle from its normal middle position to the six o’clock position
disengages the latching mechanism. To secure the door, return the handle to the middle position.
From the interior, both latching mechanisms are engaged and disengaged through use of a handle
near the bottom-aft position of the interior door. Again, pulling the handle away from the door
disengages the safety release. To activate the latching mechanism, move the door handle down
from its near horizontal position until the slide bolts are fully engaged and the curved end of the
handle is resting in the safety detent. There are placards on the interior doors labeled “Open” and
“Closed” with direction arrows. When both doors are properly closed with the latching
mechanism and the baggage door is secured and locked, the “Door Open” annunciator in the
upper left position of the annunciator panel will not be lit, and the aural warning will silence.
WARNING
If the red “Door Open” annunciator light is on or the aural warning is playing,
then one or more doors are not properly secured and the airplane is unsafe to fly.
Door Locks – There are door locks for each door that restrict use of the latching mechanism and
are intended as antitheft devices. The door lock on the pilot’s side is a tube-type lock and is
operated with a key. On the passenger’s side, there is an interior latch control for locking the
door. The keyed lock and the latch are moved counterclockwise to lock the door.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-15
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
To lock the airplane, first engage the door latching mechanism on the passenger side, and then
activate the door lock by moving the interior latch. Next, close and latch the pilot’s door, and use
the key to activate the door lock. Ensure that the baggage door is locked. The passenger’s door
must not be locked during flight operations. Locking the door would inhibit rescue operations in
case of an emergency.
Door Seal System – The airplane is equipped with a pneumatic door seal system that limits air
leakage and improves soundproofing. An inflatable gasket around each main door expands when
the door seal system is turned on. An electrical motor near the pilot’s rudder pedals operates the
system, which maintains a differential pressure of 12 to 15 psi. The system is activated by a
switch in the rocker switch panel labeled “Door Seal” and is protected by a five-amp circuit
breaker. The cabin and baggage doors must be closed for the door seal system to operate. The
latching mechanism of each door moves a micro switch, which turns off the Door Open
annunciator. The Door Open annunciator must be extinguished for the door seal system to
operate.
The cabin door latching mechanism also controls the dump door seal valve. When either cabin
door latching mechanism is moved more than a half inch towards the open position, the dump
valve is engaged and the pressure in the seals is dumped. This prevents inadvertent operation of
the doors when they are sealed; however, setting the door seal switch to the off position after
landing is recommended.
Normally, the door seal switch remains in the On position for the entire flight. If the system
pressure drops below 12 psi, the air pump will cycle on until pressure is restored. If the pump
runs continuously, it is an indication that a seal is damaged and incapable of holding pressure. In
this situation, the door seal system should not be operated until repairs are made.
Baggage Door – The baggage access door is located on the left side of the airplane,
approximately two and one half feet from the left cabin entrance door. The door has Ace type
locks on each side of the door, and both locks are used to secure and unsecure the door. There is
a piano hinge at the top and the door is held open by a gas strut during loading and unloading
operations.
To open the baggage door, insert the key into each lock and rotate 90º clockwise. The key cannot
be removed from the forward baggage door lock; hence, when opening it, the aft lock is released
first. Once the aft lock is unlatched, remove the key and open the forward lock. This design
reduces the possibility of taking off with the baggage door open, provided the ignition and
baggage door keys are on the same key ring. When the second lock is unlatched, the gas strut
will raise the door. The baggage door is part of the door annunciator system. If the baggage door
is not properly closed and the forward latch secured, the red “Door Open” light in the
annunciator panel will illuminate and the aural warning will sound.
Step (Installed) – On each side of the airplane there is an entrance step mounted to the fuselage
and located aft of the flaps. The entrance step is used for access to the airplane; however, the
flaps cannot be stepped on during ingress and egress operations. Placing weight on the top of the
flaps imposes unnatural loads on the control’s surface and hardware and may cause damage.
Both flaps are placarded with the words “No Step.”
Step (Not Installed) – Some owners prefer to not have the step installed since it lowers cruise
speed by about two knots. Some of these owners may prefer to carry a small step ladder/stool to
assist passengers in entering and exiting the airplane. The pilot must, in this instance, enter and
RA050001
7-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
exit the airplane without the use of a portable device. If a portable step is not used, it is
recommended that entering and exiting the airplane be made from the front of the wing. The
easiest method of ingress or egress is to sit on the wing facing forward and then stand up.
Handles – Optional fuselage handles are available with certain aircraft to assist entering the
aircraft. The handles are located behind the passenger windows. Do not hang or otherwise put
your full weight on the handles.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The airplane braking system is hydraulically operated by a dedicated braking system. Each
rudder pedal has a brake master cylinder built into it. Depressing the top portion of the rudder
pedals translates this pressure into hydraulic pressure. This pressure is transmitted through a
series of hard aluminum and steel grade Teflon lines to pistons in the brake housing of each
brake. The piston activates the brake calipers that apply friction to the chrome steel discs. Each
disc is connected to a wheel on the main landing gear and when the caliper clamps onto the disc,
it creates friction, which impedes its rotation. Since the disc is part of the wheel, the friction on
the disc slows or stops the forward momentum of the airplane.
Parking Brake – The parking brake is near the floor, forward of the circuit breaker panel on the
pilot’s side of the airplane. When disengaged, the handle is flush with the side panel. The black
handle is placarded with the red lettered statement, “Brake Engaged,” which is only visible when
the brake is engaged. To operate, apply and maintain brake pressure to both brakes, and move
the parking brake control 90° clockwise by grasping the forward portion of the handle. Once the
parking brake handle is set, release pressure on the brake pedals.
Moving the parking brake control to the “On” position causes a valve to close the line between
the master cylinders and the parking brake. The pressure introduced by the foot pedals before the
brake was set is maintained in the system between the parking brake handle and the brake
housing. To release the parking brake, apply pressure to the brake pedals, and move the parking
brake selector 90° counterclockwise or back to the flush position. When the parking brake is on,
the position of the handle restricts access to the left rudder pedal and limits inadvertent operation
with the parking brake system engaged.
Steering – Directional control of the airplane is maintained through differential braking.
Applying pressure to a single brake introduces a yawing moment and causes the free castoring
nose wheel to turn in the same direction. As is the case with most light aircraft, turning requires a
certain amount of forward momentum. Once the airplane is moving forward, applying right or
left brake will cause the airplane to steer in the same direction. There are two important
considerations. First, use enough power so that forward momentum is maintained, otherwise the
differential braking will stop the airplane. Second, avoid the tendency to ride the brakes since
this will increase wear. Some momentary differential braking may be required for takeoff until
the control surfaces become effective.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-17
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ENGINE
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
The airplane engine is a Teledyne Continental Motors Aircraft Engine Model IO-550-N. It is a
horizontally opposed, six-cylinder, fuel injected, air-cooled engine that uses a high-pressure wetsump type of oil system for lubrication. There is a full flow, spin-on, disposable oil filter. The
engine has top air induction, an engine mounted throttle body, and a bottom exhaust system. On
the front of the engine, accessories include a hydraulically operated propeller governor and a
gear driven alternator. Rear engine accessories include a starter, gear-driven oil pump, geardriven fuel pump, and dual gear-driven magnetos and vacuum pumps.
ENGINE CONTROLS
Throttle – The throttle controls the volume of air that enters the cylinders. The control has a
black circular knob and is located to the right of the rocker switch panel and above the radios.
The throttle has a friction control collar that increases or decreases the pressure required to
advance or retard the control. It is used to lock the throttle at a particular manifold pressure
setting. When it is turned clockwise, the friction is increased; turning counterclockwise
decreases the friction. Changes in throttle settings are displayed on the manifold gauge. Moving
the throttle forward increases engine power and manifold pressure, while moving it back will
reduce power and manifold pressure.
Propeller – The propeller control allows the pilot to vary the speed or RPM of the propeller. The
control has a blue knob with large raised ridges around the circumference and is located between
the throttle and the mixture controls. The control has a vernier feature, which permits small
adjustments by rotating the knob either clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Large adjustments, such as “exercising the prop” (moving the control to the full aft position), can
be made by pressing in the locking button in the center of the knob and moving the control as
desired. The high-speed position is with the control full forward.
Mixture – The mixture control allows the pilot to vary the ratio of the fuel-air mixture. The
control has a red knob with small raised ridges around the circumference and is located to the
left of the flap switch, above the radios. The control has a vernier feature, which permits small
adjustments by rotating the knob either clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Large adjustments, such as when the control is set to idle cut-off (moving the control to the full
aft position), can be made by pressing in the locking button in the center of the knob and moving
the control as desired. The richest position is with the control full forward.
ENGINE SUB-SYSTEMS
Starter and Ignition – Turning the keyed ignition switch, which is located on the master switch
panel, activates the starter. This panel is on the extreme left side of the cockpit just to the left of
the rocker switch panel. The key rotates in a clockwise direction and is labeled: “Off” – “R” –
“L” – “Both” – “Start.” The “R” and “L” items of this label relate to which magneto (left or
right) is turned on or not grounded. Turning the key to “Both” (approximately straight-up) will
cause both magnetos to be ungrounded or “Hot.”
The airplane engine is equipped with TCM-Bendix S6RN-25 series, high-tension magnetos with
impulse couplings on each magneto. The left magneto fires the three upper left and lower right
set of spark plugs, and the right magneto fires the three upper right and lower left set of spark
plugs. Turning the switch to the “L” or left magneto grounds the right magneto and makes it
non-functioning. Conversely, turning the switch to the “R” or right magneto position grounds the
left magneto and makes it non-functioning.
RA050001
7-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
The key will turn with minimum resistance to the “Both” position and is spring-loaded (provides
greater resistance) from the “Both” to the “Start” position. Starting is initiated from the “Both”
position with the master switch on. Rotating the key to the start position will engage the starter.
Once the engine starts, release the key, and the spring loading mechanism will return it to the
“Both” position. A geared right-angle drive starter adapter and a direct current starter motor
accomplish engine cranking.
Propeller and Governor – The airplane is equipped with a Hartzell three-bladed constant speed
propeller with a McCauley governor. In a constant speed propeller system, the angle of the
propeller blade changes automatically to maintain the selected RPM. For this to happen the angle
of the propeller blade must change as power, air density, or airspeed changes. A decrease in
blade angle decreases the air loads on the propeller, while an increase in blade angle increases air
loads. If, for example, the manifold pressure is reduced, the angle of the blade will decrease
(decreased air loads) to maintain a constant RPM. When operating at high altitudes with reduced
air resistance, the blade angle will increase (increased air loads) to maintain a constant RPM.
An oil-driven piston in the propeller hub uses oil from the engine oil system to operate the
propeller governor. If a greater blade angle is needed to maintain a constant RPM, the valve in
the governor pumps oil into the propeller hub to increase the propeller blades’ angle of attack. If
a smaller blade angle is needed to maintain a constant RPM, the governor diverts oil away from
the piston. With oil pressure removed, spring pressure and a centrifugal blade twisting moment
cause the propeller blades’ angle of attack to decrease. The propeller is connected directly to the
drive shaft of the engine; hence, propeller and engine RPM indications are the same.
There are limits at which the propeller can no longer maintain a constant RPM. As power is
reduced, the blade angle decreases to maintain a constant RPM. When the propeller reaches its
lowest angle of attack position, approximately 14°, further reductions in power will result in
decreased RPM. The highest propeller blade pitch angle is about 35º; which was selected to be
high enough to keep the engine from overspeeding in a Vne dive. The high pitch stop will never
be reached in flight under normal conditions.
The sequence in which power changes are made is important. The objective is to not have a high
manifold pressure setting in conjunction with a low RPM setting. When increasing power
settings, increase RPM first with the propeller control, and then increase manifold pressure with
the throttle. When decreasing power settings, decrease the manifold pressure first and then
decrease the RPM setting. Do not exceed 20 inches of Hg of manifold pressure below 2200
RPM. This requirement is not an engine limitation, but rather a harmonic condition
inherent in the Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG).
Induction – The induction system routes outside air through an air filter to the throttle valve and
then to each individual cylinder where fuel from the injector nozzle of the cylinder is mixed with
the induction air. The components of the induction system include air filter and a heated
induction air door. Normally, ram air enters through the left intake hole in the front of the
cowling and passes through the air filter where it is sent on to the fuel manifold.
In the event the normal induction system is obstructed by ice, there is a control, which permits
introduction of heated air into the induction system. This control is below the rocker switch
panel near the pilot’s left knee and labeled “Induction Heat.” Heated induction air is routed
through the induction system when the knob is pulled out. The ram air intake is located by the
right intake hole in the front of the cowling. When the induction heat control is pulled out, it
moves a
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-19
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
butterfly valve that shuts off the airflow of outside induction air and opens the airflow for heated
air from the engine. There is no need for an air-to-air heat exchanger manifold. The ambient air
that circulates around the engine provides a sufficient temperature rise for the heated induction
air.
Cooling – The airplane has a pressure cooling system. The basic principle of this design is to
have high pressure at the intake point and lower pressure at the exit point. This type of
arrangement promotes a positive airflow since higher-pressure air moves towards the area of low
pressure. The high-pressure source is provided by ram air that enters the left and right intake
openings in the front of the cowling. The low pressure point is created at the bottom of the
cowling near the engine exhaust stacks. The flared cowl bottom causes increased airflow, which
lowers pressure.
Within the cowling, the high-pressure intake air is routed around and over the cylinders through
an arrangement of strategically placed baffles as it moves towards the lower pressure exit point.
In addition, fins on the cylinders and cylinder heads, which increase the surface area and allow
greater heat radiation, promote increased cooling. The system is least efficient during ground
operations since the only source of ram air is from the propeller or possibly a headwind.
Engine Oil – The IO-550-N has a wet sump, high pressure oil system. The system provides
lubrication for the moving parts within the engine and is the oil source for operation of the
propeller governor. In addition, a squirt nozzle that directs a stream of oil on the inner dome of
each piston cools each piston. The engine has an oil cooler with a pressure-temperature bypass.
The oil bypasses the oil cooler if the oil temperature is below 170°F (77°C) or a pressure
differential greater than 18 psi is detected. If the oil temperature is above 170°F (77°C), oil is
sent through the oil cooler before entering the engine. This type of arrangement keeps the oil at
constant temperature of about 180°F (82°C). Ram air for the oil cooler is provided by the
engine’s pressure cooling system.
The term “wet sump” means the oil is stored within the engine sump as opposed to a separate oil
tank. The oil is drawn out of the sump by the engine-driven oil pump where it is sent to a full
flow oil filter, i.e., a filter that forces all the oil to pass through the filter each time it circulates.
The system pressure is kept constant by a spring-loaded pressure relief valve that is between the
pump and the filter. From the oil filter, the oil flows into the oil cooler if the temperature is high
enough and then is routed to the left oil gallery (an oil dispersal channel or passage). The oil in
the left gallery flows forward to the front of the engine and a portion of the flow is sent to the
propeller governor. The oil flow is then directed to the right engine gallery and flows towards the
rear of the engine and back to the oil sump.
Oil within the left and right galleries is injected onto the crankshaft, camshaft, propshaft bearing,
accessory drive bearings, cylinder walls, and other various parts within the engine. After
lubricating the engine, gravity causes the oil to flow downward through transfer tubes and drain
holes where it is returned to the oil sump.
If the filter becomes clogged and prevents oil from moving through the system, a bypass valve
reroutes the oil around the filter. In this event, the lubricating oil is, of course, unfiltered.
However, rerouting the oil will prevent engine failure. It is important to note that the pilot will
have no indication that the oil filter has clogged, and this situation compounds the problem.
Since the filter failure was most likely caused by contaminated oil, the oil system will be
lubricated with contaminated oil. The best solution is timely and frequent oil changes.
RA050001
7-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
The dipstick and oil filler cap access door are located on the top left engine cowl about two feet
from the propeller hub. The engine must not be operated with less than six quarts of oil and must
not be filled above eight quarts. For extended flights, the oil should be brought up to full
capacity. Information about oil grades, specifications, and related issues are covered in Section 8
of this handbook.
Exhaust – Gases that remain after combustion flow from the cylinders through the exhaust
valves and into the exhaust manifold (a series of connected pipes) and are expelled into the
outside atmosphere. There is an exhaust manifold on each side of the engine, and each of these
manifolds is connected to three cylinders. The manifolds are connected to a muffler and tail pipe
that extend out the bottom of the engine cowling. A heat shroud is attached to the exhaust pipe
on the left side and serves as a heat exchanger. The air-to-air heat exchanger is used for cabin
heat.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-21
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operation and use of engine instruments and the instruments for accessory items connected
to the engine, such as the vacuum pump and alternator, are discussed below. While some of these
instruments display information about systems that are not directly related to the operation of the
engine, they are included here for convenience to permit discussion and referencing under one
heading. In addition, reference is made to the annunciator panel since many of its indications are
associated with the engine and engine related instruments. The annunciator panel is described in
more detail on page 7-24 of this section. The instruments discussed below are in the engine
instrument panel, which is on the left side of the airplane to the left of the flight instrument
panel. The panel is canted about 30° in relation to the flight instrument panel. See (Figure 7 - 3)
for a drawing of the instrument panel.
Fuel Quantity – The fuel quantity gauges are in the engine instrument panel in the top-left
position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the left tank fuel quantity on the left
side and the right tank fuel quantity on the right side. The gauge displays the amount of available
usable fuel, in U.S. gallons, in each tank. The dials for each gauge range from 0 gallons (red
placard) to 49 gallons with major increments of 10 gallons and minor increment of 5 gallons.
There are two green lights on the left and right side of the gauge that illuminate to indicate which
tank is selected. The lights will only work when the fuel selector is properly seated in the left or
right position. Controlling light intensity and testing these lights is discussed later in this section
on page 7-45. The pilot is reminded that the fuel gauges are approximate indications and are
never substitutes for proper planning and pilot technique.
Manifold Pressure – The manifold pressure gauge is in the engine instrument panel in the topright position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with manifold pressure indications on
the left and fuel flow readings on the right. Changes in throttle settings are displayed on the
manifold pressure gauge in inches of mercury (inches of Hg.) as it measures the absolute
pressure in the engine intake manifold, behind the throttle valve. The manifold pressure gauge
has increments that range from 0 to 30 inches of Hg. but does not have colored arcs or
limitations displayed on the instrument. The electronically powered gauge will not operate with
the master switch off.
Fuel Flow/Fuel Pressure – The fuel flow/fuel pressure gauge is in the engine instrument panel
in the top-right position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with manifold pressure
indications on the left and fuel flow/pressure readings on the right. Changes in throttle or mixture
settings will produce changes in the fuel flow/pressure readings. Readings for this gauge are
obtained by measuring the fuel pressure on the metered side of the fuel system and converting it
into a related fuel flow reading. The instrument displays gallons per hour (GPH) and ranges from
0 GPH to 25 GPH. The top and bottom of the gauge have fuel pressure markings that range
between 4 and 18 psi. The gauge is electronically operated and will not display a reading with
the master switch turned off.
Vacuum – The vacuum gauge is in the engine instrument panel in the center-left position. The
instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the vacuum gauge on the left and ammeter
indications on the right. The gauge measures vacuum or suction in inches of mercury (inches of
Hg. below ambient pressure) in major increments of one inch Hg. The normal operating limits
(Green Arc) displayed on the gauge range from 4.5 inches of Hg. to 5.2 inches of Hg. The
vacuum gauge measures the absences of pressure directly from the vacuum system and operates
independently from the electrical system of the airplane.
RA050001
7-22
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Ammeter – The ammeter is in the engine instrument panel in the center-left position. The
instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the vacuum gauge on the left and the ammeter on
the right. The ammeter measures the condition of the battery in terms of charging or discharging.
The range of the indications run from a + 60 amps to – 60 amps in 30 amp increments. While
there is no placarded operating range, under most conditions the instrument should indicate a
positive charging state. The master switch must be on for the ammeter to operate.
Tachometer – The tachometer is in the engine instrument panel in the center -right position.
Changes in RPM settings are displayed on the tachometer in increments of 100 RPM with the
red line at 2725 RPM. A green arc indicates the range for normal operations, 2000 to 2700 RPM.
The gauge is electronically operated and translates the rotor speed of the right magneto into an
equivalent engine RPM reading. Since the tachometer is electrically powered, it will not display
a reading with the master switch turned off.
Oil Temperature – The oil temperature gauge is in the engine instrument panel in the bottomleft position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the oil temperature gauge on the
left and oil pressure gauge on the right. The gauge measures oil temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) in 20 °F increments. The normal operating limits (Green Arc) displayed on the
gauge range from 170°F to 200°F with a red line upper limit of 240°F. The thermal bulb, which
is the source point for measurement of oil temperature, is located near the oil cooler. Power for
the temperature gauge is supplied by the airplane’s electrical system, and the oil temperature
gauge will not operate with the master switch turned off.
Oil Pressure – The oil pressure gauge is in the engine instrument panel in the bottom-left
position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the oil temperature gauge on the left
and oil pressure gauge on the right. The gauge measures oil pressure in pounds per square inch
(psi) in increments of 10 psi. The normal operating limits (Green Arc) displayed on the gauge
range from 30 psi to 60 psi. The lower limit of 10 psi is not placarded. An electrical transducer
mounted to the oil cooler converts pressure changes into electrical voltages. Power for the
transducer is supplied by the airplane’s electrical system, and the oil pressure gauge will not
operate with the master switch turned off.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) – The CHT gauge is in the engine instrument panel in the
bottom-right position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the exhaust gas
temperature (EGT) gauge on the left and CHT readings on the right. The CHT gauge displays
cylinder head temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F). The green arc or normal operating limits,
range from 240°F to 460°F with a red line above 460°F. The source of the temperature reading is
a direct measurement from a bayonet probe in the No. 2 cylinder, which is normally the hottest
cylinder. While the CHT is a voltage-generating temperature indicator, commonly referred to as
a thermocouple, the transmitting unit uses the electrical system of the airplane, and the gauge
will not operate if electrical power is lost or the master switch is turned off.
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) – The EGT gauge is in the engine instrument panel in the
bottom-right position. The instrument is a dual presentation gauge with the exhaust gas
temperature (EGT) gauge on the left and CHT readings on the right. The EGT gauge does not
quantify exhaust gas temperatures in terms of a numerical reading. Rather, the instrument serves
as an efficiency reference since it measures relative temperature, not actual. The graduations are
unlabeled and in increments of 25°F. There is a manually set reference pointer that is controlled
by a knob in the left-center of the dial. The EGT is calibrated to a base indication of 1250ºF to
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-23
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
1275ºF. Therefore, when the EGT needle is four increments from the bottom, the actual
temperature is 1350ºF to 1375ºF.
The primary use of the EGT is for proper mixture control since the indications reflect
combustion efficiency. Compared to CHT, the measurement is more direct and mixture
adjustments are reflected almost immediately. (Please see the discussion on page 4-21 for proper
mixture leaning techniques.) The EGT measurement location is at the exhaust manifold of
cylinder No. 2. The EGT is a voltage-generating temperature indicator, commonly referred to as
a thermocouple, and operates independently from the electrical system of the airplane.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL
All flight and navigational instruments are installed in this particular area. In addition, there is an
annunciator array located in the upper right portion of the flight instrument panel. The panel is
directly in front of the pilot, and the instrument presentation is contained in three rows. Directly
above the annunciator panel is an acknowledge button for the aural warning system. The
discussion that follows will identify each instrument, moving from left to right and down the
rows. A drawing of the airplane cockpit is shown on page 7-12.
Annunciator Panel – The presentation of the annunciator panel is shown in (Figure 7 - 5). The
number below each label identifies the page number that contains the relative discussion.
Controlling light intensity and testing these lights is discussed in this section on page 7-45.
FUEL VALVE
FUEL PUMP
L LOW FUEL
7-37
3-15 & 7-39
7-38
R LOW FUEL
7-38
DOOR OPEN
ALT
OIL
RUDR LMTR
LVAC
7-15
3-22/7-42
3-21
7-47
7-34
Above Messages Indicated with Red Lights
RVAC
7-34
RESERVED
SPDBRK
(Optional)
Supplement No. 3
Above Messages Indicated with Amber Lights
(Figure 7 - 5)
1. If the DOOR OPEN light is on, one or more of the airplane’s doors is not properly secured.
2. If the FUEL VALVE light is on, the fuel selector is not set to either the left or right tank, or
is not properly seated in the detent of the selected tank.
3. If the ALT light is on, the alternator has failed or was tripped off-line by an over voltage
condition. In either case, the battery is in a state of discharge.
4. If the OIL light is on, the engine oil pressure is less than 5 psi.
5. If the FUEL PUMP light is on, the engine driven pump has failed, and the backup boost
pump must be armed.
6. If the RUDR LMTR light is on, left rudder travel is limited to 12º.
7. If either the LVAC or RVAC light is on, the indicated vacuum pump is inoperative.
8. If either the L LOW FUEL or R LOW FUEL light is on, the indicated tank has less than
eight gallons of usable fuel remaining in that tank.
9. If the SPDBRK light is on, the speed brakes are deployed.
Aural Warning – The aural voice warning system is installed in addition to most of the red
annunciators. Any warning that causes a red annunciator to illuminate (except for oil pressure)
RA050001
7-24
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
will also cause the aural warning to activate. In addition, the aural system is integrated with the
Davtron clock, and will provide a reminder when the countdown timer reaches zero.
The aural warning system operates when the avionics master is on and there is engine oil
pressure. This feature prevents the warning system from going through all the commands when
power is first applied. There is also a two second delay to allow fuel tank selection without a
nuisance warning.
An acknowledge button is located below the annunciator panel’s red lights and is accessible to
both the pilot and copilot. Pressing the acknowledge button stops the played annunciation until
the next annunciation is triggered. The aural warning will play when it receives an input from the
annunciator panel to the appropriate pin of the warning device. This causes the message to be
played, repeating every two seconds until the acknowledge button is pushed. If more than one
warning is detected, each affected alert will be played at least once regardless of when the
acknowledge button is pressed.
The aural warning will be played over the cabin speaker and the headsets regardless of the audio
panel switch positions. The aural warnings consist of a female voice speaking in English. The
aural warnings that play are:
1. Door Is Open – this warning is activated when any of the doors are unlatched and the engine
RPM is over 1800 RPM
2. Alternator Off – this warning is activated when any of the following occur.
a. The alternator is switched off.
b. The overvoltage relay has been activated.
c. The bus voltage is below 12.0 volts DC.
d. The alternator has failed.
3. Fuel Valve – this warning is activated when the fuel valve is not in the left or right tank
detents.
4. Fuel Pump On – this warning is activated when the fuel pressure is less than 5 psi.
5. Timer at Zero – this annunciation is activated by the Davtron clock and is programmed by
the pilot.
Magnetic Compass – The airplane has a conventional aircraft, liquid filled, magnetic compass
with a lubber line on the face of the window, which indicates the airplane’s heading in relation to
magnetic north. The instrument is located on top of the glare shield and is labeled at the 30°
points on the compass rose with major increments at 10° and minor increments at 5°. A compass
correction card is on the compass and displays compass error at 30° intervals with the radios on.
Voltmeter/OAT/Clock – This instrument contains three separate indications. The upper window
is dedicated to voltmeter and outside air temperature readings, and the lower window is a multifunction timepiece. See (Figure 7 - 6) for a drawing of the instrument. There are three control
buttons on the face of the indicator. Pressing the top button, labeled O.A.T. and VOLTS, will
cycle the reading in the upper Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) from a voltage reading, to an
outside air temperature in °F, to an outside air temperature reading in °C. The lower two buttons,
labeled SELECT and CONTROL, are for the multi-function clock and are discussed under clock
features in paragraph 3 below.
1. The voltmeter displays the system’s bus voltage and under normal conditions should
indicate about 14.2 volts. At 16 volts, the voltage regulator will take the alternator off-line,
and at approximately 8 volts, electrical equipment will cease to operate or will operate
erratically. The voltmeter is electrically powered and will not operate if the master switch is
turned off.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-25
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
2. The outside air temperature (OAT) gauge measures the ambient air temperature from a
probe located on the forward access panel, under the right wing, just forward of the fuel vent.
The temperature is digitally displayed in either °F or °C depending on which mode is
selected. The OAT is electrically powered and will not operate if the master switch is turned
off.
3. The digital clock displays four time modes: universal time (UT), sometimes referred to as
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), local time (LT), flight time (FT), and elapsed time (ET). The
time mode selected is indicated in the lower digital display window on the left side with a
flashing underscore below the selected time mode. In (Figure 7 - 6) the ET time mode is
selected. Pressing the Select button several times cycles the display through the four time
modes in the order they are listed.
a. The Universal Time (UT) display is in hours and minutes and based on the 24-hour
clock. To reset the UT clock, ensure that the display is in the UT mode, which is
indicated by the flashing underscore below the UT in the display window. Next, press the
Select and Control buttons at the same time to enter the time reset mode. This will cause
the first digit in the LED to flash, which indicates that this is the number that can be
controlled or changed. Next, press the Control button, and the flashing number will
increase. When the desired number is set in, press the Select button, and the next digit
will flash. Again, adjust this number with the Control button until the desired number is
set. The last two digits, the minutes, are set in the same manner, and one final push on the
Select button exits the UT time reset mode. It is important that the reset procedure for the
UT mode is clearly understood as it will be referenced several times in the following
discussion.
b. The Local Time (LT) display is in hours and minutes and based on the 12-hour clock. In
the LT mode, the time is normally set to the local time zone in which the airplane is
operated, i.e., PST, EDT, etc. The clock is reset in the same manner as described in the
previous paragraph for the UT mode, except the Select button is used to underscore the
LT prior to entering the time reset mode. It is neither necessary nor possible to reset the
minute’s display since they are synchronized with the UT clock.
c. The Flight Time (FT) mode is useful for keeping track of the approximate flight hours
for a particular trip or series of trips. The recorder indicates time in hours and minutes up
to 99 hours and 59 minutes. The recorder is not an actual measurement of flight time
since it operates or counts up whenever the master switch is on and the system has oil
pressure. Pressing the Select button until the FT is underscored in the display window
accesses the FT mode. The flight time can be reset to 00:00 from FT mode by pushing the
Control button for approximately three seconds. On airplane serial numbers 40004 to
40015, the flight timer will not function unless Service Letter 01-011 is incorporated.
RA050001
7-26
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
(Figure 7 - 6)
1. The Flight Time Alarm – This feature is helpful for reminding the pilot to perform some
action in the future. Suppose that fuel tanks are to be switched in one hour and the current
flight time indication is 02:30 hours. From the FT mode (FT underscored), press both the
Select and Control buttons at the same time for one second to enter the flight alarm set mode.
Set in the desired future flight time indication in hours and minutes, in this case 03:30, for
alarm activation. The number is input in the same manner described for the UT reset. When
the flight time reaches 03:30, the LED indication will flash. If the FT mode is not displayed
at the time the alarm becomes active, and the clock automatically selects the FT mode for
display. Pressing either the Select or Control buttons turns off the alarm. The flight time is
unchanged and will continue counting.
2. The Elapsed Time (ET) count up timer is extremely useful for a number of flight
operations, and its use is simple and straightforward. Using the Select button, move the
underscore until the clock is in the ET mode. Press the Control button, and the timer will
start counting. Elapsed time counts up to 59 minutes and 59 seconds and then switches to
hours and minutes. It continues counting up to 99 hours and 59 minutes. Pressing the control
button again resets the ET to zero.
3. The Elapsed Time (ET) countdown timer has a number of applications; however, it
requires a few more setup steps. Suppose a pilot is on an instrument approach, and from the
VOR it is calculated that at two minutes and thirty seconds the airplane will be at the missed
approach point. In this instance, to time the approach, the clock is preset to a 02:30 standby
state and then is activated when crossing the VOR.
The time is entered the same as described for the UT mode; however, the final input to
the Select button to exit the reset mode will not start the countdown timer. Rather, the
timer will display the preset 02:30 setting and start the countdown when the Control
button is pressed. When the ET countdown timer reaches zero, the display will flash, and
the timer will start counting up. Pressing the Control button once will stop the display
from flashing, and a second push on the Control button will reset the ET timer to zero.
The ET countdown time can be set for times up to 59 minutes and 59 seconds.
4. To test the clock, hold the Select button in for three seconds. This will cause the display to
read 88:88 with all four modes underscored. When electrical power is first turned on, the top
display will indicate the system’s voltage, and the clock will display the mode it was in when
the electrical power was turned off. When the electrical system of the airplane is not on, a
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-27
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
backup AA battery holds the time and other settings such as flight time in the memory of the
clock. The battery has a three-year life, but it is recommended that it be replaced every two
years. Incorrect time and mode readings during power up are indications of an expended or
defective backup battery.
Remote Marker Beacon Repeater Indicator – A remote marker beacon (MB) repeater
indicator (Outer, Middle, and Inner Markers) is located above the artificial horizon. The three
remote lights are connected to the SL10 audio panel, which contains the receiver and controls for
the remote marker beacons. MB annunciations are also displayed on the SL10 audio panel and
provide a backup source for station passage. The operation of the marker beacon receiver is
covered on page 7-49 as part of SL15 audio panel discussion. The remote marker beacon
repeater indicator must be functional for IFR operations.
14H Annunciator Control Unit (ACU) – This area on the panel contains indications and
function switches for the Global Positioning System (GPS) and selection of which navigational
source (GPS or VOR) is displayed on the navigation indicator. A discussion of these switches
begins on page 7-49.
Airspeed Indicator – The airspeed indicator is part of the pitot-static system, which is discussed
on page 7-33. The instrument measures the difference between ram pressure and static pressure
and, through a series of mechanical linkages, displays an airspeed indication. The source of the
ram pressure is from the pitot tube and the source of the static pressure is from the static air vent.
The instrument shows airspeed in knots on the outer circumference of the instrument, which
ranges from 0 to 260 knots with 10-knot increments. Airspeed limitations in KIAS are shown on
colored arcs as follows: white arc – 57 to 119 knots; green arc – 71 to 179 knots; yellow arc –
179 to 235 knots; and red line – 235 knots.
True airspeed (TAS) is obtainable for indicated airspeeds between 135 and 215 knots by
reference to the true airspeed ring on the outer portion of the dial, approximately between the
five thirty and ten o’clock positions. The adjustment knob for this function is near the five
o’clock position on the airspeed indicator. Moving the knob causes the pressure altitude scale in
a window at the top of the instrument to move under a stationary temperature scale. Rotate the
knob until the pressure altitude (in increments of 1000 feet) is opposite the temperature (°C in
increments of 10°), and read the TAS on the true airspeed ring. Greater accuracy is produced if
calibrated airspeed is used rather than indicated airspeed.
Integrated Flight System (IFS) – This term IFS, as used in this manual, refers to the integrated
use of the KI 256 attitude indicator and flight director, the KCS 55A compass system (HSI), and
the S-Tec 55 autopilot system. Navigation, heading, and attitude information are integrated with
the basic gyroscopic instruments, i.e., the direction gyro (DG) and attitude indicator (AI). For
example, flight director bars are integrated with the AI and provide visual commands for the
pilot to follow throughout the various realms of flight. Similarly, heading, navigational course,
and glideslope data are integrated into the HSI. This type of integration enhances situational
awareness and instrument interpretation.
KI 256 Attitude Indicator and Flight Director (FD) – The attitude indicator is part of the
vacuum system, which is discussed on page 7-34. The instrument is a two-gimbaled gyro and
operates at about 25,000 RPM. The gyro provides information relating to movement around the
pitch and roll axes. The tumble limits (gimbal stops) are set at 85° in both pitch and roll. The
instrument cannot be caged or reset in flight. If the instrument is tumbled in flight it will give
RA050001
7-28
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
unreliable indications and takes up to 30 minutes to self-erect and give proper indications. On the
ground, a tumbled gyro can be reset in a few minutes by stopping and starting the engine.
DRAWING OF THE KI 256 FLIGHT DIRECTOR
(Figure 7 - 7)
Attitude Indicator – The roll is indicated by displacement from a fixed white index at the top of
the instrument. The displacement indications range left and right between 0° and 90° with major
indexes of 30° and minor indexes of 10° between the 0° to 30° ranges. Roll is also indicated by
the relationship between the delta figure in the foreground and horizon-like display in the
background. The background horizon display is a painted disc with a white horizontal line
through the diameter. The upper portion of the disc is blue to represent the sky and the lower
ground portion is brown. Pitch is indicated by displacement of the fluorescent delta above and
below the horizon line. The tip of the delta shows the position of the airplane’s nose relative to
the horizon. There are white lines above the horizon line indexed in increments of 5° with a label
at the 10° and 20º points.
KI 256 Flight Director – The flight director portion of the unit is essentially provided by the
yellow, triangular command bars, which touch each side of the delta. This is sometimes referred
to as a single-cue flight director. The command bars move up and down together or individually,
depending on the action commanded. For example, if the airplane is on an ILS approach and
above the glideslope, both command bars will move down, commanding a descent. The pilot
then changes the attitude of the airplane so the command bars are aligned with the delta. The
command bars are scaled to the amount of change needed. If a large change is needed, the unit
will command a larger adjustment and then incrementally reduce it as the desired target is
approached.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-29
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
The KI 256 is part of the Bendix/King KFC 200 system. However, the annunciator and select
switch shown in the Pilot’s Guide for the King KAP/KFC 200 Flight Control Systems are not
included. The select switches on the autopilot unit and the autopilot annunciator above the flight
director are substitutes for these Bendix/King items.
Autopilot/Flight Director Interface – Data for the flight director command bars (FDCB) are
supplied by the S-Tec 55 autopilot computer, which is turned on through the autopilot master
switch. See Section 9 for more information about the S-Tec 55 autopilot. Heading, navigation,
climb/descent, and approach commands are all controlled by input to the autopilot control unit.
In the FD mode, the autopilot is on but does not control the airplane. Instead, computer outputs,
which were previously sent to the autopilot servos, are sent to the command bars of the flight
director. Once mastery of the S-Tec 55 autopilot is achieved, a pilot should have little difficulty
programming flight director commands. With the autopilot on, the command bars are made
active by pressing the heading mode button on the autopilot and either the altitude button or
vertical speed button.
The elevation of the delta is mechanically adjustable for parallax using the setscrew near the four
o’clock position of the faceplate. However, a trained avionics technician must do this since the
command bars must also be electronically adjusted to correspond with the location of the delta.
Pilot’s Guide – A Bendix/King publication, Pilot’s Guide for the King KAP/KFC 200 Flight
Control Systems, is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA Approved
Flight Manual and is the primary source document for operation and use of the system. The KFC
200 Flight Control System enhances and simplifies navigational and instrument approach
operations. After reviewing Pilot’s Guide for the King KAP/KFC 200 Flight Control Systems,
pilots unfamiliar with its operation should have little difficulty using the system.
Altimeter – The altimeter is part of the pitot-static system, which is discussed on page 7-33. The
instrument measures the height above sea level and is correctable for variations in local pressure.
The pressure source for the instrument is from the static air vent. An aneroid or diaphragm
within the instrument either expands or contracts from changes in air pressure, and this
movement is transferred, through a series of mechanical linkages, into an altitude reading.
Adjustments for variations in local pressure are accounted for by setting the station pressure
(adjusted to sea level) into the pressure adjustment window, most commonly known as the
Kollsman Window. The altimeter has two Kollsman Windows. The window in the three o’clock
position permits settings in inches of mercury (labeled inches Hg.). The one in the nine o’clock
position is calibrated for an equivalent value in millibars (labeled mb). The adjustment knob for
these two windows is at the seven o’clock position on the dial.
Optional Instrument – This space on the flight instrument panel is reserved for an optional
instrument. A discussion of all optional equipment is included in Section 9.
Turn Coordinator – The turn coordinator is electrically powered and protected by a three-amp
circuit breaker. The instrument has a single gimbaled, electrically driven gyro with the stationary
axis of the gyro aligned relative to the longitudinal axis of the airplane, but tilted at a 37° angle.
This type of arrangement provides information about movement around the vertical or yaw axis
of the airplane. Tilting the gyro also allows the instrument to indicate a wing down condition,
even when the airplane is not in a turn. Moreover, this design limits or dampens adverse yaw
indications. The instrument is designed to measure the rate of yaw rather than relative change.
RA050001
7-30
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
The instrument contains a rear view silhouette of an airplane that pivots at the center of the dial.
When the wings of the silhouetted airplane are aligned with the horizontal white marks at the
three and nine o’clock positions, the airplane is not turning and the wings are level. A standard
rate turn (two minutes to change 360°) left or right is made by placing the left or right wing of
the silhouette airplane on the left or right marks below the horizontal white marks. The quality of
the turn is indicated by the inclinometer commonly referred to as “the ball.” Under normal
turning conditions, the ball should remain in the center of the race (the tube that contains the
ball). The instrument provides no pitch information, and a red flag will appear above the right
wing of the silhouette airplane if the instrument is without power.
KCS 55A Compass System – The KCS 55A system consists of four basic components, (1) the
panel mounted KI 525A Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI), (2) a magnetic slaving transmitter,
(3) a directional gyro, and (4) the panel mounted KA 51B Slaving Control and Compensator
Unit.
DRAWING OF THE KCS 55A FLIGHT DIRECTOR
(Figure 7 - 8)
Specifications – The instrument is an electrically driven dual-gimbaled gyro that spins at about
24,000 RPM. The instrument provides information about the airplane’s relative change in
heading. The tumble limits are set at 70°, and reliable operations have been demonstrated up to
55° in both the pitch and roll axes. If the HSI is tumbled, it can be reset by setting the slave
control to the free position and toggling the spring-loaded compensator switch clockwise or
counterclockwise, as appropriate. The compensator switch merely replaces the heading
adjustment knob that is on the older, traditional gyros that are not slaved.
The directional gyro of the KCS 55A consists of a compass card with the top view of an airplane
silhouette superimposed over the center of the dial. A pointer at the top of the card indicates the
heading of the airplane. Pointers are placed on the compass card at 45° increments. Before
takeoff, ensure that the KA 51B Slaving Control and Compensator switch is set to the slaved
position. Also check that the magnetic compass and the reading on the HSI compass card are
approximately the same. The KCS 55A compass system gyro is normally adjusted automatically
to the KMT 112 magnetic slaving unit located in the wing.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-31
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
HSI – The system is built around the KI 525A HSI pictured on the left side in (Figure 7 - 8). This
instrument integrates heading, navigation, and instrument approach information into a single
display unit. The unit is mounted in the flight instrument panel below the attitude indicator and
replaces the conventional directional gyro (DG). The vertical panel mounted KA 51B Slaving
Control and Compensator Unit is located in the engine instrument panel above the manifold
pressure/fuel flow gauge and shown on the right side of (Figure 7 - 8). The magnetic slaving
transmitter and directional gyro are mounted in a special avionics compartment, aft of the
baggage area, below the hat rack. The access door is beneath the carpeting in the forward portion
of the hat rack floor. The KMT 112 slaving transmitter is located near the left wingtip.
If the HSI provides inconsistent or erratic information, the problem is most likely associated with
the KMT 112 magnetic slaving unit. The HSI can still be utilized by placing the slaving switch
to the free position; however, the compass will need to be adjusted to the magnetic compass
about every 15 minutes through use of the spring-loaded compensator switch.
Pilot’s Guide – A Bendix/King Compass System Pilot’s Guide KCS 55A is included as part of
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA Approved Flight Manual and is the primary
source document for operation and use of the system. The KCS 55 system enhances and
simplifies navigational and instrument approach operations. After reviewing the Pilot’s Guide
KCS 55A, pilots unfamiliar with the operation of an HSI should have little difficulty learning the
system.
Vertical Speed or Velocity Indicator (VSI or VVI) – The vertical speed indicator is part of the
pitot-static system, which is covered in the next part of this section. Flow restricted static air is
supplied to the inside of the instrument case while unrestricted air is sent to the inside of a
diaphragm within the instrument case. The momentary pressure differential causes the
diaphragm to expand or contract, and this movement is transferred into a rate of altitude change.
The VSI indicates the rate of altitude change in feet per minute and ranges up and down from 0
to 4000 feet with major-labeled increments of 1000 feet. Between 0 and 2000 feet the minor
increments are 100 feet, and between 2000 and 4000 feet the minor increments are 250 feet.
Navigation Indicator Head – The final area on the instrument panel is for the navigation
display. This area in the panel will contain the MD200-306 navigation indicator. The use of the
MD200-306 indicator is covered in avionics portion of this section.
HOUR METER
General – The hour meter is located on the right knee bolster, next to the power point and ELT
remote switch. Two conditions are required for the hour meter to operate. The airplane must
have an indicated speed of approximately 60 knots to activate the air switch, and oil pressure
must be present at a sufficient level to activate the oil pressure switch. There are some airplanes
that only use an air switch to activate the hour meter. The oil pressure switch is integrated to
preclude inadvertent operation of the hour meter when the airplane is secured on the ground
during extremely high wind conditions.
The hour meter will run even if the master switch is turned off during flight operations. The hour
meter is provided to record time in service, which is the basis for routine maintenance,
maintenance inspections, and the time between overhaul (TBO) on the engine and other airplane
components. It is possible to record the approximate flight time using the FT function on the
Davtron voltmeter/OAT/clock, which is discussed on page 7-25.
RA050001
7-32
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Applicability – The above general discussion is applicable to airplane serial numbers 40015 and
above. On airplane serial numbers 40004 to 40014, the hour meter is operated anytime there is
sufficient oil pressure to activate the oil pressure switch, which is basically anytime the engine is
operating. No air switch is installed. All aircraft may be retrofitted with the air switch.
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
The pitot-static system, as the name suggests, has two components, ram air from the pitot tube
and ambient air from the static air vent. The amount of ram compression depends on air density
and the rate of travel through the air. The ram air, in conjunction with static air, operates the
airspeed indicator. The static system also provides ambient uncompressed air for the altimeter,
vertical speed indicator, and the blind encoder that is integrated with the airplane’s transponder.
(See page 7-28 for a discussion of the static system instruments.)
The pitot tube is located in the pitot housing on the right wing of the airplane, and the static air
vent is on the right side of the fuselage between the cabin door and horizontal stabilizer. The
pitot housing contains a heating element to heat the pitot tube in the event icing conditions are
encountered. The heating element is protected by a 10-amp circuit breaker, which is located in
the cockpit circuit breaker panel. If the normal static source becomes blocked, an alternate static
source, which uses pressure within the cabin, can be selected. The alternate static source is
located on the pilot’s knee bolster, next to the left dimmer switch. To access the alternate static
source, rotate the knob clockwise from the NORM to the ALT position.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-33
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS
VACUUM SYSTEM
The airplane is equipped with two engine-driven vacuum pumps that provide high velocity
airflow to drive the gyros in the attitude and heading indicators. Air moves through the system
and over vanes on each gyro, which produces a high-speed rotation, more than 24,000 RPM.
Either pump produces sufficient vacuum to operate both instruments in the event one of the
pumps should fail. If this happens, a message in the annunciator panel will illuminate to indicate
which pump is inoperative. Both vacuum pumps must be installed and operating to operate in
IFR conditions. Any inoperative pump or other component of the system must be replaced prior
to the next flight.
The drawing in (Figure 7 - 9) shows the direction of airflow through the system. Air is drawn in
through the air filter by the two engine driven vacuum pumps and routed to the attitude indicator
(AI). The air passes through the indicator and is vented overboard. A suction gauge attached to
the attitude indicator displays the system’s relative pressure (negative), normally between 4.5 to
5.2 inches Hg. of vacuum. Since the airplane is equipped with an HSI that is electrically
operated, air is only routed through the attitude indicator.
VACUUM SYSTEM DIAGRAM
“VACUUM PUMP FAILED” WARNING LIGHT SWITCHES
VACUUM PUMPS
SUCTION GAUGE
EXHAUST
VACUUM
REGULATOR
VALVE
FILTER
EXHAUST
MANIFOLD CHECK
VALVE
AI
(Figure 7 - 9)
RA050001
7-34
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
To account for fluctuations within the system, the suction produced by the two engine driven
pumps is well in excess of what is required to operate the two gyros. The suction pressure within
the system is kept constant by the pressure regulator valve that draws air from an alternate source
as necessary to maintain 4.5 to 5.2 inches Hg. of vacuum within the system. If either pump
should fail, the manifold shuttle valve closes the line on the failed side, which ensures positive
flow to the operating side.
It is important to note that it is possible to have normal suction readings with a non-functioning
system. If the air filter is clogged and no air is drawn through the instruments, the suction
pressure within the system is still maintained at prescribed levels by the vacuum regulator valve.
In this situation, the system would first build 4.5 to 5.2 inches Hg of suction and then draw
alternate air via the vacuum regulator valve. This condition is approximately analogous to
sucking through a straw that is sealed in one end. While there is suction pressure inside the
straw, there is no airflow through the straw.
FUEL SYSTEM
The fuel system has two tanks that gravity feed to a three-position (Left, Right, and Off) fuel
selector valve located in the forward part of the armrest between the pilot and copilot seats. The
fuel flows from the selected tank to the auxiliary fuel pump and then to the strainer. From this
point it goes to the engine-driven pump where, under pressure, it is sent to the throttle/mixture
control unit and then on to the fuel manifold valve for distribution to the cylinders. Unused fuel
from the continuous flow is returned to the selected fuel tank. A pressure gauge on the metered
side of the fuel manifold valve measures system pressure and displays both the fuel pressure and
the equivalent fuel flow reading on the same gauge. The diagram in (Figure 7 - 10) shows a
general layout of the fuel system for aircraft S/N 40004 to 40079. The diagram in (Figure 7 - 11)
shows a general layout of the fuel system for aircraft S/N 40080 and on.
Each fuel tank contains a slosh box near the fuel supply lines. A partial rib near the inboard
section of the fuel tank creates a small containment area with a check valve that permits fuel
flow into the box but restricts outflow. The slosh box is like a mini-fuel tank that is always full.
Its purpose, in conjunction with the flapper valves, is to ensure short-term positive fuel flow
during adverse flight attitudes, such as when the airplane is in an extended sideslip or subject to
the bouncing of heavy turbulence.
Fuel Quantity Indication – The airplane has integral fuel tanks, commonly referred to as a “wet
wing.” Each wing has two internal, interconnected compartments that hold fuel. The wing’s
slope or dihedral produces different fuel levels in each compartment and requires two floats in
each tank to accurately measure total quantity.
The floats move up and down on a pivot point between the top and bottom of the compartment,
and the position of each float is summed into a single indication for the left and right tanks. The
positions of the floats depend on the fuel level; changes in the float position increases or
decreases resistance in the sending circuit, and the change in resistance is reflected as a fuel
quantity indication. The indicators are powered by the airplane’s electrical system, protected by
a two-amp circuit breaker, and will not operate with the master switch turned off. Please see
page 7-22 for data on the fuel gauges.
The pilot is reminded that the fuel gauges are approximate indications and are never substitutes
for proper planning and pilot technique. Always verify the fuel onboard through a visual
inspection, and compute the fuel used through time and established fuel flows.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-35
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGRAM (AIRCRAFT S/N 40004 TO 40079)
FUEL FLOWS FROM
EITHER LEFT OR
RIGHT TANK
DEPENDING ON THE
TANK SELECTED
CROSS VENT LINE
LOW FUEL
ANNUNCIATOR
SWITCHES
FILLER CAP
FILLER CAP
CHECK
VALVE
CHECK
VALVE
FUEL
VENT
FUEL
VENT
SLOSH
BOXES
FUEL LEVEL
SENDING UNIT
FUEL LEVEL
SENDING UNIT
FUEL DRAIN
FUEL DRAIN
Fuel
Selector
Valve
TANK SELECTED LED
VAPOR SUPPRESS SWITCH
AUX FUEL
PUMP
FUEL VAPOR
RETURN TO
SELECTED TANK
FUEL VALVE
ANNUNCIATOR
PRIMER SWITCH
FS
FUEL STRAINER
ENG. FUEL
PUMP
SHADIN
FUEL FLOW
FUEL STRAINER
INTERNAL BYPASS
LINE
BACKUP BOOST ARM
THROTTLE AND
TAMU
METERING UNIT
FUEL
MANIFOLD
TO INJECTOR
NOZZLES
MIXTURE CONTROL
OPTIONAL
EQUIP.
THROTTLE
FF
FP
TRANSDUCER
AND
LATCHING RELAY
COMBINATION
FUEL FLOW &
FUEL PRESS.
GAUGE
(Figure 7 - 10)
RA050001
7-36
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: J/05-09-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGRAM (AIRCRAFT S/N 40080 AND ON)
FUEL FLOWS FROM
EITHER LEFT OR
RIGHT TANK
DEPENDING ON THE
TANK SELECTED
LOW FUEL
ANNUNCIATOR
SWITCHES
FILLER CAP
FILLER CAP
FUEL
VENT
FUEL
VENT
SLOSH
BOXES
FUEL LEVEL
SENDING UNIT
FUEL DRAIN
FUEL LEVEL
SENDING UNIT
FUEL DRAIN
Fuel
Selector
Valve
VAPOR SUPPRESS SWITCH
AUX FUEL
PUMP
FUEL VAPOR
RETURN TO
SELECTED TANK
PRIMER SWITCH
FS
FUEL STRAINER
ENG. FUEL
PUMP
FUEL VALVE
ANNUNCIATOR
SHADIN
FUEL FLOW
FUEL STRAINER
INTERNAL BYPASS
LINE
BACKUP BOOST ARM
THROTTLE AND
TAMU
METERING UNIT
FUEL
MANIFOLD
TO INJECTOR
NOZZLES
MIXTURE CONTROL
OPTIONAL
EQUIP.
THROTTLE
FF
FP
TRANSDUCER
AND
LATCHING RELAY
FUEL FLOW &
FUEL PRESS.
GAUGE
(Figure 7 - 11)
Fuel Selector – The fuel tank selector handle is between the two front seats, at the forward part
of the armrest. The selector is movable to one of three positions, Left, Right, and Off. The fuel
tank selector handle is connected to a drive shaft that moves the actual fuel valve assembly,
which is located in the wing saddle. Moving the fuel tank selector handle applies a twisting force
to move the fuel selector valve. Sometimes, to overcome the resistance to the sloping left and
right detents, fractionally raising the fuel selector handle will make it easier to move.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-37
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
When the fuel tank selector handle is moved to a particular position, positive engagement occurs
when the fuel selector valve rests in one of the three available detents, Left, Right, and Off.
Rotating the handle to the desired tank position changes the left and right tanks; initially, a small
amount of additional pressure is required to move the valve out of its detent. A spring-loaded
release knob in the selector handle prevents inadvertent movement beyond the right and left tank
positions. To move to the Off position, pull up on the fuel tank selector, and rotate the handle
until the pointer is in the Off position and the fuel valve is seated in the detent. To move the
handle from the Off position to the left of right tank, pull up on selector, and rotate the handle to
the desired tank.
When a tank is selected and the selector is properly seated in its detent, one of two green lights
on the left and right side of the fuel gauge will illuminate to indicate which tank is selected. If a
tank is selected, and a green light is not illuminated, then the selector handle is not properly
seated in the detent. In addition, if the fuel selector is not positively seated in either the left or
right detent, or is in the Off position, a red FUEL VALVE light indication is displayed on the
annunciator panel.
Fuel Low Annunciators – There is a separate system, independent of the fuel quantity
indicators, which displays a low fuel state. A fuel level switch in each tank activates a L LOW
FUEL or R LOW FUEL light on the annunciator panel when there is less than 8 gallons (30 L)
of usable fuel remaining in that tank. The fuel warning light has a 30 second delay switch, which
limits false indications during flight in turbulent air conditions. Please see page 7-24 for data on
the annunciator panel.
Fuel Vents (Aircraft S/N 40004 to 40079) – There is a ventilation source for the fuel tank in
each wing. The vents are wedge-shaped recesses built into the access panel. They are located
under the wing approximately five feet inboard from the wing tip and positioned to provide
positive pressure to each tank. The vents should be open and free of dirt, mud and other types of
clogging substances. The tanks are cross-vented with a line between the right and left tanks.
When fuel expands beyond a tank’s capacity, it is sent to the other tank or out the fuel vent if
both tanks are full. A fuel vent check valve limits draining from the vents if the airplane is
parked in a sloped area. However, an internal tank pressure of more than two to three psi will
bypass the check valve and allow fuel to drain from the vents. The cross venting provides two
vent sources for each tank, and both tanks are vented even if one of the fuel vents is clogged.
Fuel Vents (Aircraft S/N 40080 and on) – There is a ventilation source for the fuel tank in each
wing. The vents are wedge-shaped recesses built into the access panel. They are located under
the wing approximately five feet inboard from the wing tip and positioned to provide positive
pressure to each tank. The vents should be open and free of dirt, mud and other types of clogging
substances. When fuel expands beyond a tank’s capacity, it is sent out the fuel vent if both tanks
are full. An internal tank pressure of more than two to three psi will allow fuel to drain from the
vents.
Fuel Drains and Strainer – The inboard section of each tank contains a fuel drain near the
lowest point in each tank. The fuel drain can be opened intermittently for a small sample or it
can be locked open to remove a large quantity of fuel. The gascolator or fuel strainer is located
under the fuselage, on the left side, near the wing saddle. Open the accessory door in this area for
access to the gascolator. There is a conventional drain device that operates by pushing up on the
valve stem. There is an internal bypass in the strainer that routes fuel around the filter if it
becomes clogged.
RA050001
7-38
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Backup Boost Pump, Vapor Suppression, and Primer – The auxiliary fuel pump is connected
to two switches located in the rocker switch panel, just to the left of the engine controls. One
switch is labeled BACKUP PUMP with red letters, and the other is labeled VAPOR SUPPRESS
with amber letters. The vapor suppression switch is used primarily to purge the system of fuel
vapors that form in the system at high altitudes or atypical operating conditions. The vapor
suppression pump must be turned on before changing the selected fuel tank. If proper engine
operations are observed, turn off the pump.
The positions on the backup pump switch are placarded with the terms BACKUP PUMP,
ARMED, and OFF. The switch is normally in the ARMED position for takeoff and climb to
cruise altitude and in the OFF position for cruise, descent, and approach to landing. If the engine
driven pump malfunctions, and the backup pump is in the ARMED position, the backup fuel
pump will turn on automatically when the fuel pressure is less than about 5.5 psi (±0.5 psi). This
condition will also activate a red FUEL light in the annunciator panel. Please see an amplified
discussion on page 3-15.
Primer - The primer is a push-button switch located next to the ignition switch in the master
switch panel. Depressing the primer button activates the backup boost pump and sends raw
gasoline, via the fuel manifold, to the cylinders. Since the fuel system is used for priming
operations, the mixture must be rich and throttle partially opened for the primer to work
properly.
Fuel Injection System – The engine has a continuous-flow fuel injection system. This system
meters fuel flow as a function of engine speed, throttle position, and the mixture control.
Metered flow is passed to air-bled, continuous flow nozzles at individual intake ports. The
engine is equipped with a speed-sensing pump that delivers a nominal 28-psi discharge pressure
at takeoff. The continuous-flow system permits the use of a rotary vane pump in place of the
more complex plunger-type pump. A relief valve maintains optimum fuel flow and there is no
need for an intricate mechanism for timing injection to the engine.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM
The environmental control system (ECS) incorporates the use of an air-to-air heat exchanger,
ram intake air, and an electric fan to distribute heated and outside air to various outlets within the
cabin. The ECS essentially consists of two subsystems, heated air and the fresh air. Heated air is
sent to floor vent system and defroster, and fresh air is ducted through the eyeball vents. The
system demand affects the volume of flow to a particular vent. As more vents are opened, the
airflow to each vent is decreased.
Airflow – Ram air enters through a hole in the front right portion of the engine intake and flows
to either the heat exchanger (located on the right exhaust manifold) or the eyeball vents. Air to
the heat exchanger, depending on the control settings, is mixed with outside air in the heater box.
The air next passes through a fan unit before entering the distribution system. Operating the
single speed fan will increase the airflow through the system (not including the eyeball vents). A
diagram of the ECS system is shown in (Figure 7 - 12).
Floor Vent System – The floor vent system provides mixed air to vents under both knee bolsters
in the front seat area and to two eyeball vents in the back lower portion of the front seat center
storage console. Rotating the vents clockwise and counterclockwise controls the airflow to the
rear floor eyeball vents, while the front vents have fixed grates. The temperature and floor air
control knobs control the temperature of the air and the amount of airflow. Moving the knobs
clockwise increases the temperature and volume of the air. Additional airflow is provided by
operating the ECS fan, which is activated by a rocker-type switch on the left side of the panel. In
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-39
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
flight, under most conditions, the ram air provides sufficient airflow and use of the fan is
unnecessary. However, the fan is useful for ground operations when the ram air source is limited.
Defrosting System – The defrosting system is operated by adjustment of the Defrost Air Knob
in the ECS panel. Turning the knob clockwise will increase the airflow to the windshield. The
temperature of the defrost air is controlled by the same center knob that controls the floor air
system.
Individual Eyeball Vents – Outside, unheated ram air is ducted to the eyeball vents. Individual
eyeball vents are located at each of the four seating positions. The pilot’s vent is in the engine
instrument panel, and the copilot’s vent is positioned in a similar location on the right side panel.
The two rear vents are behind the left and right cabin doorsills. Each vent is adjustable in terms
of airflow volume and direction. Turning the adjustment ring on the vent counterclockwise opens
the vent and increases airflow; turning the vent clockwise closes the vent and decreases airflow.
In most situations, the eyeball vents are for fresh air, and the floor vents are for heated air. On
warmer days, during taxi operations, some additional circulation is available from the floor vent
system by operating the cabin fan with the heat control set to the lowest setting.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
COLD AIR
OUTSIDE
RAM
AIR
HEATED AIR
MIXED AIR
HEAT
EXCHANGE
FRONT SEAT
EYEBALL VENT
FRONT SEAT
EYEBALL VENT
HEATER
BOX
DEFROSTER
FAN
CONTROL
PANEL
REAR SEATING
EYEBALL VENTS
FRONT
FLOOR VENT
FRONT
FLOOR VENT
REAR EYEBALL
FLOOR VENT
(Figure 7 - 12)
Standby Battery – The valve that controls the air temperature selected, from off to full, is
operated by an electric servomotor mounted on the control unit. In case of a total electrical
RA050001
7-40
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
failure, in situations associated with an engine or cabin fire, the airflow must be turned off. If the
electrical system fails or power is turned off, the pilot can close the airflow by activation of the
standby battery. The standby battery switch is located on the light row (second row) of the
circuit breaker panel. See details on activation of the standby battery on page 3-23.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-41
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ELECTRICAL AND RELATED SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
General Description – The airplane electrical system is designed to normally operate at 14.2
volts. Power is supplied by a 60-amp alternator (continuous rating), and storage is maintained by
a 25 amp-hour (at a 20-amp discharge rate) lead-acid battery located in the engine compartment.
The voltage regulator is designed to maintain ± 0.4 volts of the normal voltage. There is an
alternator switch in the cockpit area that disconnects the alternator and stops the excitation. A
red “Alt Out” light in the annunciator panel illuminates should the alternator become inoperative.
At 16 volts output, an over voltage control will stop the excitation to the alternator. The airplane
is equipped with a voltmeter that measures bus voltage and an ammeter that measures the
charging or discharging of the battery.
The system has four distribution buses, a primary bus, an avionics bus, a battery bus, and a
standby bus. Power is supplied to the primary distribution bus when the system master switch is
turned on, and supplied to the avionics distribution bus when both the system master and
avionics master switches are turned on. Items connected to the battery bus bypass the master
switch and are powered directly from the battery. The standby bus is connected to a reserve
battery and supplies essential power for emergency operations. Please refer to (Figure 7 - 13) for
a diagram of the electrical system.
Master Switch – The system master switch is located in the master switch panel to the left of the
rocker switch panel. The switch is a split-rocker design with the alternator switch on the left side
and the battery switch on the right side. Pressing the top of the alternator portion of the splitswitch turns on both switches, and pressing the bottom of the battery portion of the split-switch
turns off both switches. The battery side of the switch is used on the ground for checking
electrical devices and will limit battery drain since power is not required for alternator excitation.
The alternator switch is used individually (with the battery on) to recycle the system and is
turned off during load shedding. See the discussion on page 3-22.
Avionics Master Switch – The avionics master switch is located in the master switch panel to
the right of the system master switch. The switch is a rocker-type design and connects the
avionics distribution bus to the primary distribution bus when the switch is turned on. The
purpose of the switch is primarily for secondary protection of delicate avionics equipment when
the engine is started. When the switch is turned off, no power is supplied to the avionics
distribution bus.
Rocker Switch Panel – The rocker switch panel contains eight rocker-type switches that turn on
various lights and devices. The labeling of each switch is shown in
(Figure 7 - 14). The number below each switch identifies the page number that contains the
related discussion. The top of each rocker switch is engraved with an Off placard, which is only
visible when the switch is turned off.
STANDBY BATTERY SYSTEM
The standby battery switch is used in case of a total electrical failure. The guarded and wiresealed switch is located on the light row of the circuit breaker panel. Breaking the copper wire on
the switch guard, raising the switch guard, and depressing the push-button switch, activates the
standby system. When the standby system is activated, electrical power from a standby 6-cell
lithium battery pack is supplied to the essential lights, instruments, avionics, and electrical
equipment. See (Figure 3- 5) on page 3-23.
RA050001
7-42
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Voltage
Regulator
Battery Bus
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ALT OUT
Annunciator
Warning Out
Field
Power In
Ground
Alternator
Alternator
Contactor
80 Amp
Current
Limiter
Hour Meter (3 Amp)
Flip/Step Lights (3 Amp)
ELT (3 Amp)
Rudder Limiter. (5 Amp)
Aileron Trim (1 Amp)
Elevator Trim (1 Amp)
Position Lights (15 Amp)
Strobe Lights (10 Amp)
Landing Light (4 Amp)
Taxi Light (4 Amp)
Ammeter
Battery
Contact
PRIMARY BUS
Master
Switch
Alternator
Switch
50 Amp
Current
Limiter
Panel & Spot Lights (7.5 Amp)
Flaps (10 Amp)
Backup Pump/Vapor Suppress (10 Amp)
Eng. Instruments (3 Amp)
Pitot Heat (10 Amp)
Relays (3 Amp)
Fuel Level (2 Amp)
Stall Warning (2 Amp)
Ammeter
Shunt
Voltage Regulator (5 Amp)
Clock/Cabin Fan (7½ Amp)
-
T & B/ECS Servo (3 Amp)
Starter
Contactor
+
Door Seal/Power Point (5 Amp)
Starter
Motor
Annunciator Panel (3 Amp)
Audio (3 Amp)
Avionics
Master
Switch
Avionics
Contactor
50 Amp
Current
Limiter
AVIONICS BUS
GPS (2 Amp)
Nav/Com 1 (5 Amp)
Nav/Comm 2 (5 Amp)
Xponder/Encoder (5 Amp)
HSI – (5 Amp)
Autopilot (5 Amp)
Map (7½ Amp) (Optional)
WX (5 Amp)
Optional Equipment
Ignition
Switch
Blind Encoder
R
Mag
HSI
Standby Bus
L
Mag
Standby
Battery
Turn Coordinator
Flood Lights
GPS
Nav/Com 1
Flaps
ECS Servomotor
(Figure 7 - 13)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-43
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
PITOT
POSITION STROBE LANDING
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
TAXI
DOOR
VAPOR
BACKUP
HEAT
LIGHTS
LIGHTS
LIGHT
LIGHT
SEAL
SUPPRESS
PUMP
7-33
7-47
7-47
7-47
7-47
7-16
7-39
7-39
(Figure 7 - 14)
Once the standby system is activated, the equipment specified for each configuration shown in
(Figure 3- 5) on page 3-23 will operate for at least 30 minutes. There is no monitor light to
indicate that the system is operating, other than restoration of partial electrical power. However,
the switch has a locking feature. When it is first engaged, it remains in the depressed position
until pressed a second time.
The standby battery switch should only be used in case of a total electrical failure and under
conditions that require standby power for the safe continuation of the flight. Once the standby
system is activated and utilized, the battery pack must be replaced at the conclusion of the flight.
In any event, the battery pack must be replaced every five years. Do not break the copper wire to
test the system or for any other reason. If an unexplained broken sealing-wire is observed,
inadvertent standby system activation is an important consideration, particularly if the switch is
depressed. In either case, battery replacement is required. See page 3-24 for a discussion of
standby battery emergency procedures.
AIRPLANE INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
The interior lighting system is one of the more sophisticated systems available for small
airplanes. A good understanding of the following discussion is important to properly use all the
features of the interior lighting system. The salient features of this system are summarized in
(Figure 7 - 15), which begins on page 7-45.
Glare Shield Extension – A 22 in. (55.9 cm) wide extension panel is installed inside the top
portion of the airplane’s fixed glare shield. Grasping the curled edge in the center of the panel
and pulling aft operates this extension panel. The extension adds about four additional inches to
the fixed glare shield’s length and eliminates nighttime instrument panel reflection on the
windshield. This reflection is present when the pilot’s seat is in some of the forward positions.
Flip & Access Lights – The flip-lights are rectangular shaped fixtures located in the middle of
the overhead panel and in the baggage compartment. The lights bypass the system master switch
and operate without turning on power to the system. Rotating or flipping the lens right or left
turns on the two flip-lights. In the center position, they are used as part of the airplane’s access
lighting system.
When either main entrance door is unlatched, a switch in the door latching mechanism activates
the two flip-lights and two lights that illuminate each entrance step. The access lights are on a
ten-minute timer and turn off automatically unless reset by activating both main door-latching
mechanisms when all the doors are closed.
This design has two advantageous features. First, opening either of the main cabin doors provides
an immediate light source for preflight operations, passenger access, and baggage loading.
Second, the flip-lights, when rotated either left or right, serve as emergency lighting in situations,
which necessitate turning off the master switch. The only disadvantage is that the flip-lights can
RA050001
7-44
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
inadvertently be left on, depleting battery power. To prevent this from happening, ensure the
flip-lights are in the centered or flush position when securing the airplane at the end of a flight.
Overhead Reading Lights – There are three overhead reading lights, two in the front seat and
one between the two backseat positions. Each light has its own switch and is on a swivel that can
be adjusted to an infinite number of positions. The intensity of these lights is adjusted by moving
the left thumb-wheel dimmer switch in the center of the overhead panel, near the windshield.
The dimmer has an on-off switch at the extreme aft position of its rotation, and rotating the
thumb-wheel forward increases the light intensity. The airplane’s position lights must be on for
the overhead reading lights to operate.
Instrument Flood Bar – There is a tube array of color-corrected lights inserted under the glare
shield. This indirect light source complements the backlighting in each instrument and facilitates
the use of adjustable instruments such as the true airspeed indicator, directional gyro, and
navigational instruments. The intensity of the lights can be adjusted by moving the right wheeltype dimmer switch in the center of overhead panel, near the windshield. The dimmer has an onoff switch at the extreme aft position of its rotation, and rotating the thumb-wheel forward
increases the light intensity. The airplane’s position lights must be on for the instrument flood
bar lights to operate.
Upper Instrument and Engine Panels – The instruments in the flight and engine instrument
panels have backlighting, i.e., a small light within each instrument case that illuminates its dial.
The left thumb-wheel switch between the pilot’s legs on the knee bolster controls the dimmer for
these lights. The dimmer has an on-off switch at the extreme down position of its rotation, and
rotating the thumb-wheel up increases the light intensity. The airplane’s position lights must be
on for the upper instrument and engine panel lights to operate.
Lower Instrument Panel, Circuit Breaker Panel, and Rocker Switches – The lower
instrument, circuit breaker, and rocker switch panels contain switches and controls that have
backlighting. The lighting illuminates the placards on or next to the breaker, switch or control
and the internally lighted engraved rocker switches. The right thumb-wheel switch between the
pilot’s legs on the knee bolster controls the dimmer for these lights. The dimmer has an on-off
switch at the extreme down position of its rotation, and rotating the thumb-wheel up increases
the light intensity.
Trim, Flaps, Fuel Tank Position, and Annunciator Panel (Press to Test PTT) – The test
feature for these items is located in the lower right area of the trim panel, which is next to the
rocker switch panel. Pushing the test button verifies the operation of all the LEDs associated
with the trim, flaps, fuel tank position, and annunciator panel. The PTT is also used to verify
operation of the rudder limiter and is discussed under a separate heading on page 7-47. When the
test position is selected, all related LEDs illuminate in the bright mode. A light that fails to
illuminate should be replaced.
The position light switch on the rocker panel controls the intensity of these lights. When the
position lights are on, the trim, flaps, fuel tank position, and annunciator lights operate in the dim
mode. When the position lights are off, the lights operate in the bright mode. The degree of
luminance is set in at the factory and cannot be adjusted manually. In the daytime, during periods
of reduced ambient light, the position lights can be turned on if the illumination of the LEDs is
distracting.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-45
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SUMMARY OF INTERIOR LIGHTS AND SWITCHES
LIGHT
LOCATION OF LIGHTS
LOCATION OF SWITCH
•
•
•
•
Two overhead swivel lights
in the front seat area
One centered swivel light
in the rear seat area
Color correct flood bar
under the glare shield
which lights the flight
instruments and front panel
areas
•
Provides backlighting for
engine and flight
instruments
•
Provides backlighting for
radios, switches, or
placards next to switches,
circuit breakers, and
controls
Trim, Flaps, Fuel
Tank, &
Annunciator Panel
Upper
Instrument
Panel
•
Front and rear flip lights in
overhead console
Exterior lights near the
right and left entrance steps
Lower Inst. &
Circuit Breaker
Panels
Glare
Shield
Flood Bar
Overhead
Swivel
Lights
Courtesy
Lights
♦
•
•
•
•
The trim position LEDs are
in the trim panel.
The Flap position LEDs are
in the flap panel.
The fuel tank LEDs are on
the fuel quantity gauge.
Annunciator LEDs are in
the annunciator panel.
♦
♦
♦
♦
If all doors are latched, fliplight is activated by flipping
the lens from the neutral
position.
If a door is unlatched, a switch
activates flip-lights when the
lens is in the neutral position.
The left thumb wheel dimmer
switch is in the overhead panel.
Individual switch at each light
The right thumb wheel dimmer
switch is in the overhead panel.
REMARKS
ƒ
ƒ
Door switch activates
timer that turns off access
lights after 10 minutes.
Operates with master
switch on or off
ƒ
Master switch and
position lights must be on
for the system to operate.
ƒ
Master switch and
position lights must be on
for the system to operate.
Part of the standby battery
system
ƒ
♦
The left thumb wheel dimmer
switch is in the knee bolster on
the pilot’s side.
ƒ
Master switch and
position lights must be on
for the system to operate.
♦
Right thumb wheel dimmer
switch in the knee bolster on
the pilot’s side
ƒ
Master switch and
position lights must be on
for the system to operate.
♦
The PTT feature is located in
the trim panel, just to right of
the rocker switch panel. LEDs
are dimmed by operating the
position lights.
ƒ
Master switch must be on
for the system to operate.
(Figure 7 - 15)
Interior Light Protection – With the exception of the flip-lights, all interior lights are
connected to the primary distribution bus and will only operate when the master switch is on.
The light systems are protected by circuit breakers in the circuit breaker panel. See (Figure 7 13) for a listing of circuit breaker amperages ratings.
AIRPLANE EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Aircraft position and anticollision or strobe lights are required to be lighted on aircraft operated
from sunset to sunrise. Anticollision lights, however, need not be lighted when the pilot in
command determines that, because of operating conditions, it would be in the interest of safety to
turn off the lights. For example, strobe lights shall be turned off on the ground if they adversely
RA050001
7-46
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
affect ground personnel or other pilots, and in flight when there are adverse reflections from
clouds.
The exterior lighting system includes the position lights, the strobe or anticollision lights, the
landing light, and the taxi lights. These lights are activated through use of switches in the rocker
switch panel. The light system is protected by circuit breakers in the circuit breaker panel. See
(Figure 7 - 13) for a listing of circuit breaker amperage ratings.
Position and Anticollision Lights – The left and right position lights (red and green) are
mounted on each wing tip. Each wing position light contains the required aft or rearward
projecting white lights. The anticollision lights are on each wing tip and contained within the
same light fixture as the position lights.
Taxi and Landing Lights – The taxi and landing lights are contained in the leading edge of the
left wing. The outboard bulb in the light housing is the taxi light that provides a diffused light in
the immediate area of the airplane. The inboard bulb is the landing light, which has a spot
presentation with a slight downward focus. The taxi and landing lights are sized for continuous
duty and can be left on for operations in high-density traffic areas.
STALL WARNING SYSTEM
Stall Warning – The aural stall warning buzzer in the overhead console is actuated by a vanetype switch located on the leading edge of the left wing. Under normal flight conditions, the
angle of relative wind flow keeps the vane in the down position. The vane is connected to an
electrical switch that is open under normal flight operations. When the airplane approaches its
critical angle of attack, the relative wind pushes the vane up and closes the switch. The switch is
set to activate approximately five to ten knots above the actual stall speed in all normal flight
configurations.
Rudder Limiter – The rudder limiter, which is an integral part of the stall system, is designed to
limit the normal full left rudder deflection of 17° ± 1° to only 11.5° ± 0.5°. The rudder limiter
system is automatically armed in a relaxed position when the aircraft’s electrical power is turned
on. The system is activated when two conditions exist, (1) the airplane’s stall warning is active,
and (2) the engine manifold pressure is more than 12 in. of Hg. When the system is activated, a
solenoid near the left rudder pedal moves a cam that physically limits the travel of the left rudder
pedal. There is a time delay of approximately one second before the system is activated. This
delay feature prevents inadvertent activation of the rudder limiter in turbulent air. A light located
in the annunciator panel, triggered by a magnetic sensor located next to the rudder limiter cam
acts as a visual indication of when the rudder limiter is engaged.
Two points need to be emphasized regarding the operation of the rudder limiter. First, if a left
rudder deflection of greater than 11.5° exists before the stall warning is active with a throttle
setting greater than 12 in. of Hg, the cam cannot engage. In addition, if a left rudder deflection of
greater than 12° exists while the stall warning is active and before the throttle setting is greater
than 12 in. of Hg, then the cam cannot engage when the throttle is advanced beyond 12 in. of Hg.
Second, if the rudder limiter is activated and pressure is applied to the left rudder pedal so that
the rudder limiter cam is engaged and then the conditions which caused the rudder limiter to
activate cease to exist so that the rudder limiter action is no longer needed, then the pressure on
the left rudder pedal must be released in order for the rudder limiter cam to disengage. In either
of these two conditions the cam actuation does not override the rudder input. It should also be
noted that should the manifold pressure gauge itself or the stall warning horn become
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-47
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
inoperative, the rudder limiter will still be functional provided that the stall warning vane is still
operative.
Rudder Limiter Test – There are provisions for ground testing the rudder limiter during the
preflight inspection. The purpose of the test is to verify operation of the manifold pressure
transducer, the solenoid, and the cam next to the rudder pedal. While sitting in the pilot’s seat
with the master switch on and the engine off, depress the test button on the trim panel. When the
test button is depressed, the pilot will hear and feel the solenoid near the left rudder pedal
engage, the RUDR LMTR annunciator will illuminate, and left rudder travel will be restricted.
When the operation is verified, release the test switch. The rudder limiter test switch is also used
to test the operation of the trim, flap, annunciator panel, and fuel tank position LEDs. The pilot
should remember that anytime these lights are tested, the rudder limiter will engage.
While the press to test feature verifies the individual operation of the system’s basic components,
it does not test the functionality of the system. For a function test of the system, turn on the
master switch (engine off), and move the stall warning microswitch to the up position for two to
three seconds. The aural stall warning will be heard immediately, followed by an audible “click”
of the rudder limiter solenoid.
Rudder Limiter Fail-Safe Feature – The system is armed when the airplane’s electrical power
is turned on; however, all electronic and electrical switching are in the relaxed position. When
the stall warning is active and manifold pressure is more than 12 inches of Hg, the system
activates from this so-called “relaxed armed” position. If either of the two inputs to the system
should fail, the rudder limiter will still operate. For example, if the manifold pressure transducer
becomes inoperative, the rudder limiter will be activated by the sole input from the stall warning.
Conversely, if the stall warning fails, the rudder limiter will be functional, provided the stall
warning vane is operative, i.e., freely moves up and down.
Fail-Safe Test – The operating condition of the fail-safe system can be verified from time to
time through use of a special ground testing procedure. With the master switch on and the engine
off, pull the stall warning circuit breaker and have someone move the stall vane to the up
position. The rudder limiter should engage even though there is no aural stall warning. Repeat
the procedure with engine instruments circuit breaker pulled and the stall warning breaker reset.
This time the rudder limit will engage with an aural stall warning, even though there is no
manifold pressure indication.
Inadvertent Overriding of the Rudder Limiter – In flight, it is possible to inadvertently
override the rudder limiter. The sequence of flight control input is the controlling factor. If full
left rudder is applied while operating with the throttle set to more than 12 inches of Hg of
manifold pressure and then the speed is reduced enough to activate the stall warning, the rudder
limiter will attempt to engage. However, the deflected left rudder will limit movement of the
cams and the system will be overridden until the left rudder pressure is released. The cams are
spring-loaded and will engage when pressure on the left rudder pedal is released.
Stall Warning System (Electrical) – Operation of the stall warning system requires the master
switch to be on since both the stall warning and rudder limiter are connected to the primary bus.
Breakers in the circuit breaker panel protect both items. The stall warning is protected by a 2amp circuit breaker and the rudder limiter is protected by a 5-amp circuit breaker. The two
breakers are isolated from each other and failure of one system will not cause the other system to
fail.
RA050001
7-48
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
STANDARD AVIONICS INSTALLATION
The equipment described below covers both the basic avionics installation and some optional
items. Other, optional STC installed avionics equipment is covered in Section 9 of this manual.
SL15-MS AUDIO AMPLIFIER
General – The Apollo SL 15MS Audio Selector Panel/Intercom System (ASPIS) is frequently
referred to as the audio panel. The primary purpose of the panel is to control communication and
navigation selections, intercom functions, and the marker beacons. In addition, the unit has
provisions for two stereo entertainment inputs. The audio panel is located in the top of the radio
rack panel assembly, and a drawing of the unit is shown in (Figure 7 - 16).
Microphone Selector Switch – The microphone selector switch is a rotary-type knob located on
the right side of the audio panel. The unit has an automatic communications feature that
automatically pairs the receiver with the selected transmitter. This permits selecting a desired
transmitter (Com 1 or Com 2) without having to reselect the corresponding communication
receiver button. The receiver selection is displayed to the left of the microphone selection switch
in the ten button Audio Selector portion of the panel. As a particular transmitter is selected, a
light in the respective com button is illuminated.
Transmitter Indicator – When either the pilot or copilot are transmitting, the green lamp
associated with the Com that is being used to transmit will flash continuously as the PTT is
depressed.
DRAWING OF THE SL15 STEREO AUDIO PANEL
Receive Audio Selectors
Marker Mode Selector
Marker Indicator Lamps
O
M
High
I
Low
Mic Selector
Photo
Detector
Com 1
Nav 1
MKR
ADF
DME
Com 2
Nav 2
ICS
AUX
SPR
Test
V
o
l
u
m
e
Com 1
Com 2
Com 3
Iso
Com 1/2
Com 2/1
Tel
All
Push
(Fail-Safe)
R
Crew
Mounting
Screw
Apollo SL15
Crew ICS/
Music 1 Mute
Transmit
Swap
Speaker Switch
Intercom Mode Sel.
TX Indicator
Swap Indicator
Intercom Vol.
(Figure 7 - 16)
Com Functions – When Com 1 is selected, the No.1 SL30 radio is selected. When Com 2 is
selected, the No. 2 SL30 radio is active for communication. Com 3 can be utilized at a later time
if a third communications transceiver is installed in the airplane, such as an HF unit. Note that
there is not a dedicated Com 3 audio mode switch for monitoring. However, the AUX switch can
be used for this function.
Split Com Modes – The unit has three split communications modes, Com1/Com2, Com2/Com1,
and Tel. These functions allow the pilot and copilot to communicate simultaneously on two
different radio frequencies. The left and right placement of the Com number can be thought of as
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-49
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
referring to the respective left and right seat positions. For example, with the Microphone
Selector Switch set to Com1/Com2, the pilot can communicate on Com 1 while the copilot
communicates on Com 2. This feature is useful when the pilot is in contact with ATC while the
copilot is speaking to Flight Watch.
NOTE
Due to the nature of VHF communications signals and the size constraints in
general aviation aircraft, it is probable that there will be some bleed-over in
the Split mode, particularly on adjacent frequencies. UPS Aviation
Technologies makes no warranty about the suitability of Split Mode in all
aircraft conditions. Split Mode does not turn off other (Nav, ADF, etc.) selected
audio to the pilot. However, the copilot will only hear the selected communications
receiver.
TEL Mode – The TEL position is for telecommunications and works when the system is
interfaced to an appropriate approved wireless system, such as the AirCell® ACM2000. Placing
the microphone selector in TEL position connects the pilot’s microphone and headphones to the
installed cell phone. Pressing the pilot’s push to talk (PTT) function will automatically switch
the pilot microphone selection to the Com 1 position and allow continued aircraft
communications as well.
On/Off and Fail-Safe Feature – Unit power is turned on and off by pushing the volume knob.
The SL15 has a fail-safe feature, which permits use of the audio panel even if it is turned off or
loses power. While the unit will not have lighting and the intercom will be inoperative,
communications can still be maintained on the pilot’s side using the No. 1 Radio. The fail-safe
feature is not activated on the copilot’s side.
Audio Selector Buttons – There are 10 latching buttons in the Audio Selector that can be
depressed and latched to monitor a particular receiver. Depressing and latching the button of the
desired receiver makes that receiver active and illuminates the light on the face of the button. To
deselect the receiver, push in on the button to unlatch it. If the light in the button is not
illuminated, the receiver audio is not active. Remember, the volume control on the particular
selected receiver determines the loudness, not the volume control on the audio panel.
1. Com 1 and 2 – One Com is selected by the microphone selector switch, which lights the
corresponding Com button. The annunciation light cannot be extinguished by pressing the
latching switch. Depressing the Com latching switch monitors the Com not selected by the
microphone switch.
2. Nav 1 and 2 – The Nav 1 and 2 (navigation) button is used to receive audio information
from VHF Omnidirectional Range (VOR) stations or an instrument landing system (ILS).
3. Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) – Depressing the DME button makes the audio
active for an installed DME.
4. Automatic Direction Finding equipment (ADF) – Depressing the ADF button makes the
audio active for an installed ADF.
5. ICS Switch – Pressing the ICS permits pilot/copilot communications when Com function is
set to the split mode, i.e., Com 1/Com 2 or Com 2/Com 1. In split mode, the pilot and copilot
are usually isolated from each other on the intercom, simultaneously using their respective
radios. Depressing the ICS button in Split Mode will activate VOX intercom between the
pilot and copilot positions. This permits intercommunication when desired between the crew.
Pressing the ICS button again disables this crew intercom function.
RA050001
7-50
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
6. Auxiliary Button – The AUX Button permits additional optional equipment such as a
second ADF or DME.
7. Marker Beacon Receiver – The marker beacon receiver is located on the far left, top upper
portion of the audio panel. There are three lights, blue (outer marker), amber (middle
marker), and white (inner/airway marker), which give a visual and aural indication when the
respective marker is crossed in flight. The MKR button in the audio panel must be depressed
for the audio portion to function. There is also a marker beacon repeater indicator located in
the flight instrument panel, above the artificial horizon. The repeater indicator must be
functional for IFR operations using the marker beacon receiver.
• The High and Low sense switches control the sensitivity of the marker beacon receiver.
In the High position, the outer marker is received about a mile from the receiver. In the
Low sense position, the airplane must be proximate to the marker beacon receiver to
receive the aural and visual indication. Many pilots set the marker switch to the higher
sensitivity for an advance indication of approaching the outer marker and then set the
sensitivity to the lower level when the marker signal is received. Doing this will silence
the tone and visual indication until the airplane is closer to the marker, giving the pilot a
more precise indication.
• Holding the three-position switch in the Test position applies voltage to all three marker
lamps to indicate they are functioning. The TEST position is spring-loaded so that when
the toggle switch is released, it returns to the LO SENS position. The photocell in the
faceplate automatically measures ambient light conditions and dims the marker lights, the
label backlighting, and the lights in the Audio Selector Buttons.
• The aural portion of the marker is turned on and off by selecting and deselecting the
“MKR” audio switch on the Audio Selector Panel. The markers do not have an automatic
audio reset function, and if the audio for the markers is deselected, it stays off until
reselected.
8. Speaker Switch – The “SPR” labeled latching button on the Audio Selector Panel is for
turning the cabin speaker on and off. In the unlatched position, audio information is sent only
to the headsets. If the button is pushed in and latched, the light in the button is illuminated
and the selected audio information is sent to the headphones and the cabin speaker. However,
in the split communications mode, the speaker is disabled, even if the “SPR” button is
selected. It is recommended that the speaker be disengaged when using the split mode.
Swap Function – The swap function is for remotely changing back and forth between from Com
1 to Com 2 through use of a momentary switch on the control stick. This option is not installed
in the airplane. The owner or operator of the airplane may wish to have this feature installed by
an authorized avionics technician.
Volume Control – The particular device selected, not the audio panel, controls the volume to
the headset and cabin speaker. Moreover, the communication feature is always active even when
an unrelated Audio Select Button is depressed. For example, if Com 1 is selected on the
microphone selector switch, the Com 1 Audio Selector Button will automatically be selected,
illuminated, and audio information will be sent to the headphones (and speaker, if selected). If
Nav 2 is selected at the same time, both button lights (Com 1 and Nav 2) will be on. Depending
on the volume setting of each unit, two sources of communications could be sent to the
headphones and the cabin speaker.
Intercom – The intercom portion of the audio panel is located to the left of the Audio Select
Buttons and contains a volume control, a Squelch control, and a three-position intercom selection
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-51
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
switch. The volume button controls the loudness of the intercom system only. Communication
and navigation amplification is regulated by the volume controls on the radios.
The intercom system is voice actuated. When someone speaks, the voice generates a small
current and activates the microphone switch. To prevent broken or clipped communication the
squelch should be adjusted before each flight. With the engine running, set the VOX (Voice
activated Relay) level by slowly rotating the Squelch Control Knob clockwise until noise from
the engine is no longer audible. Make sure no one is speaking or creating noise while adjusting
the squelch. It is probably best to monitor the system with the intercom select switch in the “All”
position to verify that the system is noiseless. It is also recommended that unused headsets be
unplugged to preclude extraneous background noise.
The Intercom Select switch can be set to three modes depending on the situation and pilot
preference. The mode selected is indicated by the position of the switch in relation to the placard.
1. In the “All” mode, the intercom is linked to all seat positions; the pilot and passengers can
talk to each other, everyone hears radio communications, and everyone hears music from
Entertainment No. 1 (optional equipment). During any communication, the music volume
decreases and then gradually increases back to the original level after communications are
completed. This so-called “soft mute” mode is also selectable by pressing once on the
volume control.
2. In the “Crew” mode, pilot and front seat passenger are linked together; they can
communicate with each other and receive radio communications. The rear seat passengers
are linked together and can talk to each other but cannot hear radio communications nor can
they communicate with the pilot and front seat passenger. The pilot and copilot can hear
music from Entertainment No. 1, and passengers can hear music from Entertainment No. 2 if
installed by the owner or operator of the airplane. (The Audio Panel has the capability for
two entertainment channels; however, access to Entertainment No. 2 is not available as an
optional item.)
3. In the “Iso” (Isolate) mode, the pilot hears the radios, but is isolated from the intercom,
while the front seat and rear seat passengers are on the same intercom loop but cannot hear
radio communications. The front and rear seat passengers can hear music from the optional
Entertainment No. 1 channel.
4. The above description of the various intercom modes is valid only when the Microphone
Selector switch is set to Com 1 or Com 2. Anytime the selector switch is set to one of the
three Split Modes, only the rear seat passengers have intercom functions.
Squelch Adjustment – No adjustment of the IntelliVox™ squelch control is necessary. Through
three individual signal processors, the ambient noise appearing in all microphones is constantly
being sampled. Non-voice signals are blocked. When someone speaks, only their microphone
circuit opens, placing their voice on the intercom. The system is designed to block continuous
tones; therefore, people humming or whistling in monotone may be blocked after a few
moments.
For best performance, the headset microphone must be placed a minimum of ¼ inch away from
your lips, preferably against them. It is also a good idea to keep the microphone out of a direct
wind path. Moving your head through a vent air stream may cause the IntelliVox™ to open
momentarily. This is normal. For optimum microphone performance, UPS Aviation
Technologies, Inc. recommends installation of a Microphone Muff Kit from Oregon Aero (1800-888-6910). This will not only optimize VOX performance, but will improve the overall
clarity of all your communications.
RA050001
7-52
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Key Click Adjustment – It is possible to provide audible feedback when depressing any of the
10 pushbuttons of the SL15. The pushbuttons are not only mechanical to provide direct sun light
readability, but with the key click enabled, the pilot can hear the action of depressing the
pushbuttons. To enable the key click, depress the Com 1 and Com 2 buttons simultaneously for
at least 3 seconds. To inhibit the function, again press the Com 1 and Com 2 pushbuttons
simultaneous for at least 3 seconds. Once the function has been disabled or enabled, the SL15
will remember that mode until the pilot changes it. When the aircraft radios are audible at a
particular position, that position will also hear the key click.
APOLLO GX50 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS)
General – The GPS is a United States satellite based radio navigational, positioning, and time
transfer system operated by the Department of Defense. The system provides highly accurate
position and velocity information and precise time on a continuous global basis to an unlimited
number of properly equipped users. The system is unaffected by weather and provides a
worldwide common grid reference system based on the earth fixed coordinate system. The GPS
constellation of 24 satellites is designed so that a minimum of five are always observable by a
user anywhere on earth. The receiver uses data from the best four satellites above its horizon,
adding signals from one as it drops signals from another, to continually calculate its position.
The GPS receiver verifies the integrity of the signals received from the GPS constellation
through receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM) by determining if a satellite is
providing corrupted information. At least one satellite, in addition to those required for
navigation, must be in view for the receiver to perform the RAIM function; thus, RAIM needs
five satellites in view, or four satellites and baro-aiding to work. RAIM needs six satellites in
view (or five satellites with baro-aiding) to isolate the corrupt satellite signal and remove it from
the navigation solution. Baro-aiding is a method of augmenting the GPS solution equation by
using a nonsatellite input source. Baro-aiding uses the pressure altitude corrected for the local
barometric pressure setting to provide accurate altitude information to the GPS receiver.
The Global Positioning System, when receiving adequate and usable signals, can be used as a
primary means of navigation in oceanic airspace and certain remote areas. GPS equipment may
be used as a supplemental means of IFR navigation for domestic en route, terminal operations,
and certain instrument approach procedures. This approval permits the use of GPS in a manner
that is consistent with current navigation requirements. The system can be used as one of the
required items for long-range oceanic navigation and as the only device for short-range oceanic
routes that require one source of navigation.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-53
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
PICTURE OF THE GX50 GPS
(Figure 7 - 17)
Subscription Updates – The GX50 GPS Navigation system in the airplane has a database that
contains detailed information about waypoints, airports, VOR’s, and NDB’s, as well as the
capability for 500 user-defined waypoints. The database is updated every 28 days and is revised
by inserting a new database card into the GPS. The Nav/Data™ information is provided through
an arrangement with Jeppesen Nav/Data™ Service and is available on a subscription basis.
Contact UPS Aviation Technologies, Inc. at the address shown in the GPS User’s Guide for
more details.
Apollo GX50 User’s Guide – The GX50GPS is limited to use for en route and non-precision
approach IFR operations. An Apollo GX50 User’s Guide is included as part of the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook and The FAA Approved Flight Manual and is the primary source document
for operation of the airplane’s GPS. To properly use all the features of the GX50 GPS requires
considerable practice and study. However, the long-term benefits more than justify the time
devoted to learning the system.
It is imperative that the GPS guide be studied at some length and that several hours of in-flight
practice under VFR conditions occur before using the GPS for IFR operations. The GPS unit
provides an extensive amount of flight, navigation and airport data, but there is a corresponding
level of complexity. Two flight simulation functions are available for home study purposes. (1)
There is a flight simulator mode preprogrammed into the GPS unit. The Apollo GX50 User’s
Guide contains procedures for removal of the GPS and using it in the home environment for
training purposes. (2) The manufacturer of the GPS sells a CD ROM flight simulator program
designed for the Windows 95/98 and NT operating systems.
Most of the documentation in the GPS user’s guide is applicable to the GPS unit installed in the
airplane. However, fuel/air information is limited to pressure altitude input from the Trans-Cal
SSD 120 encoder. The other input details to the fuel/air data system such as temperature and fuel
information are not integrated with the GPS. While the GPS is capable of processing this
additional data and displaying items such as density altitude, outside air temperature, endurance,
range, etc., this is not possible as the airplane is currently configured. If the owner or operator of
the airplanes wishes to integrate these additional inputs, contact the GPS manufacturer for more
information.
RA050001
7-54
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
H14 GPS ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL UNIT (ACU)
The information displayed on the H14ACU is repeated on the face of the GX50 GPS. However,
Federal Aviation Regulations require an installed and operating remote annunciator in the
instrument panel for IFR operations. The panel contains six annunciator lights and two push
buttons, NAV/GPS and GPS/SEQ. The following discussion assumes a basic understanding of
the GX50 GPS. A drawing of the H14ACU annunciator is shown in (Figure 7 - 18) and a
discussion of the features follows.
MSG (Message) Light – When the annunciator message (MSG) light on the upper left side of
the remote indicator is illuminated, there is one or more new messages waiting for review.
Pressing the message key on the installed GPS unit accesses the details of a message. The
message will show information about the GPS system and may require pilot action. When the
message light is on, the message(s) should be reviewed as soon as possible since some messages
are associated with the system’s integrity.
(Figure 7 - 18)
The message light also displays information, instructions, and input prompting during the en
route and approach phases of the flight. As the airplane approaches an en route waypoint, or an
initial or final approach fix (IAF and FAF respectively) the message light illuminates on the
panel of the H14ACU. Pressing the message button on the GX50 will display information about
the flight or direct the pilot to take certain actions.
NAV/GPS Annunciator and Button – Depressing the NAV/GPS latching button selects the
GPS function when the button is locked in the depressed position. This also illuminates the GPS
light to the left of the button. If the GPS light is on, information from the installed GPS unit is
selected for display on the navigation indicator. When the latching button is out, the navigation
function is selected and the NAV light will be illuminated. If the navigation light is on, the
information from the SL30 is selected for display on the panel mounted navigation indicator.
Repeated depressions of the switch will toggle the indications between the NAV and GPS
modes.
APPR (Approach Transition) – This particular function permits using the GPS for nonprecision instrument approaches. One difference between this mode and the en route mode is the
integrity monitoring is set to a tighter level. In the en route mode, a full-scale reading of the CDI
equals five miles from center to the left or right. In the approach transition mode the scale is one
mile left and right. When the airplane is 30 nautical miles from the destination airport with an
approach loaded in the GPS, a message will offer the pilot the option to enable the approach.
When the approach is enabled through input to the GPS, the APPR light will illuminate to
indicate the airplane is in the approach transition phase. The IAF is usually crossed within this
30-mile transition area.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: L/02-14-2005
RA050001
7-55
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ACTV (Approach Active) – When the airplane is within three nautical miles of the FAF, the
ACTV light will start flashing. Within two miles of the FAF, the CDI sensitivity will change
gradually from one mile to three tenths of a mile. As the airplane passes the FAF, the ACTV
light will become steady and the OBS HOLD light will turn on.
The APPR ACTV mode is only entered through automatic engagement by the GX50 GPS. Once
the airplane crosses the FAF, flight plan leg sequencing is suspended; hence, the OBS HOLD
light is illuminated automatically. In this situation, the missed approach point (MAP) is the next
waypoint. Once the airplane passes the FAF, depressing the GPS SEQ button will cancel the
APPR ACTV and OBS HOLD indications. The mode can only be reengaged by flying a missed
approach and returning to the FAF.
WARNING
Once the airplane has passed the final approach fix, the ACTV light must be
on and steady. If the light is not on or does not stop flashing, do not continue
the approach. Moreover, the blind altitude encoder/digitizer must be on and
functioning properly for operations in the approach mode. See page 7-63 for
a discussion of the Trans-Cal SSD 120 blind encoder/digitizer.
PTK (Parallel Track) – To avoid other air traffic, many pilots prefer flying a course parallel to
a given airway but a few miles to the left or right. The GX50 can be programmed to fly parallel
courses to most flight plans set into the GPS. When this particular feature is active in the GPS,
the PTK light will illuminate and remain on during the period parallel tracking is in use.
GPS SEQ (GPS Sequencing) – The GPS sequencing switch is used to temporarily suspend the
active flight plan. A repeated input to the spring-loaded GPS SEQ switch toggles the GPS in and
out of the OBS HOLD mode. When the OBS HOLD light is on, the active flight plan is
temporarily suspended. As discussed above, the OBS HOLD is automatically engaged after
crossing the final approach fix during an instrument approach. There are other times during a
typical VFR or IFR flight that the OBS hold function is useful. For example, under VFR
conditions the pilot might want to do a few minutes of sightseeing along a particular route.
During IFR operations, ATC might require holding at some en route location.
APOLLO SL30 NAV/COMM
Overview and Quick-Start Guide – The information that follows is excerpted from the Apollo
Model SL30 NavComm User’s Guide and is edited somewhat. The SL30 information in this
AFM/POH is intended as a quick-start guide and must be supplemented with the 40± page user’s
guide, which is included as part of the AFM/POH.
RA050001
7-56
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: L/02-14-2005
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
(Figure 7 - 19)
Getting Started – The SL30 combines a 760-channel VHF communications transceiver with a
200-channel VOR, localizer, and glideslope receiver. Besides the traditional Nav/Comm
features, the SL30 also provides automatic decoding of the Morse code station identifier for
VOR/LOC, most-used frequency storage in memory, and built-in course deviation indicator. The
SL30 can also monitor the standby Comm and Nav frequencies. When a localizer frequency is
tuned and in the active window, the radio automatically tunes the corresponding UHF glideslope
frequency. A brief discussion of the unit follows. Refer to (Figure 7 - 19) for a picture of the
radio.
• Display – The Apollo SL30 Nav/Comm uses a single line by 32-character 5x7 dot matrix
alphanumeric display. A photocell is located in the top left corner of the front panel display.
The photocell automatically controls the light intensity of the display LEDs from low
brightness at night to high brightness during daylight operation.TX – A transmit (TX)
indicator located above the flip/flop ------- button lights when the Comm radio is
transmitting.
• Power On/Off, Volume, Squelch – The knob on the left side of the SL30 controls power
on/off, volume, and squelch test. Rotate the knob clockwise (CW) past the detent to turn the
power on. Continuing to rotate the knob to the right increases speaker and headphone
amplifier volume level. Rotate the knob to the left to reduce the volume level. Pull the knob
out to disable automatic squelch. The SL30 may be configured to have the volume knob
control the Nav and intercom volume, as well as the Comm volume.
• Large/Small Knobs – The dual concentric knobs on the right side of the SL30 are used to
select frequencies, to view the features available within a function, or make changes. Details
are provided in the appropriate sections of the Apollo Model SL30 NavComm User’s Guide.
• Flip/Flop – Press the flip/flop button ------- to switch between the active (left-most) and
standby (right-most) frequency. Switching between Com frequencies is disabled while
transmitting.
• Comm – Press COM to select the Comm radio mode. The annunciator will light above the
button when the Comm mode is selected. Press COM a second time to monitor the standby
frequency. See the Advanced Operation section in the Apollo Model SL30 NavComm User’s
Guide for more about monitoring frequencies.
• NAV – Press NAV to select the Nav radio mode. The annunciator above the button will light
when the Nav mode is selected. Press NAV a second time to monitor the standby frequency.
See the Advanced Operation section in the Apollo Model SL30 NavComm User’s Guide for
more about monitoring frequencies.
• SYS – Press SYS to reach the System mode. The annunciator above the button will light
when the System mode is selected.
• OBS – Press OBS to see the current OBS setting and graphic CDI. Note that the OBS course
setting of the MD-200 or HSI is decoded and displayed on the screen of the SL30.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-57
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
•
•
•
•
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
T/F – Press T/F to toggle between the bearing TO or radial FROM the active VOR. The T/F
button does not operate for localizer frequencies and operates independent of the OBS and
HSI settings.
ID – Press ID to select the Nav audio and toggle between VOICE or IDENT. Pressing ID
will cancel the VOR monitor function. Selecting the monitor function will suspend the ID
function until the monitor function is disabled.
SEL – Press SEL to choose from a list of channel types or to change values. In Comm or
Nav modes, press SEL to choose frequencies from the available lists. Press SEL again if you
want to cancel the selection process. The annunciator will light above the button when this
function is active.
ENT – Press ENT to save selected values, confirm a prompt, or save the standby frequency.
Basic Operating Procedures for the SL30 Nav/Comm – Use the following steps for operation
and use of the radio’s basic features. Advanced operations are discussed in the Apollo Model
SL30 NavComm User’s Guide.
• Power On – Turn the SL30 on. Ensure the SL30’s Power/Volume knob and the system and
avionics master switches are in the on position. The SL30 runs through a short initialization
routine and briefly displays the last VOR check date. If the radio is turned off and on for less
then 15 seconds, it will bypass the initialization process and return to the previous display.
• Selecting a Comm Frequency - New frequencies are first selected as a standby frequency
and then toggled to the active side with the flip/flop switch. While viewing the standby
frequency display, use the large and small knobs on the right side of the radio to select the
desired frequency.
1. Press COM to reach the Comm radio function. The annunciator above the COM button
will light.
2. Turn the Large knob to change the values in one MHz increments. The MHz selection
range is between 118 and 136 in one MHz steps.
3. Turn the Small knob to change the values in 25 kHz increments. The kHz selection range
is between 000 and 975 kHz in 25 kHz steps. Note that only two digits are displayed to
the right of the decimal point.
4. Turn the large and small knobs clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease
the frequency values. Standby frequency selection is not inhibited while transmitting.
5. Press the flip/flop button to toggle the standby frequency to the active frequency.
• Selecting a Nav Frequency – The selection of Nav frequencies is the same as for the Comm
frequencies. The annunciator above the Nav button will light.
1. Press NAV to reach the Nav radio function.
2. Turn the Large knob to change the values in one MHz increments. The MHz selection
range is between 108 and 117 in one MHz steps.
3. Turn the Small knob to change the values in 50 kHz increments.
4. Press the flip/flop button to toggle the standby frequency to the active frequency.
NOTE
It is not possible to simultaneously display both Nav and Comm frequencies.
•
•
System Mode – Software versions, setup of the Nav and Comm functions, and information
about the last VOR test are viewable from the system mode. See the Advanced Operations
section of the Apollo Model SL30 NavComm User’s Guide for more details.
OBS Mode – Press OBS to see the current OBS setting and graphic CDI. Note that the OBS
course setting of the MD-200 or HSI is decoded and displayed on the screen of the SL30.
RA050001
7-58
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
•
•
•
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Recalling Frequencies – In the Comm or Nav modes, press SEL to gain access to the
available frequency lists of each mode. Turn the large and small knobs to view the available
channels.
1. Press COM or NAV to go to the desired mode.
2. Press SEL to go to the frequency database.
3. Turn the large knob to review the type of frequency.
4. Turn the small knob to display the available channels in the selected type.
5. Press ENT to put the displayed channel into the standby position or press flip/flop to put
the displayed channel into the active position. Press SEL again to cancel selection.
Emergency Channel – The standard emergency channel (121.50 MHz) is stored in the
Comm memory of the SL30.
1. Press Com if the radio is not in Comm mode. Press SEL and turn the large knob one
position counterclockwise to the emergency channel.
2. The following display will appear 119.10 s124.55 emergency 121.50 (assume the first
two frequencies were previously set into Comm).
3. Press the flip/flop button to make the emergency channel the active channel.
Stuck Mike – The SL30 has a stuck microphone feature, which suspends radio transmission
if the push-to-talk transmit button is depressed for more than 35 seconds. A Stuck Mic
annunciation will be displayed until the push-to-talk button is released. While actual stuck
mike occurrences are rare, the 35-second time-out feature is commonly experienced during
pilot-to-pilot communications.
NOTE
If a stuck microphone occurs during an emergency and use of the radio’s
transmitter is necessary, turn the radio off and then back on using its power
switch. This will provide 35 seconds of transmission before the radio timesout.
MD-200 NAVIGATION INDICATOR
Mid Continent Navigation Indicator – The navigation head, frequently referred to as the OBS,
is located in the instrument panel next to the vertical speed indicator and just above the throttle.
The instrument is selectable for VOR stations, Instrument Landing Systems, and LNAV (lateral
navigation) functions. It is important to remember that LNAV cross-track deviation is linear
during LNAV operations and angular during VOR operations. There are six basic components in
the MD-200 navigation indicator: (1) the Omni Bearing Selector, (2) the azimuth card, (3) the
To/From & Flag Indicator, (4) the glideslope flag, (5) the VOR/LOC/NAV deviation bar, and (6)
the glideslope deviation bar. A drawing of the instrument appears in (Figure 7 - 20).
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-59
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
DRAWING OF MD-200 NAVIGATION INDICATOR
(Figure 7 - 20)
Radio navigation and approach information from the No. 1 SL30 and GX50 GPS is only
displayed on the HSI. The source of the navigation information, i.e., GPS or navigation radio,
depends on the selection of ACU. (See page 7-55 for a discussion of the H14ACU.) Radio
navigation and approach information from the No. 2 SL30 is only displayed on the MD-200
navigation indicator.
VOR Station – When VOR data is sent to the MD-200 navigation indicator, the instrument
provides course information to and from the VOR station. If the OBS is moved so that the needle
is centered, the course displayed above the triangular pointer is the course to or from the station
depending on the reading of the TO/FROM indicator. For example, if the heading of the airplane
is similar to the course indicated by the azimuth card and a To indication is displayed, under no
wind conditions the airplane will generally be on a course to the station. If the CDI indication
moves to the right or left, then the course selected is to the right or left of the airplane.
Localizer – The localizer is one of the components of the Instrument Landing System and
provides information about the airplane’s alignment with the approach runway. The localizer
frequencies are part of the VHF navigation band and range from 108.10 to 111.95 MHz on the
odd kHz settings. While the OBS does not influence localizer indications, it is a good idea to
adjust the azimuth card to the same course as the localizer. The localizer is much more sensitive
than the VOR, and smaller left and right corrections are required to center the CDI. On a front
course approach, a needle deflection left or right means the runway centerline is to the left or
right.
Glideslope – The glideslope or glidepath indicator provides information about the airplane’s
vertical position during the approach to the runway. The glideslope operates in the UHF
frequency band and is automatically paired with the selected VHF localizer frequency. The
horizontal needle in the navigation head indicates the airplane’s position along the glideslope. If
the horizontal needle is deflected up, then the airplane is below the prescribed glidepath. A down
needle means the airplane is too high. The glideslope must only be used when the warning flag is
not displayed in the glideslope window. The glideslope is not usable on the back course. In
RA050001
7-60
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
addition, pilots must be alert when approaching the glidepath interception. False courses and
reverse sensing will occur at angles considerably greater than the published path of about three
degrees.
MD-200 Annunciators – When the back course localizer function is selected on the No. 2 SL30,
the BC function in the left lower quadrant of the instrument illuminates. No NAV/GPS
annunciations are provided since this instrument only provides navigational information, i.e.,
VOR or ILS.
To review, the No. 1 SL30 and GPS provide data to the HSI, depending on the selection made on
the H14 GPS Annunciator Unit. The No. 2 SL30, which is connected to the MD-200, can only
provide navigation information to the MD-200. It is not possible to switch the navigator source
to a different indicator, i.e., transfer nav data from the No. 2 radio to the HSI.
APOLLO SL70 ATCRBS TRANSPONDER
General – The SL70 Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS) transponder is
located in the lower portion of radio rack panel assembly. The unit has the capability of
transmitting on 4096 discrete codes and is equipped with Mode C altitude reporting capabilities.
A photocell on the front of the SL70 adjusts the LED intensity for ambient light conditions. The
SL70 will automatically test its receive function if no interrogations have been received in the
last 30 seconds. A photocell on the front of the SL70 adjusts the LED intensity for ambient light
conditions.
A picture of the SL70 is shown in ( on page 7-62. The SL70 is divided into four basic parts
which include: (1) the ON/OFF switch, IDENT button, and mode select buttons on lower left
side of the unit’s panel, (2) the code display portion in the upper left of the panel, (3) the altitude
hold and code select knobs on the lower right side of the panel, (4) the altitude display window
on the upper right side of the unit.
ON/OFF Knob – A single knob on the left side of the unit turns power on and off. Rotate the
knob clockwise to turn transponder power on and counterclockwise to turn power off. When the
knob is in the OFF position, the unit is off and nothing will appear in the display window. When
the transponder is first turned on it automatically goes to the standby mode and will display the
VFR Code.
Ident Button – The Ident (IDT) button should only be depressed when directed to do so by
ATC. Pushing the button appends a Special Position Identification (SPI) to the code transmitted
and permits rapid detection by ATC. When the Ident button is depressed, the Reply LED will be
lighted for 20 seconds. The Reply (Ident) LED will also flash when the SL70 generates
transponder replies
Mode Buttons – An LED above each mode pushbutton will light when that button is pressed.
When the transponder is in the SBY (Standby) position, the unit is energized but will not reply to
interrogations. In the ON mode, the unit can reply to all Mode A and Mode C interrogations;
however, the altitude reporting information available on Mode C is not accessible. No
information will be displayed in the altitude window. When the ALT (Altitude) mode is
selected, the unit can respond to all Mode A and C position interrogations, as well as altitude
information for Mode C interrogations. Pressing the VFR button once sets in the VFR squawk
code. Press the button a second time to toggle between the VFR squawk code and the previously
entered code.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-61
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Code and Altitude Display Windows – The display window shows the code selected on the left
side and altitude information on the right side. Altitude information is displayed hundreds of
feet, i.e., 095 indicates a pressure altitude of 9,500 feet. The displayed pressure altitude is
generated by the Trans-Cal SSD 120 encoder/digitizer. The indication in the ALT/FL window is
usually different from the indication of the airplane’s altimeter. The altitudes displayed on the
transponder and the altimeter should approximately agree when the airplane’s altimeter is set to
29.92 inches Hg. The example in (Figure 7 - 21) shows a pressure altitude of 7,500 feet.
Code Select Knob – The selected squawk code will always be in use. As a squawk code is
changed, the original code is sent until the new code is selected. The dual concentric knobs on
the right side of the unit are used to select squawk codes. Turning the outer knob moves the
cursor to allow editing of the selected character. Turning the inner knob changes values. To
select a code, use the following procedure.
1. Rotate the outer knob clockwise one position; the first character of the squawk code will
flash.
2. Rotate the inner knob to the desired number for the first digit.
3. Rotate the outer knob to move the cursor to the next desired digit. Turn the small knob to
select the desired number.
4. Repeat step 3 for each of the desired digits.
5. After the last digit is selected, rotate the outer knob clockwise one more position. The
display will stop flashing. The new code is now selected.
Timing Out – It is important that code inputs are performed in a prompt manner. If the code
select knobs are not used for three seconds or more, the display will stop flashing and code
selection is terminated. Moreover, pressing any of the mode pushbutton will end code selection.
PICTURE OF THE SL70
(Figure 7 - 21)
Altitude Hold – Altitude Hold helps the pilot maintain a constant altitude. Repeated input to the
HLD button enables and disables altitude hold. The LED above the HLD button is lighted when
altitude hold is enabled. When the HLD button is pressed, the altitude display will indicate
“+000.” The altitude display values will increase/decrease as the aircraft changes altitude. The
altitude display will flash when the airplane’s change in altitude exceeds the selected threshold.
Setting Altitude Hold – Press the HLD button to set the current altitude as the hold altitude. The
LED above the HLD button will light, indicating that Altitude Hold is active. The altitude
displayed is a value relative to the hold altitude, in 100-foot increments. A displayed value of
RA050001
7-62
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
+001 means the airplane is 100 ft. above the hold altitude. The altitude display will flash when
the airplane’s change in altitude exceeds the selected threshold established in the hold buffer.
Setting the Altitude Hold Buffer – Set the Altitude Hold Buffer value by pressing the HLD
button for two seconds, or longer. Select a value between 200 and 2500 feet by turning the inner
knob to change the buffer value, such as ±002 for 200 feet. Press HLD again to save the value,
which is retained when the SL70 is turned off. If the holding buffer value is not changed, the
factory default value of 300 feet is displayed when the Altitude Hold mode is made active.
TRANS-CAL SSD 120 BLIND ENCODER/DIGITIZER
General – The Trans-Cal SSD 120 encoder is a self-contained, solid-state electronic device that
determines the pressure altitude of the airplane. The device samples atmospheric pressure from
the airplane’s static system with the barometric scale of the encoder set to 29.92 inches Hg. The
pressure altitude of the airplane is then converted to a digital equivalent or is encoded. When the
encoder is connected to the airplane’s transponder in Mode C operations and receives an
interrogation from an air traffic control entity, the unit will transmit the encoded pressure altitude
to the ground station. The ground station corrects the encoded pressure altitude for local pressure
variations before the altitude of the airplane is displayed on the ground-based system.
Depressing the altitude (ALT) button on the SL70 transponder will activate the encoder. If the
solid-state pressure sensor has had sufficient time to warm up and stabilize, it will reply to Mode
C altitude interrogations. It is important to realize that changing settings in the Kollsman window
of the airplane’s altimeter does not affect the blind encoder. However, an incorrect altimeter
setting will cause the airplane to fly at an altitude different from the assigned altitude, and the
incorrect or unassigned flight altitude will be displayed on the ground-based radar. When ATC
indicates that the altitude readout is invalid, the first thing the pilot should check is the airplane’s
altimeter setting.
Altitude Range and Accuracy – The encoder is designed to provide reliable altitude
information from a pressure altitude of -1,000 feet to a pressure altitude of 30,000 feet. Within
this range of operating pressure altitudes, the encoder is accurate to ± 50 feet.
CONTROL STICK SWITCHES & HEADSET PLUG POSITIONS
As discussed on page 7-10, there is a hat switch on the top portion of the pilot’s and copilot’s
control stick for operation of the trim tabs. In addition, both sticks have a Push-to-talk (PTT)
microphone transmitter switch and the pilot’s stick has an autopilot function switch (AFS).
Please see (Figure 7 - 22) for a drawing of the pilot’s control stick grip.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-63
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
AUTOPILOT
DISCONNET
SWITCH
TRIM SWITCH
PUSH TO TALK SWITCH
(Figure 7 - 22)
Autopilot Disconnect Switch (ADS) – The ADS is a spring-loaded rocker switch on the top left
side of the pilot’s control stick and is normally operated with the thumb of the left hand. Pressing
the bottom or top portion of the rocker switch will disengage the autopilot. The top and bottom
of the switch is engraved with the letters DISC. (Note: Operating the elevator trim switch will
also disconnect the autopilot; however, the elevator trim switch should not be used in lieu of
disconnecting the autopilot with the ADS.) See the applicable supplement in Section 9 for a
detailed autopilot discussion.
Push to Talk (PTT) Switch – The PTT is a trigger switch on the forward side of the grip and,
on the pilot’s side, is engaged with the index fingertip of the left hand. There is a PTT switch on
the copilot’s stick that is normally operated with the index fingertip of the right hand. The PTT
switches are used in conjunction with headsets that have a small, adjustable, boom-type
microphone.
Plug Positions – The airplane has four headset plug positions, two in the front seat area on the
floor next to the center console and two in the backseat area under each fresh air vent. The
headsets, in conjunction with voice activated microphones, are normally used for
communications and intercom functions. See page 7-49 for a discussion of the audio panel and
intercom. However, either the pilot’s or copilot’s plug can be used to add a hand-held
microphone if desired. The airplane has special Bose headset plugs, which are designed to
operate with the special noise canceling headsets. There is a significant reduction in cabin noise
when the Bose product is used.
Headsets – It is suggested that the owner or operator purchase headsets for use in the airplane,
as opposed to use of a hand-held microphone and cabin speaker. Pilot and passenger comfort is
enhanced in terms of noise fatigue, and the use of headsets facilitates both radio and intercom
communications. Moreover, in situations involving extended over water operations, where two
microphones are required, a second headset with a boom mike will fulfill this requirement and
eliminate the purchase of a seldom-used, hand-held microphone.
RA050001
7-64
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)
General – The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is installed in the airplane as required by
Federal Aviation Regulations to aid in search and rescue operations. It is located aft of the
baggage compartment hat rack or storage shelf. There is an access panel in the vertical partition
of the storage shelf with the following placard: EMERGENCY LOCATION TRANSMITTER
LOCATED AFT OF THIS POINT. IT MUST BE MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
FAR PART 91. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.) In this instance, the ELT battery
must be replaced every two years (Artex 200) or every 5 years (Artex ME406). The batteries
must also be replaced when the transmitter has been in use for more than one cumulative hour; or
when 50 percent of their useful life has expired. The access panel is secured with Velcro strips
and is removable.
Artex 200 ELT – The ELT is automatically activated from the ARM setting with a G-force or
change in velocity of more than 3.5 feet per second. When activated, the unit will transmit a
signal on 121.5 and 243.0 MHz for about 50 hours depending on the age and condition of the
battery. The range of the ELT depends on weather and topography. Transmission can be
received up to 100 miles distant depending on the altitude of the search aircraft. In case of a
forced landing in which the ELT is not activated, the unit can be turned on with either the remote
switch or the switch on the ELT. Do not turn the ELT off even at night, as search aircraft may be
en route 24 hours per day. Turn off the unit only when the rescue team arrives at the landing site.
Switches – There is a two position remote ELT switch located under the knee bolster on the
copilot’s side which is used to arm, test, and reset the transmitter. In addition, there is a
three-position switch on the ELT that is used to arm, test, reset, and turn off the unit. Under
normal conditions, the switch on the ELT is set to the ARM position, and accessing the unit
is unnecessary since most functions are accomplished with the remote switch. The one
exception is the ELT cannot be turned off with the remote switch. In the event the ELT
remains on during normal operations and cannot be reset, moving the three position toggle
switch on the ELT to neutral turns off the transmitter.
Since there are three selectable switch positions on the ELT and two positions on the remote
panel, a total of six switch combinations exist. The table below (Figure 7 - 23) summarizes
the six possible combinations and describes how the unit will work with each switch
combination.
ELT Unit Switch
Setting
Remote Switch
Setting
ARM (Normal)
ARM (Normal)
ON
ARM
ARM
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ARM
OFF
ON
How ELT Will Function
ELT G-switch is activated by 3.5 ft. /sec. change in velocity
Overrides G-switch and activates ELT. Normally this setting is used
for maintenance and emergencies when the ELT is not activated.
WARNING, the ELT will not operate under any of these conditions.
(Figure 7 - 23)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-65
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Testing and Reset Functions – If the ELT is tested while installed in the airplane, use the
following procedures. First, the test shall be conducted only during the first 5 minutes after
any hour unless special arrangements are established with the controlling ATC entity. Next,
place the remote switch in the ON position and verify that the red light on the remote switch
flashes. Also, verify that the ELT is heard on the airplane’s communication radio, which
shall be set to 121.5 MHz. Limit the test period to about three bursts or three flashes of the
remote red light, and then move the remote switch to the ARM position. Verify that a signal
is no longer audible on 121.5 MHz and that the red light on the remote switch is not flashing.
If desired, a system function test is possible using the switch combinations in (Figure 7 - 23)
with verification that the appropriate function is displayed. Remember that the functional
check does not verify the condition of system components such as antenna, G-switch,
cabling, and battery condition.
During post flight shutdown operations, monitoring 121.5 MHz on the communications radio
will verify the absence of an ELT transmission. If an ELT tone is heard, reset the unit by
moving the remote switch to the ON position for one second and then moving the switch
back to the ARM position. The ELT, if it is functioning properly, should be reset. If this
procedure does not reset the ELT and a tone is still audible on the communication radio, the
ELT must be turned off by moving the switch on the transmitter to the neutral position. The
problem with the ELT shall be corrected in a timely manner. Refer to FAR 91.207 for
additional information. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.)
Artex ME406 ELT – In the event of a crash, the ME406 activates automatically, and transmits the
standard swept tone on 121.5 MHz lasting until battery power is gone. This 121.5 MHz signal is
mainly used to pinpoint the beacon during search and rescue operations.
NOTE
In October 2000 the International Cospas-Sarsat Program, announced at its 25th
Council Session held in London, UK that it plans to terminate satellite processing
of distress signals from 121.5 and 243 MHz emergency beacons on February 1,
2009.
In addition, for the first 24 hours of operation, a 406 MHz signal is transmitting at 50- second
intervals. This transmission lasts 440 ms and contains identification data programmed into the
beacon and is received by Cospas-Sarsat satellites. The transmitted data is referenced in a
database (maintained by the national authority responsible for ELT registration) and used to
identify the beacon and owner.
Accuracy – Doppler positioning is employed using both 121.5 MHz and 406 MHz signals.
Position accuracy of the 121.5 MHz signal is within an area of approximately 15-20 km
radius about the transmitter. Due to the better signal integrity of the 406 MHz, its location
accuracy is within about a 3 km radius.
Switch Operation – An acceleration activated crash sensor (G-switch) turns the ELT ‘on’
automatically when the ELT experiences a change in velocity (or deceleration) of 4.5 fps ±0.5
fps. Activation is also accomplished by means of the remote switch located to the right of the
MFD or the panel (local) switch on the ELT. To deactivate the ELT set either switch to the
RA050001
7-66
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
‘ON’ position, then back to ‘ARM’. The ELT does not have an ‘OFF’ position. Instead, a
jumper between two pins on the front D-sub connector must be in place for the G-switch to
activate the unit. The jumper is installed on the mating half of the connector so that when the
connector is installed, the beacon is armed. This allows the beacon to be handled or shipped
without ‘nuisance’ activation (front connector removed).
NOTE
The ELT can still be manually activated using the local switch on the front of the
ELT.
Care should be taken when transporting or shipping the ELT not to move the switch or allow
packing material to become lodged such as to toggle the switch.
Self Test Mode – Upon turn-off, the ELT automatically enters a self-test mode that transmits
a 406 MHz test coded pulse that monitors certain system functions before returning to the
‘ARM’ed mode. The 406 MHz test pulse is ignored by any satellite that receives the signal,
but the ELT uses this output to check output power and correct frequency. If the ELT is left
activated for approximately 50 seconds or greater, a distress signal is generated that is
accepted by one or more SAR satellites. Therefore, when the self-test mode is required, the
ELT must be activated, then, returned to ‘ARM’ within about 45 seconds otherwise a “live”
distress message will be transmitted.
NOTE
All activations of the ELT should be kept to a minimum. Local or national
regulations may limit testing of the ELT or special requirements or conditions to
perform testing. For the “self test”, Artex recommends that the ELT be “ON” for
no more than 5 seconds during the first 5 minutes after the hour.
In addition to output power of the 121.5/406 MHz signals and 406 MHz frequency, other
parameters of the ELT are checked and a set of error codes generated if a problem is found.
The error codes are displayed by a series of pulses of the ELT LED, remote LED and alert
buzzer. See below.
Testing – Always perform the tests within the first 5 minutes of the hour. Notify any nearby
control tower of your intensions, in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Section 12-22, Note 3. If
outside of the US, always follow all local or national regulations for testing of ELT’s.
WARNING
Do not allow test duration to exceed 5 seconds.
Any time the ELT is activated it is transmitting a 121.5 MHz distress signal. If the unit
operates for approximately 50 seconds, a “live” 406 MHz distress signal is transmitted and is
considered valid by the satellite system. Any time that the ELT is cycled from “ARM” to
“ON” and then back to “ARM”, a 406 MHz signal is transmitted, however it is specially
coded as a “self test” signal that is ignored by the COSPAS-SARSAT satellites.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-67
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NOTE
The self-test time is accumulated in a register on the battery pack. The register
records activation time in 30 second increments so all activations will count as at
least 30 seconds, even if the actual time is much less. Total allowable time is 60
minutes as determined by FAR 91.207 and RTCA DO-204. After this time has
been accumulated a 7- flash error will be presented after the self test. The battery
must be replaced at this point for the ELT to remain in compliance. Always follow
ELT testing requirements per local or national authorities.
Tune a receiver (usually the aircraft radio) to 121.5 MHz. Turn the ELT aircraft panel
switch “ON” for about 1 second, then back to the “ARM” position. The receiver should
voice about 3 audio sweeps. At turn-off (back to ‘ARM’ state) the panel LED and buzzer
should present 1 pulse. If more are displayed, determine the problem from the list below.
Codes displayed with the associated conditions are as follows:
1 Flash – Indicates that the system is operational and that no error conditions were
found.
3 Flashes – Bad load detect. Detects open or short condition on the antenna output or
cable. These problems can probably be fixed by the installer.
• Check that the RF cable is connected and in good condition. Perform
continuity check of center conductor and shield. Check for a shorted cable.
• Check for intermittent connection in the RF cable.
• If this error code persists there may be a problem with the antenna installation.
This can be checked with a VSWR meter. Check the antenna for opens,
shorts, resistive ground plane connection.
4 Flashes – Low power detected. Occurs if output power is below about 33 dBm (2
watts) for the 406 signal or 17 dBm (50 mW) for the 121.5 MHz output. Also may
indicate that 406 signal is off frequency. For this error code the ELT must be sent
back for repair or replacement.
5 Flashes – Indicates that the ELT has not been programmed. Does not indicate
erroneous or corrupted programmed data.
6 Flashes – Indicates that G-switch loop between pins 5 and 12 at the D-sub
connector is not installed. ELT will not activate during a crash.
• Check that the harness D-sub jumper is installed by verifying less than 1 ohm
of resistance between pins 5 and 12.
RA050001
7-68
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
7 Flashes – Indicates that the ELT battery has too much accumulated operation time
(> 1hr). Battery may still power ELT; however, it must be replaced to meet FAA
specifications. May also indicate damage to the battery circuit.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
General – The airplane fire extinguisher is located below the copilot’s seat in a metal bracket
and is mounted parallel to the lateral axis. The extinguisher is stored with the top of the unit near
the middle of the airplane so that the it is accessible from the pilot’s seat.
The extinguisher is filled with a 1211/1301 Halon mixture (commonly called Halonaire) that
chemically interrupts the combustion chain reaction rather than physically smothering the fire.
The hand extinguisher is intended for use on Class B (flammable liquids, oil, grease, etc) and
Class C (energized electrical equipment) type fires.
Temperature Limitations – The fire extinguisher has temperature storage limitations that may
need to be considered depending on the operating environment of the airplane. If it is anticipated
that the cabin temperature will exceed the extremes shown in the table below (Figure 7 - 24) the
extinguisher must be removed and stored in a more temperate location.
Temperature
Extremes
Maximum/Minimum Temperatures
Lowest Cabin Temperature
-40ºF (-40ºC)
Highest Cabin Temperature
120º F (49ºC)
(Figure 7 - 24)
Operation and Use – To operate the fire extinguisher, use the following procedures after
securing the ventilation system:
1. Remove the fire extinguisher from its mounting bracket by pulling up on the bracket release
clamp.
2. With the unit in an upright position, remove the retaining pin from the handle.
3. Discharge the extinguisher by pushing down on the top handle. For best results, direct the
discharge towards the base of the fire, near the edge. Use a small side-to-side sweeping
motion while moving towards the back of the fire. The extinguisher has a continuous
discharge capability of approximately eight seconds. Do not direct the initial discharge at the
burning surface at close range since the high velocity stream may scatter the burning
materials.
4. Short bursts from the extinguisher of one or two seconds are more effective than a long
continuous application.
5. When the fire is extinguished, open all ventilation and return the fire extinguisher to its
mounting bracket. Do not lay it on the floor or in a seat.
6. Have the fire extinguisher replaced or recharged before the next flight.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION/STATIC DISCHARGE
While composite construction provides both strength and low air resistance, it does have high
electrical resistance and, hence, very little electrical conductivity. Conductivity is necessary for
lightning protection, since it is important that all parts of the airplane to have the same electrical
potential. Moreover, in the event of a lightning strike, the energy is distributed to and absorbed
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-69
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
by all the skin area, rather than to an isolated location. One method of lightning protection,
which is used in this airplane, is achieved by integrating aluminum and copper mesh as part of
the composite sandwich. The depth of the mesh varies from 10 to 30 thousandths of an inch
below the surface of the paint and encompasses most surfaces of the airplane. The various parts
of the airplane are then interconnected through use of metal fasteners inserted through several
plies of mesh, mesh overlaps, and bonding straps.
WARNING
The thickness of the surface paint is important for lightning protection
issues, and the color is important because of heat reflection indices. The
owner or operator of the airplane must only repaint the airplane according
to the specifications for Columbia 300 LC40-550FG as shown in the airplane
maintenance manual.
Static wicks are used to bleed an accumulated static electrical charge off the airplane’s surface
and discharge it into the air. An airplane that does not properly dissipate static build-ups is
susceptible to poor or inoperative radio navigation and communication. The wick is made of
carbon, enclosed in a plastic tube. One end of the wick is connected to the trailing edge of a
airplane’s surface, and the other end sticks out into the air. As the airplane flies through the air,
static electricity builds up on the surfaces, travels through the mesh to the static wicks, and
discharges into the air. The over application of wax increases the generation of static electricity.
See page 8-17 in Section 8 for instructions about the care of the airplane’s surfaces. Also refer to
page 4-15 in Section 4 for more information about the static wicks.
RA050001
7-70
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
FLIGHTMONITOR (FMP300 SERIES)
Overview – The FlightMonitor is classified as a FSD or Flight Situation Display. The 10.3 inch
display is similar to a laptop computer screen and uses a popular commercial operating system.
The FlightMonitor is located to the right of the flight instrument panel, while the input controls
for the FlightMonitor’s computer are just below the center armrest. The controls are intuitive and
easy to operate using one hand. The knobs and buttons are well separated and visual access is not
necessary. The FlightMonitor is a joint venture of the Avidyne and AvroTec Corporations;
however, AvroTec provides hardware and software support, and all warranty and/or technical
inquiries should be to them.
The unit interfaces with the GPS and displays the airplane’s position on an assortment of
aeronautical charts, i.e., WAC, Sectional, Area, Low Altitude, and High Altitude charts. In
addition, the unit has a Navigator module that is useful for flight planning and getting a general
overview of a proposed route. Lightning data from the BF Goodrich WX 500 Stormscope™ can
also be displayed and analyzed. The software contains a database, which provides airport
information similar to most commercial GPS’s.
User’s Manual – The FlightMonitor can be used for VFR and IFR operations to enhance
situational awareness, however, current charts appropriate for the intended operations must be
carried onboard the airplane. An AvroTec FlightMonitorFMP300 Series User’s Manual is
included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA Approved Flight Manual and is
the primary source document for operation of the unit. Proper use of the many features requires
some practice and study. However, the long-term benefits more than justify the time devoted to
learning the system. It is recommended that the guide be reviewed at some length and an hour or
so of practice under VFR conditions occur before using the FlightMonitor for complex
operations.
Subscription – The charts and the Navigator information is updated using a CD and CD player.
A CD player is included with the FlightMonitor. The parallel port cable for chart updates is
located behind the center console access panel on the co-pilot’s side. For more details about
subscriptions, pricing, etc., contact AvroTec, Inc. at the phone number provided in AvroTec
FlightMonitorFMP300 Series User’s Manual
BF GOODRICH WX-500 AND WX-950 STORMSCOPE®
The model number installed depends on whether an AvroTec FlightMonitor is installed. The
WX500 is used for airplanes with a FlightMonitor and the WX-950 is provided on airplanes that
do not have a FlightMonitor. The only difference between the two systems is the display. The
WX-950 is displayed on a dedicated panel-mounted instrument, and the WX-500 is displayed on
the FlightMonitor.
WX-500 Users Guide – If the WX-500 is installed, the AvroTec FlightMonitorFMP300 Series
User’s Manual and the WX-500 Stormscope® Series II Weather Mapping Sensor User’ Guide
are included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA Approved Flight Manual
and are the primary source document for operation of the unit.
WX-950 Pilot’s Guide – If the WX-950 is installed, the Pilot’s Guide for the Stormscope®
Series II Weather Mapping Systems Model WX-950 is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-71
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Handbook and The FAA Approved Flight Manual and is the primary source document for
operation of the unit.
Brief Operational Overview – The antenna detects the electric and magnetic fields generated
by intra-cloud, inter-cloud, and cloud to ground electrical discharges and sends the resulting
signals to the processor. The processor digitizes, analyzes, and converts the signals into range
and bearing. A clustering algorithm is then used to identify the location of storm cells within a
200 nautical mile radius of the airplane. This information is then sent to the FlightMonitor or the
installed Stormscope® display unit, which plots the location of the associated thunderstorms.
The WX-500/950 is a passive sensor that listens for electromagnetic signals with a receiving
antenna and operates as well on the ground as it does in the air.
It should be noted that there are general limitation to use of lightning detectors. They are not
tactical devices that can be used for circumnavigating specific storm cells. Rather, they provide a
generalized location and range of areas with potentially dangerous weather. When using the
WX-950, information is projected onto the 3-inch display/processor in the instrument panel if the
system is on and the unit is the display mode. When using the WX-500, data is continuously sent
when the FlightMonitor is on. If the FlightMonitor lightning detector display is not active, a
“Lightning Ahead” message will be annunciated at the bottom of the FlightMonitor.
J.P. INSTRUMENTS EDM-701 DIGITAL ENGINE SCANNER
A JPI Pilot’s Guide is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA
Approved Flight Manual and is the primary source document for operation of the unit. The
discussion below is intended to provide the pilot with a brief overview of the unit’s operation.
The EDM-701 is installed in the engine instrument panel in the lower right position and displays
CHT and EGT in digital and analog format. The analog display is a vertical bar graph of EGT
temperatures for each cylinder presented as a percentage of 1650ºF. A dot over the vertical bar
indicates which cylinder’s temperature is currently being displayed. Below the bar graph, the
EGT and CHT temperatures are displayed next to each other. Missing bars at the base of the
vertical columns indicate the hottest and coldest CHT trend.
The Lean Find mode is used to determine the leanest cylinder. To use this function, press the LF
button. During constant power cruise, pressing the LF button for five seconds will cause the
vertical bar graph to level at mid scale representing the peaks of each column. At this point, each
bar represents 10°F and acts as an EGT trend monitor. Press the LF button again to return to
normal function.
The CHT limit of 460°F is programmed at the factory, however, it may be re-programmed to set
a lower CHT limit as a pre-warning.
1. Press the reset button located in the small hole in the back of the instrument marked RS
when the power is on.
2. Press the STEP button to index to the “CHT HI” alarm.
3. Hold in the LF button to increase the limit and tap it to decrease the limit.
4. Continue pressing the STEP button to index past the “END Y” choice.
RA050001
7-72
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SHADIN MINIFLO-LTM DIGITAL FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A Shadin Miniflo-L Pilot’s Guide is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The
FAA Approved Flight Manual and is the primary source document for operation of the unit. The
discussion below is intended to provide the pilot with a brief overview of the unit’s operation.
The Miniflo-L is installed in the flight instrument panel above the attitude indicator. This
instrument provides fuel flow management during flight without entering information other than
the initial fuel on board. The system consists of the fuel flow transducer, the GPS receiver, and
the panel-mounted unit. The system provides various information to the pilot for fuel
management as described in the paragraph 1. The system is initially programmed at the factory
with the useable fuel and then is programmed by the pilot prior to each flight as described in
paragraph 5. Please see (Figure 7-24) for a drawing of the Shadin Miniflo-L.
(Figure 7 - 25)
1. Functions – The following fuel flow management functions are provided:
ƒ Range—the distance the aircraft may travel in nautical miles.
ƒ Fuel to Destination—the fuel needed to reach a destination or waypoint based on the
actual wind conditions, assuming ground speed, track, and fuel flow remain constant.
To display Fuel to Destination in the right display window, rotate the rotary switch to
FUEL TO DEST. Readings during climb and descent are invalid.
ƒ Fuel Reserve—the amount of fuel on board when the aircraft reaches its destination
assuming ground speed, fuel flow, track, and altitude remain constant. To display
Fuel Reserve in the right display window, rotate the rotary switch to F. AT DEST.
Readings during climb and descent are invalid.
ƒ Endurance—the time left to fly, displayed in hours and minutes, based on amount of
fuel remaining and current fuel flow. To display Endurance in the right display
window, rotate the rotary switch to ENDURANCE. The display window will flash in
this mode if the time remaining to fly at the present power setting is less than 45
minutes.
ƒ Fuel Used—the amount of fuel used since the last fuel entry or reset. To display Fuel
Used in the right display window, move the USED/REM toggle switch to the USED
position. The Fuel Used will continue to be displayed as long as the switch is held in
the USED position and for three seconds after the switch is released.
ƒ Fuel Remaining—the amount of fuel on board. To display Fuel Remaining in the
right display window, move the USED/REM toggle switch to the REM position. The
Fuel Remaining will continue to be displayed as long as the switch is held in the
REM position and for three seconds after the switch is released.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-73
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Not Enough Fuel—the display and a negative sign followed by the amount of fuel
short to reach the destination will flash when the fuel needed to reach the destination
is more than the fuel remaining on board. For the flashing display, the rotary switch
must be in the FUEL TO DEST. position.
Fuel Reserve Will Be Used—the display will flash if the endurance is less than the
time to reach the destination plus 45 minutes at the current cruise power setting. For
the flashing display, the rotary switch must be in either the FUEL TO DEST. or the
F. AT DEST. position.
Fuel Flow—the fuel flow per hour to a tenth of a gallon up to 100 gallons and to the
nearest gallon above 100 gallons. When displayed in pounds, the display is to the
nearest pound up to 999 lb/hr and to the nearest 10 lb. above 999 lb/hr. Fuel flow is
displayed continuously on the left display window.
Nautical Miles Per Gallon—to display Nautical Miles Per Gallon in the right
display window, rotate the rotary switch to NM GAL.
2. Initial Programming – Initial programming is done at the factory and is used to enter the
total usable fuel into the memory. The unit should only be reprogrammed if a modification to
the aircraft that changes the fuel tank capacity is completed and the reprogramming is done in
accordance with the maintenance manual.
3. Diagnostic Testing – The system contains diagnostic software that may be used to test the
system. To activate the function, press the ENTER/TEST button. If the test is successful,
“GOOd” will appear in the display window for three seconds. If the test is not successful,
“bAd” and an error message will be displayed. If “bAd” is displayed, the system is not
working properly and can not be used until serviced in accordance with the maintenance
manual.
NOTE
Using the test function while the engine is running will cause the computer to
lose 17 seconds of fuel count.
4. Preflight Check Programming – Prior to flight, complete the diagnostic test by following
the instructions in paragraph 3. After the diagnostic test, move the USED/REM toggle switch
to the USED position to display the fuel used since the last fuel entry or reset. Next, move the
USED/REM toggle switch to REM to display the fuel remaining on board. Finally, verify the
remaining fuel on board with the actual fuel on board by checking the fuel tanks.
WARNING
Miniflo-L is a fuel flow measuring system and NOT a fuel quantity sensing
device. A visual determination of the usable fuel in the fuel tanks is required
and the actual amount of fuel on board should be entered into the system.
5. Programming – Before each flight, the Miniflo-L system should be verified or set
depending on refueling conditions.
A. No Fuel Added – If no fuel has been added, the necessary data is stored and no action to
set the system is required.
B. Fuel Tanks Full – If the fuel tanks have been filled the Ramping Method or ADD/FULL
Toggle Switch Method may be used.
RA050001
7-74
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Ramping Method
1. Move the USED/REM toggle switch to the REM position and hold.
2. Press the ENTER/TEST button to increment the fuel remaining until the total
usable fuel is reached.
3. Release the USED/REM toggle switch and the ENTER/TEST button to enter
the total usable fuel on board into memory.
4. If the required figure is exceeded follow the instructions for Correcting Fuel
on Board Entry Error.
ADD/FULL Toggle Switch Method
1. Move the ADD/FULL toggle switch to the FULL position and hold.
2. Press the ENTER/TEST button.
3. Release the ADD/FULL toggle switch.
4. Moving the USED/REM toggle switch to REM verifies the correct amount of
fuel is indicated. The current total usable fuel should be displayed.
C. Partial Fuel Added – If the fuel tanks have been partially filled the Ramping Method or
ADD/FULL Toggle Switch Method may be used.
Ramping Method
1. Add the amount of fuel from the refueling meter to the amount of fuel
remaining.
2. Move the USED/REM toggle switch to REM and hold.
3. Press and hold the ENTER/TEST button to increment the fuel remaining until
the correct figure is reached, then release the button.
4. Release the USED/REM toggle switch. The displayed figure is entered into
memory as the fuel remaining on board.
5. If the required figure is exceeded follow the instructions for Correcting Fuel
on Board Entry Error.
ADD/FULL Toggle Switch Method
1. Move the ADD/FULL toggle switch to the ADD position and hold.
2. Move the USED/REM toggle switch to REM to increment the fuel amount
added until the amount of fuel added is reached.
3. Press the ENTER/TEST button.
4. Release the ADD/FULL toggle switch. The computer will add the added fuel
to the fuel remaining and use the total as the current fuel remaining.
5. Moving the USED/REM toggle switch to REM verifies the correct amount of
fuel is indicated. The current usable fuel remaining will be displayed.
D. Correcting Fuel on Board Entry Error – If an error was made in entering the fuel amount,
the following method may be used.
1. Move the USED/REM toggle switch to USED and simultaneously press and
hold the ENTER/TEST button. This action will reset the fuel used and the fuel
remaining figure will appear and pause in the display window for four
seconds.
2. Continue holding the ENTER/TEST button while the figure decrements.
3. When the correct figure is reached, release both the USED/REM toggle
switch and the ENTER/TEST button.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
7-75
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
6. Emergency Procedures – In case of an electrical power failure in-flight, the fuel flow system
will cease to function. After system power is restored, the system will resume accurate fuel
flow reading, but time remaining, fuel used, fuel remaining, reserve, gallons to destination,
and all other functions and warnings will not be accurate.
APOLLO MX20 MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY
The MX20 is an option available on aircraft S/N 40017 and on. An Apollo MX20 Pilot’s Guide
is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA Approved Flight Manual and
is the primary source document for operation of the unit. The discussion below is intended to
provide the pilot with a brief overview of the unit’s operation.
Two MX20 units are installed on the instrument panel on the copilot’s side. The MX20 unit is
shown in Figure 7-25. The only controls for the MX20 are on the unit itself. Each unit can
display information independent of the second unit.
(Figure 7 - 26)
The unit interfaces with the GX50 GPS and displays the airplane’s position on an assortment of
aeronautical charts, i.e., WAC, Sectional, Area, Low Altitude, and High Altitude charts.
Lightning data from the BF Goodrich WX 500 Stormscope™ can also be displayed and
analyzed. The software contains a database, which provides airport information similar to most
commercial GPS’s.
In order to properly use the MX20, it is important to understand how the MX20 interfaces with
the GPS. The GX50 GPS must be operating and be programmed for the MX20 in order for the
MX20 to be fully functional. The navigation route desired for display on the MX20 needs to be
programmed and activated in the GX50. All navigation route changes need to be made through
the GX50. The aircraft altitude encoder provides altitude information to the MX20. The
altimeter’s barometric correction settings need to be set individually in each MX20 as well as in
the GX50.
RA050001
7-76
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
The selectable orientations for the Custom MAP mode, the IFR Chart Mode, and the VFR Chart
Mode are Track-up, Desired Track-up, or North-up orientation while the Terrain Mode only
allows for Track-up orientation. Changing modes will go to the last selected orientation of the
newly selected mode (i.e., from Terrain to MAP, orientation will automatically go from Track-up
to North-up if North-up was the last orientation selected when previously in the MAP mode).
The pilot should be alert for automatic changes in orientation when changing modes and ensure
that the desired orientation is selected.
The MX20 is Limited to VFR Navigation Only. The information currently displayed on the
MX20 is approved only to enhance situational awareness and aid in VFR navigation. It is not
certified for use as an IFR instrument. All IFR navigation and IFR operations will be conducted
by primary reference to the primary flight instruments, primary navigation systems and displays,
and current and approved IFR charts. The MX20 can be operating and can be referenced during
IFR conditions to facilitate situational awareness, but it should not be used as an IFR navigation
tool. This limitation is not intended to restrict the pilot from using the MX20 as necessary in
dealing with an unsafe situation. The pilot should always use the best information available to
make timely safety-of-flight decisions. The MX20 Datalink capabilities (Weather Datalink,
Flight Information Service, and Traffic) are not currently available with this certification
User’s Manual – The MX20 can be used for VFR operations to enhance situational awareness,
however, current charts appropriate for the intended operations must be carried onboard the
airplane. An Apollo MX20 User’s Guide is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
and The FAA Approved Flight Manual and is the primary source document for operation of the
unit. Proper use of the many features requires some practice and study. However, the long-term
benefits more than justify the time devoted to learning the system. It is recommended that the
guide be reviewed at some length and an hour or so of practice under VFR conditions occur
before using the MX20 for complex operations.
Subscription – The charts and the Navigator information is updated using a data card. For more
details about subscriptions, pricing, etc., contact UPS Aviation Technologies at one of the
following phone numbers:
800-252-6726 ext. 3995 (US)
800-654-3415 ext. 3995 (Canada)
503-391-3411 ext. 3995 (International)
GROUND POWER PLUG
The ground power plug is an option available on aircraft S/N 40050 and on. The ground power
plug is located behind the left wing between the trailing edge of the flap and the step. The plug
allows connection to a 12 volt DC power source for maintenance and allows the engine to be
started from a ground power cart. The aircraft power must be off when the plug is connected or
disconnected to the 12 volt DC power source. Once connected, the battery can be charged by
turning the BATT switch on.
CAUTION
The battery should be carefully monitored while charging. Do not exceed 14
volts DC input.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-77
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
CAUTION
The master switch should not be turned on until after the engine has started
and the ground power plug has been removed.
During normal operation of the ground power plug the BATT and ALT switches should be off to
keep from overheating the battery. The procedure for starting the engine using the ground power
plug and a power cart is contained on pages 4-7 and 4-7 of this manual.
S-TEC 429 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM STEERING (GPSS) CONVERTER
The 429 GPSS converter is an option available on aircraft S/N 40036 and on. An S-Tec GPSS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook is included as part of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and The FAA
Approved Flight Manual and is the primary source document for operation of the unit. The
discussion below is intended to provide the pilot with a brief overview of the unit’s operation
and is taken from the S-TEC manual.
The 429 GPSS converter is an accessory to the S-TEC 55 autopilot system that enables a pilot to
switch between heading and GPS navigational signals. During normal flight operations, the
GPSS converter can be switched between the heading and the GPSS modes of operation. In the
heading mode, the converter receives a heading error signal from the heading bug on the HSI.
The converter processes this information and sends the heading error to the autopilot.
When in the GPSS mode, the converter receives ground speed and bank angle digital signals that
are calculated and converted to a commanded turn rate. The turn rate is then scaled and
converted to a DC heading error signal that is compatible with the S-TEC 55 autopilot. The end
result is an autopilot that can be directly coupled to the roll steering commands produced by the
GPS, eliminating the need for the pilot to make any further adjustment to the HSI course arrow.
A push button is located next to the clock on the instrument panel and enables the pilot to switch
between the HDG and GPSS mode. If the unit is in the HDG mode, autopilot HDG operation
will be normal. During flight, if the pilot selects the GPSS mode and valid data is present, the
autopilot will begin to track to the GPS waypoint. If the unit is in the GPSS mode and valid data
is lost, or if GPSS is selected and valid data is not available, the GPSS indicator located next to
the clock will flash to indicate a problem. The aircraft will immediately go wings level until the
pilot can program a valid GPS flight plan or switch the unit to the HDG mode.
Preflight Procedures –
1. Turn aircraft master and avionics switches on. The HDG lamp on the GPSS panel switch will
illuminate indicating the autopilot, when turned on, will operate normally in heading mode.
2. Turn on the autopilot master switch.
3. Select the HDG mode on the autopilot after the RDY annunciator appears.
4. Move the HSI heading bug left and right. The control wheel should smoothly follow the
HDG bug movement.
5. Activate a valid GPS waypoint or flight plan on the GPS Navigator.
6. Press and release the GPSS switch, the HDG lamp should go out and the GPSS lamp should
flash. The HDG bug will no longer move the control wheel.
7. Disconnect the autopilot.
NOTE
The GPSS steering function cannot be ground tested even though a valid GPS
steering signal is present on the GPS navigator due to the missing ground speed
component.
RA050001
7-78
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
En route Navigation Procedures –
1. Select the HDG mode on the autopilot.
2. Select the HDG mode on the panel-mounted GPSS converter switch.
3. Program and activate the desired destination waypoint or flight plan into the GPS navigator.
4. Select the GPSS mode on the panel mounted GPSS converter switch. Observe that GPSS
annunciates steadily.
5. Verify that the autopilot immediately begins tracking to the desired waypoint.
Navigation Procedure Critical Information – The following information is critical to be aware
of while using the GPSS.
Anytime the GPS has a valid waypoint programmed into it and the pilot selects the GPSS mode
with the autopilot in the HDG mode, the autopilot will immediately begin tracking to the
waypoint.
Do not attempt to conduct pilot selectable intercepts (dual mode) when using the GPSS converter
since this capability does not exist. Conduct all GPSS operations with the autopilot in the HDG
mode only. Selecting any lateral mode besides HDG (NAV, APR, REV, etc.) will decouple the
autopilot from the GPSS function.
If the GPSS lamp flashes when engaged, it indicates:
1. The GPS is not on or does not have an active waypoint or flight plan.
2. The bank angle and ground speed signals are not being received or may not be valid.
When operating in the GPSS mode, the autopilot does not use inputs from the HDG bug or
course arrow, therefore, the pilot is not required to set these in any specific position. However,
the pilot will be required to revert back to the HDG mode to maneuver the aircraft for a holding
pattern or procedure turn.
If the GPSS lamp begins to flash, the aircraft will go wings level with 0.5 to 2 seconds. At this
time the pilot can either enter a valid GPS waypoint or press and release the GPSS switch to
return the autopilot to the HDG mode.
GPS Approach Procedures –
1. Select the HDG mode on the autopilot.
2. Select the HDG mode on the panel mounted GPSS converter switch.
3. Select and activate the desired approach on the GPS navigator.
4. Select the GPSS mode on the panel mounted GPSS converter switch. Observe that the GPSS
annunciates steadily.
5. Verify that the autopilot immediately begins tracking to the desired initial approach fix.
6. If the selected approach contains a procedure turn or a holding pattern, the pilot must conduct
the following procedures.
7. When approaching the procedure turn, deselect the GPSS mode by pressing the panel
mounted switch, thus leaving the autopilot in HDG mode.
8. Lead the aircraft around the procedure turn or holding pattern using the HDG bug on the
HSI.
9. When approaching the desired inbound course, once again select the GPSS mode.
10. Conduct the remainder of the approach in the GPSS mode.
11. Monitor course-tracking quality during GPSS operations.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
7-79
Section 7
Description of the Airplane and its Systems
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Emergency Procedures – In the event of a malfunction of the GPSS converter or any time it is
not performing as expected, do not attempt to identify the system problem. Immediately regain
control of the aircraft by disabling and disconnecting the autopilot as necessary. Do not attempt
to use the GPSS function until the problem has been identified and corrected.
A GPSS unit malfunction will most likely affect the autopilots heading mode, rendering it
unusable. However, it may be possible to use the other autopilot lateral modes such as navigation
(NAV) or approach and pitch modes. Exercise caution when examining the use of these
functions after a GPSS malfunction.
RA050001
7-80
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 8
Handling, Servicing,
&
Maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 8-3
General................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Fuselage Identification Plate ........................................................................................... 8-3
Publications ..................................................................................................................... 8-3
Address Information ........................................................................................................ 8-3
SERVICES AND SERVICING................................................................................................... 8-4
Lancair Advisory Service ...................................................................................................... 8-4
Delivery Package ................................................................................................................... 8-4
Fuel Servicing........................................................................................................................ 8-4
Recommended Fuel Grades ............................................................................................. 8-4
Fuel Capacities ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Approved Fuel Additives................................................................................................. 8-4
Fuel Additive Mixture Table ........................................................................................... 8-5
Grounding During Refueling and Defueling ................................................................... 8-6
Fuel Contamination ......................................................................................................... 8-6
Oil Servicing.......................................................................................................................... 8-7
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Temperature Ranges ......................................... 8-7
Sump Capacity................................................................................................................. 8-7
Oil Filter .......................................................................................................................... 8-7
Brakes and Tire/Nose Strut Pressures ................................................................................... 8-7
Battery Replacement Cycles.................................................................................................. 8-8
MAINTENANCE AND DOCUMENTATION .......................................................................... 8-9
Maintenance........................................................................................................................... 8-9
Airplane Inspection Periods............................................................................................. 8-9
Airworthiness Directives ................................................................................................. 8-9
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................................. 8-9
Alterations or Repairs ...................................................................................................... 8-9
Required Oil Changes and Special Inspections............................................................... 8-9
Recommended Oil Changes and Special Inspections...................................................... 8-9
Warranty Inspections ..................................................................................................... 8-10
Airplane Documentation...................................................................................................... 8-10
ADLOG™ Maintenance Recordkeeping System (MRS).................................................... 8-10
HANDLING AND STORAGE ................................................................................................. 8-10
Ground Handling ................................................................................................................. 8-11
Towing........................................................................................................................... 8-11
Parking........................................................................................................................... 8-11
Securing the Airplane .................................................................................................... 8-11
Windshield Cover .......................................................................................................... 8-12
Jacking and Leveling............................................................................................................. 8-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
8-1
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Jacking ........................................................................................................................... 8-12
Leveling ......................................................................................................................... 8-12
Storage ................................................................................................................................... 8-13
Flyable Storage (7 to 30 days) ....................................................................................... 8-13
Temporary Storage (up to 90 days)................................................................................ 8-13
Return to Service From Temporary Storage .................................................................. 8-14
Indefinite Storage (over 90 days)................................................................................... 8-14
Return to Service From Indefinite Storage .................................................................... 8-14
Airframe Preservation for Temporary and Indefinite Storage ....................................... 8-15
Airframe Preservation Return to Service ....................................................................... 8-15
Inspections During Temporary Storage ......................................................................... 8-16
Inspections During Indefinite Storage ........................................................................... 8-16
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE CARE .......................................................................................... 8-17
Airframe ............................................................................................................................... 8-17
Exterior........................................................................................................................... 8-17
Anti-Erosion Tape.......................................................................................................... 8-17
Windshield and Windows .............................................................................................. 8-17
Interior Cleaning and Care............................................................................................. 8-18
Engine and Propeller............................................................................................................ 8-19
Engine Cleaning and Care.............................................................................................. 8-19
Propeller Cleaning and Care .......................................................................................... 8-19
RA050001
8-2
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
INTRODUCTION
This section contains procedures for ground handling of the Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG), as
well as recommendations and techniques for routine care of the airplane’s interior and exterior.
In addition, maintenance intervals and procedures are addressed. Finally, publications, the
Lancair Advisory Service, and servicing information are discussed.
GENERAL
The owner or operator of the airplane is responsible for ensuring the airworthiness of the
airplane is maintained. The responsibility extends to maintaining the airplane logbooks, ensuring
the required inspections are performed in a timely manner, and ensuring that mandatory service
directives and part replacements are accomplished within the specified period.
While the owner or operator is responsible for the continued airworthiness of the airplane, the
use of an authorized dealer or certified service station will facilitate compliance. It is
recommended that the owner or operator of the airplane contact a dealer or a certified service
station for service information. All correspondence regarding the airplane should include the
airplane serial number.
Fuselage Identification Plate – The airplane serial number, make, model, Type Certificate (TC)
number, year of manufacture, and Production Certification (PC) number is contained on the
Fuselage Identification Plate on the tail cone of the airplane. The serial number is also listed on
the cover page of the FAA Approved Flight Manual.
Publications – Owners and noncommercial operators may do preventative maintenance as
described in part 43 of the Federal Aviation Regulations. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in
Canada.) To do this requires the use of an authorized maintenance manual and possibly, a parts
catalog. In some instances, the owner or operator may wish to maintain a copy of the
maintenance manual and parts catalog to assist other appropriately certified individuals in
maintaining the airplane’s continued airworthiness. In either event, a maintenance manual, parts
catalog, and other related documentation can be obtained by contacting:
The Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation
22550 Nelson Road
Bend Municipal Airport
Bend, Oregon 97701-9710
Phone: (541) 318-1144
Fax: (541) 318-1177
Email: [email protected]
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
RA050001
8-3
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
SERVICES AND SERVICING
LANCAIR ADVISORY SERVICE
Changes that affect the Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG), including the maintenance and operation
of the airplane, are provided to all registered owners free of charge. The Lancair Advisory will
contain two basic types of data, compulsory and informational. Compulsory items must be
accomplished within a specified time to maintain the continued airworthiness of the airplane.
Informational items are non-binding and usually contain details and tips that enhance the use of
the airplane.
Domestic owners will receive information at the address listed in the FAA database. It is
important for international airplane owners to advise us of any address changes to ensure
uninterrupted advisory information. Individuals who are not registered owners can obtain the
advisory service on a subscription basis by contacting the manufacturer at the address listed on
page 8-3.
DELIVERY PACKAGE
The items listed below are provided with the airplane when it is delivered to the owner. If any of
the items are lost or damaged, replacements can be purchased by contacting the manufacturer at
the address shown on page 8-3. Publications are also available for purchase by non-owners.
•
Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Flight Manual (1)
•
Lancair Dealer Directory (1)
•
Lancair Warranty Program (1)
•
Checklist Booklet (1 Set)
•
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG) Passenger Briefing Card (3)
•
ADLOG MRS
FUEL SERVICING
Recommended Fuel Grades
100LL Grade Aviation Fuel (Blue)
100 Grade Aviation Fuel (Green)
Fuel Capacities
Total Capacity: 106 US Gallons (401 L)
Total Capacity Each tank: US 53 Gallons (201 L)
Total Usable Fuel: 49 US Gallons (185 L) in each tank (98 US Gallons (371 L) Total)
Approved Fuel Additives – Under certain ambient conditions of temperature and humidity,
water can be supported in the fuel in sufficient quantities to create restrictive ice formation along
various segments of the fuel system. To alleviate the possibility of this occurring, it is
permissible to add Isopropyl Alcohol to the fuel supply in quantities not to exceed 3% of the
total. In addition, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (EGME) and diethylene glycol monomethyl
ether (DiEGME) compounds to military specification MIL-I-27686E may be added for this
purpose. The ethylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monomethyl ether
compounds must be carefully mixed with fuel concentrations not to exceed 0.15 percent by
volume.
It is important that the approved fuel additives are mixed in correct proportions. Consideration is
required to ensure the appropriate concentration levels are achieved when the tank is filled. For
example, adding 40 gallons (151 L) of fuel with a 0.15 percent concentration of EGME to a tank
with 10 gallons (38 L) of untreated fuel will produce a mixture of something less than 0.15
RA050001
8-4
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
percent. Consideration must also be made for the unusable fuel in the tank since it will be
combined with the total mixture.
The additives shall be added as the fuel is introduced to the fuel tank so that the mixture is
properly combined. Alternatively, the additive can be mixed with a small amount of fuel in a
separate container, such as a five-gallon can, and added to the fuel tank before normal fueling.
The table in (Figure 8-1) lists the number of ounces of each additive for a given fuel quantity.
FUEL ADDITIVE MIXTURE TABLE
Isopropyl
EGME & DiFuel
Alcohol (3%) EGME (0.15%)
Gal. (L)
Fluid Ounces
Fluid Ounces
Fuel
Gal. (L)
Isopropyl
Alcohol (3%)
Fluid Ounces
EGME & DiEGME (0.15%)
Fluid Ounces
1 (3.8)
3.8
0.2
27 (102.2)
103.7
5.2
2 (7.6)
7.7
0.4
28 (106.0)
107.5
5.4
3 (11.4)
11.5
0.6
29 (109.8)
111.4
5.6
4 (15.1)
15.4
0.8
30 (113.6)
115.2
5.8
5 (18.9)
19.2
1.0
31 (117.3)
119.0
6.0
6 (22.7)
23.0
1.2
32 (121.1)
122.9
6.1
7 (26.5)
26.9
1.3
33 (124.9)
126.7
6.3
8 (30.3)
30.7
1.5
34 (128.7)
130.6
6.5
9 (34.1)
34.6
1.7
35 (132.5)
134.4
6.7
10 (37.9)
38.4
1.9
36 (136.3)
138.2
6.9
11 (41.6)
42.2
2.1
37 (140.1)
142.1
7.1
12 (45.4)
46.1
2.3
38 (143.8)
145.9
7.3
13 (49.2)
49.9
2.5
39 (147.6)
149.8
7.5
14 (53.0)
53.8
2.7
40 (151.4)
153.6
7.7
15 (56.8)
57.6
2.9
41 (155.2)
157.4
7.9
16 (60.6)
61.4
3.1
42 (159.0)
161.3
8.1
17 (64.4)
65.3
3.3
43 (162.8)
165.1
8.3
18 (68.1)
69.1
3.5
44 (166.5)
169.0
8.4
19 (71.9)
73.0
3.6
45 (170.3)
172.8
8.6
20 (75.7)
76.8
3.8
46 (174.1)
176.6
8.8
21 (79.5)
80.6
4.0
47 (177.9)
180.5
9.0
22 (83.3)
84.5
4.2
48 (181.7)
184.3
9.2
23 (87.1)
88.3
4.4
49 (185.5)
188.2
9.4
24 (90.8)
92.2
4.6
50 (189.3)
192.0
9.6
25 (94.6)
96.0
4.8
51 (193.0)
195.8
9.8
26 (98.4)
99.8
5.0
52 (196.8)
199.7
10.0
(Figure 8-1)
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
8-5
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
WARNING
Mixing of ethylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monomethyl
ether compounds is extremely important because concentrations more than the
0.15 percent by volume can have a harmful effect on engine components.
Grounding During Refueling and Defueling – The high-speed characteristics of the airplane
make generation of static electricity more likely, so it is important for the airplane to be
grounded to the fuel source during refueling and defueling operations. Place the fuel source
grounding clamp on the right or left exhaust stack of the airplane before touching the filler neck
of the fuel tanks with metal parts of the ground refueling equipment. Remember that refueling is
often done at the conclusion of a flight and the exhaust stacks may still be hot, so care must be
used when attaching the clamp.
Some defueling is possible using the defueling feature on the delivery system of the Avgas fuel
supplier. This procedure is usually adequate for removing fuel when gross takeoff weight is an
issue. To completely defuel the airplane, refer to Chapter 12 in the Airplane Maintenance
manual.
Fuel Contamination – To test for fuel contamination, fuel samples must be taken from each of
the wing drains and from the gascolator before each flight and after the airplane is refueled.
There are three types of contaminants that can inadvertently be introduced to the fuel system: (1)
sediment such as dirt and bacteria, (2) water, and (3) the improper grade of fuel.
1. The accumulation of sediments is an inherent issue with most aircraft and can never be
completely eliminated. Refueling the airplane at the conclusion of each flight and using fuel
from a supplier who routinely maintains the filtration of the refueling equipment will lessen
the problem somewhat. If specks are observed in the fuel sampler, continue the sampling
operation until no debris is observed. Be sure the sampling device is clean before using it.
2. The two more common sources of water contamination are condensation of water from the
air within a partially filled fuel tank and water-contaminated Avgas from a fuel supplier.
Again, refueling after each flight and proper filtration of the fuel delivery system will
mitigate water contamination. Water, which is heavier than Avgas, will collect near the
bottom of the sampling device. If water is observed in the fuel sampler, take additional fuel
samples until all the water is removed.
3. Aviation fuel is dyed according to its grade and on new aircraft, like the Columbia 300
(LC40-550FG), the filler neck is sized to only accept fuel of the proper grade. Still, the color
of the fuel shall be verified according to the specifications on page 8-4, since the fuel truck
might have been refilled improperly. If fuels of two different grades are mixed, the fuel
sample will be clear. If an inferior, improper grade of fuel is noted, completely defuel both
tanks, and refuel with the proper grade of Avgas.
Persistent fuel contamination is a serious problem. If repeated fuel sampling is ineffective or
there is chronic contamination, approved personnel must inspect the airplane, and it is unsafe to
fly. Two final thoughts about refueling and contamination: First, remember that fuel service
personnel are people of unknown training and background. It is always a good idea to personally
observe refueling operations. Second, if it is necessary to operate in areas where there is
questionable fuel delivery, the use of a portable fuel filter is recommended.
RA050001
8-6
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NOTE
There are a number of fuel additives on the market that are formulated for
automotive use. While the additives may be beneficial for cars, trucks, etc., they
are not approved for aircraft use.
OIL SERVICING
The oil grades shown below are recommended after the initial engine break-in period. Refer to
the Required Special Inspections heading on page 8-9 for additional details about oil grades
during the engine break-in period. Only lubricant oils conforming to Teledyne Continental
Motors Specification MHS-24D (latest revision) can be used. Note, the use of MHS-25 synthetic
oils has been removed.
NOTE
Oil is added to the engine through the filler neck that contains the dipstick. To
remove the dipstick, rotate it counterclockwise to unseat it; raise the dipstick
approximately six to eight inches or until a slight resistance is felt; rotate the
dipstick 90º clockwise and remove from the filler neck.
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Average Air Temperature Ranges
Below 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 30, 10W30, 15W50, or 20W50
Above 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE50, 15W50, 20W/50, or 20W60
Sump Capacity – The system has a wet type oil sump with a drain-refill capacity of eight
quarts.
Oil Filter – A full flow, spin on-type, 20-micron oil filter is used.
NOTE
There are a number of oil additives on the market that are formulated for
automotive use; however, they are not approved for aircraft operations.
BRAKES AND TIRE/NOSE STRUT PRESSURES
Proper inflation of the tires reduces tire external damage and heat, which reduces tire wear.
Proper inflation of the nose strut ensures a smoother ride. Maneuverability on the ground is
enhanced when tire and strut pressures are at proper levels. The table below (Figure 8-2)
summarizes the recommended pressures and types of tires.
Tire Considerations – The airplane is normally delivered with Goodyear tires. These tires have
a profile that provides about ⅜ in. (0.95 cm) clearance between the tire and wheel pants. Other
brands of tires with similar specifications and TSO’s may have slightly larger profiles. Tires with
larger profiles are not recommended since damage to the tire or wheel pant is possible,
particularly during landing. If other brands of tires are used, the profile of the tire must be
precisely measured and compared with the Goodyear tire.
CAUTION
The profile of replacement tires that are not a recommended brand should
be measured precisely to ensure they are the same height and width. The use
of tires that have slightly larger profiles can cause damage to the tire and to
the wheel pant, particularly during landing operations.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
8-7
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
PRESSURE
TYPE OF GAS
Nose Strut
LC-40 NGO
250 psi
Nitrogen
Nose Gear Tire
5.00-5 (10 ply)
88 psi
Air
Main Gear Tires
15x6.00-6 (6-ply)
55 psi
Air
(Figure 8-2)
Normally, a trained mechanic adds brake fluid. However, this is an approved item of
preventative maintenance, and servicing by a private pilot who is the owner or operator is
permitted. The brake fluid levels shall be serviced according to instructions contained in the
Lancair Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG) Maintenance Manual with MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT CYCLES
The Columbia 300 has three separate batteries that require periodic replacement. While the
system battery indicates its charge on the installed voltmeter, the standby and ELT batteries do
not have a positive test to indicate their charge. The table below summarizes the replacement
cycles.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT CYCLES
BATTERY TYPE
BATTERY LOCATION
REPLACEMENT CYCLE
Emergency Locator Transmitter
(ELT) Battery
Aft of the baggage compartment hat
rack – Please see page 7-65 for more
information.
Every 2 years (Artex 200), every 5
years (Artex ME406), or when the
battery had been used for more than
one hour or used 50% if its power
Standby Battery – Lithium Ion Type
Battery
Behind the kidney panel on the right
side of the instrument panel
Every five years - However, if the
battery is activated for any reason, it
must be replaced.
System – Dry Sealed Lead-Acid
Type Battery
Just forward of the firewall on the
copilot’s side
Every Four Years – However, if the
battery fails to hold a charge, it must
be replaced.
(Figure 8-3)
RA050001
8-8
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: M/10-16-2006
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
MAINTENANCE AND DOCUMENTATION
MAINTENANCE
Airplane Inspection Periods – Part 91, Subpart E of the Federal Aviation Regulations requires
that each U.S. civil registered airplane not used for hire be inspected every 12 calendar months in
accordance with Part 43. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.) If the airplane is used for
hire, the regulations require that it must be inspected before or at each 100 hours of time in
service.
Airworthiness Directives – The FAA may issue notifications known as Airworthiness
Directives (AD’s) that are applicable to the airplane or one of its components. The directives
specify what action is required and normally have a compliance period. It is the responsibility of
the owner/operator of the airplane to ensure compliance with all applicable AD’s.
Preventive Maintenance – A certificated pilot who owns or operates an airplane not used as an
air carrier is authorized by FAR Part 43 to perform limited preventive maintenance on his or her
airplane. (U.S. operating rules do not apply in Canada.) Appendix A of Part 43 of the Federal
Aviation Regulations is specific as to what items constitute preventative maintenance. Only the
certificated pilot who owns or operates the airplane can perform the specific items listed in FAR
Part 43. The work must be performed according to procedures and specifications in the
applicable handbook or maintenance manual. Appropriately licensed personnel must perform all
other maintenance items not specifically identified in Appendix A of Part 43. For more details
regarding authorized maintenance, contact the dealer or service center.
Alterations or Repairs – All alterations or repairs to the airplane must be accomplished by
licensed personnel. In addition, an alteration may violate the airworthiness of the airplane.
Before alterations are made, the owner or operator of the airplane should contact the FAA for
approval.
Required Oil Changes and Special Inspections – During the engine break-in period, straight
mineral oil must be used for the first 25 hours. After the first 25 hours of the airplane’s time in
service, the oil and oil filter must be changed and a new supply of Teledyne Continental Motors
specification MHS-24 (latest revision) ashless dispersant oil must be used. At 50 hours of time in
service, the oil and oil filter shall be changed and the filter and discarded oil checked for
evidence of metal particles. Thereafter, the oil and oil filter must be changed at every 100 hours
of time in service.
At the first oil change, the engine and related accessories including the magnetos, starter,
alternator, engine driven fuel and oil pumps, oil cooler, propeller governor, and vacuum pumps
should be inspected for oil leaks and security. Spark plug leads and other electrical circuits
should be checked for proper routing, abrasion, chafing, and security. Check engine controls and
linkages for proper operation. Finally, check the intake and exhaust system for security and
evidence of cracking.
Recommended Oil Changes and Special Inspections – At approximately every 50 hours of
time in service it is recommended the engine oil be changed. Since the cowling is removed for an
oil change, a cursory inspection of other engine systems is possible, and the engine can be
cleaned and degreased if necessary. The airplane’s engine is the single most expensive
component in the airplane and arguably the most important. The comparative nominal expense
and time involved in doing 50-hour oil changes are more than offset by the long-term benefits
and peace of mind.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
RA050001
8-9
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Warranty Inspections – Please refer to Lancair Warranty Inspection Guide.
AIRPLANE DOCUMENTATION
There are certain items required to be in the airplane at all times. Moreover, some of the items
must be displayed near the cabin or cockpit door. The required items are provided with the
airplane when it is delivered to the new owner. A description of all required documentation is
summarized in the table below in (Figure 8-4).
Item
Must be Displayed
Location
Aircraft Airworthiness Certificate
Yes
Aircraft Registration
Yes
In display pocket on
the copilot’s side near
the rudder pedals
Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Flight Manual
No
Weight & Balance documentation (FAA Form 337 if applicable)
No
Equipment List
No
All these items are
located in the front
passenger seatback
pocket.
(Figure 8-4)
ADLOGTM MAINTENANCE RECORDKEEPING SYSTEM (MRS)
The ADLOGTM MRS is included in the airplane’s delivery package. Its 12 color-coded, indexed
sections simplify, organize, and centralize all relevant airplane maintenance data. The
ADLOGTM MRS also includes a one-year airworthiness directive (AD’s) revision service for the
applicable equipment, instruments, and components for the airplane based on its serial number.
Thereafter, the owner of the airplane can continue the subscription at a fairly nominal cost.
This system is the best available and ensures that the maintenance history of the airplane and all
applicable AD’s are precisely documented in a logical format. The system has been in use for
more than 20 years and is revered by both mechanics and Part 135 operators. The ADLOGTM
service also includes AD’s for STC equipment that the owner may add to the airplane.
RA050001
8-10
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: G/02-01-2002
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
HANDLING AND STORAGE
GROUND HANDLING
Towing – A locking, hand-held tow bar is provided with the airplane and stored in the baggage
compartment. The tow bar is inserted into two small holes in the nose wheel fairing, forward of
the nose wheel axle. The tow bar must be locked in place before attempting to move the airplane.
The tow bar is collapsible for storage by removing the locking pin. With the pin removed, slide
the handle out of the sleeve and insert in the opposite end. Reinsert the locking pin. To use the
tow bar, reverse the procedure.
It is recommended that the airplane only be maneuvered during towing by use of the hand-held
tow bar. If it is necessary to tow with a vehicle, extreme care is required to ensure the rotation
limits of the nose wheel (60° left and right) are not exceeded. Since the rotation of the nose gear
is limited by physical stops, rotating the gear beyond 60° will damage the airplane.
It is always a good idea to have another person serve as a spotter when moving the airplane.
Remember that the airplane has vertical limitations as well as horizontal restrictions. The vertical
stabilizer is frequently overlooked as an airplane is being pushed into a hanger with most of the
attention directed towards the wingtips. When moving the airplane over uneven surfaces,
remember that small up and down oscillations of the nose strut result in amplified movement of
the vertical stabilizer. Finally, keep in mind that inflation levels of both the nose tire and strut
affect the height of the vertical stabilizer. A flat tire or low nose strut will increase the height of
the vertical stabilizer.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to move the airplane by pushing or pulling on the propeller.
This a common practice for airplanes with fixed pitch propellers; however, it
is not recommended for constant speed propellers, since pressures applied to
the propeller blades are transmitted to moving parts within the propeller
hub. Over time, these forces could cause damage to the propeller.
Parking – During parking operations, it is best to head the airplane into the wind if possible.
Normally, setting the parking brake is recommended; however, there are two situations where
doing so is not a good idea.
1. If the brakes are overheated, which might result from a short field landing or extensive
taxiing, it is best to not set them until they have had a sufficient cooling period. A brake pad
clamped to a hot chrome disc can cause uneven cooling of the brake disc, which has the
potential of warping it.
2. It is also not a good idea to set the brakes in cold weather. Accumulations of freezing rain,
ice, and snow can freeze-weld the brake pad to the disc. Landing or taxiing in standing water
at near freezing temperatures can cause similar problems if the brakes are set when the
airplane is parked.
Securing the Airplane – In any event, whether the brakes are set or not set, the airplane should
be chocked and the following items should be accomplished to secure the airplane.
1. Install the control lock.
2. Chock the main gear tires with chocks on both sides of each tire.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
8-11
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
3. Attach a rope or chain to each tie-down point and secure the rope or chain to a ramp tie-down
point. There are three tie-down points, one on each wing and one on the tail. The ropes or
chains should have a tensile strength of at least 750 lbs.
4. Install the pitot tube cover.
WARNING
Do not use any device except approved tie-down rings to secure the airplane.
While the proper size eyebolt from a hardware store will fit in the threaded tiedown socket, the eyebolt length is critical. A tie-down bolt of incorrect length
could cause jamming or interfere with proper movement of the ailerons.
Windshield Cover – The use of a windshield cover is an often-debated issue and is a decision
the owner or operator of the airplane must make. Windshield covers have both positive and
negative benefits. Ultimately, a number of factors must be weighed, including (1) the
geographical area of operations, (2) the time of year, (3) the specific parking location, and (4) the
integrity of the covering device.
1. From a positive standpoint, the cover limits the intrusion of ultraviolet (UV) light. Over time,
UV rays significantly accelerate the aging process, which makes the windshield and
windows more brittle and impregnates them with an irremovable yellowish tinge.
2. On the negative side, dust and dirt can accumulate between the cover and the windshield.
When the wind blows, the whipping action of the cover beats the dust and dirt into the
windshield.
JACKING AND LEVELING
Jacking – There are two jack points under each wing proximate to the wing saddle. The points
are near the center of mass of the longitudinal axis, and great care must be used when jacking the
airplane. The tailskid is used as a third point of stabilization. The following points should be
considered when the airplane is raised by jacks.
1. If the airplane is simultaneously lifted by both jacks, then specific procedures established in
Chapter 7 of the maintenance manual must be followed. This procedure is fairly involved. It
requires special equipment to stabilize the airplane, sandbags for tail ballast, and three or
four people to operate the jacks and keep the airplane steady.
2. If only one jack is used, as when changing a single tire, the airplane can be safely jacked by
one person using the following procedure.
a. The operation must be performed in a level area, such as an airplane hangar.
b. Set the parking brake and chock the nose tire and the main gear tire that is not raised.
c. Place 50 pounds of ballast (usually sandbags) on the engine cowling, near the propeller.
d. Place a jack under the jack point of the wing to be lifted and raise the jack up to the wing
jack point. Take extra precaution to ensure the jack is properly stabilized, the base is
locked in position, and the jack is lifting vertically. Be sure the raising point of the jack is
properly inserted into the jack point on the wing.
e. Slowly raise the jack until the desired ground clearance is achieved. However, the
clearance between the bottom of the tire and lifting surface (ground or hangar floor) must
not exceed three inches.
Leveling – Please see page 6-4 for information about leveling the airplane.
RA050001
8-12
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
STORAGE
The storage of an airplane mostly deals with engine related items. Very little needs to or can be
done to preserve the airframe, particularly for flyable and temporary storage. The best protection
for the exterior is, of course, to hangar the airplane, if possible. If the airplane cannot be
hangared, then a coat of wax using the material and techniques described on page 8-17 should be
applied to all exterior surfaces. In addition, all typical items associated with securing the airplane
should be done. These include: (1) installing the pitot tube cover, (2) chocking all wheels and
tying the airplane down with the parking brakes released, (3) installing the control lock, (4)
topping off the fuel tanks, (5) cleaning the bolts and nuts on the brakes and applying a non-stick
preservative like graphite or a silicone, and (6) installing other owner-option protection devices.
There are three types of storage categories, flyable, temporary, and indefinite. The time period
and applicable storage procedure for each type is discussed below.
Flyable Storage (7 to 30 days) – If the airplane is to be maintained in flyable storage, then it
should be flown for a minimum of 30 minutes every 30 days; ground running the engine is not a
substitute for flying the airplane. During flyable storage, the propeller should be rotated by hand
every seven days. This operation should include at least six complete revolutions of the engine.
Stop the propeller 45º to 90º from its original position. For maximum safety use the following
procedures:
1. Ensure that the ignition switch is set to the OFF position.
2. Set the throttle to the CLOSED position.
3. Set the mixture to IDLE CUT OFF.
4. Set the parking brake, and chock the wheels.
5. Ensure that airplane tie-downs are secure.
6. Open cabin door on the pilot’s side of the airplane.
7. Always assume the propeller could start when moving it manually, and use an appropriate
technique for hand turning the propeller.
8. Release the parking brake when the operation is completed.
WARNING
Always assume that the engine could start when rotating the propeller by
hand. Remain clear of the arc of the propeller blades at all times.
Temporary Storage (up to 90 days) – Use the following procedures to preserve the engine for
temporary storage. See the Airframe Preservation for Temporary or Indefinite Storage heading
on page 8-15 for airframe preservation items.
1. Remove the top spark plug from each of the six cylinders, and apply an atomized injection of
preservation oil, MIL-L-46002, Grade 1. As the oil is injected into each cylinder, the piston
should be near bottom dead center, and the preservation operation should be done at room
temperature.
2. When Step 1 is complete, and with none of the pistons at dead center, re-spray each cylinder
thoroughly making sure to cover all interior surfaces.
3. Install spark plugs.
4. Spray approximately two ounces of preservation oil through the oil filler tube.
5. Seal all engine openings exposed to the atmosphere with suitable plugs or moisture resistant
tape.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
8-13
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
6. Tag engine, cowling, and other appropriate areas with the statement, “Do not turn propeller,
engine preserved.”
Return to Service From Temporary Storage – To return an airplane that has been in
temporary storage to active service, perform the following steps.
1. Remove seal plugs, tape, and all methods of tagging the airplane, including items tagged on
the airframe.
2. Remove the bottom spark plug from each of the six cylinders, and rotate the propeller several
times to remove the preservation oil.
3. Reinstall the spark plugs according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Conduct a normal engine start and idle the engine for several minutes until oil temperature is
within normal limits. Monitor engine instruments to ensure they are within normal operating
ranges.
5. Stop the engine and inspect the entire airplane before test flying.
Indefinite Storage (Over 90 Days) – If the airplane is to be stored for a long period, follow the
procedures listed below to preserve the engine. See the Airframe Preservation for Temporary or
Indefinite Storage heading on page 8-15 for airframe preservation items.
1. Drain the engine oil and refill with MIL-C-6529 Type II preservation oil. Start the engine
and operate until normal temperature ranges are achieved. Fly the airplane for about 30
minutes and then allow the engine to cool to the ambient temperature.
2. Follow Steps 1, 2, and 4 above for Temporary Storage.
3. Install dehydrator plugs MS27215-1 or -2, in each of the top spark plug holes. Ensure the
dehydrator plug is blue when installed. Protect and support the spark plug leads with AN4060 protectors.
4. Place a bag of desiccant in the exhaust pipes, and seal the openings with moisture resistant
tape.
5. Seal the induction system with moisture resistant tape.
6. Seal the engine breather by taping a dehydrator plug, M527215-2, in the lower end. Seal the
“whistle hole” vent in the breather tube with moisture resistant tape.
7. Tag engine, cowling, and other appropriate areas with the statement, “Do not turn propeller,
engine preserved.”
8. Install plugs in the engine cowl inlets and all other openings. Do not plug or seal tank vents
on the bottom of each wing.
NOTE
During the various storage periods, FAA Airworthiness Directives and
manufacturer’s service bulletins may apply which require action based on
calendar dates, not operating hours. These items must still be completed even
though the airplane is in storage.
Return to Service From Indefinite Storage – To return an airplane that has been in indefinite
storage to active service, perform the following steps.
1. Remove all dehydrator plugs, seal plugs, tape, and all methods of tagging the airplane
including items tagged on the airframe.
2. Drain the preservation oil, and service the airplane engine with the recommended lubricating
oil.
RA050001
8-14
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
3. Remove the bottom spark plugs from each of the six cylinders, and rotate the propeller
several times to remove the preservation oil.
4. Re-install the spark plugs and carefully rotate the propeller by hand several times to check
for possible liquid lock.
5. Conduct a normal engine start, and idle the airplane for several minutes until oil temperature
is in within normal limits. Monitor all engine instruments to ensure they are within normal
operating ranges.
6. Stop the engine and inspect the entire airplane before test flying.
7. Test fly the airplane.
NOTE
The dehydrator plugs must be visually checked every 30 days to verify that
the color has not changed. Bad dehydrator plugs should be replaced. If
more than half of the plugs change color, the bad plugs and all the desiccant
bags on the engine should be replaced.
Every six months the dehydrator plugs should be replaced and the cylinders
re-sprayed with preservation oil. When removing the plugs, check the
cylinder interior. If rust stains are noted, spray the cylinder with
preservation oil, turn the prop through six revolutions, and then re-spray all
cylinders.
Airframe Preservation for Temporary and Indefinite Storage – If the airplane is to be stored
for over 30 days, some or all the procedures below may be applicable, depending on the
anticipated storage time period.
1. Ensure the tires are free of grease, oil, tar, and gasoline. The presence of these items
accelerates the aging process. Sunlight and static electricity convert oxygen to ozone, a
substance that accelerates the aging process. Special tire covers can be installed which retard
the erosion process.
2. It is best if the weight of the airplane is removed from the tires to prevent flat spots. If the
airplane cannot be blocked or set on jacks, then every 30 days each wheel should be rotated
about 90º to expose a new tire pressure point.
3. If the airplane does not have a recent coat of wax, a new coat should be applied as discussed
on page 8-17.
4. Lubricate exposed exterior metal fittings, hinges, push rods, etc. Use plugs or moisture
resistant tape to seal all openings except fuel vent holes and drain holes.
5. Remove the battery and store in a cool, dry location. The battery may need periodic servicing
and recharging depending on the storage period.
6. Prominently tag areas where tape and plugs are installed.
Airframe Preservation Return to Service – To return the airframe portion of an airplane that
has been in temporary or indefinite storage to active service, perform the following steps, as
applicable.
1. Remove all methods of tagging and sealing the airplane including any items on or in the
engine area.
2. Remove tire covers or other protection devices. Check the condition of the tires and service
to proper pressures. Cracked, deformed, and desiccated tires should be replaced.
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior of the airplane including the transparencies. If necessary,
renew the protective wax coat. See page 8-17 for instructions on care of the airframe.
4. Check the condition and charge of the battery. If the battery is still serviceable, reinstall it in
the airplane; otherwise, install a new battery.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
8-15
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
NOTE
When an airplane has been in storage for a long period, the date of the
required annual inspection may have passed. There is no requirement to
perform this inspection during the temporary or indefinite storage period.
However, the inspection must be completed before than airplane is returned
to service.
Inspections During Temporary Storage – The following inspections should be performed
while the airplane is in temporary storage.
1. Check the cleanliness of the airframe a frequently as possible, and remove any dust that has
collected.
2. Check the condition and durability of the protective wax coat and renew as required.
3. Every 30 days, check the interior of at least one cylinder for evidence of corrosion.
Inspections During Indefinite Storage – The following inspections should be performed while
the airplane is in indefinite storage.
1. Check the condition of the dehydrator plugs ever 30 days to verify that the color has
not changed. Bad dehydrator plugs should be replaced. If more than half of the plugs
change color, the bad plugs and all the desiccant bags on the engine should be
replaced.
2. Every six months the dehydrator plugs should be replaced and the cylinders resprayed with preservation oil. When removing the plugs, check the cylinder interior.
If rust stains are noted, spray the cylinder with preservation oil, turn the prop
through six revolutions, and then re-spray all cylinders.
RA050001
8-16
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE CARE
AIRFRAME
Exterior – The exterior painted surfaces are cleaned by washing with a mild soap and water and
drying with a soft towel or chamois. The seal coats that are applied to the painted surface, in
most instances, will provide adequate protection from moisture and the sun. Some additional
protection is provided by waxing the painted surface and facilitates washing the airplane since
bugs and dirt will not adhere as tightly to a waxed surface. A wax with a high concentration of
carnauba is recommended. There are several commercial boat waxes available that are ideal for
this use. Be sure to read the label with an eye for the percentage of carnauba in the compound.
CAUTION
Do not wax the airplane for at least 180 days from the date of purchase. The
paint curing process involves the expulsion of certain substances within
paint. A coat of wax can impede or stop the curing process, which inhibits
adhesion of the paint to the composite surface.
The exterior paint color on the upper fuselage area and the top of the wings has a good heat
reflection index. This good index is required to ensure the continued bonding and integrity of the
composite material. Only approved Lancair paint colors are permitted in these areas. Care must
be taken to not lay dark, heat absorbing material on the top area of the wings and fuselage.
Anti-erosion Tape – The anti-erosion tape is located on the leading edges of the wings,
horizontal tail, vertical tail, and gear fairings. Care should be taken to prevent damage to the tape
on the wing when entering the aircraft. People who sit on the wing by lifting themselves up over
the leading edge should take care not to drag their legs over the tape when sliding on or off the
wing. If the tape is starting to fray, detach, crack, crinkle, etc., it should be replaced using the
instructions in the maintenance manual.
Windshield and Windows – The proper care of the windshield and windows (sometimes
referred to as transparencies) is one of the more important exterior care items on the airplane,
and often the least understood. The cardinal rule is never do anything that will scratch the
surface of the acrylic plastic. The following points for cleaning and caring for the transparencies
will help to keep windows looking and performing like new.
1. First, when cleaning the windows, it is recommended that rings and watches be removed as
they can cause deep scratches. In this vein, long sleeve shirts should be turned up a few rolls
to hide exposed buttons.
2. When removing bugs and dirt, avoid touching the surface. If possible, remove most of the
dirt by flushing the windows and windshield with water and a mild dish soap mixture. Allow
the accumulation of dirt and/or bugs to soak for a few minutes. If rubbing is required, a bare
hand is best. When all the debris on the surface of the window is loosened, apply a second
water flush and then dry with a 100% cotton cloth.
3. Use a good quality non-abrasive cleaner/polish specifically intended for acrylic windows and
apply per the manufacturer’s instructions. Use up and down or side to side movements when
polishing. Never use a circular movement as this can cause glare rings.
4. The best polishing cloth is the softest cotton available. One hundred percent cotton flannel is
ideal and available in yard goods stores. Never use any type of paper product or synthetic
material. In particular, never use shop rags or shop towels. Be sure the polishing cloth is
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
8-17
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
clean and dry. Reserve polishing cloths should be stored in a plastic bag to limit dirt
accumulation.
5. Small scratches, the type that can be seen but cannot be felt with a fingernail, should be filled
with a polishing compound that has scratch filling properties. The cleaner/polisher mentioned
in paragraph 3 frequently has scratch filling properties and is satisfactory for regular use.
Some scratches are not correctable with a scratch-filling product. While the scratches cannot
be felt, they are still visible, particularly when flying into the sun. In this instance, a mildly
abrasive scratch removal cream can be used per manufacturer’s recommendations. Scratches
of greater magnitude require the use of high abrasives and removal of some of the window’s
surface around the greatest depth of the scratch. This procedure requires considerable
expertise and frequently makes areas where the scratch was removed more objectionable
than the original scratch.
6. As mentioned previously in this section, the use of canopy or window covers can grind dirt
particles into the acrylic and are virtually impossible to remove.
CAUTION
Do not use anything containing ammonia, aromatic solvents like methyl ethyl
ketone, acetone, lacquer thinner, paint stripper, gasoline, benzene, alcohol,
anti-ice fluid, hydraulic fluid, fire extinguisher solutions, or window cleaner
on the acrylic window surfaces. The use of these substances may cause the
surface to craze.
NOTE
To remove difficult substance such as tape residue, oil, and grease, the safest
solvents are 100% mineral spirits or kerosene. Some alcohols are safe, such
as isopropyl alcohol.
Interior Cleaning and Care – The useful life of the airplane’s interior can be extended through
proper care and cleaning. One of the major elements in the aging process is the interior’s
exposure to sunlight. If possible, the airplane should be hangared. Routine vacuuming is another
item that helps extend the life of the airplane’s interior. A general rule for spills is to blot the
affected area with firm pressure for a few seconds. Never rub or pat an area to remove a spill.
Portions of the airplane’s seats are covered with leather. The leather is treated with a sealant,
which provides a protective cover. Do not attempt to feed the leather in any way. In particular,
the use of spray polishes, saddle soaps, waxes, and so-called hide foods create a sticky surface,
which attracts dirt and can cause irreversible damage.
The leather and ultra-leather seats, seatbacks, knee bolsters, and the like, should be routinely
wiped with moist soft cotton cloth after vacuuming. Use a mild non-detergent soap such as
Neutrogena. Wipe the leather and ultra-leather using a light circular motion taking care not to
soak the surface. Once the seats and other areas are clean, repeat the process using clean water
and then wipe the surfaces with a dry cloth. For ink stains, use a special application available
through Douglas Interior Products known as a D.I.P. Stick. Since the D.I.P. Stick application
must be used within 24 hours, one should be held in reserve at all times.
The carpet can be cleaned with a mild foam product, but care must be used not to over saturate.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions regarding use of the foam cleaner. Small spots can be
cleaned with a commercial spot remover; however, this must be done with care. Again, follow
the recommended procedure of the manufacturer, and try a test application in an area of limited
exposure.
RA050001
8-18
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
ENGINE AND PROPELLER
Engine Cleaning and Care – If necessary, the engine is normally cleaned at the recommended
50-hour oil change interval since the cowling is removed to change the oil. In addition, the air
filter should be cleaned at every 100 hours of time in service; it may require more frequent
cleaning depending on the operating environmental conditions. If the engine is cleaned at the 50
or 100 hour oil change intervals, this should be adequate under most operating conditions.
In any event, the engine must be kept relatively clean for all flight operations. It is difficult to
establish a precise time in service recommendation since much depends on the environmental
conditions and the types of airplane operations. Engine cleaning, air filter cleaning and
replacement, and lubrication of the engine controls is permitted as an item of preventative
maintenance and can be performed by the owner or operator if that person possesses a private
pilot or higher level of certification.
It is best to clean the engine with a spray type cleaner, preferably under pressure. There are a
number of approved commercial solvents specifically designed for this use. Care must be
exercised to ensure that application of the solvent does not damage other components in the
engine area. Refer to the Lancair Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG) Approved Maintenance Manual
for additional instructions.
Propeller Cleaning and Care – It is important to keep the propeller clean since it facilitates
detection of cracks and other problems. The propeller must be cleaned with a non-oil-based
substance such as Stoddard Solvent. The solvent must only be applied to the surface of the
blades with a soft brush or cloth; care must be used to avoid contact with the propeller hub and
seals. Do not use any type of spray application, pressurized or unpressurized, since over-spray
particles could contact the propeller hub and seals. The use of water and a mild soap is also
acceptable; however, never use any alkaline-based products.
Nicks on the leading edge of propeller blade, particularly towards the blade’s tip should be
dressed out as soon as possible. Undressed nicks, over time, can lead to problems that are more
serious. The repair of the airplane’s propeller, including propeller nicks, can only be performed
by authorized maintenance personnel and is not an item of authorized preventative maintenance.
When the propeller is clean, dry the surface with a soft cloth and wax the blades with a good
quality automobile paste wax. The major issue with propeller care is corrosion control. Frequent
cleaning and applications of paste wax will significantly retard the erosion process. These
procedures are particularly applicable in geographical areas of high humidity and salt particles.
Never try to remove corrosion pitting with an abrasive material such as steel wool or sandpaper
since this accelerates the corrosion process.
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003
RA050001
8-19
Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Columbia 300 (LC40-550FG)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RA050001
8-20
Initial Issue of Manual: February 22, 2000
Latest Revision Level/Date: I/04-07-2003